What is the process of creating and editing rebar shapes within Revit Structure, and what customization options are available?

Creating and editing rebar shapes in Revit Structure involves using the Rebar Shape Browser to select from available shapes or creating custom shapes using the Rebar Shape Editor. Customization options include adjusting hooks, orientation, and alignment via graphical controls and applying rebar over valid host elements like columns or beams. When placing rebar, users can sketch custom shapes or choose standard and stirrup shapes that adapt to host constraints. Additional customization can include modifying rebar length, hooks, and applying finishing settings for spiral rebar .

How does Revit Structure handle the import and management of different file formats, and what are some challenges associated with this?

Revit Structure supports importing various file formats, including DWG, DXF, DGN, ACIS SAT, SKP, and IFC. Each format comes with different suitability and quality of geometry, affecting tools like Join Geometry or Roof by Face. Importing files may require adjustments to geometry due to the original file's format, export settings, and import settings. For managing imported files, using the Visibility/Graphics settings in Revit can help control layer visibility. However, challenges include ensuring correct import settings and adjusting the geometry to fit Revit's requirements for rendering and mass calculations .

What are the key considerations to keep in mind before starting a new project in Revit Structure?

Before starting a new project in Revit Structure, it is important to consider several aspects: using levels and grids as the foundation of the design process, importing existing data from other CAD programs like AutoCAD, and utilizing the massing tool to create conceptual models. Levels and grids help define the spatial layout, while importing external data can streamline the setup by integrating pre-existing information. Massing tools allow for creating conceptual models, which can then be refined into detailed building elements .

Evaluate the role of embedded and curtain walls within host walls in Revit, regarding their behavior when modifications occur.

In Revit, embedded and curtain walls within host walls behave similarly to hosted elements like doors and windows. When the host wall is resized, embedded walls adjust their dimensions automatically, maintaining their association. However, their individual properties like orientation and placement remain unchanged unless directly modified. This provides flexibility in design while ensuring that interdependent elements behave cohesively when their host is altered, which is particularly important for curtain walls embedded in exterior walls .

How can you manage layer visibility effectively when importing a DWG file into Revit Structure?

Managing layer visibility in DWG imports into Revit Structure involves using the Visibility/Graphics settings to expand the DWG file's imported categories, where you can toggle visibility for each layer. Hidden layers can be restored by resolving the linked file and selecting layers again. Selecting 'All' or specific layers ensures only relevant components are shown based on project requirements. This process helps control project visualization, filter out unnecessary data, and maintain a clear design focus .

Describe the types of wall functions recognized in Revit and discuss how wall function is used in project scheduling and display.

Revit recognizes wall functions such as Interior, Exterior, Foundation, Retaining, Soffit, and Core-Shaft. These functions categorize walls based on their role in the building's structure, affecting how they are used in project scheduling and display. By using the wall's function property, views can be filtered to show or hide specific wall types, and wall schedules can be organized to include or exclude walls by function. This categorization streamlines project management, aiding in the organization, resource allocation, and construction documentation processes .

Explain the function and significance of wall joins in Revit, and how they are configured in a project.

Wall joins in Revit are significant as they determine the intersection and cleanup of walls in project models. By default, Revit creates a butt join and removes visible edges between walls that share component layers, leading to seamless transitions. The Wall Join Display instance property allows configuration to either all wall types or specific types. Users can select different join options (Miter or Square-off) and specify whether the join cleans up or follows default settings, allowing for tailored customization of wall interactions. This feature allows for flexibility and precision in modeling wall intersections .

How does Revit Structure's beam system parameter adaptation work when structural elements are changed? Provide examples.

Revit Structure's beam system parameters adapt automatically to changes in the design. For example, if a column is relocated, the beam system parameters adjust themselves relative to the new column position. Parameters such as beam type, justification, and layout automatically update to maintain the integrity of the structure. This ensures that the support structure remains consistent and functional even as modifications are made to the spatial positioning of elements like columns .

Discuss how Revit's conceptual massing environment aids in transitioning from conceptual designs to detailed project models.

Revit's conceptual massing environment helps transition from conceptual designs to detailed project models by allowing users to test and analyze design concepts early in the project. It provides tools to create shapes and surfaces that can be further developed into detailed elements. Users can evaluate floor areas, curtain walls, and adjust masses within the conceptual environment before transitioning into the project environment for detailed modeling. This approach supports iterative design adjustments and efficient resource utilization, fostering a seamless integration between concept and detailed design phases .

Analyze the importance of setting element covers in Revit Structure, especially for concrete components, and describe the parameters involved.

In Revit Structure, setting element covers is crucial for concrete elements as it determines the placement of rebar in relation to formwork and ensures structural integrity. Important cover settings include top, bottom, interior, and exterior faces, with specific offsets for top/exterior and bottom/interior covers. These settings allow for the precise placement of multiple rebar layers in different reinforcement scenarios. Adjusting these parameters helps meet design requirements and building codes, ensuring that reinforcement scheduling, clash detection, and structural analysis accurately reflect real-world conditions .

Open navigation menu

Upload

100% found this document useful (2 votes)

4K views1,848 pages

Revit Structure 2011 User Guide

Autodesk, Inc. DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES, EITHER EXPRESS or IMPLIED, REGARDING THESE materials. Some materials included in this publication are reprinted with the permission of the copyright holder.

Uploaded by

gerabaldismith

We take content rights seriously. If you suspect this is your content, claim it here.

Available Formats

Download as PDF, TXT or read online on Scribd

100% found this document useful (2 votes)

4K views1,848 pages

Revit Structure 2011 User Guide

Autodesk, Inc. DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES, EITHER EXPRESS or IMPLIED, REGARDING THESE materials. Some materials included in this publication are reprinted with the permission of the copyright holder.

Uploaded by

gerabaldismith

We take content rights seriously. If you suspect this is your content, claim it here.

Available Formats

Download as PDF, TXT or read online on Scribd

You are on page 1/ 1848

Revit Structure 2011

User's Guide

April 2010
© 2010 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved. Except as otherwise permitted by Autodesk, Inc., this publication, or parts thereof, may not be
reproduced in any form, by any method, for any purpose.

Certain materials included in this publication are reprinted with the permission of the copyright holder.

Disclaimer
THIS PUBLICATION AND THE INFORMATION CONTAINED HEREIN IS MADE AVAILABLE BY AUTODESK, INC. "AS IS." AUTODESK, INC. DISCLAIMS
ALL WARRANTIES, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR
FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE REGARDING THESE MATERIALS.

Trademarks
The following are registered trademarks or trademarks of Autodesk, Inc., and/or its subsidiaries and/or affiliates in the USA and other countries:
3DEC (design/logo), 3December, 3December.com, 3ds Max, Algor, Alias, Alias (swirl design/logo), AliasStudio, Alias|Wavefront (design/logo),
ATC, AUGI, AutoCAD, AutoCAD Learning Assistance, AutoCAD LT, AutoCAD Simulator, AutoCAD SQL Extension, AutoCAD SQL Interface,
Autodesk, Autodesk Envision, Autodesk Intent, Autodesk Inventor, Autodesk Map, Autodesk MapGuide, Autodesk Streamline, AutoLISP, AutoSnap,
AutoSketch, AutoTrack, Backburner, Backdraft, Built with ObjectARX (logo), Burn, Buzzsaw, CAiCE, Civil 3D, Cleaner, Cleaner Central, ClearScale,
Colour Warper, Combustion, Communication Specification, Constructware, Content Explorer, Dancing Baby (image), DesignCenter, Design
Doctor, Designer's Toolkit, DesignKids, DesignProf, DesignServer, DesignStudio, Design Web Format, Discreet, DWF, DWG, DWG (logo), DWG
Extreme, DWG TrueConvert, DWG TrueView, DXF, Ecotect, Exposure, Extending the Design Team, Face Robot, FBX, Fempro, Fire, Flame, Flare,
Flint, FMDesktop, Freewheel, GDX Driver, Green Building Studio, Heads-up Design, Heidi, HumanIK, IDEA Server, i-drop, ImageModeler, iMOUT,
Incinerator, Inferno, Inventor, Inventor LT, Kaydara, Kaydara (design/logo), Kynapse, Kynogon, LandXplorer, Lustre, MatchMover, Maya,
Mechanical Desktop, Moldflow, Moonbox, MotionBuilder, Movimento, MPA, MPA (design/logo), Moldflow Plastics Advisers, MPI, Moldflow
Plastics Insight, MPX, MPX (design/logo), Moldflow Plastics Xpert, Mudbox, Multi-Master Editing, Navisworks, ObjectARX, ObjectDBX, Open
Reality, Opticore, Opticore Opus, Pipeplus, PolarSnap, PortfolioWall, Powered with Autodesk Technology, Productstream, ProjectPoint, ProMaterials,
RasterDWG, RealDWG, Real-time Roto, Recognize, Render Queue, Retimer,Reveal, Revit, Showcase, ShowMotion, SketchBook, Smoke, Softimage,
Softimage|XSI (design/logo), Sparks, SteeringWheels, Stitcher, Stone, StudioTools, ToolClip, Topobase, Toxik, TrustedDWG, ViewCube, Visual,
Visual LISP, Volo, Vtour, Wire, Wiretap, WiretapCentral, XSI, and XSI (design/logo).

Third Party Software Program Credits

ACIS Copyright© 1989-2001 Spatial Corp. Portions Copyright© 2002 Autodesk, Inc.
Flash ® is a registered trademark of Macromedia, Inc. in the United States and/or other countries.
International CorrectSpell™ Spelling Correction System© 1995 by Lernout & Hauspie Speech Products, N.V. All rights reserved.
InstallShield™ 3.0. Copyright© 1997 InstallShield Software Corporation. All rights reserved.
PANTONE® Colors displayed in the software application or in the user documentation may not match PANTONE-identified standards. Consult
current PANTONE Color Publications for accurate color. PANTONE Color Data and/or Software shall not be copied onto another disk or into
memory unless as part of the execution of this Autodesk software product.
Portions Copyright© 1991-1996 Arthur D. Applegate. All rights reserved.
Portions of this software are based on the work of the Independent JPEG Group.
RAL DESIGN© RAL, Sankt Augustin, 2002
RAL CLASSIC© RAL, Sankt Augustin, 2002
Representation of the RAL Colors is done with the approval of RAL Deutsches Institut für Gütesicherung und Kennzeichnung e.V. (RAL German
Institute for Quality Assurance and Certification, re. Assoc.), D-53757 Sankt Augustin.
Typefaces from the Bitstream® typeface library copyright 1992.
Typefaces from Payne Loving Trust© 1996. All rights reserved.
Printed manual and help produced with Idiom WorldServer™.
WindowBlinds: DirectSkin™ OCX © Stardock®
AnswerWorks 4.0 ©; 1997-2003 WexTech Systems, Inc. Portions of this software © Vantage-Knexys. All rights reserved.
The Director General of the Geographic Survey Institute has issued the approval for the coordinates exchange numbered TKY2JGD for Japan
Geodetic Datum 2000, also known as technical information No H1-N0.2 of the Geographic Survey Institute, to be installed and used within
this software product (Approval No.: 646 issued by GSI, April 8, 2002).
Portions of this computer program are copyright © 1995-1999 LizardTech, Inc. All rights reserved. MrSID is protected by U.S. Patent No.
5,710,835. Foreign Patents Pending.
Portions of this computer program are Copyright ©; 2000 Earth Resource Mapping, Inc.
OSTN97 © Crown Copyright 1997. All rights reserved.
OSTN02 © Crown copyright 2002. All rights reserved.
OSGM02 © Crown copyright 2002, © Ordnance Survey Ireland, 2002.
FME Objects Engine © 2005 SAFE Software. All rights reserved.
ETABS is a registered trademark of Computers and Structures, Inc. ETABS © copyright 1984-2005 Computers and Structures, Inc. All rights
reserved.
RISA is a trademark of RISA Technologies. RISA-3D copyright © 1993-2005 RISA Technologies. All rights reserved.
Portions relating to JPEG © Copyright 1991-1998 Thomas G. Lane. All rights reserved. This software is based in part on the work of the Independent
JPEG Group.
Portions relating to TIFF © Copyright 1997-1998 Sam Leffler. © Copyright 1991-1997 Silicon Graphics, Inc. All rights reserved. The Tiff portions
of this software are provided by the copyright holders and contributors “as is” and any express or implied warranties, including, but not limited
to, the implied warranties or merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose are disclaimed. In no event shall the copyright owner or
contributors of the TIFF portions be liable for any direct, indirect, incidental, special, exemplary, or consequential damages (including, but not
limited to, procurement of substitute goods or services; loss of use, data, or profits; or business interruption) however caused and on any theory
of liability, whether in contract, strict liability, or tort (including negligence or otherwise) arising in any way out of the use of the TIFF portions
of this software, even if advised of the possibility of such damage. Portions of Libtiff 3.5.7 Copyright © 1988-1997 Sam Leffler. Copyright ©
1991-1997 Silicon Graphics, Inc. Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this software and its documentation for any purpose is
hereby granted without fee, provided that (i) the above copyright notices and this permission notice appear in all copies of the software and
related documentation, and (ii) the names of Sam Leffler and Silicon Graphics may not be used in any advertising or publicity relating to the
software without the specific, prior written permission of Sam Leffler and Silicon Graphics.
Portions of Libxml2 2.6.4 Copyright © 1998-2003 Daniel Veillard. All Rights Reserved. Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person
obtaining a copy of this software and associated documentation files (the “Software”), to deal in the Software without restriction, including
without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute, sublicense, and/or sell copies of the Software, and to permit
persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so, subject to the following conditions: The above copyright notices and this permission notice
shall be included in all copies or substantial portions of the Software.
Government Use
Use, duplication, or disclosure by the U.S. Government is subject to restrictions as set forth in FAR 12.212 (Commercial Computer
Software-Restricted Rights) and DFAR 227.7202 (Rights in Technical Data and Computer Software), as applicable.
Contents

Chapter 1 What’s New? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1

New in Revit Structure 2011 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1

Introduction to Revit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9

Chapter 2 Building Information Modeling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11

What Is Revit Structure? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
What Is Meant by Parametric? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
How Does Revit Structure Keep Things Updated? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Understanding Revit Terms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Element Behavior in a Parametric Modeler . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Element Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15

Chapter 3 Licensing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Licensing Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Standalone Licensing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Licensing Extension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
License Transferring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
License Borrowing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18

Chapter 4 User Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21

Ribbon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Customizing the Ribbon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Application Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Quick Access Toolbar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Tooltips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Keytips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Project Browser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Using the Project Browser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Drawing Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32

v
Status Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Options Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Properties Palette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Modifying Instance Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Modifying Type Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Creating a New Family Type in a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Previewing Family Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
View Control Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Recent Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
InfoCenter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Overview of InfoCenter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Search For Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Receive Product Updates and Announcements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Save and Access Favorite Topics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Specify InfoCenter Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Search Topics in Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Autodesk® Seek . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Searching for Content with Autodesk Seek . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Online Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52

Start a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53

Chapter 5 Creating a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55

Creating a Project Using Default Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Creating a Project Using a Template . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Before You Begin a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56

Chapter 6 Using Information from Other Sources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57

Import/Link Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Suitability of Imported Geometry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Implications of Importing vs. Linking for Xrefs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Importing or Linking CAD Formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Importing or Linking CAD Files Using the Import CAD and Link CAD Tools . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Importing CAD Files Using i-drop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Importing Files from SketchUp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Importing ACIS Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Import and Link Options for CAD Formats and Revit Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Setting Scaling for Imported DWG or DXF Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Setting Line Weights for Imported DWG or DXF Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Mapping AutoCAD SHX Fonts to TrueType Fonts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Setting Constraint Parameters for Imported Geometry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Moving a View-Specific Import to the Foreground or Background . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Importing Images . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Modifying Imported Images . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Deleting Raster Images . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Importing Building Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Building Component ADSK Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Working with Building Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Tips for Working with Building Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Building Component Workflow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Opening Industry Foundation Class (IFC) Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Selecting a Template for IFC Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Loading an IFC Class Mapping File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Overriding Categories and Subcategories for IFC Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Linking AutoCAD Files to a Revit Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
How Linking to AutoCAD Files Works . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Linking to an AutoCAD File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72

vi | Contents
Location of the Linked File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Linking DWF Markup Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Modifying DWF Markups Created in Design Review . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Exploding Imported Geometry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Managing Layers in Linked and Imported Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Querying Objects in Layers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Hiding and Deleting Layers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Changing the Graphic Display of Layers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Troubleshooting Problems with Linked Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Changes in the DWG File Are Not Reflected in the Revit Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Changes to the Layer Color and Line Style Do Not Display in the Revit Project . . . . . . . . . . 80
Layers in the DWG File Do Not Display in the Revit Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
File Operations (Open, Save, Synchronize) Are Blocked or Slow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80

Chapter 7 Opening Revit Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83

Opening a Revit Project File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Opening Families and Training Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Opening Files from the Conceptual Design Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Opening Files from the Web Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Opening Revit Files from Windows Explorer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85

Chapter 8 Saving Revit Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87

Saving a File with a Different Name or Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Save Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Setting Save Reminders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Backup and Journal Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Specifying the Number of Backup Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Backup Files for Network Saves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Journal Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90

Preliminary Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91

Chapter 9 Levels and Grids . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93

Levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Adding Levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Modifying Levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Level Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Grids . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Adding Grids . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Modifying Grids . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Grid Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105

Chapter 10 Project Location and Orientation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107

Specifying the Project Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
Troubleshooting Location Dialog Issues . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Rotating a View to True North . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Rotating Project North . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111

Chapter 11 Site Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113

Site Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Defining Site Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Site Settings Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Toposurfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Simplifying a Toposurface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Toposurface Subregions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Splitting a Toposurface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119

Contents | vii
Merging Toposurfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Graded Regions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Toposurface and Subregion Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Property Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Converting Sketched Property Lines to Table-Based Property Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
Reporting Cut and Fill Volumes on a Site . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
Viewing the Cut/Fill Volumes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
Cut and Fill in a Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Cut and Fill Reporting with Building Pads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Building Pads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Adding a Building Pad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Modifying Building Pads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Modifying the Structure of a Building Pad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Building Pad Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Parking Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
Site Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Contour Line Labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Labeling Contour Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Modifying the Label Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
Changing the Appearance of Contour Line Labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
Contour Label Type Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132

Chapter 12 Conceptual Design Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135

Conceptual Design Environment Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Exploring Conceptual Designs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Early Conceptual Study Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Integrated Study Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Intelligent Sub-Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Conceptual Design Environment Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Conceptual Massing Family Creation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Switching between Conceptual Design and Project Environments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Template Files for the Conceptual Design Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
Drawing in the Conceptual Design Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
Drawing Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
3D Snapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
3D Aligning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
Conceptual Design Model Line Instance Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
3D Work Planes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
3D Levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
3D Reference Planes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
Reference Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
X-Ray Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
Accessing X-Ray Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
Display of Elements in X-Ray Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
Manipulating Forms in X-Ray Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
Profiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
Locked Profiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
Locking and Unlocking Profiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
Forms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Solid and Void Forms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Creating Solid Forms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
Creating Void Forms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
Accessing Create Form Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
Unconstrained and Referenced-Based Forms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
Selecting Forms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
Form Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
Modifying Forms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
Rehosting Forms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
Dimensioning Forms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184

viii | Contents
Referencing Imported Geometry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
Conceptual Design Environment Model Instance Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
Manipulating Forms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
Manipulating Joined Forms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
Rationalizing Surfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
Dividing a Surface with UV Grids . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
Understanding UV Grids . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
Enabling and Disabling UV Grids . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
Modifying the Spacing of UV Grids on Divided Surfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
Adjusting UV Grids with the Face Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
Dividing a Surface by Intersection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
Patterning Surfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
Editing the Patterned Surface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
Pattern Component Families . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
Surface Representation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
Pattern Element Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
Conceptual Design Environment Glossary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214

Chapter 13 Structural Modeling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217

Structural Template . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
Starting a Project with the Structural Template . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
Loading Structural Component Families . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
Loading Structural Families . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
Structural Columns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
Creating a Structural Column Family . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
Starting a Structural Column Family . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
Specifying How a Structural Column Displays in Plan View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
Structural Column Family Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
Placing a Vertical Structural Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
Placing Slanted Structural Columns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
Placing a Slanted Structural Column in a Plan View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
Placing a Slanted Structural Column Using 3D Snapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
Placing a Slanted Structural Column Using 2-Click 3D View Placement . . . . . . . . . . 227
Placing a Slanted Structural Column in Elevations or Sections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
Placing Multiple Columns by Grid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
Locking Columns to a Grid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
Adding Structural Columns Inside Architectural Columns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
Adjusting Slanted Column Geometry End Position and Trim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
Slanted Column Geometry Alignment with Beams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
Attachment Justification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
Cut Style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
Slanted Column Style Behaviors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
Modifying Structural Columns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
Modifying Slanted Structural Columns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
Modifying the Slant of Placed Structural Columns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
Adding a Splice Symbol or Plate Symbol to a Steel Structural Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
Structural Column Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
Modifying Structural Column Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
Structural Column Type Properties - Steel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
Structural Column Type Properties - Concrete . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
Structural Column Instance Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
Beams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
Structural Usage of Beams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
Beam Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
Creating Beams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
Sketching Individual Beams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
Using the Grid Tool to Place Beams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
Sketching Beams with the Chain Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
Curved Beam Modeling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255

Contents | ix
Sloped Beam Modeling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
3D Snapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
Editing Beams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
Beam Graphical Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259
Beam Handles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259
Changing Beam Geometry Using Shape Handles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
Moment Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
Beam Tags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
Structural Framing Tag Families . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
Beam Annotations Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
Beam Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
Modifying Beam Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
Beam Type Properties - Steel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
Beam Type Properties - Concrete . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
Beam Instance Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
Joins and Cutback on Framing Elements and Columns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
Bounding Boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
Beam to Column Joins . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
Cutback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
Bounding Box Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276
Modifying Beam Symbolic (Coarse Level of Detail) Cutback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277
Modifying Beam Instance (Medium/Fine Level of Detail) Cutback . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277
Beam to Beam Cutback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277
Beam to Column Cutback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278
Beam to Wall Cutback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
Brace and Truss Cutback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
Column Cutback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
Beam Joins . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281
Square-off Joins . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281
Miter Joins . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281
Adjusting Cutback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283
Creating a Miter Join . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283
Beam Elevation at Column Join . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285
Beam Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286
Creating a Structural Beam System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287
Creating a One-Click Beam System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288
Defining the Boundary of a Structural Beam System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289
Specifying Beam Direction in a Beam System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295
Defining Beam System Justification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296
Beam System Layout Rules and Patterns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299
Dropping Beam Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300
Creating a Cantilevered Beam System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300
Creating a 3D Beam System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301
Tagging Beam Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303
Placing Beam System Tags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304
Tagging Beam Systems on Placement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304
Modifying Beam System Tags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305
Resetting Structural Beam Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
Modifying a Beam System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308
Modifying Beam System Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308
Beam System Type Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309
Beam System Instance Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309
Braces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310
Loading Structural Braces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311
Adding Structural Braces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311
Modifying Braces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313
Controlling Brace Attachments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313
Brace Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314
Steel Brace Type Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314
Steel Brace Instance Properties (When Attached to a Beam) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316

x | Contents
Brace Instance Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318
Trusses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320
Creating a Truss Family . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
Creating a New Truss Layout Family File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322
Adding Truss Family Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322
Sketching a Truss Family Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323
Adding a Truss . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323
Attaching a Truss to a Roof or Structural Floor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324
Removing Truss Families . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326
Editing a Truss Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326
Tagging a Truss . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329
Placing a Truss Tag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329
Placing Structural Framing Tags on Truss Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329
Tagging New Webs in a Truss . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330
Editing Truss Tag Families . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331
Resetting a Truss . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331
Truss Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331
Truss Object Type Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332
Truss Object Instance Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334
Web Instance Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335
Top/Bottom Chord Instance Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338
Openings in a Structural Beam, Brace, or Structural Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343
Structural Stiffeners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345
Structural Walls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345
Creating a Structural Wall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346
Modifying Structural Walls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347
Modifying Structural Walls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347
Defining Structural Wall Shapes or Openings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348
Arc Walls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350
Structural Wall Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351
Structural Wall Type Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352
Structural Wall Instance Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353
Wall Foundations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355
Creating a Wall Foundation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355
Modifying a Wall Foundation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356
Default End Extensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357
Wall Foundation Breaks Beneath Doors and Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357
Tagging a Wall Foundation with Elevation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358
Changing the Structural Usage of a Wall Foundation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358
Wall Foundation Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358
Modifying Wall Foundation Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359
Wall Foundation Type Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359
Wall Foundation Instance Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360
Isolated Foundations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361
Adding Isolated Foundations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362
Isolated Foundation Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363
Modifying Isolated Foundation Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363
Isolated Foundation Type Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363
Isolated Foundation Instance Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364
Structural Floors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366
Adding a Structural Floor or Deck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366
Cantilevers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367
Applying Cantilevers when Creating a Structural Floor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368
Applying Cantilevers to an Existing Structural Floor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368
Span Direction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369
Adding a Span Direction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370
Modifying Span Direction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371
Sloped Structural Floors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372
Openings in Structural Floors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372
Drop Panels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373

Contents | xi
Modifying Structural Floors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375
Structural Floor Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 376
Modifying Structural Floor Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 376
Structural Floor Type Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 376
Structural Floor Instance Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 377
Slab Edges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379
Resizing or Flipping Slab Edges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 380
Adding or Removing Segments of the Slab Edge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 380
Changing Horizontal and Vertical Offsets of Slab Edges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 380
Slab Edge Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 380
Foundation Slabs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 382
Adding Foundation Slabs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 382
Modifying Foundation Slab Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 383
Foundation Slab Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 383
Shape Editing for Structural Floors, Roofs, and Floors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 386
Using the Modify Sub Elements Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 387
Using the Add Point Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388
Using the Add Split Line Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 389
Using the Pick Supports Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390
Using the Curved Edge Condition Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390
Using the Reset Shape Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391
Deleting Shape Modifiers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391
Variable Layer Thickness for Roofs and Structural Floors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 392
Concrete Modeling Concepts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 393
Concrete Geometry Joins . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 393
Legacy Drawing Behaviors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 394
Valid Concrete Element Join Combinations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 394
Dominant Elements in a Concrete Join . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 395
Display of Hidden Lines of Structural Concrete Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 395

Chapter 14 Reinforcement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 397

Reinforcement Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 397
Valid Rebar Hosts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 398
Rebar Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 399
Rebar Cover References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 399
Editing Rebar Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 399
Modifying Rebar Cover Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400
Rebar Cover Element Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 401
Rebar Shapes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 402
Placing Rebar Shapes in a Host . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 403
Add Rebar to a Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 403
Adding Rebar to a Beam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 405
Plane Placement of Rebar in Walls and Structural Floors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 407
Rehosting Rebar Shapes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 409
Changing the Orientation of Rebar Shapes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 410
Auto-Expand Behavior of Rebar Shapes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 411
Modifying Rebar Shape . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 413
Select a New Rebar Shape . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 415
Spiral Rebar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 415
Select a New Rebar Bar Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 417
Modify a Rebar Sketch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 417
Sketch Placement of Rebar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 417
Rebar Shape Family Editing Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 418
Rebar Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 419
Major Segment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 419
Shape Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 419
Rebar Shape Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 420
Allowable Bar Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 420
Rebar Schedule Mark . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 420

xii | Contents
Rebar View Visibility States . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 421
Changing Rebar View Visibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 422
Rebar Type Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 423
Rebar Instance Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 424
Rebar Hooks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 426
Rebar Hook Length Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 427
Rebar Hook Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 427
Rebar Hook Graphical Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 429
Moving Hooks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 429
Toggling Hook Orientation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 429
Swapping Hooks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 431
Rebar Hook Type Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 431
Rebar Sets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 432
Creating Rebar Sets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 432
Rebar Sets Shape Handles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 433
Area Reinforcement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 433
Sketching Area Reinforcement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 434
Whole Host Area Reinforcement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 434
Viewing Area Reinforcement in a Cross Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 435
Area Reinforcement Type Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 436
Area Reinforcement Instance Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 437
Tagging Area Reinforcement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 438
Path Reinforcement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 439
Sketching Path Reinforcement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440
Viewing Path Reinforcement in Cross Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 441
Path Reinforcement Type Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 441
Path Reinforcement Instance Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 442
Tagging Path Reinforcement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 443

Architectural Modeling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 445

Building The Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 447

Chapter 15 Walls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 449

Walls Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 450
Placing Walls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 452
Modifying Walls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 454
Wall Best Practices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 485
Wall Type Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 487
Wall Instance Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 488
Troubleshooting Walls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 490

Chapter 16 Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 491

Placing Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 492
Adding Doors to Curtain Walls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 493
Door Tags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 493
Changing the Door Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 494
Changing the Door Orientation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 494
Moving a Door to a Different Wall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 494
Door Instance Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 495
Door Type Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 496

Chapter 17 Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 499

Placing Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 499
Window Tags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 500
Changing the Window Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 500

Contents | xiii
Changing the Window Orientation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 501
Moving a Window to a Different Wall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 501
Window Instance Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 501
Window Type Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 502

Chapter 18 Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 505

Placing Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 506
Moving Components to Different Hosts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 507

Chapter 19 Architectural Columns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 509

Adding a Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 509
Attaching Columns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 510
Detaching Columns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 515
Coarse-Scale Cut Patterns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 515
Modifying Architectural Columns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 516
Architectural Column Type Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 516
Architectural Column Instance Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 517

Chapter 20 Roofs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 519

Roofs Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 519
Creating a Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 521
Modifying Roofs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 524
Roof Slope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 528
Adding Elements to Roofs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 533
Roof Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 547
Troubleshooting Roofs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 554

Chapter 21 Floors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 555

Adding Floors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 555
Changing the Floor Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 556
Editing a Floor Sketch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 556
Sloped Floors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 556
Multi-layer Floors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 557
Floor Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 557

Chapter 22 Openings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 561

Cutting Rectangular Openings in Walls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 562
Cutting Openings in Floors, Roofs, and Ceilings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 563
Cutting Shaft Openings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 564

Chapter 23 Model Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 565

Adding Model Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 566
Editing Model Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 566
Moving Model Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 566
Model Text Instance Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 567
Model Text Type Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 568

Chapter 24 Model Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 569

Placing Model Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 569
Converting Line Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 570
Model Line Instance Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 571

Chapter 25 Compound Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 573

Materials in Compound Geometry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 573

xiv | Contents
Layer Join Cleanup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 573
Applying a Function to a Layer of a Compound Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 574
Inserting Layers into a Compound Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 575
Layer Wrapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 576
Setting Layer Wrapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 576
Previewing the Compound Geometry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 577
Layers as References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 577
Compound Walls Joined to Columns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 577
Editing Layers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 577
Flipping Orientation of Compound Walls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 577

Chapter 26 Sloped Surfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 579

Sloped Surfaces Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 579
Creating a Sloped Surface Using a Slope Arrow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 581
Creating a Sloped Surface Using Parallel Sketch Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 583
Creating a Sloped Surface Using a Single Sketch Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 583
Slope Arrow Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 584
Boundary Line Properties for Sloped Surfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 585

Chapter 27 Uniformat Assembly Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 587

Circulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 589

Chapter 28 Stairs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 591

Creating Stairs by Sketching Runs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 592
Creating Stairs by Sketching Boundary and Riser Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 595
Creating Spiral Staircases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 596
Creating Arced Landings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 597
Specifying the Railing Type for New Stairs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 597
Stair Calculator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 598
Modifying Stairs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 599
Stair Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 601

Chapter 29 Ramps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 607

Adding a Ramp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 607
Changing the Ramp Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 608
Editing a Ramp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 608
Ramp Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 608

Chapter 30 Railings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 611

Adding a Railing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 611
Changing the Railing Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 612
Modifying the Railing Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 612
Modifying Railing Joins . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 613
Modifying Railing Height and Slope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 613
Controlling Placement of Balusters and Posts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 614
Railing Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 619

Chapter 31 Curtain Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 623

Curtain Wall Workflow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 623
Curtain Elements Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 623
Curtain Walls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 625
Creating Linear Curtain Walls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 625
Merging Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 626
Creating Non-Linear Curtain Walls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 627

Contents | xv
Changing the Orientation of Curtain Walls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 627
Adding Curtain Grids . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 627
Modifying Curtain Walls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 628
Merging Curtain Wall Panels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 628
Embedding Curtain Walls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 629
Cleaning Curtain Wall Joins . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 630
Wall Panels in Curtain Walls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 630
Changing Curtain Wall Panel Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 632
Reshaping Curtain Wall Panels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 632
Joining Curtain Wall Panels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 632
Unjoining Curtain Wall Panels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 632
Curtain Grid Placement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 633
Excluding Grids from Curtain Panels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 633
Creating Varied Surface Grid Layouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 633
Modifying Surface Grid Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 634
Locking the Position of Mullions and Curtain Grids . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 635
Mullions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 635
Placing Mullions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 635
Angle and Position of a Mullion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 636
Controlling Mullion Joins . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 636
Cleaning Mullion Joins . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 636
Corner Mullions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 637
Mitered Mullions on Curtain Walls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 639
Changing Mullion Material . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 639
Mullion Profiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 640
Applying a Mullion Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 640
Creating a Mullion Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 640
Curtain Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 640
Curtain Systems by Face . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 641
Adding Curtain Grids to a Curtain System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 641
Adding Mullions to a Curtain System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 641
Curtain Element Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 642
Curtain Wall Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 642
Common Mullion Type Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 645
Circular Mullion Type Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 646
Rectangular Mullion Type Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 646
Corner Mullion Type Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 647
Mullion Instance Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 648
Type-Driven Curtain Element Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 648
Troubleshooting Curtain Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 650
Switching Wall Type to Family Curtain Wall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 650
Invalid Curtain Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 650
No Curtain Panel Families Loaded . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 651
Non-System Panel Families . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 651
Cannot Divide Curtain Grid by Grid Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 651
Supported for Non-Rectangular Curtain Walls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 651

Chapter 32 Design Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 653

Design Option Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 653
Design Option Workflow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 654
Design Options Terminology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 655
Best Practices for Design Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 656
Creating Design Option Sets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 657
Adding Design Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 658
Working with Design Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 659
Editing a Design Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 659
Determining the Active Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 660
Promoting a Secondary Option to the Primary Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 661
Moving Elements from the Main Model to a Design Option Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 661

xvi | Contents
Moving Elements from One Design Option to Another . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 662
Selecting Elements in Design Options and the Main Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 663
Duplicating a Design Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 664
Annotating and Detailing Design Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 664
Deleting Design Options and Option Sets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 665
Incorporating a Design Option into the Main Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 666
Viewing Design Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 667
Dedicating Views to Design Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 667
Viewing the Main Model Without Design Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 668
Viewing Multiple Design Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 668
Checking the Design Option Settings for a View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 669
View Tags in Dedicated Views for Design Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 669
Considerations When Using Design Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 670
Unsupported Elements for Design Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 670
Referencing Elements in Design Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 670
Interdependent Elements in Design Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 671
Design Options and Worksets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 671
Design Options and Wall Joins . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 671
Troubleshooting Issues with Design Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 673
Elements in Main Model Will Be Deleted . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 673
Highlighted Elements Overlap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 673
Incorrect Wall Joins . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 673
Inserts in Design Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 673
None of the Created Elements Are Visible in This View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 674
None of the Selected Elements Can Be Added to This Option Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 674
Option Conflict Between Rooms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 674
Room Option Conflict . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 675

Chapter 33 Revit Families . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 677

Families Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 677
Different Kinds of Families . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 678
Family Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 678
Opening the Family Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 679
The Families Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 680
Working with Families . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 680
Viewing Families in a Project or Template . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 680
Viewing Elements with a Specific Family Type in a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 681
Creating an Element from a Family Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 681
Changing the Family Type of an Element . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 682
Modifying a Family Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 682
Editing Labeled Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 682
Locking Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 682
Adding a Type to a Family . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 683
Deleting Unused Families and Family Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 683
System Families . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 684
Revit System Families and Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 684
Workflow: Using System Families in Your Projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 686
Loading System Family Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 686
Loadable Families . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 687
Revit Structure Standard Loadable Families . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 687
Workflow: Using Loadable Families in Your Projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 688
Loading and Saving Families . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 688
Creating Loadable Families . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 691
Modifying Families in a Project (or Nested Family) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 692
Creating Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 692
Creating Family Parameter Links . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 694
Family Category and Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 695
Working with Shared Components in a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 695
In-Place Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 696

Contents | xvii
Workflow: Working with In-place Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 696
Creating an In-Place Element . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 696
Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 696
Working with Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 697
Connector Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 701
Labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 704
Editing Multi-parameter Labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 705
Edit Label Unit Formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 706
Label Type Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 707
Label Instance Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 708
Applying the Label to a Tag in a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 708
Applying the Label to a Titleblock in a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 709

Chapter 34 Rooms and Areas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 711

Rooms and Areas Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 711
Area Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 711
Area Schemes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 711
Area Plans . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 712
Area Boundaries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 713
Areas and Area Tags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 714
Removing Areas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 716
Showing Areas and Area Boundaries in Linked Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 718
Area Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 718
Area Type Rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 719

Document the Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 723

Chapter 35 2D Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 725

Plan Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 725
Creating a Plan View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 725
Plan View Direction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 725
Cutting a Plan View by the Back Clip Plane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 727
Plan View Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 729
Displaying a Plan View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 729
Plan Region . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 729
Elevation Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 730
Creating an Elevation View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 730
Displaying an Elevation View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 731
Changing the Elevation Symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 732
Changing the Clip Plane in an Elevation View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 732
Reference Elevation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 732
Framing Elevation Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 733
Creating Custom Elevation Tags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 734
Elevation View Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 737
Section Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 737
Creating a Section View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 737
Section Tag Visibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 738
Breaking Section Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 739
Controlling Section View Width and Depth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 740
Segmented Section View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 740
Reference Sections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 742
Hiding the Section Annotation Symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 743
Displaying a Section View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 743
Section Heads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 744
Section View Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 745
Callout Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 746
Callouts Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 746

xviii | Contents
Creating a Callout View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 747
Opening a Callout View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 748
Modifying a Callout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 748
Callout Tags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 750
Visibility of Callouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 753
Reference Callouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 753
Modifying Callout Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 755

Chapter 36 3D Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 757

Creating an Orthographic 3D View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 757
Creating a Perspective 3D View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 758
Adjusting the Camera Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 758
Specifying Camera Position in a 3D View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 758
Modifying the Camera Position in a Perspective 3D View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 758
Turning Off the Camera in a 3D View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 760
Displaying a 3D View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 760
Rotating a 3D View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 760
Specifying the Background for a 3D View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 761
Change the Extents of a 3D View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 762
3D View Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 763

Chapter 37 Legend Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 767

Creating a Legend . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 768
Dimensioning Legend Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 769
Placing Components from a Legend into a Project View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 769
Modifying Legend Component Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 769

Chapter 38 Schedules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 771

Schedule Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 771
Creating a Schedule or Quantity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 772
Key Schedules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 772
Creating a Key Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 773
Applying a Key to an Element . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 773
Applying the Key to a Component Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 773
Material Takeoff Schedules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 774
Creating a Material Takeoff Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 774
Annotation Schedules (Note Blocks) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 774
Creating an Annotation Schedule (Note Block) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 774
Graphical Column Schedules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 775
Including Off-Grid Columns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 776
Hiding Levels in Graphical Column Schedules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 782
Displaying by Plan Level Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 783
Displaying by Column Location Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 783
Displaying by Column Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 783
Changing the Text Properties of the Graphical Column Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 784
Changing the Grid Properties of the Graphical Column Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 784
Changing the Display Properties of the Columns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 785
Splitting the Schedule into Segments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 786
Tag the Columns in a Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 786
Grouping Columns by Similar Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 786
Applying the Schedule to a Sheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 787
View Parameters of Graphical Column Schedules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 787
Specifying Schedule Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 788
Selecting Fields for a Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 788
Limiting Data Presented in a Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 789
Sorting Fields in a Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 790
Adding Grand Totals to a Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 790
Adding Column Totals to a Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 791

Contents | xix
Formatting a Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 791
Applying a Phase to a Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 795
Modifying Schedules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 795
Editing Cells in a Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 796
Grouping Column Headings in a Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 796
Hiding Schedule Columns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 796
Deleting Schedule Rows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 796
Reusing Schedule Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 797
Saving Schedule Views to an External Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 797
Inserting Schedule Views from Another Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 797
Foundation Footings Schedule Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 797
Exporting a Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 798

Chapter 39 Visibility and Graphic Display in Project Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 801

Overview of Visibility and Graphic Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 801
Overriding Visibility and Graphic Display of Individual Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 802
Overriding Graphic Display of Element Categories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 803
Removing Graphic Display Overrides for Element Categories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 804
Specifying Element Category Visibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 805
Applying Transparency to Faces of Model Element Categories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 806
Controlling Visibility and Graphic Display of Elements Using Filters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 806
Creating a Criteria-Based Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 806
Applying a Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 808
Managing Selection-Based Filters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 809
Modifying Filter Criteria . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 811
Modifying Filter Visibility and Graphics Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 811
Hiding Elements in a View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 811
Hiding Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 811
Revealing and Unhiding Hidden Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 812
Temporarily Hiding or Isolating Elements or Element Categories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 812
Overriding Individual Lines in an Element . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 813
Overriding Host Layers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 813
Override Cut Line Styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 814
Troubleshooting View and Visibility Issues . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 814

Chapter 40 Use and Manage Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 817

Renaming Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 817
Navigating Primary and Dependent Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 817
Navigating Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 818
ViewCube . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 819
Navigation Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 824
SteeringWheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 826
Saving a 3D View Orientation as a Project View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 843
Duplicate Dependent Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 843
Adding Matchlines for Dependent Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 845
Propagating Dependent View Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 847
Making a Dependent View Independent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 847
Deleting Dependent Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 847
Creating Dependent Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 847
Rotating Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 848
Rotating a Section View or Scope Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 848
Rotating a Viewport on a Sheet View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 848
Rotating a View by the Crop Region . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 848
Crop Regions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 849
Cropping a View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 850
Showing or Hiding Crop Regions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 850
Resizing Crop Regions Graphically . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 850
Resizing Crop Regions Explicitly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 853

xx | Contents
Cut a View by the Far Clip Plane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 854
Finding Referring Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 855
Finding a View Symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 855
Customizing Project View Organization in the Project Browser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 855
Sorting Views or Sheets in the Project Browser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 856
Creating a Project Browser Sort Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 856
Editing a Project Browser Sort Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 857
Adding a Filter to a Project Browser Sort Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 857
Editing a Project Browser Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 857
Creating a View List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 858
Using View Lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 858
Adding a View List to a Sheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 859
Reusing Views and Sheets in Other Projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 859
View Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 859
Zooming Project Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 860
View Scale . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 860
Detail Levels and Display of Structural Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 861
Display of Hidden Lines of Structural Concrete Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 861
Showing Hidden Element Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 862
Section, Elevation, and Callout View Tag Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 862
View Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 864
Visual Styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 867
Graphic Display Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 871
View Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 873

Chapter 41 Project Phasing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 877

Phase Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 877
Creating Phases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 878
Combining Phases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 879
Phase Filters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 879
Creating Phase Filters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 880
Applying Phase Filters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 880
Defining the Graphic Display for Phase Filters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 880
Defining the Graphic Display for Phase Statuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 880
Infill Elements for Phasing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 881
Viewing Infill Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 882
Changing the Structure of Infill Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 882
Demolishing Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 883
Using the Demolish Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 885

Chapter 42 Annotating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 887

Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 887
Temporary Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 887
Permanent Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 888
Spot Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 902
Listening Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 909
Dimension Witness Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 910
Modifying Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 912
Dimension Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 916
Text Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 926
Adding Text Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 926
Modifying Text Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 929
Text Note Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 936
Keynotes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 938
Differences Between Keynoting and Tagging a Material . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 938
Keynoting Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 939
Keynote Workflow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 939
Types of Keynotes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 940

Contents | xxi
Assigning Keynote Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 941
Keynote Legend . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 941
Adding Additional Categories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 942
Resolving Keynote File Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 944
Keynote Tag Ends . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 944
Tags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 944
Tag Labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 944
Multiple Tags for Families . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 945
Applying a Tag By Category . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 945
Applying a Tag On Placement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 946
Changing a Tag Instance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 946
Aligning Tags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 947
Tag Type Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 947
Tag Instance Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 947
Tag All Not Tagged . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 947
Material Tags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 948
Modifying Tags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 949
Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 951
Welding Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 951
Modifying Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 952
Annotation Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 953

Chapter 43 Detailing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 955

Detailing Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 955
Types of Views for Detailing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 955
Creating Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 955
Sorting the Draw Order of Detail Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 958
Saving Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 959
Detail Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 959
Sample Detail View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 959
Creating a Detail View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 960
Detail View Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 962
Reusing Details From Callouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 962
Drafting Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 964
Sample Drafting View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 964
Creating a Drafting View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 964
Sketching a Detail in a Drafting View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 965
Importing a View From Another CAD Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 965
Drafting View Display and Filled Regions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 966
Drafting View Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 966
Reusing Drafting Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 966
Inserting a Detail Component . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 967
Creating a Detail Component Family . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 968
Creating a 2D Line-Based Detail Component Family . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 968
Detail Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 969
Repeating Detail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 969
Insulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 971
Adding Insulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 971
Increasing the Insulation Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 971
Resizing the Insulation Length . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 971
Resizing the Bulge Between Insulation Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 972
Filled Region . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 972
Changing Filled Region Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 972
Resizing the Filled Region . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 972
Viewing the Area of a Filled Region . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 973
Masking Regions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 973
Adding a Masking Region in a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 973
Adding a Masking Region to a Detail Family . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 973
Masking Regions in Model Families . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 974

xxii | Contents
Masking Region Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 976

Chapter 44 Preparing Construction Documents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 977

Construction Documents Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 977
Sheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 978
Sheets Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 978
Adding a Sheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 979
Adding Views to a Sheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 980
Aligning Views on a Sheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 982
Aligning View Titles on a Sheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 984
Locking the Position of a View on a Sheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 984
Renaming a Sheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 985
Specifying Title Block Information for Sheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 985
Modifying a View on a Sheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 987
Dividing a View Across Multiple Sheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 987
Rotating a View on a Sheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 988
Creating a Title Sheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 989
Adding a Legend to a Sheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 990
Adding a Note Block to a Sheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 991
Using External Information on a Sheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 992
Sheet Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 993
Title Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 995
Title Blocks Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 995
Creating a Title Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 995
Modifying a Title Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 996
Logos and Images in a Title Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 996
Loading a Title Block into a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 997
Changing the Title Block Used on a Sheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 998
Revision Schedules on Title Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 998
Adding Custom Fields to a Title Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1003
Importing a Title Block from Another CAD Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1004
Viewports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1005
Viewport Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1006
Creating a Viewport Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1006
Applying a Viewport Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1006
Modifying Viewport Type Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1007
Viewport Type Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1007
View Titles on Sheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1007
Modifying a View Title on a Sheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1008
Removing a View Title from a Sheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1009
View Title Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1009
Schedules on Sheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1011
Adding a Schedule to a Sheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1011
Formatting a Schedule on a Sheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1012
Splitting a Schedule on a Sheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1012
Adjusting Schedule Columns on a Sheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1014
Displaying Vertical Headings in a Schedule on a Sheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1014
Sheet Lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1015
Creating a Sheet List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1015
Adding Placeholder Sheets to a Sheet List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1015
Filtering Placeholder Sheets on a Sheet List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1016
Omitting Sheets from a Sheet List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1016
Adding a Sheet List to a Sheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1017
Organizing a Sheet List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1017
Revisions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1018
Revision Workflow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1019
Entering Revision Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1019
Merging Revisions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1020
Changing the Order of Revisions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1020

Contents | xxiii
Revision Cloud Numbering by Project or by Sheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1021
Numbering for Revisions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1022
Revision Clouds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1024
Revision Schedules on Sheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1028
Issuing a Revision . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1029

Chapter 45 Rendering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1031

Rendering Workflow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1031
Real-time Rendering Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1032
Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1033
Lights Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1033
Lighting Best Practices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1036
Creating and Modifying Lighting Fixtures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1038
Using Lighting Fixtures in a Building Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1059
Light Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1067
Decals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1071
Creating a Decal Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1072
Modifying a Placed Decal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1073
Renaming a Decal Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1073
Duplicating a Decal Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1073
Deleting a Decal Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1073
Sharing Decals Between Projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1074
Decal Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1074
Rendering an Image . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1076
Defining Render Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1077
Creating the Rendered Image . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1086
Changing Render Settings for a View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1088
View Templates for Render Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1089
View Properties for Renderings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1090
Rendering Best Practices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1090
The Rendering Process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1090
Render Performance and the Building Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1091
Render Performance and Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1091
Render Performance and Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1092
Render Performance and Image Size/Quality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1093
Troubleshooting Issues with Rendering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1093
Press Render to Update the Image . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1094
Missing Images . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1094
Not Enough Memory to Create the Rendered Image . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1094
Disk Space Insufficient for Rendering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1094
Rendering Process Is Taking Too Long . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1095
Rendered Image Is Black . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1095
Rendered Image Is Washed Out or Faded . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1095
Elements Are Gray in Rendered Image . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1096
Glass is Too Light or Too Dark . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1096
Rendered Image Is Poor Quality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1096
Rendered Image is Wrong Color . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1096
Light Source Shapes Do Not Display in Rendered Image . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1097

Chapter 46 Walkthroughs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1099

Walkthrough Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1099
Creating a Walkthrough Path . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1099
Editing a Walkthrough Path . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1100
Editing Walkthrough Frames . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1101
Controlling Walkthrough Playback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1102
Exporting a Walkthrough . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1102

Chapter 47 Share the Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1105

xxiv | Contents
Export . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1105
Exporting to CAD Formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1105
Exporting to DWF Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1120
Exporting Layers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1125
Exporting to ODBC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1126
Exporting a View to an Image File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1129
Exporting Project Views to HTML . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1130
Creating Room/Area Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1131
Exporting to Industry Foundation Classes (IFC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1132
Exporting Your Design to gbXML . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1137
Exporting to AutoCAD Architecture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1139
Exporting to 3ds Max . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1139
Publish . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1142
Publishing to Autodesk® Seek . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1142
Publishing to Buzzsaw . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1144
Print . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1146
Printing Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1147
Print Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1147
Print Preview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1149
Printing Views and Sheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1149
Selecting Views to Print . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1150
Printing to PDF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1151
Changing Your System’s PDF Print Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1152
Printing FAQs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1152
Batch Printing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1153
Print Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1154
Structural Interoperability with AutoCAD Architecture and AutoCAD MEP . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1154
Importing Structural Elements from AutoCAD Architecture and AutoCAD MEP . . . . . . . . 1154
Exporting Structural Elements to AutoCAD Architecture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1165
Placing 3D Beams from Geometry References in Imported 3D Drawings . . . . . . . . . . . . 1172

Collaborate with Others . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1175

Chapter 48 Linked Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1177

Overview of Linked Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1177
When to Link Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1178
Dimensions and Constraints in Linked Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1178
Repeating a Linked Model in the Host Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1179
Nesting Linked Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1179
Phases and Linked Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1180
Transferring Project Standards Between Linked Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1181
Linking and Worksharing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1181
Directory Paths for Linked Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1181
Workflow for Linking Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1182
Linking Revit Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1183
Linking One Model to Another . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1184
Showing or Hiding Nested Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1184
Mapping Phases Between Linked Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1185
Copying a Linked Model in the Host Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1185
Copying Elements from a Linked Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1186
Selecting Elements in a Linked Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1186
Visibility of Linked Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1187
Overview of Visibility of Linked Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1187
View Filters for Linked Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1188
Displaying a Linked Model by Host View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1192
Displaying a Linked Model by Linked View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1193
Using Custom Settings to Display Linked Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1194
Hiding a Linked Model in a View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1195

Contents | xxv
Displaying a Linked Model in Halftone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1195
Linked Models in Schedules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1195
Visibility of Worksets for Linked Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1198
Troubleshooting Issues with Visibility of Linked Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1199
Tagging Elements in Linked Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1200
Overview of Tagging Elements in Linked Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1201
What Elements Can I Tag in Linked Models? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1201
What Happens to Tags When a Linked Model is Unavailable? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1202
What Happens to Tags When Linked Elements Are Changed or Deleted? . . . . . . . . . . . 1202
Linked Model Instance Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1202
Linked Model Type Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1203
Managing Links . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1203
Unloading and Reloading Linked Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1203
Reviewing Orphaned Elements from Linked Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1203
Rehosting Orphaned Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1205
Unresolved References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1205
Manage Links Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1206
Link Management Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1206

Chapter 49 Working in a Team . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1209

Worksharing Workflow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1209
Enabling Worksharing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1210
Setting Up Worksets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1212
Using Workshared Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1217
Creating a Local Copy of the Central Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1218
Worksets on the Status Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1218
Editing Workshared Projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1219
Saving Workshared Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1225
Loading Updates from the Central Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1230
Visibility of Worksets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1230
Working Offsite and Offline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1232
Upgrading Workshared Projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1232
Workshared Project Rollback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1233
Rolling Back Workshared Projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1234
Saving a Specific Backup Version as a New File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1234
Viewing Workshared File History . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1234
Creating a Central Model from an Existing Workshared File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1235
Moving the Central Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1236
Worksharing Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1237
Troubleshooting Worksharing Issues . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1237
Central File Has Been Restored . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1237

Chapter 50 Multi-Discipline Coordination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1239

Copy/Monitor Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1239
When Should I Use Copy/Monitor? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1239
What Elements Can I Copy or Monitor? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1240
Copy/Monitor Methods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1241
Copy/Monitor and Workshared Projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1242
Copy/Monitor Workflow for Linked Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1243
Copying Levels for Monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1244
Copying Elements for Monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1246
Monitoring Elements in a Linked Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1248
Monitoring Elements in the Current Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1250
Specifying Options for Copy/Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1251
Copy/Monitor Parameters for Levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1252
Copy/Monitor Parameters for Grids . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1252
Copy/Monitor Parameters for Columns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1253
Copy/Monitor Parameters for Walls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1253

xxvi | Contents
Copy/Monitor Parameters for Floors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1254
Stopping Element Monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1254
Coordination Review . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1255
Reviewing Warnings for Monitored Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1255
Creating a Coordination Review Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1256
Actions for Coordination Review . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1256
Copy/Monitor Best Practices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1257
Troubleshooting Copy/Monitor Issues . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1258
Cannot See Monitored Elements in View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1258
Coordination Monitor Alert . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1258
Instance of Linked RVT File Needs Coordination Review . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1258
Site Plan Was Deleted . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1259
Walls Copied to Revit Structure Are Inaccurate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1259

Chapter 51 Interference Checking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1261

Chapter 52 Shared Positioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1265

Defining Named Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1265
Seeing and Creating Named Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1266
Repositioning Named Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1266
Modifying Linked Model Position Through Instance Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1267
Acquiring and Publishing Coordinates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1267
Acquire Coordinates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1267
Publish Coordinates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1268
Acquiring or Publishing Through Linked Instance Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1268
Relocating and Mirroring a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1269
Relocating a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1269
Relocating a Project by Entering Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1269
Mirroring a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1270
Reporting Shared Coordinates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1270
Project Base Points and Survey Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1271
Making Project Base Points and Survey Points Visible . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1271
Moving Project Base Points and Survey Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1271
Pinning Project Base Points and Survey Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1272
Tips for Working with Project Base Points and Survey Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1272

Analyze the Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1275

Chapter 53 The Structural Analytical Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1277

Structural Analytical Model Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1277
Visualization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1279
Structural Member Analytical Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1281
Analytical Model Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1285
Physical Views and Analytical Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1285
Analytical Model Continuity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1286
Examples of End Join Continuity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1287
Automatic Adjustment of the Analytical Model (Auto-Detect) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1288
Analytical Projection Rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1289
Examples of Auto-Detect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1292
Auto-Detect Tolerances . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1294
Manual Adjustment of the Analytical Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1295
Walls of Unequal Width . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1295
Columns Offset in Plan View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1296
Adjusting Columns to Beams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1297
Adjusting Walls to Beams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1299
Wall Joins . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1300
Projection Plane Options for each Structural Element Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1301

Contents | xxvii
Segmented Analytical Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1302
Segmented Analytical Model Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1303
Loads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1304
Load Cases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1304
Load Combinations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1305
Load Modeling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1307
Loading Load Tags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1314
Tagging Loads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1315
Load Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1315
Boundary Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1318
Adding Boundary Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1318
Boundary Conditions Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1321
Verifying the Analytical Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1322
Automatic Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1322
Checking Member Supports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1323
Checking Analytical/Physical Consistency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1325
Modifying Elective Checking Criteria and Tolerances . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1326
Linking with Analysis and Design Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1327
Track Changes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1327

Chapter 54 Massing Studies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1329

Massing Studies Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1329
Typical Uses of Massing Studies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1330
Massing Studies Terminology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1330
Massing Studies and Building Maker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1331
Creating a Mass Family . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1331
Creating an In-Place Mass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1332
Creating a Mass Family Outside of a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1332
Mass Instance Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1333
Placing a Mass Instance from a Mass Family . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1333
Using Multiple Mass Instances in a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1333
Analyzing a Conceptual Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1335
Mass Floors Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1335
Mass Floors at the Top of a Mass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1336
Mass Floors at the Bottom of a Mass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1337
Creating Mass Floors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1337
Selecting Mass Floors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1338
Creating a Mass Floor Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1339
Tagging Mass Floors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1340
Assigning a Usage to a Mass Floor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1342
Examples of Conceptual Design Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1342
Mass Floor Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1353
Troubleshooting Mass Floors and Conceptual Design Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1354
Creating Building Elements from Mass Instances . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1356
Modeling by Face . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1356
Creating Floors from Mass Floors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1362
Creating Curtain Systems from Mass Instances . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1362
Creating Roofs from Mass Instances . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1363
Updating Face Selections for Roofs and Curtain Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1365
Updating Face-Based Host Shapes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1365
Selecting Face-Based Hosts from a Mass Instance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1365
Controlling Visibility of Mass Instances . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1365
Importing Massing Studies from Other Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1366
Considerations for Imported Geometry in Mass or Generic Model Families . . . . . . . . . . 1366
Best Practices When Importing Masses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1367
Importing a Design to a Mass Family Outside a Revit Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1367
Importing a Design as an In-Place Mass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1369
Example of Importing a Massing Study . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1370
Printing Mass Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1371

xxviii | Contents
Chapter 55 Solar Studies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1373
Solar Studies Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1373
Solar Studies Workflow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1374
Setting up and Creating Solar Studies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1374
Creating Views for Solar Studies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1374
Displaying Sun and Shadows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1375
Creating Solar Studies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1376
Previewing Solar Study Animations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1387
Saving Solar Study Images to Projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1387
Exporting Solar Studies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1388
Troubleshooting Solar Study Issues . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1389
Working with Sun Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1390
Specifying a Sun Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1390
Using Sun Setting Presets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1392
Sun Settings in Upgraded Projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1394

Chapter 56 Display Styles for Analysis Add-In Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1395

Analysis Visualization Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1396
Analysis Display Styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1396
Analysis Display Styles Workflow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1397
Styles Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1397
Analysis Results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1401
Saving the Analysis Results View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1402
Analysis Result and Legend Element Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1402

Tools and Techniques . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1403

Chapter 57 Sketching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1405

Sketching Terminology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1405
Sketching Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1406
Sketching a Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1407
Sketching a Rectangle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1408
Sketching a Circle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1408
Sketching an Inscribed Polygon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1409
Sketching a Circumscribed Polygon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1409
Sketching Arcs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1410
Sketching Ellipses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1414
Sketching a Spline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1417
Modifying a Spline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1418
Closing an Open Loop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1418
Modifying Sketched Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1419
Creating Solid and Void Geometry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1420
Creating an Extrusion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1420
Creating a Blend . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1422
Creating a Revolve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1425
Creating a Sweep . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1426
Creating a Swept Blend . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1430
Cut Geometry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1434
Creating 2D Geometry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1436
Adding a Reference Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1436
Troubleshooting Sketching Issues . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1437
Element Is Slightly Off Axis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1437
Ceiling Sketch Is Invalid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1438
Floor Sketch Is Invalid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1438
Dimension Cannot Be Made Constraining . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1438
Element Is Too Small on Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1438

Contents | xxix
Chapter 58 Editing Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1439
Selecting Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1439
Basics for Selecting Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1440
Selecting Multiple Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1440
Selecting Elements Using a Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1442
Selecting Chains of Walls and Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1442
Selecting Multiple Curtain Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1447
Restoring a Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1448
Removing Elements from a Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1449
Controls and Shape Handles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1449
Undoing, Redoing, or Canceling an Action . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1453
Undoing an Action . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1454
Redoing an Action . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1454
Canceling an Action . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1455
Repeating Last Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1455
Editing Elements in Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1455
Creating Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1456
Loading Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1458
Placing Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1459
Modifying Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1461
Converting Groups and Linked Revit Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1465
Saving Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1466
Deleting Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1466
Group Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1466
Using Arrays of Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1467
Creating an Array . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1467
Copying an Array . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1471
Deleting Members from an Array . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1472
Changing an Array . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1472
Moving Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1474
Moving Elements by Dragging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1474
Moving Elements with Arrow Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1475
Moving Elements with the Move Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1475
Moving Elements with the Offset Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1476
Moving Elements with Cut-and-Paste . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1477
Moving End-joined Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1478
Moving Lines and Components with Walls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1478
Aligning Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1479
Rotating Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1481
Flipping Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1483
Mirroring Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1483
Preventing Elements from Moving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1484
Resizing Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1486
Resizing Elements with Shape Handles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1486
Scaling Graphically . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1486
Scaling Numerically . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1488
Trimming and Extending Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1489
Copying Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1491
Copying Elements with the Copy Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1492
Copying Elements to the Clipboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1492
Pasting Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1493
Copying Elements with the Create Similar Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1497
Modifying Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1497
Changing Element Types Using the Match Type Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1497
Changing the Line Style of Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1498
Changing the Cut Profile of Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1503
Measuring Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1505
Joining Geometry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1506
Unjoining Geometry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1508

xxx | Contents
Cut Structural Member with Plane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1508
Coping and Remove Coping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1508
Splitting Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1509
Splitting Faces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1511
Applying a Material to the Face of an Element . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1512
Deleting Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1514
Troubleshooting Editing Issues . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1514
Can’t Cut Instances Out of Wall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1515
Elements Were Deleted . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1515
Cannot Paste Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1515

Chapter 59 Work Planes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1517

Setting the Work Plane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1517
Making the Work Plane Visible . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1518
Modifying Work Plane Grid Spacing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1518
Rotating a Work Plane Grid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1519
Elements Associated with Work Planes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1519
Changing the Work Plane of an Element . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1519
Dissociating an Element from a Work Plane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1519
Creating a Work Plane-based Family . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1520
Flip Control for Work Plane-based Families . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1520

Chapter 60 Reference Planes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1523

Adding Reference Planes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1523
Naming Reference Planes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1524
Hiding the Annotation in the View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1524
Reference Plane Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1524
Reference Plane Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1524

Chapter 61 Datum Extents and Visibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1527

Example of Datum Visibility in Project Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1527
Visibility of Non-Perpendicular Datums in Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1528
Visibility of Arc Grids in Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1529
Resizing Datum Extent Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1530
Maximizing 3D Model Extents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1530
Propagating 2D Datum Extents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1531
Controlling Visibility of Datums Using Scope Boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1531
Creating a Scope Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1532
Applying a Scope Box to Datums . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1533
Controlling Visibility of Scope Boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1535

Chapter 62 Constraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1537

Applying Constraints with Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1537
Equality Constraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1537
Applying an Equality Constraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1538
Changing the EQ Label to the Dimension Value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1538
Controlling Visibility of Constraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1538
Removing Constraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1539
Constraints and Worksets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1539

Chapter 63 Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1541

Shared Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1541
Categories Allowing Shared Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1542
Setting Up Shared Parameter Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1543
Adding Shared Parameters to Families . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1545
Shared and Family Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1545

Contents | xxxi
Exporting Shared Parameters to a Shared Parameter File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1546
Tagging with Shared Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1546
Schedules with Shared Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1548
Project Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1549
Creating Project Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1549
Creating Shared Project Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1550
Reporting Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1550

Chapter 64 Formulas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1553

Using Formulas for Numerical Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1553
Valid Formula Syntax and Abbreviations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1553
Conditional Statements in Formulas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1554

Customize Revit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1557

Chapter 65 Keyboard Shortcuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1559

Adding Keyboard Shortcuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1559
Removing Keyboard Shortcuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1560
Importing Keyboard Shortcuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1561
Exporting Keyboard Shortcuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1561
Resetting Keyboard Shortcuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1562
Using Keyboard Shortcuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1562
Rules for Keyboard Shortcuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1563
Reserved Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1563

Chapter 66 Project Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1565

Project Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1565
Specifying Energy Analysis (gbXML) Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1566
Fill Patterns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1566
Creating a Simple Fill Pattern . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1567
Fill Pattern Host Orientation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1567
Creating a Custom Fill Pattern . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1568
Applying a Fill Pattern . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1569
Deleting a Fill Pattern . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1569
Editing a Fill Pattern . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1569
Working with Model Patterns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1569
Custom Pattern Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1570
Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1573
Materials Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1574
Material Appearance Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1574
How Materials Are Stored . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1575
Searching for a Material . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1575
Applying Materials to Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1576
Create and Modify Material Appearances . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1577
Changing the Display Properties of a Material . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1578
Texture Alignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1580
Changing the Render Appearance of a Material . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1582
Changing Material Identity Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1595
Changing Material Physical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1596
Creating a Material . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1597
Renaming a Material . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1598
Deleting a Material . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1598
Importing ADSK Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1599
Render Appearance Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1599
Searching for a Render Appearance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1599
Entering Search Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1600
Object Styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1601

xxxii | Contents
Creating Object Style Subcategories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1601
Modifying Object Styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1601
Deleting an Object Style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1601
Renaming an Object Style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1602
Line Styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1602
Creating a Line Style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1602
Deleting a Line Style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1602
Modifying Line Styles in the Family Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1603
Line Weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1603
Specifying Line Weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1603
Adding Scales to Model Line Weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1603
Deleting Scales . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1603
Line Patterns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1604
Creating a Line Pattern . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1604
Editing a Line Pattern . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1604
Deleting a Line Pattern . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1604
Halftone/Underlay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1605
Structural Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1605
Structural Settings Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1605
Annotation Styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1609
Specifying Arrowhead Styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1609
Specifying Text Note Styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1610
Specifying Dimension Styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1610
Modifying Reinforcement Tag Abbreviations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1610
Loading Tag Styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1612
Specifying the Default Tag for an Element Category . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1612
Project Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1613
Setting Project Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1613
Changing Decimal Display and Digit Grouping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1613
Snaps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1614
Setting Snap Increments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1614
Enabling and Disabling Snaps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1615
Temporarily Overriding Snap Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1615
Snap Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1615
Object Snaps and Snap Shortcut Key Combinations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1617
Temporary Dimension Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1618
Detail Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1618
Setting Detail Level Scale Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1618
Specifying the Detail Level for a View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1619
Managing Family Visibility and Detail Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1619
Colors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1622
Using the Windows Color Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1622
Using the PANTONE Color Picker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1622

Chapter 67 Revit Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1623

Setting Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1623
General Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1623
User Interface Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1624
Graphics Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1625
File Location Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1625
Places . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1626
Rendering Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1626
Additional Render Appearance Paths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1627
ArchVision Content Manager Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1627
Spelling Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1628
SteeringWheels Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1628
ViewCube Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1630
Macros Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1631

Contents | xxxiii
Chapter 68 Project Templates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1633
Creating a Template . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1633
Project Template Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1634

Chapter 69 Transferring Project Standards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1635

Chapter 70 View Templates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1637

View Template Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1637
Creating a View Template . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1637
Specifying and Applying a Default View Template . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1639
Applying a View Template . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1639
Applying a View Template to All Views on a Sheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1639
Deleting a View Template . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1640
View Template Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1640

Chapter 71 Creating Macros with Revit VSTA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1643

Getting Started with Macros . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1643
Upgrading Revit VSTA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1644
Revit VSTA Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1645
Using Macro Manager and the Revit VSTA IDE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1645
Basic Workflow for Revit VSTA Macro Development . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1647
Creating Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1648
Creating Macros . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1649
Building Macros in the Revit VSTA IDE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1654
Modifying and Removing Modules and Macros . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1655
Running Macros in the Macro Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1655
Using the StepInto Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1655
Macro Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1656
Revit SDK, API Reference Documentation, VSTA Samples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1657
Using the Revit VSTA Samples from SDK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1658
Revit API Differences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1659
Integrating Macros into Revit VSTA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1660
Restoring RevitAPI.dll and RevitAPIUI.dll . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1664
Migrating SDK Samples to Revit VSTA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1664
Revit Macros FAQ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1666
Related Information about Revit Macros . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1669

Chapter 72 Memory Usage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1671

3 GB Feature Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1671
Enabling the 3 GB Feature on 32-Bit Machines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1672
Verifying Virtual Memory Allocation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1673

Chapter 73 Best Practices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1675

Chapter 74 Troubleshoot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1677

Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1677
Diagnostic Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1678
Selecting Elements by ID Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1678
Finding an Element's ID Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1678
Error Handling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1678
Viewing Elements Involved in Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1679
Viewing all Errors and Warnings Associated with an Error Message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1679
Messages and Warnings You Can Ignore . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1680
Reviewing Warning Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1680
Warnings for Selected Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1680

xxxiv | Contents
Exporting Warnings to a File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1681

Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1683

Chapter 75 gbXML Schema Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1685

gbXML Element . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1685
Campus Element . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1686
DocumentHistory Element . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1687
Location Element . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1688
Building Element . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1688
Space Element . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1689
ShellGeometry Element . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1690
SpaceBoundary Element . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1691
Surface Element . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1691
Opening Element . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1693

Glossary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1695
Glossary Terms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1695

Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1779

Contents | xxxv
xxxvi
What’s New?
1
This topic lists the new and enhanced features for Revit Structure.

New in Revit Structure 2011

The following features are new or enhanced for Revit Structure.
For additional detail and a more interactive listing of New Features for Revit Structure, go to the following:
http://www.autodesk.com/revitstructure-features.

User Interface Enhancements

■ Modeless Properties Palette

■ Repeat last command / Repeat Commands recently used

■ Quick Access Toolbar (QAT):

■ Single QAT per application

■ Increased number of default commands in the QAT

■ Customization options via dialog box: move command up/down, add separator, remove command

■ Improved access to Worksets and Design Options on status bar

■ Ribbon Enhancements:
■ Redesigned Modify tab:
■ Consistent modify tools - panels and buttons are always in the same order on the left side of the
Modify tab. Buttons enable/ disable as necessary.

■ Modify tab name updates to reflect the active contextual tab appended.

■ Contextual tab content is appended to the right side of the Modify tab when active.

■ Modify and contextual contents are separated by a gray visual bar.

■ Persistent access to core modify tools (Object-Action commands):

■ Move

1
■ Copy

■ Rotate

■ Mirror - Pick Axis

■ Mirror - Draw Axis

■ Delete

■ Type Selector Enhancements

Type Selector is combined with the Properties Palette. Open at all times; can be opened/closed using
the Properties Palette button available in the Properties ribbon panel.

■ Group Edit Mode access

Panel is removed from the ribbon and will float in drawing area when invoked. Default is upper left
corner of drawing area and can be moved.

■ Model In-Place
Project ribbon replaced with the family ribbon when an in-place model is started or edited. When
you finish editing in-place, the ribbon will revert to the project ribbon.

■ Improved icons based on user feedback

Large Team Workflow: Linked Models

■ Enhancements to the Visibility Control of Worksets in workshared files:
■ Visibility by Default for Worksets

■ Ability to open/close Worksets for linked models

■ Ability to control visibility of linked models according to host model

■ Ability to apply View Filters to linked models from host model

■ Ability to tag elements in linked files, with the exception of rooms, spaces, and areas

■ Ability to automatically generate a ceiling grid from walls in a linked model

■ Ability to apply View Filters to linked files

Graphics
■ Realistic materials available in editable views

■ Hardware acceleration (DX9) on by default

■ Levels of Details (adaptive to zoom)

■ Ambient occlusion

■ Display performance improvements (over 30%)

■ Significant performance improvement in display of mechanical and electrical drawings (up to 200%)

Materials
■ Protein 2.0 appearances, in single project library

2 | Chapter 1 What’s New?

■ Increased interoperability with 3ds Max through:
■ Export of FBX files to Max with Protein 2 appearances

■ Import of DWG files and ADSK files with Protein 2 appearances

NOTE 3ds Max/Design 2011 is required for materials to transfer.

■ Support for new realistic display style through Protein 2 materials

■ New material classes available in Protein 2, including procedural appearances

Inventor Interoperability
■ Support for oval duct, cable tray, and conduit connectors

■ Support of new electrical properties (such as Motor)

■ Improved performance when importing ADSK files

■ Improved AEC Exchange functionality

■ Support of Protein materials

Performance Improvements
■ Graphics

■ MultiCore Operations

■ Sync with Central

■ Model Open

■ User interface reaction time

■ Linked Models

DWG Export
■ Increased visual fidelity when exporting Revit files to DWG

■ Export option for True Color

■ Export option for Text treatment

Family Editor Enhancements

■ Interactive exploration of parameter values in Revit families

■ Ability to lock labeled dimensions

■ Reporting Parameters

Parameter Enhancements
■ Default parameter type (length vs. text)

■ Parameters groups automatically set

New in Revit Structure 2011 | 3

Temporary Dimension Enhancements
■ Remembering witness lines

■ Family Editor: right-click permanent dimensions to select labels

■ Ability to control temporary dimension font size and background (transparent or opaque)

3D Alignment Enhancements
■ Align tool now works on an element's node, vertex, edge, surface, form, or level

Expanded Region of High Geometric Accuracy

■ Previous versions of Revit were unable to maintain the expected level of geometric accuracy at locations
farther than 1 mile from the project origin. Revit will now maintain a high level of geometric accuracy
for elements placed within 20 miles of the project origin.

Selection Enhancements
■ Select All Instances in the current view or in the entire project

Text Notes Enhancements

■ Additional leader attachment points: Top Left (TL), Middle Left (ML), Bottom Left (BL), Top Right (TR),
Middle Right (MR), and Bottom Right (BR).

■ Ability to adjust leader end distance

■ Ability to show box around text

■ Ability to create bullets and numbering

Sheet Enhancements
■ Create new sheet list rows to create placeholder sheets

■ Convert placeholder sheets to project sheets

■ Grid guide for sheets, enabling consistent sheet creation

Floor Enhancements
■ Ability to set span direction for metal deck floors

Analysis
■ Sun Path
Interactive tool for visualizing the impact of natural light and shadows on buildings and sites

Structural Analysis Enhancements

■ Horizontal projection from columns and beams
You can now horizontally project from columns to the default plane or to a named reference plane. You
can also horizontally project from the center line of a beam, location lines, grids, and named reference
planes.

■ Horizontal projection from the center of a wall core

You can now specify the center of a wall core to accommodate varying widths in vertically compound
structural walls.

4 | Chapter 1 What’s New?

■ Vertical projection auto-detect behavior of columns
Top or bottom vertical projection of a column will now auto-detect beams when structural floors are not
present.

■ Vertical projection from beams

You can now project vertically from the location line or the bottom of a beam.

■ Manual analytical adjustment of columns

You can now use the top or bottom of a column analytical model as a source for manual analytical
adjustment.

■ Rigid Links enhancements between beams and columns

The enhanced rigid links will be formed between beams and multiple neighboring columns, and their
creation are governed by parameters on both beams and columns.

Reinforcement Enhancements
■ Reinforcement of spiral

■ Reinforcement project units

■ Reinforcement of slab edges

■ First and last rebar sets are now suppressible in a project

■ Additional hook bend radius for rebar

■ Concrete Host Cover Reference has configurable object style

■ Concrete Host Cover Reference Lines now remain in view when resizing and repositioning rebar

■ Major Space is now a label category parameter for area reinforcement tags

Concrete Join/Cleanup
■ Improved concrete end joins and cleanup for curved beam and variable beam profiles

Slanted Column
■ Steel and concrete end position geometry and trim

■ Beam to column joins

■ Plan view placement

■ Column end geometry position control when column is attached to a beam

■ Cut column tangent to an attached structured floor

■ Unattached column end cut appearance

Beam System Enhancements

■ Specify beam direction with walls and beams

■ Specify beam direction from an independent sketch line

■ Remove a beam system while retaining beam elements

New in Revit Structure 2011 | 5

Truss Enhancements
■ Bottom chord attachment to structural floors and foundation slabs

■ Sketch chords on attached trusses

■ Remove a truss family while retaining beam elements

Connection Symbol Enhancements

■ New aditional load connection symbol families

■ Ability to load and manage connection symbol families (from the Structural Settings dialog)

Subscription Advantage Pack

NOTE The following items were previously released exclusively to Subscription customers.

■ Conditional Formatting in Schedule

■ Element Section Area and Linear Weight in Schedules

■ Span Direction Tool

■ DWG Export enhancements (Index color and True Color support)

■ Beam Coping for steel beams framed into joined beams and columns

■ Text Formatting Shortcuts (Ctrl+B, Ctrl+I, and Ctrl+U)

■ Beam System Tags

■ Split Walls with Gap

■ Keyboard Shortcut UI

■ Find and Replace Text in Notes

■ Convert between Line Types: Model, Detail, Symbolic

■ Export to DWG with correct RGB colors

■ Linked File Performance Enhancements

■ New API for slope angle and elevation for x,y location in given slab with choice of top and bottom

■ Insulation Tool

■ Beam Placement using 3D CAD Geometry

■ Control beam length tolerance

■ "A" and "W" User defined parameters to be available in Schedule Field

■ Countrification Content for China, Russia, and Italy

■ Structure Extensions:
■ Interference of Reinforcing Bars

■ Bridge Design Modules

6 | Chapter 1 What’s New?

Revit Extensions
■ Shared Parameters Converter

■ Model Review

■ Autodesk Revit DB Link

■ Wall framing enhancements:

■ New method to choose the location of the studs (wall layers are exposed)

■ Multi-selection of walls and openings

■ Steel frame generator

■ Reinforcement enhancements:
■ Export and draw user-defined reinforcement or designed reinforcement in ASD

■ Export and draw the formwork of element recognized by REX in ASD

■ Exposed required reinforcement on beam and column extension

■ Leverage new mounting part content with beam, column, and wall extension

■ Provide content mapping tools to synchronize code dependent data shared between RST, RSA,
and ASD

■ Generate rebar using shape codes

User Assistance (Documentation)

■ Transition to Web Help, which includes improved search capabilities

■ Streamlined Help reference content

■ Short Tutorials in video format

■ Additional Enhanced Tooltips

■ New animated ToolClips

■ Improved First Experience

Other Enhancements
■ Custom elevation tag

■ List sheets not in a project on drawing list

■ Background images in renderings

■ Repeat last command

■ Sheet layout grid

■ Removal of 4 core rendering limit

■ Google Maps™ mapping service interface (Location dialog) lets you visualize project locations

New in Revit Structure 2011 | 7

8
Introduction to Revit

9
10
Building Information
Modeling 2
Read these topics to learn how building information modeling works and how it differs from traditional 2D design methods.

What Is Revit Structure?

The Revit platform for building information modeling is a design and documentation system that supports
the design, drawings, and schedules required for a building project. Building information modeling (BIM)
delivers information about project design, scope, quantities, and phases when you need it.
In the Revit model, every drawing sheet, 2D and 3D view, and schedule is a presentation of information
from the same underlying building model database. As you work in drawing and schedule views, Revit
Structure collects information about the building project and coordinates this information across all other
representations of the project. The Revit parametric change engine automatically coordinates changes made
anywhere—in model views, drawing sheets, schedules, sections, and plans.

What Is Meant by Parametric?

The term parametric refers to the relationships among all elements of the model that enable the coordination
and change management that Revit Structure provides. These relationships are created either automatically
by the software or by you as you work.
In mathematics and mechanical CAD, the numbers or characteristics that define these kinds of relationships
are called parameters; hence, the operation of the software is parametric. This capability delivers the
fundamental coordination and productivity benefits of Revit Structure: change anything at any time anywhere
in the project, and Revit Structure coordinates that change through the entire project.
The following are examples of these element relationships:

■ The outside of a door frame is a fixed dimension on the hinge side from a perpendicular partition. If you
move the partition, the door retains this relationship to the partition.

■ Rebar is spaced equally across a given elevation. If the length of the elevation is changed, the relationship
of equal spacing is maintained. In this case, the parameter is not a number but a proportional characteristic.

■ The edge of a floor or roof is related to the exterior wall such that when the exterior wall is moved, the
floor or roof remains connected. In this case, the parameter is one of association or connection.

11
How Does Revit Structure Keep Things Updated?
A fundamental characteristic of a building information modeling application is the ability to coordinate
changes and maintain consistency at all times. You do not have to intervene to update drawings or links.
When you change something, Revit Structure immediately determines what is affected by the change and
reflects that change to any affected elements.
Revit Structure uses 2 key concepts that make it especially powerful and easy to use. The first is the capturing
of relationships while the designer works. The second is its approach to propagating building changes. The
result of these concepts is software that works like you do, without requiring entry of data that is unimportant
to your design.

Understanding Revit Terms

Most of the terms used to identify objects in Revit Structure are common, industry-standard terms familiar
to most engineers. However, some terms are unique to Revit Structure. Understanding the following terms
is crucial to understanding the software.

Project
In Revit Structure, the project is the single database of information for your design—the building information
model. The project file contains all information for the building design, from geometry to construction data.
This information includes components used to design the model, views of the project, and drawings of the
design. By using a single project file, Revit Structure makes it easy for you to alter the design and have
changes reflected in all associated areas (plan views, elevation views, section views, schedules, and so forth).
Having only one file to track also makes it easier to manage the project.

Level
Levels are infinite horizontal planes that act as a reference for level-hosted elements, such as roofs, floors,
and ceilings. Most often, you use levels to define a vertical height or story within a building. You create a
level for each known story or other needed reference of the building; for example, first floor, top of wall, or
bottom of foundation. To place levels, you must be in a section or elevation view.
South Elevation View of a Structure

Element
When creating a project, you add Revit parametric building elements to the design. Revit Structure classifies
elements by categories, families, and types.

12 | Chapter 2 Building Information Modeling

Category
A category is a group of elements that you use to model or document a building design. For example,
categories of model elements include walls and beams. Categories of annotation elements include tags and
text notes.

Family
Families are classes of elements in a category. A family groups elements with a common set of parameters
(properties), identical use, and similar graphical representation. Different elements in a family may have
different values for some or all properties, but the set of properties—their names and meaning—is the same.
For example, a truss could be considered one family, although the web supports that compose the family
come in different sizes and materials.
There are 3 kinds of families:
■ Loadable families can be loaded into a project and created from family templates. You can determine
the set of properties and the graphical representation of the family.

■ System families include slabs, dimensions, roofs, and levels. They are not available for loading or creating
as separate files.
■ Revit Structure predefines the set of properties and the graphical representation of system families.

■ You can use the predefined types to generate new types that belong to this family within the project.
For example, the behavior of a wall is predefined in the system. However, you can create different
types of walls with different compositions.

■ System families can be transferred between projects.

■ In-place families define custom elements that you create in the context of a project. Create an in-place
element when your project needs unique geometry that you do not expect to reuse or geometry that
must maintain one of more relationships to other project geometry.
■ Because in-place elements are intended for limited use in a project, each in-place family contains
only a single type. You can create multiple in-place families in your projects, and you can place copies
of the same in-place element in your projects. Unlike system and standard component families, you
cannot duplicate in-place family types to create multiple types.

Type
Each family can have several types. A type can be a specific size of a family, such as a 30” X 42” or A0 title
block. A type can also be a style, such as default aligned or default angular style for dimensions.

Understanding Revit Terms | 13

Instance
Instances are the actual items (individual elements) that are placed in the project and have specific locations
in the building (model instances) or on a drawing sheet (annotation instances).

Element Behavior in a Parametric Modeler

In projects, Revit Structure uses 3 types of elements:

■ Model elements represent the actual 3D geometry of the building. They display in relevant views of the
model. For example, structural walls, slabs, ramps, and roofs are model elements.

■ Datum elements help to define project context. For example, grids, levels, and reference planes are datum
elements.

■ View-specific elements display only in the views in which they are placed. They help to describe or
document the model. For example, dimensions, tags, and 2D detail components are view-specific elements.

There are 2 types of model elements:

■ Hosts (or host elements) are generally built in place at the construction site. For example, structural
walls and roofs are hosts.

■ Model components are all the other types of elements in the building model. For example, beams,
structural columns, and 3D rebar are model components.

There are 2 types of view-specific elements:

■ Annotation elements are 2D components that document the model and maintain scale on paper. For
example, dimensions, tags, and keynotes are annotation elements.

■ Details are 2D items that provide details about the building model in a particular view. Examples include
detail lines, filled regions, and 2D detail components.

This implementation provides flexibility for designers. Revit Structure elements are designed to be created
and modified by you directly; programming is not required. If you can draw, you can define new parametric
elements in Revit Structure.
In Revit Structure, the elements determine their behavior largely from their context in the building. The
context is determined by how you draw the component and the constraint relationships that are established
with other components. Often, you do nothing to establish these relationships; they are implied by what

14 | Chapter 2 Building Information Modeling

you do and how you draw. In other cases, you can explicitly control them, by locking a dimension or aligning
2 walls, for example.

Element Properties
In Revit Structure, each element you place in a drawing is an instance of a family type. Elements have 2 sets
of properties that control their appearance and behavior: type properties and instance properties.

Type Properties
The same set of type properties is common to all elements in a family, and each property has the same value
for all instances of a particular family type.
For example, all elements that belong to the Desk family have a Width property, but its value varies according
to family type. Thus every instance of the 60” x 30” family type within the Desk family has a Width value
of 5’, while every instance of the “72 x 36” family type has a Width value of 6’.
Changing the value of a type property affects all current and future instances of that family type.

Instance Properties
A common set of instance properties also applies to all elements that belong to a particular family type, but
the values of these properties may vary according to the location of an element in a building or project.
For example, the dimensions of a window are type properties, while its elevation from the level is an instance
property. Similarly, cross-sectional dimensions of a beam are type properties, while beam length is an instance
property.
Changing the value of an instance property affects only the elements in your selection set, or the element
that you are about to place. For example, if you select a beam, and change one of its instance property values
on the Properties palette, only that beam is affected. If you select a tool for placing beams, and change one
of its instance property values, the new value applies to all beams you place with that tool.

Element Properties | 15
16
Licensing
3
Licensing Overview
There are 3 options for licensing with Revit Structure:

■ Standalone. A standalone license is associated with one machine. In addition, you can transfer a license
from one computer to another with a standalone license. For more information, see License Transferring.

■ Network. A network license is not associated with one computer. It can be installed on a network server
and multiple computers on that network to run Revit Structure. In addition, you can borrow a license
from the license server and use it outside the network environment for a specified time. For more
information, see License Borrowing.

■ Demo. A demo license allows you to use Revit Structure as a viewer.

Standalone Licensing
Follow this procedure to obtain a standalone license for Revit Structure. If you have not already run Revit
Structure in trial mode, the Product License Activation dialog displays when you first start Revit Structure.
Proceed to the Product License Activation dialog, and select Activate the Product.

If you have already run Revit Structure, click ➤ Licensing ➤ (Product and License Information).

To enter a standalone license

1 In the Product and License Information dialog, verify Standalone-Locked is selected. Proceed to
step 4.
2 If Standalone-Locked is not selected, select Standalone-Locked and click Apply to restart Revit
Structure.
3 Open the Product and License Information dialog.
4 Click Register.
5 In the Product License Activation dialog, select Activate the product.
6 In the Product Information Required dialog, enter your serial number and product key.
7 Click Next.

17
8 Select Connect now and activate, or, I have an activation code from Autodesk. If you select
Connect now, the activation process completes by connecting to Autodesk over the internet.
You are prompted to log into Register Once to complete the activation. The first time you do
this, you will need to create an account for the activation.
9 If you did not select Connect now, use copy (Ctrl+C) and paste (Ctrl+V) to paste the entire
activation code into the text field labeled 1.
10 Click Next.
11 Click Finish. Revit Structure displays a license confirmation dialog.

Licensing Extension
If you have network licensing, and a license outage occurs, you can extend your licensing long enough to
save your work.

Outage Examples
■ You were using Revit Structure, left your computer for over 2 hours but forgot to save, and all the floating
licenses, including yours, are now assigned to other users.

■ The machine that hosts the license server went down.

Saving Your Work in an Outage

If a network outage occurs, Revit continues to run for a 2-hour grace period. If the network license is not
recovered during this time, messages display to inform you of how much time remains. At the end of 2
hours, a dialog prompts you to save, or exit Revit without saving.

License Transferring
If you are running Revit Structure with a standalone license, you can transfer that license using the License
Transfer Utility. This transfers a product license from one computer to another and ensures that the product
works only on the computer that has the license. To access License Transfer Utility, do one of the following:

■ On Windows XP, click Start menu ➤ Programs ➤ Autodesk ➤ Autodesk Revit Structure 2011 ➤ License
Transfer Utility.

■ On Windows Vista or Windows 7, click Start menu ➤ All Programs ➤ Autodesk ➤ Autodesk Revit Structure
2011 ➤ License Transfer Utility.

For more information about the License Transfer Utility, see its online help.

License Borrowing
If you are running a network-licensed version of Revit Structure, you can borrow a license from a license
server so that you can use the software for a specified time when your computer is not connected to the
network. The license is returned to the license server automatically at the end of the day on the return date
that you specified when you borrowed the license. You can also return a license early.

NOTE If you have a standalone version of the software, you cannot borrow a license. To view your product license

type, click ➤ Licensing ➤ (Product and License Information).

18 | Chapter 3 Licensing
To borrow a license

1 Click ➤ Licensing ➤ (Borrow License).

2 Click a return date on the calendar in the dialog.

Be sure the date is within the valid range as shown in the dialog.

3 Click Borrow License.

NOTE There is a limit to the number of licenses available for borrowing. If you try to borrow a license and
are notified that no licenses are available, all network licenses might already be borrowed by other users. If
you are unable to borrow a license, contact your network administrator.

License Returning
When the license-borrowing period expires, the borrowed license is returned to the license server
automatically. When you reconnect your computer to the network, you may start Revit Structure normally.
Successful startup of the software indicates that you have acquired the usual (online) network license. At
that point, you can borrow a license again.

NOTE To view the expiration date for the borrowed license, click Help menu ➤ About. In the About dialog, click
Product Information. In the Product Information dialog, under License expiration date, view the license return
date.

To return a license early

■ Click ➤ Licensing ➤ (Return License Early).

License Borrowing | 19
20
User Interface
4
The Revit interface is designed to simplify your workflow. With a few clicks, you can change the interface to better support
the way that you work. For example, you can set the ribbon to one of 4 display settings. You can also display several
project views at one time, or layer the views to see only the one on top.

Ribbon
The ribbon displays when you create or open a file. It provides all the tools necessary to create a project or
family.

As you resize the Revit window, you may notice that tools in the ribbon automatically adjust their size to
fit the available space. This feature allows all buttons to be visible for most screen sizes.

21
Expanded panels
An arrow next to a panel title indicates that you can expand the panel to display related tools and controls.

By default, an expanded panel closes automatically when you click outside the panel. To keep a panel
expanded while its ribbon tab is displayed, click the push pin icon in the bottom-left corner of the expanded
panel.

Dialog launcher

Some panels allow you to open a dialog to define related settings. A dialog-launcher arrow on the bottom
of a panel opens a dialog.

Contextual ribbon tabs

When you use certain tools or select elements, a contextual ribbon tab displays tools that relate to the context
of that tool or element. In many cases, the contextual tab merges with the Modify tab. A contextual ribbon
tab closes when you exit the tool or clear the selection.

You can specify whether a contextual tab automatically comes into focus or the current tab stays in focus.
You can also specify which ribbon tab displays when you exit a tool or clear a selection. See User Interface
Options on page 1624.

Customizing the Ribbon

You can customize the ribbon by changing its display and rearranging its tabs and panels.

22 | Chapter 4 User Interface

To move ribbon panels
If you want to... Then...

move a panel on the ribbon drag the panel label to the desired location on the rib-
bon.

move a panel off the ribbon drag the panel label to the drawing area or the desktop.

dock floating panels together drag one panel over the other.

move docked panels as a move the cursor over the panel to display a grip on the
group left side. Drag the grip to the desired location.

return a floating panel to the move the cursor over the panel to display a control in
ribbon the upper-right corner, and click Return Panels to Rib-
bon.

To change the ribbon display

If you want to... Then...

specify the preferred method for minimiz- to the right of the ribbon tabs, click the
ing the ribbon right arrow and select the desired behavior:
Minimize to Tabs, Minimize to Panel Titles,
Minimize to Panel Buttons, or Cycle
through All.

show the full ribbon, or minimize the rib- to the right of the ribbon tabs, click the
bon to show only tabs, panel titles, or left arrow to change the ribbon display. It
panel buttons switches between displaying the full ribbon
and the preferred method for minimizing
the ribbon, or cycles through all display
options.

hide panel titles Right-click in an empty (gray) area of the

ribbon, and select Show Panel Titles.

To change tab behavior

You can control which tab displays after you exit a tool or clear a selection: the Modify tab, or the tab that
displayed previously. You can also specify that a contextual tab does not display when you select elements.

Customizing the Ribbon | 23

1 Click ➤ Options.

2 On the User Interface tab of the Options dialog, under Tab Display Behavior, define the settings as
desired.

To reset the ribbon and Quick Access toolbar

If you need to reset the ribbon to restore default settings, you can delete the UIState.dat file.
UIState.dat is located in the following folder:

■ Windows XP:
%USERPROFILE%\Local Settings\Application Data\Autodesk\Revit\<product name and release>

■ Windows Vista or Windows 7:

%LOCALAPPDATA%\Autodesk\Revit\<product name and release>

WARNING Deleting UIState.dat also removes customizations to the Quick Access toolbar.

Application Menu
The application menu provides access to common file actions, such as New, Open, and Save. It also allows
you to manage files using more advanced tools, such as Export and Publish.

Click to open the application menu.

To see choices for each menu item, click the arrow to its right. Then click the desired item in the list.
As a shortcut, you can click the main buttons in the application menu (on the left) to perform the default
operation.

Click the left side of... to open the...

New Project dialog

(New)

Open dialog
(Open)

Print dialog
(Print)

24 | Chapter 4 User Interface

Click the left side of... to open the...

DWF Publish Settings dialog

(Publish)

Product and License Information dialog

(Licensing)

Recent Documents
On the application menu, click the Recent Documents button to see a list of recently opened files. Use the
drop-down list to change the sort order of recent documents. Use the push pins to keep documents on the
list, regardless of how recently you opened them.

Open Documents
On the application menu, click the Open Documents button to see a list of all open views in open files.
Select a view from the list to display it in the drawing area.

Quick Access Toolbar

The Quick Access toolbar contains a set of default tools. You can customize this toolbar to display the tools
that you use most often.

To move the Quick Access toolbar

The Quick Access toolbar can display above or below the ribbon. To change the setting, on the Quick Access
toolbar, click Customize Quick Access Toolbar drop-down ➤ Show Below the Ribbon.

To add tools to the Quick Access toolbar

Navigate the ribbon to display the tool that you want to add. Right-click the tool, and click Add to Quick
Access Toolbar.

NOTE Some tools on contextual tabs cannot be added to the Quick Access toolbar.

Quick Access Toolbar | 25

If you removed default tools from the Quick Access toolbar, you can add them again by clicking the Customize
Quick Access Toolbar drop-down, and selecting the tool to add.

To customize the Quick Access toolbar

To make a quick change to the Quick Access toolbar, right-click a tool on the Quick Access toolbar and select
one of the following options:

■ Remove from Quick Access Toolbar removes the tool.

■ Add Separator adds a separator line to the right of the tool.

To make more extensive changes, on the Quick Access toolbar drop-down, click Customize Quick Access
Toolbar. In the dialog, do the following:

If you want to... Then...

move tools up (left) or down (right) on the

toolbar in the list, select the tool. Then click

(Move Up) or (Move Down) to move

the tool to the desired location.

add a separator line select the tool that will display above (to
the left of) the separator line. Then click

(Add Separator).

remove a tool or separator line from the

toolbar select the tool or line and click (Re-
move).

Tooltips
Tooltips provide information about a tool in the user interface or an item in the drawing area, or instructions
on what to do next when using a tool.

Ribbon tooltips
When you hold the cursor over a tool on the ribbon, by default Revit Structure displays a tooltip. The tooltip
provides a brief description of the tool. If you leave the cursor over the ribbon tool for another moment,
additional information displays, if available. While the tooltip is visible, you can press F1 for context-sensitive
help that provides more information about that tool.

NOTE If you press F1 before the tooltip displays, the default help topic opens instead of the appropriate
context-sensitive help topic. Wait for the tooltip to display before pressing F1.

26 | Chapter 4 User Interface

These tooltips are useful when you are first learning how to use the software. You can adjust the amount of
information displayed in tooltips or how quickly the information displays. You can also turn off the tooltips
when you no longer need them.
Some tooltips include embedded videos, called ToolClips™. These videos use motion to show how to use
the tool. They play automatically when you display the tooltip. To see an example, display the tooltip for

Modify tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ (Trim/Extend to Corner).

NOTE ToolClips™ are not supported on 64-bit computers.

In-canvas tooltips
When you are working in the drawing area, Revit Structure displays a tooltip near the cursor. This same
information is repeated in the status bar.

■ When you move the cursor over an element, the tooltip identifies the element, showing its category,
family, and type.

■ When you are using a tool, the tooltip provides hints on what to do next.

To turn off these tooltips, define the Tooltip assistance option as None, as described below.

To adjust or turn off tooltips

1 Click ➤ Options.
2 On the User Interface tab, for Tooltip assistance, select one of the following values:
■ Minimal: For ribbon tooltips, displays only the brief descriptions, suppressing the display of
additional information. In-canvas tooltips display as usual.

■ Normal: (Default) For ribbon tooltips, displays a brief description when you move the cursor
over a tool, followed by more information if you leave the cursor in place for another moment.
In-canvas tooltips display as usual.

■ High: For ribbon tooltips, displays the brief description and more information about the tool
(if available) at the same time, without a delay. In-canvas tooltips display as usual.

■ None: Turns off ribbon tooltips and in-canvas tooltips so they no longer display.

NOTE When you turn off tooltips, context-sensitive help (F1) is also turned off. If you want
context-sensitive help to be available, set Tooltip assistance to Minimal.

Keytips
Keytips provide a way to access the application menu, the Quick Access toolbar, and the ribbon using the
keyboard. To display keytips, press Alt.
You can use keytips to navigate through the ribbon. Type the keytip for a ribbon tab to bring that tab into
focus and to display the keytips for its buttons and controls. If a ribbon tab has an expanded panel containing
additional tools, type its keytip to display the panel and see keytips for those tools.

Related topic

■ Keyboard Shortcuts on page 1559

Keytips | 27
Project Browser
The Project Browser shows a logical hierarchy for all views, schedules, sheets, families, groups, linked Revit
models, and other parts of the current project. As you expand and collapse each branch, lower-level items
display.

To change the size and location of the Project Browser

■ To show the Project Browser, click View tab ➤ User Interface panel, and select the Project Browser check
box.

■ To hide the Project Browser, click View tab ➤ User Interface panel, and clear Project Browser, or click
the Close button (the red X) at the top of the browser.

■ To resize the Project Browser, drag one of its borders.

■ To move the Project Browser, drag the browser’s title bar within the Revit window. As you move the
cursor, an outline indicates where the browser will move to, and what its shape will be. Release the mouse
button to place the browser in the desired location. You can also drag the Project Browser outside the
Revit window to the desktop.

■ To float the Project Browser in the drawing area, double-click its title bar. You can then move the browser
to the desired location, and drag its borders to resize it.

You can customize the organization of project views in the Project Browser. See Customizing Project View
Organization in the Project Browser on page 855.
Changes to the size and location of the Project Browser are saved and restored when the application is
restarted.

Using the Project Browser

The Project Browser is a powerful way to navigate and manage complex projects.

Views, Schedules, Sheets

If you want to... then...

open a view double-click the name of the view, or right-click the name and click Open from
the shortcut menu. The active view name displays in bold.

28 | Chapter 4 User Interface

If you want to... then...

add a view to a sheet drag the view name onto the sheet name or onto the sheet in the drawing area.
You can also right-click the sheet name, and click Add View on the shortcut
menu. In the Views dialog, select the view to add, and click Add View to Sheet.
After you perform one of these actions, the sheet is active in the drawing area,
and the added view displays as a viewport. As you move the cursor, the viewport
moves with it. When the viewport is in the desired location on the sheet, click
to place it. See Adding Views to a Sheet on page 980.

remove a view from a sheet under the sheet name, right-click the view name, and click Remove From Sheet.

create a new sheet right-click the Sheets branch, and click New Sheet. See Adding a Sheet on page
979.

copy a view right-click the view name, and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate.

copy a view with view-specific elements right-click the view name, and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate with Detailing.
View-specific elements (such as detail components and dimensions) are copied
into the view. This tool is available for plan views, callout views, drafting views,
and section views. You cannot copy callouts from plan views.

rename views, schedules right-click the view name, and click Rename. In the Rename View dialog, enter
a new name, and click OK.

rename a sheet right-click the sheet name, and click Rename. In the Sheet Title dialog, enter a
name and number for the sheet, and click OK.

close a view right-click the view name, and click Close.

delete a view right-click the view name and click Delete.

change properties click the view name, and change properties in the Properties palette.

expand or collapse branches in the Project click + to expand, or click – to collapse. Use the arrow keys to navigate between
Browser branches.

find referring views right-click the view name, and click Find Referring Views. See Finding Referring
Views on page 855.

Families
If you want to... then...

create a new family type right-click the family type name, and click
Duplicate.
A new type name displays in the type list.
Double-click the new type to open the
Type Properties dialog. See Revit Families
on page 677.

rename a family right-click the family name, and click Re-

name. Enter a new name. (You cannot re-
name a system family.)

Using the Project Browser | 29

If you want to... then...

create a new family instance in a view right-click the family type name, and click
Create Instance. This tool activates the ap-
propriate tool and selects the appropriate
type to create the selected family in the
drawing area.

reload a family right-click a loaded family, and click Re-

load. In the Open dialog, navigate to the
family location, select it, and click Open.
See Loading and Saving Families on page
688.

edit a family right-click a loaded family, and click Edit.

You can edit and reload the family directly
into the project. See Modifying Families in
a Project (or Nested Family) on page 692.

delete a family right-click the family name and click De-

lete. If the project includes instances of that
family, a dialog displays asking if you want
to unload the family and delete all in-
stances of it in the project. Click Yes to
delete the family, or click No to cancel.

NOTE This tool is not enabled for wall

types.

modify type properties double-click the type name under a family.

For example, under the Walls family,
double-click Exterior - Brick on CMU. The
Type Properties dialog opens, and you can
edit values.

delete a family type Right-click the family type name, and click
Delete.
This function deletes family types that you
may have created and families loaded into
the project.

drag and drop family types into a project select the family type, and drag it into the
appropriate view. You can drag families
created from loadable families and system
families.

Groups
If you want to... then...

place a group instance in a view under Groups, navigate to the desired

group, then drag the group into the
drawing area. See Placing Groups on
page 1459.

30 | Chapter 4 User Interface

If you want to... then...

modify group types right-click the group type, and select one
of the following tools:
■ Delete: Deletes the group type.
■ Rename: Renames the group type.
■ Select All Instances: Selects all in-
stances of a group type in the pro-
ject.
■ Properties: Changes type properties.

duplicate a group type under Groups, navigate to the desired

group, right-click the group name, and
click Duplicate. The new group type
displays in the Project Browser. See Du-
plicating Group Types on page 1458.

reload a group under Groups, navigate to the desired

group, right-click the group name, and
click Reload. See Loading Groups on
page 1458.

Revit Links
If you want to... then...

create a new link to a Revit model right-click the Revit Links branch, and
click New Link. See Linking Revit Models
on page 1183.

manage links to Revit models right-click the Revit Links branch, click
Manage Links, and click the Revit tab.
See Managing Links on page 1203.

copy a linked Revit model to another pro- under Revit Links, navigate to the linked
ject file model to copy, right-click the link name,
and click Create Instance. Click in the
drawing area to place the new instance
of the linked model. See Copying a
Linked Model in the Host Model on page
1185.

unload or reload a linked Revit model under Revit Links, navigate to the linked
model, right-click the link name, and
click the desired tool to unload or reload
the model. See Managing Links on page
1203.

Renderings
If you want to... then...

render an image display a 3D view and click View

tab ➤ Graphics panel ➤ (Render).

Using the Project Browser | 31

If you want to... then...
Then select Render in the Rendering
dialog.

place rendered images onto sheets drag the rendered image name onto the
sheet in the drawing area.

Drawing Area
The drawing area of the Revit window displays views (and sheets and schedules) of the current project. Each
time you open a view in a project, by default the view displays in the drawing area on top of other open
views. The other views are still open, but they are underneath the current view. Use tools of the View
tab ➤ Windows panel to arrange project views to suit your work style.
The default color of the drawing area background is white; you can invert the color to black. (See instructions
below.)

To manage views in the drawing area

■ To display a project view that has not yet been opened, navigate to the view in the Project Browser, and
double-click the view name.

■ To see a list of open views, click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Switch Windows drop-down. The bottom
of the menu lists the open views. A check mark indicates the view that currently has focus in the drawing
area.

■ To display another open (but hidden) view in the drawing area, click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤
Switch Windows drop-down, and click the view to display.

■ To open a second window for the current view, click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ (Replicate). This
tool is useful if you want to pan and zoom on certain areas of the design, while also viewing the entire
design in another window. (Use the Tile tool to see both views at the same time.) Any changes that you
make to the project in the new window also display in other windows of the project.

■ To arrange all open windows in a series in the drawing area, click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤
(Cascade).

32 | Chapter 4 User Interface

■ To see all open views at the same time, click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ (Tile).

■ To close all hidden views, click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ (Close Hidden Windows). If more
than one project is open, one window per project remains open.

■ To increase the size of the drawing area, click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ User Interface drop-down,
and clear check boxes to hide interface components, such as the Project Browser and the status bar.

To invert the background color of the drawing area

1 Click ➤ Options.

2 In the Options dialog, click the Graphics tab.

3 Select or clear the Invert background color option.

To refresh the screen

■ Press F5.

Status Bar
The status bar is located along the bottom of the Revit window. When you are using a tool, the left side of
the status bar provides tips or hints on what to do. When you are highlighting an element or component,
the status bar displays the name of the family and type.

To hide the status bar

Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ User Interface drop-down, and clear the Status Bar check box.
To hide only the Worksets or Design Options controls on the status bar, clear their corresponding check
boxes.
The progress bar appears on the left side of the status bar when a large file is opening and indicates how
much of the file has downloaded.

Several other controls appear on the right side of the status bar:

■ Worksets: Provides quick access to the Worksets dialog for a workshared project. The display field shows
the active workset. Use the drop-down list to display another open workset. See Using Worksets on page
1222.

■ Design Options: Provides quick access to the Design Options dialog. The display field shows the active
design option. Use the drop-down list to display another design option. See Working with Design Options
on page 659. Use the Add to Set tool to add selected elements to the active design option.

■ Active Only: Filters selections to select only active design option components. See Selecting Elements in
Design Options and the Main Model on page 663.

■ Exclude Options: Filters selections to exclude components that are part of a design option. See Selecting
Elements in Design Options and the Main Model on page 663.

■ Press & Drag: Allows you to drag an element without selecting it first.

Status Bar | 33
■ Editable Only: Filters selections to select only editable, workshared components. See Filtering Non-Editable
Workset Elements from Selection on page 1225.

■ Filter: Refines the element categories selected in a view. See Selecting Elements Using a Filter on page 1442.

Options Bar
The Options Bar is located below the ribbon. Its contents change depending on the current tool or selected
element.

To move the Options Bar to the bottom of the Revit window (above the status bar), right-click the Options
Bar, and click Dock at bottom.

Properties Palette
The Properties palette is a modeless dialog where you can view and modify the parameters that define the
properties of elements in Revit.

Opening the Properties Palette

When you start Revit for the first time, the Properties palette is open and docked above the Project Browser
on page 28 on the left side of the drawing area. If you subsequently close the Properties palette, you can
reopen it using any of the following methods:

■ Click Modify tab ➤ Properties panel ➤ (Properties).

■ Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ User Interface drop-down ➤ Properties.

■ Right-click in the drawing area, and click Properties.

You can dock the palette to either side of the Revit window and resize it horizontally. You can resize it both
horizontally and vertically when it is undocked. The display and location of the palette will persist from
one Revit session to the next for the same user.
Typically you keep the Properties palette open during a Revit session so that you can
■ Select the type of element you will place in the drawing area, or change the type of elements already
placed (See Type Selector on page 35)

■ View and modify the properties of the element you are placing or of elements selected in the drawing
area (See Modifying Instance Properties on page 36)

■ View and modify the properties of the active view (See View Properties on page 873)

■ Access the type properties that apply to all instances of an element type (See Modifying Type Properties
on page 38)

34 | Chapter 4 User Interface

If no tool for placing elements is active, and no elements are selected, the palette displays the instance
properties for the active view. (You can also access the instance properties of a view by selecting it in the
Project Browser on page 28.)
Unless elements of different types are selected, the Edit Type button accesses a dialog where you can view
and modify the type properties of the selected element (or those of the view, depending on how the properties
filter is set; see Filtering the Display of Instance Properties on page 36). For more information on the
distinction between instance properties and type properties, see Element Properties on page 15.

NOTE You can also access the type properties for the active tool or currently selected elements by clicking Modify

| <Element> tab ➤ Properties panel ➤ (Type Properties). When available, this button always accesses type
properties for the selected element(s), or for a family type selected in the Project Browser on page 28. The Edit
Type button on the palette, however, accesses type properties for the entity whose instance properties are currently
displayed, which could be either the active view, the active tool, or a currently selected element type.

In most cases (see exceptions in note below), the Properties palette displays both user-editable and read-only
(shaded) instance properties. A property may be read-only because its value is calculated or assigned
automatically by the software, or because it depends on the setting of another property. For example, a wall’s
Unconnected Height property is only editable if the value of its Top Constraint property is Unconnected.
For specific dependencies, see the instance property descriptions for individual element types, such as Wall
Instance Properties on page 488.

NOTE When you select the top node in the Project Browser (Views), or an individual family type, the Properties
palette displays the associated read-only type properties. To modify the type properties, click Modify tab ➤ Properties

panel ➤ (Type Properties). When you open the Family Editor, the palette displays family parameters by default.

Type Selector
When a tool for placing elements is active, or elements of the same type are selected in the drawing area,
the Type Selector displays at the top of the Properties palette. It identifies the currently selected family type
and provides a drop-down from which you can select a different type.

Properties Palette | 35
To make the Type Selector available when the Properties palette is closed, right-click within the Type Selector,
and click Add to Quick Access Toolbar.

Filtering the Display of Instance Properties

Modifying Instance Properties

Use the Properties palette to modify the instance properties of

■ the element you are about to place using a tool

■ elements selected in the drawing area

■ the active view

36 | Chapter 4 User Interface

The content of the Properties palette varies according to the situation. If a tool is active, or one or more
elements of the same type are selected, the Type Selector on page 35 at the top of the palette identifies the
currently selected family type. In the following example, a single beam is selected.

Immediately below the Type Selector is a filter that identifies the category of the elements a tool will place,
or the category and number of elements selected in the drawing area. If multiple categories or types are
selected, only the instance properties common to all display on the palette. When multiple categories are
selected, use the filter’s drop-down to view the properties for a specific category.
If no tool for placing elements is active, and no elements are selected in the drawing area, the palette displays
the instance properties of the active view.
The Properties palette displays both user-editable and read-only properties. To modify a user-editable property
value, click it and either enter a new value, select one from a drop-down list, or select/clear a check box. For
some properties, the value box contains a button that opens a dialog or browser window in which you define
the desired value.

To commit a change you make to a property value, do any of the following:

■ Move the cursor off the palette.

■ Press Enter (twice if a new value is selected from a drop-down).

■ Click Apply.

If making multiple changes, you can press Tab to move from one property to the next, or just click the next
one you want to change. You can then use any of the methods listed above to commit all your changes at
once.
To cancel changes before committing them, press Esc twice. Closing the palette also cancels your changes.
For specific information about the instance properties of a particular element, see the Help topic for that
element type, for example, Wall Instance Properties on page 488.

Modifying Instance Properties | 37

Modifying Type Properties
Use the Type Properties dialog to modify the type properties of

■ the element you are about to place using a tool

■ one or more elements of the same type selected in the drawing area

■ the active view (when no tool is active and no elements are selected)

Note that any changes you make to type properties will apply to all instances of that type within the project.
To open the Type Properties dialog, do either of the following:

■ Click Modify tab ➤ Properties panel ➤ (Type Properties).

■ On the Properties palette, click (Edit Type).

Related topics

■ Creating a New Family Type in a Project on page 38

■ Previewing Family Types on page 39

Creating a New Family Type in a Project

You can add a new type to the family and change the parameters for that type. This feature allows you to
define an entire family of different-sized components within the project.

NOTE A new family type created in the project exists only in that project.

To create a new family type in a project

1 In the drawing area, select an element belonging to the desired type.

2 On the Properties palette, click (Edit Type).

3 In the Type Properties dialog, click Duplicate.
4 In the Name dialog, enter a name for the new type and click OK.
5 Specify properties for the type, as desired.
6 To preview the new element type, click Preview. See Previewing Family Types on page 39.
7 In the Type Properties dialog, click OK.
The new type displays in the Type Selector on page 35, indicating that the new type is assigned to the selected
element.

Related topics

■ Revit Families on page 677

■ Working with Families on page 680

■ Loading and Saving Families on page 688

38 | Chapter 4 User Interface

Previewing Family Types
The Type Properties dialog features a preview window that shows an image of the family type. As you set
parameters and change values for the type, the image in the window updates accordingly.

To preview a family type

1 In the drawing area, select an element belonging to the desired type.

2 On the Properties palette, click (Edit Type).

The Type Properties dialog displays.

3 To see (or hide) a preview of the family type, click the Preview button at the bottom of the
dialog.
As you change type parameters, the preview image updates to reflect the changes.

Manipulating the preview image of a family type

4 To control the appearance of the preview image, do any of the following:

■ For View, select a view name to see how this type of element will appear in a different view.

■ Use the scroll bars to move the image up, down, left, or right in the preview window.

■ Use the SteeringWheels navigation tool. If you are previewing a 3D view of the element, you
can also use the ViewCube. See Navigating Views on page 818.

The following is an example of a Type Properties dialog for a wall type, with the Preview pane displayed.

View Control Bar

The View Control Bar is located at the bottom of the view window above the status bar.

Previewing Family Types | 39

It provides quick access to functions that affect the current view, including the following:

■ Scale (See View Scale on page 860.)

■ Detail Level (See Detail Level on page 1618.)

■ Visual Style (See Visual Styles on page 867.)

■ Sun Path On/Off (See Displaying Sun and Shadows on page 1375.)

■ Shadows On/Off (See Displaying Sun and Shadows on page 1375.)

■ Show/Hide Rendering Dialog (Available only when the drawing area displays a 3D view. See Defining
Render Settings on page 1077.)

■ Crop View (See Crop Regions on page 849.)

■ Show/Hide Crop Region (See Showing or Hiding Crop Regions on page 850.)

■ Temporary Hide/Isolate (See Temporarily Hiding or Isolating Elements or Element Categories on page
812.)

■ Reveal Hidden Elements (See Revealing and Unhiding Hidden Elements on page 812.)

Recent Files
When you start Revit Structure, by default the Recent Files window displays, listing the projects and families
that you opened most recently. Click a recent project or family to open it, or use one of the buttons to
perform another action.
If you are already working in a Revit session, return to the Recent Files window by clicking View
tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ User Interface drop-down ➤ Recent Files.

InfoCenter
You can use InfoCenter to search a variety of information sources with one query. You can also easily access
product updates and announcements.

Overview of InfoCenter
You can use InfoCenter to search for information, display the Subscription Center panel for subscription
services, display the Communication Center panel for product updates, and display favorites panel to access
saved topics.
You can use InfoCenter to:

■ Search for information through keywords (or by entering a phrase)

■ Access subscription services through Subscription Center panel

■ Access to product-related updates and announcements through Communication Center panel

■ Access saved topics through Favorites panel

■ Access topics in Help

40 | Chapter 4 User Interface

To display the InfoCenter box in a collapsed state, click the arrow to its left.

To browse search results

➤ On the panel for Search Results, Subscription Center, Communication Center, or Favorites, on the right
side of the category header, do one of the following:
■ Click the Next button.

■ Click the Previous button.

To rearrange the topics displayed on a panel

1 Display a panel by doing one of the following:

■ In the InfoCenter box, enter a keyword or phrase. Then press ENTER or click the Search button.

■ In the InfoCenter box, click the Communication Center button.

■ In the InfoCenter box, click the Favorites button.

2 Click and drag a category or group header to the desired position.

NOTE You can rearrange categories within a group, but you cannot move them into other groups.

Search For Information

You can enter keywords or a phrase in the InfoCenter box to search for information.

When you enter keywords or a phrase in the InfoCenter box, you search the contents of multiple Help
resources as well as any additional documents that have been specified in the InfoCenter Settings dialog
box or through the CAD Manager Control Utility.

NOTE You must have Internet access to display search results from the Autodesk Online category.

Keyword searches produce better results. In case of a misspelled word, spelling suggestions are displayed on
the panel.
The results are displayed as links on the InfoCenter Search Results panel. Click a link to display the topic,
article, or document.
To keep Search Results, Subscription Center, Communication Center, and the Favorites panel expanded,
click the push pin icon in the bottom-right corner of the panel.

Search For Information | 41

When you use InfoCenter to search for information, you can use the following special symbols in your query
to refine or expand it. These symbols can be used alone or can be combined.

Symbol Description

* Replaces one or more characters when used at the begin-

ning, middle, or end of a word. For example, “*lish”,
“p*lish”, and “pub*” will find “publish”. Also, “anno*” will
find “annotative”, “annotation”, “annoupdate”, “annoreset”,
and so on.

? Replaces a single character. For example, “cop?” will find

“copy”, but not “copybase”.

~ Adds grammatical form variations to a keyword when added

at the beginning or end of a word. For example, “plotting~”
will find “plots”, “plotted”, and so on. Also, “~plot” will find
“preplot”, “replot”, and so on.

When performing the exact phrase search, use double quotation marks (" ") to enclose words that must
appear next to each other in the specified text string. For example, enter "specify units of measurement" to
find only topics with all those words in that order. You can also use the previously mentioned symbols in
a text string that is enclosed in double quotation marks.

To search multiple sources for information

1 In the InfoCenter box, enter a keyword or phrase.

2 Click the Search button.

The search results display in the Search Results panel.

To search a single location for information

1 In the InfoCenter box, enter a keyword or phrase.

2 Click the down arrow next to the Search button.

3 Select a location from the list to search.

The search results from that location display in the Search Results panel.

To add a location to search

1 In the InfoCenter box, click the down arrow next to the Search button.

2 Click Add Search Location.

3 In the Add Search Location dialog box, specify a document or a file location to search.

4 Click Add.

Receive Product Updates and Announcements

You can click the Communication Center button to display links to information about product updates and
announcements, and may include links to RSS feeds.

42 | Chapter 4 User Interface

Overview of Communication Center
To open Communication Center, click the Communication Center button in the InfoCenter box.

Communication Center provides the following types of announcements:

■ Autodesk Channels: Receive support information, product updates, and other announcements (including
articles and tips).

■ CAD Manager Channel. Receive information (RSS feeds) published by your CAD manager.

■ RSS Feeds. Receive information from RSS feeds to which you subscribe. RSS feeds generally notify you
when new content is posted. You are automatically subscribed to several default RSS feeds when you
install the program.

You can customize the items that display in the Communication Center panel.

Communication Center Online Policy

Communication Center is an interactive feature that must be connected to the Internet in order to deliver
content and information. Each time Communication Center is connected, it sends your information to
Autodesk so that you receive the correct information. All information is sent anonymously to Autodesk to
maintain your privacy.
Communication Center sends the following information to Autodesk:

■ Product name (in which you are using Communication Center)

■ Product release number

■ Product language

■ Country/region (specified in the Communication Center settings)

■ Your unique Customer Involvement Program (CIP) ID if you are participating in the CIP program

Autodesk compiles statistics using the information sent from Communication Center to monitor how it is
being used and how it can be improved. Autodesk maintains information provided by or collected from you
in accordance with the company's published privacy policy, which is available at
http://www.autodesk.com/privacy.

Receive New Information Notifications

Whenever new information is available, Communication Center notifies you by displaying a balloon message
below the Communication Center button on the InfoCenter box.
Click the link in the balloon message to open the article or announcement.
If you don’t want to receive Communication Center notifications, in the InfoCenter Settings dialog box,
turn off Balloon Notification.

Save and Access Favorite Topics

You can click the Favorites button to display saved links to topics or web locations.

Save and Access Favorite Topics | 43

Any link that displays on the Search Results panel, Subscription Center or Communication Center panel
can be marked as a favorite.
A link marked as a favorite displays a star icon on the Search Results panel, Subscription Center panel or the
Communication Center panel.

To display the InfoCenter Favorites panel

■ In the InfoCenter box, click the Favorites button.

NOTE The links displayed on the Favorites panel are organized into the same groups or categories from which
they were added.

To save a link in InfoCenter as a favorite

1 Display a panel by doing one of the following:

■ In the InfoCenter box, enter a keyword or phrase. Then press ENTER or click the Search button.

■ In the InfoCenter box, click the Subscription Center button.

■ In the InfoCenter box, click the Communication Center button.

2 Click the star icon that is displayed next to the link that you want to save as a favorite.

To remove a favorite link from the InfoCenter Favorites panel

1 In the InfoCenter box, click the Favorites button to display the Favorites panel.

2 Click the star icon that is displayed next to the link that you want to remove from the Favorites panel.

Specify InfoCenter Settings

You can specify InfoCenter Search and Communication Center settings in the InfoCenter Settings dialog
box.
In the InfoCenter Settings dialog box, you can specify the following settings:

■ General. Your current location, frequency for checking new online content and option to turn on or off
animated transition effects for the InfoCenter panels.

■ Search Locations. Locations (documents, web locations, and files) to search for information, as well as
the name that displays for each location and the number of results to display for each. Also, you can add
or remove search locations.
The Web Locations check box provides access to important information on the Autodesk website,
including the Knowledge Base and discussion groups. When you add document locations, you can specify
files on your local drive.

NOTE User-specified CHM (compiled help) files must be located on your local drive. InfoCenter cannot search
CHM files located on network drives.

■ Communication Center. Maximum age of the articles displayed on the Communication Center panel
and the location and name of the CAD Manager Channel.

44 | Chapter 4 User Interface

■ Autodesk Channels. Channels to display in the Communication Center panel as well as the number of
articles to display for each channel.

■ Balloon Notification. Notifications for new product information, software updates, and product support
announcements. Also, you can customize the transparency and the display time of the balloon.

■ RSS Feeds. RSS feed subscriptions. You can add or remove RSS feeds. RSS feeds generally notify you when
new content is posted.

You can use the CAD Manager Control Utility to specify InfoCenter Search and Communication Center
settings. Click Help in the CAD Manager Control Utility window for details about the CAD Manager Channel
settings you can control.

To specify locations to search for information

1 In the InfoCenter box, click the down arrow next to the Search button.

2 Click Search Settings.

3 In the InfoCenter Settings dialog box, Search Locations panel, in the right pane, select or clear the
search locations you want to include or exclude when you search for information.

4 Click OK.

NOTE With the Search All Available Languages option, you can specify whether to search the default language
or all available languages, including English, Japanese, and French. Select the check box if you want to search all
available languages.

To add a new location to search for information

1 In the InfoCenter box, click the down arrow next to the Search button.

2 Click Search Settings.

3 In the InfoCenter Settings dialog box, do one of the following:

■ On the Search Locations panel, in the right pane, click Add.

■ On the Search Locations panel, in the right pane, right-click anywhere in the pane. Click Add.

4 In the Add Search Location dialog box, specify a file location to search.

5 Click Add.

NOTE A warning message is displayed when you add a search location with a file size larger than 5 MB. You
cannot continue to work in the application until indexing is complete.

6 Click OK.

To remove a search location

1 In the InfoCenter box, click the down arrow next to the Search button.

2 Click Search Settings.

3 In the InfoCenter Settings dialog box, do one of the following:

■ Select a location to remove, and then click Remove.

■ Right-click a search location. Click Remove.

4 In the InfoCenter - Remove Search Location dialog box, click Yes.

Specify InfoCenter Settings | 45

5 Click OK.

To specify the CAD Manager Channel location and name

1 Click Start menu (Windows) ➤ All Programs (or Programs) ➤ Autodesk ➤ CAD Manager Tools ➤
CAD Manager Control Utility.

2 Select the product you want to modify. Click OK.

3 In the CAD Manager Control Utility window, InfoCenter tab, select the option to enable CAD Manager
Channel.

4 Under Feed Location, enter an appropriate feed.

5 Enter the display name for the CAD Manager and then click Apply. Click OK.

6 Restart your Autodesk product.

7 In the InfoCenter box, click the down arrow next to the Search button.

8 Click Search Settings.

9 In the InfoCenter Settings dialog box, in the left pane, click Communication Center.
The CAD Manager Channel location and name are displayed.

NOTE A green check mark is displayed if the channel can be located and a yellow warning sign is displayed if it
cannot be located.

To specify the channels to display in the Communication Center panel

1 In the InfoCenter box, click the down arrow next to the Search button.

2 Click Search Settings.

3 In the InfoCenter Settings dialog box, in the left pane, click Autodesk Channels.

4 In the right pane, select or clear the channels you want to display in the Communication Center panel.

5 Click OK.

To specify InfoCenter balloon notification settings

1 In the InfoCenter box, click the down arrow next to the Search button.

2 Click Search Settings.

3 In the InfoCenter Settings dialog box, in the left pane, click Balloon Notification.

4 In the right pane, select or clear the options to turn balloon notification on or off.

5 Enter the number of seconds to set the length of time for balloon notifications to display.

6 Enter the transparency value of the balloon or set the value using the slider.

7 Click OK.

To add an RSS feed to Communication Center

1 In the InfoCenter box, click the down arrow next to the Search button.

2 Click Search Settings.

3 In the InfoCenter Settings dialog box, in the left pane, click RSS Feeds.

46 | Chapter 4 User Interface

4 In the right pane, do one of the following:
■ Click Add.

■ Right-click anywhere in the right pane. Click Add.

5 In the Add RSS Feed dialog box, enter the location of the RSS feed you want to add. Click Add.

6 In the InfoCenter - RSS Feed Confirmation dialog box, click Close.

7 Click OK.

To remove an RSS feed from Communication Center

1 In the InfoCenter box, click the down arrow next to the Search button.

2 Click Search Settings.

3 In the InfoCenter Settings dialog box, in the left pane, click RSS Feeds.

4 In the right pane, do one of the following:

■ Click Remove.

■ Right-click an RSS feed. Click Remove.

5 In the InfoCenter - Remove RSS Feed dialog box, click Yes.

6 Click OK.

Search Topics in Help

You can click the Help button to display topics in Help.

You can get much more benefit from the Help system when you learn how to use it efficiently. You can
quickly find general descriptions, procedures, details about dialog boxes and palettes, or definitions of terms.

To display topics in Help

■ In the InfoCenter box, click the Help button.

Autodesk® Seek
Use Autodesk Seek to search for and share product design content from AutoCAD® and Revit® products.
For information about sharing product design content with Autodesk Seek, see Publishing to Autodesk®
Seek on page 1142.

NOTE Autodesk Seek is currently available only in the English edition of the software.

You can access Autodesk Seek in the following ways:

■ Go to the Autodesk Seek home page http://seek.autodesk.com.

■ Click Insert tab ➤ Autodesk Seek panel to search for content.

Search Topics in Help | 47

■ Click ➤ Publish ➤ (Share with Autodesk Seek to share online content.

■ Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ User Interface drop-down ➤ Recent Files. In the Recent Files window,
click Web Library.

With Autodesk® Seek you can find and share product design information with the online design community
to enhance designs and to meet specific customer needs. It allows designers to search for, download, and
integrate generic or manufacturer-specific building products or components and associated design information.
When you are working in a design program, you may want to include products that, for example, meet
design standards for Leadership in Energy and Environmental Design (LEED) or the Americans with Disabilities
Act (ADA). Autodesk Seek can help you locate such information and products, and get them into your design.
■ For more information about LEED green building certification, visit the U.S. Green Building Council
website: http://www.usgbc.org.

■ For more information about ADA standards for accessible design, visit U.S. Department of Justice website:
http://www.usdoj.gov/crt/ada/.

The design and product information available on Autodesk Seek depends on what content providers, both
corporate partners and individual contributors, publish to Autodesk Seek. Such content could include 3D
models, 2D drawings, specifications, brochures, or descriptions of products or components.
Autodesk has partnered with content aggregators such as BIMWorld™ and the McGraw-Hill Construction
Sweets Network®, who maintain relationships with manufacturers, to provide and maintain product and
design information within Autodesk Seek.
Autodesk® Seek also contains all files from the content libraries provided with the 2008 and later releases
of the following products:
■ AutoCAD®

■ AutoCAD® Architecture

■ AutoCAD® MEP

■ Revit® Structure

■ Revit® Architecture

■ Revit® MEP

Currently, Autodesk Seek is intended primarily for the AEC/building industry. In the future, Autodesk Seek
will expand to include product information that is more typically used in other industries.

File Types Supported by Autodesk Seek

The following list includes file types currently supported by Autodesk Seek.

File Type Description

3DS 3D Studio scene file

DGN MicroStation drawing file

DOC Microsoft Word document

DWF Autodesk’s open, secure format for sharing design informa-

tion

48 | Chapter 4 User Interface

File Type Description

DWG Industry standard file format for 2D and 3D design data

DXF Autodesk Drawing Exchange Format — enables data inter-

operability between AutoCAD and other design programs

IES Photometric data file

GSM ArchiCAD Graphic Description Language file

LCF ArchiCAD library container file

MCD Mathcad document file

MLIB Revit material library file

PDF Adobe portable document format

RFA Revit family file

RTE Revit template file

RTF Rich Text Format file

RVG Revit External Group file

RVT Revit project file

SKP Sketchup Document file

TXT Text file

XLS Microsoft Excel spreadsheet

ZIP Compressed archive file

Searching for Content with Autodesk Seek

You can enhance your designs by acquiring product or design information published by Autodesk, partner
content providers, or other designers on Autodesk Seek.

NOTE Autodesk Seek is currently available only in the English edition of the software.

Autodesk® Seek supports parametric searches, meaning that the search results returned are more or less
specific depending on what you enter in the search text box. More search terms return fewer results.

Filtering Search Results

After you have searched for product information, you can reduce the number of displayed results by applying
filters. On the Autodesk Seek web page, apply filters to narrow the results of a search.
Available filters depend on information supplied by content providers when the design files are added to
the Autodesk Seek website.

Searching for Content with Autodesk Seek | 49

Filters

■ Product Attributes. Filter results by attributes common to the returned results. The attribute filters
available vary depending upon the type of product searched.

■ Manufacturer. Filter results by manufacturer. Manufacturer names are displayed in descending order by
the number of results associated with each manufacturer. The Generic filter displays results for which
no manufacturer information has been supplied.

■ File Type. Filter results by file type. The file type filter excludes results that do not contain product or
design information of the type selected.

■ External Catalogs. Filter results by supplier catalog, such as BIMWorld.

■ Product Libraries. Filter results by Autodesk product library, such as Revit Structure.

Downloading Content from Autodesk Seek

After you have located product or design information that you want to add to your design, you need to get
it from the Autodesk Seek website and into your drawing.

NOTE The first time you download a file, you must agree to and accept the Autodesk Seek terms and conditions.
Accepting the terms installs a cookie on your computer. If you clear your web browser's cookies, you will need to
accept the Autodesk Seek terms and conditions the next time you download a file.

To perform a search

1 Click Insert tab ➤ Autodesk Seek panel ➤ Find product design files online, and enter the desired search
term.

NOTE Autodesk Seek searches all available product information by default.

2 Press Enter or click (Search Seek Online) to search.

The Autodesk website displays the results.

NOTE To return fewer results, enter more terms in the text box. For example, a search for “window” returns
more results than a search for “fixed window 3D.”

To accept the Autodesk Seek Terms and Conditions and download a file

1 To review the terms and conditions of use, click Terms and Conditions.
The Autodesk Seek Terms of Use are displayed in a browser window. When ready to proceed, close the
browser window to return to the Terms and Conditions page.

2 Click the I Have Read and Agree to the Terms and Conditions check box.

3 Click Accept. The File Download dialog box displays.

4 Do one of the following:

■ To display the file in its associated program, click Open.

■ To save the file, click Save. If necessary, specify a new file location and file name.

You can use Autodesk i-drop® to drag and drop content from a website into your drawing session. However,
you cannot use i-drop to download ZIP files.

50 | Chapter 4 User Interface

NOTE To enable i-drop you must first download and install it. For more information visit
http://www.autodesk.com/idrop.

To i-drop a file into your drawing

1 On the Autodesk Seek website, move your cursor over an available download displaying the i-drop icon.

2 Click and drag the file.

3 Drop the file at the desired location in your drawing and, if necessary, reposition it.

Where to extract the contents from a ZIP file

1 If a Readme TXT file exists, open it to determine where you should extract each file in the ZIP file.

2 Extract the files to the locations specified in the Readme. If the family does not have a Readme, extract
the files to the locations specified in the following table.

NOTE These locations are the default Windows XP, Windows Vista®, and Windows 7 paths that are set during
installation. Because these paths can be changed during installation, your paths might be different.

File Type Location

Family (RFA) The Revit library, which is installed by de-

fault in
■ Windows XP: C:\Documents and Set-
tings\All Users\Application
Data\Autodesk\<Revit release
name>\<Imperial or Metric> Library
■ Windows Vista or Windows 7:
C:\ProgramData\Autodesk\<Revit re-
lease name>\<Imperial or Metric> Lib-
rary

Type catalogs (TXT) that manage paramet- The same folder as the RFA file
ers for families with many type variations

NOTE The type catalog must have

exactly the same name as its family
RFA file. The names are case-sensitive.

Lookup tables (CSV) that Revit MEP com- ■ Windows XP: C:\Documents and Set-
ponents use to define instance parameters tings\All Users\Application
Data\Autodesk\<Revit MEP release
name>\LookupTables
■ Windows Vista or Windows 7:
C:\ProgramData\Autodesk\<Revit MEP
release name>\LookupTables

Image files (BMP, JPG, JPEG, or PNG) used ■ Windows XP: C:\Program
to create a custom color, design, texture, Files\Autodesk\<Revit release
or bump map for a render appearance name>\Data\Rendering\assetlib-
rary_base.fbm
■ Windows Vista or Windows 7:
C:\Program Files\Autodesk\<Revit release

Searching for Content with Autodesk Seek | 51

File Type Location
name>\Data\Rendering\assetlib-
rary_base.fbm

Photometric data files (IES) for use with ■ Windows XP: C:\Documents and Set-
lighting families tings\All Users\Application
Data\Autodesk\<Revit release
name>\IES
■ Windows Vista or Windows 7:
C:\ProgramData\Autodesk\<Revit re-
lease name>\IES

Online Help
To access online help, do one of the following:

■ In the title bar of the Revit window, click (Help).

■ For context-sensitive help:

■ In a dialog, click or Help.

■ Move the cursor over a tool on the ribbon. When its tooltip displays, press F1.

NOTE If you turn off tooltips, context-sensitive help (F1) for ribbon tools is also turned off. If you want
context-sensitive help to be available, set Tooltip assistance to Minimal. See Tooltips on page 26.

To access online help and other resources, in the title bar of the Revit window, click the arrow to the right

of (Help), and select an option.

Videos in help topics

Some help topics provide a link to a short video. Click the link to watch the video. It opens in a separate
window.
These help videos do not run on 64-bit computers. When you try to play a video, it prompts you to install
Adobe® Flash®, and then the video will not run.
Currently, Adobe Flash Player does not support playback in a 64-bit browser. You can run it on 32-bit browsers
installed on 64-bit computers, but by default Revit Structure uses the 64-bit browser for online help.

To view a help video on a 64-bit computer

1 Open the help topic that contains a video link.

2 Click the video link.

3 Right-click in the video window, and select Jump to URL.

4 Copy the text from the Current URL dialog.

5 Launch 32-bit Internet Explorer, and paste the contents into the address bar.

52 | Chapter 4 User Interface

Start a Project

53
54
Creating a Project
5
When creating a project in Revit Structure, you can

■ Use default settings, which are defined in a project template. Revit Structure includes a default template called Structural
Analysis-default.rte, which contains several settings to help you begin the design process immediately.
For information about changing the default template, see File Location Options on page 1625.
■ Use a custom template.

Creating a Project Using Default Settings

Use this procedure when you want to use the default template. It skips the step of specifying the template
to use when creating the project.
Do one of the following:
■ Press Ctrl+N.

■ On the Recent Files on page 40 window, under Projects, click New.

Revit Structure creates a project file, using settings in the default template. The default project name displays

in the title bar of the Revit window. To assign a different file name, click ➤ (Save As).

Creating a Project Using a Template

Use this procedure when you want to be able to specify the template to use when creating the project.

1 Click ➤ New ➤ (Project).

2 In the New Project dialog, for Template file, click Browse.
3 Navigate to the location of the desired project template, select the template file (with the file
type RTE), and click Open.

55
Revit Structure provides several project templates, which reside in the Metric Templates or
Imperial Templates folder in the following location:
■ Windows XP: C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data\Autodesk\<product
name and release>\

■ Windows Vista or Windows 7: C:\ProgramData\Autodesk\<product name and release>\

You can use one of these templates or create your own templates as needed to maintain corporate
standards or to simplify the setup process for different types of projects.

4 For Create new, click Project.

5 Click OK.
Revit Structure creates a project file using the settings defined by the specified template. The default project

name appears in the title bar of the Revit window. To assign a different file name, click ➤ (Save
As).

Related topics
■ Creating a Template on page 1633

■ Project Template Settings on page 1634

Before You Begin a Project

Before you start adding content to a Revit project, consider the following approaches to the design process:

■ Using levels and grids. Begin the design process by defining levels and grids for the model. See Levels
on page 93 and Grids on page 98.

■ Importing data. If you started the design process using another CAD program (such as AutoCAD), you
can import existing data. Revit Structure imports various CAD formats, including DWG, DXF, DGN, and
ACIS SAT files, as well as SketchUp (SKP) files and Industry Foundation Classes (IFC). See Import/Link
Overview on page 57.

■ Massing. You can start a project by designing a conceptual model. After you create basic shapes with the
massing tools, you can convert mass faces to building elements. See Massing Studies on page 1329 and
Conceptual Design Environment on page 135.

56 | Chapter 5 Creating a Project

Using Information from
Other Sources 6
Read these topics to learn how to incorporate information from other sources into Revit projects.

Import/Link Overview
The Import and Link tools allows you to import or link to various file formats.
Different file formats may be imported with different qualities of geometry. For information about variations
in imported geometry, see Suitability of Imported Geometry on page 57.
When you import files, you may need to zoom in the drawing area to see the imported data. See Zooming
Project Views on page 860.
For information about linking Revit models, see Linked Models on page 1177.

Suitability of Imported Geometry

When you import a file into Revit Structure, the format of the imported file may support varying qualities
of geometry. These variations are caused by the file type, the export settings, and the import settings.
Some tools and capabilities in Revit Structure require specific types of geometry. For example:

■ The Join Geometry tool requires volumetric geometry.

■ Rendering an image requires that faces are associated with material properties.

■ The Roof by Face tool requires geometry with suitably sized faces for flat roof panels or a NURB
representation of a complex, shaped roof panel.

■ Masses require volumetric geometry to calculate volume, surface area, and floor area faces. See
Considerations for Imported Geometry in Mass or Generic Model Families on page 1366 and Importing
Massing Studies from Other Applications on page 1366.

You can import many different types of file formats into Revit Structure. When you export a file from the
originating application for use with Revit Structure, you can set a variety of export options. With these many
variations of file formats and export options, it is important to ensure that the exported file provides the

57
geometric data needed for the Revit capability that you plan to use. To optimize results with various file
formats, consult the documentation provided with the exporting applications.

Implications of Importing vs. Linking for Xrefs

Suppose you use AutoCAD to generate a DWG file that contains external references (xrefs). When you import
or link the DWG file, Revit Structure displays the geometry from the nested xrefs. The decision to import
or link a file to a Revit project affects what you can do with the xref information:

■ If you import the file, you can explode the nested xrefs to Revit elements. However, if the xref file is
updated after the import, Revit Structure will not automatically reflect changes to the xref file.

■ If you link the file, Revit Structure automatically updates the geometry to reflect changes to the xref files.
However, you cannot explode the nested xrefs to Revit elements.

For more information, see Exploding Imported Geometry on page 75.

Importing or Linking CAD Formats

Open a Revit project, and use the Import CAD or Link CAD tools to import or link vector data from other
CAD programs such as AutoCAD (DWG and DXF), MicroStation® (DGN), SketchUp (SKP and DWG), and
ACIS (SAT). Revit Structure supports importing most DGN surfaces and solids with the exceptions of cones,
B-Spline surfaces, and SmartSolids.
In addition to using the Import CAD and Link CAD tools, you can import CAD files using drag-and-drop
from Windows® Explorer onto a model, drafting, or sheet view of Revit Structure. See Importing CAD Files
Using i-drop on page 59.
You can mirror imported and linked CAD files. See Mirroring Elements on page 1483.

NOTE Revit Structure imports ACIS solids from SAT files. SAT file formats later than version 7.0 do not import into
Revit Structure. You should determine which version your solid modeling program is creating. Some solid modeling
products (such as form-Z®) create SAT file formats later than version 7.0 by default.

Snapping to Imported Geometry

Suppose that you import an AutoCAD® drawing into Revit Structure and then want to trace over walls in
that drawing. As you place the cursor near the lines representing the walls, it can snap to the lines or the
midpoint between the lines.

Proxy Graphics from AutoCAD Files

Revit Structure supports reading in proxy graphics from AutoCAD files. Proxy graphics are AutoCAD's
representations of AutoCAD Architecture objects. Unlike AutoCAD Architecture objects, proxy graphics have
no intelligence.
Proxy graphics can exist for many types of data in AutoCAD, including Mechanical Desktop (MDT) parts
and AutoCAD Runtime eXtension (ARX) objects. If you set the Proxygraphics command to 1 in AutoCAD,
Revit Structure can then import ARX objects and AutoCAD Architecture objects (such as walls and floors)
in the DWG or DXF file.

Subdivision Surfaces and Solids Created in AutoCAD

Revit Structure can import DWG files containing subdivision surfaces and solids created in AutoCAD. Some
complex subdivision meshes may fail to convert to a traditional solid or surface altogether, or generate a
problematic solid or surface. Other highly complex SubD meshes may not import completely or at all.

58 | Chapter 6 Using Information from Other Sources

Cutting Imported Geometry
When you import a 3D DWG file into a Revit Structure project, the imported DWG geometry will not be
cut. For example, if you create a level at the elevation of a typical wall and then go to that plan view, the
imported geometry will not cut at that level. However, if you import the geometry into a cuttable in-place
family (such as Generic Model), the geometry will cut in accordance with Revit Structure’s cut planes.

Importing or Linking CAD Files Using the Import CAD and Link CAD Tools

1 Click Insert tab ➤ Import panel ➤ (Import CAD), or click Insert tab ➤ Link panel ➤

(Link CAD).
If you link the file instead of importing it, see Implications of Importing vs. Linking for Xrefs
on page 58.

2 In the Import CAD Formats or Link CAD Formats dialog, navigate to the folder that contains
the file to import or link.

TIP Make sure you import the geometric data needed for the Revit capability that you plan to use.
For more information, see Suitability of Imported Geometry on page 57.

3 Select the file.

4 Specify the import or link options. See Import and Link Options for CAD Formats and Revit
Models on page 63.
5 Click Open.

NOTE If you open a DGN file, the Select View dialog displays. Select a view to open. The view
corresponds exactly to the MicroStation view and imports into Revit Structure exactly as it appeared
in MicroStation.

6 If you chose to manually place the imported data, it displays in the drawing area and moves
with the cursor. Click to place the imported data.
You may need to zoom in to see the imported data. See Zooming Project Views on page 860.

Related topics

■ Importing or Linking CAD Formats on page 58

■ Moving a View-Specific Import to the Foreground or Background on page 66

Importing CAD Files Using i-drop

Revit Structure supports the Autodesk i-drop® drag-and-drop feature. When i-drop objects are pulled from
an i-drop–enabled web page, Revit Structure downloads the file and imports it as if it were pulled from a
local file.
When you drag-and-drop a file, the file is imported with the default settings. If you want to use different
settings (for example, Manual - Origin rather than Auto - Center to Center), import the file using the Import
CAD tool. (See Importing or Linking CAD Files Using the Import CAD and Link CAD Tools on page 59.)

Importing or Linking CAD Files Using the Import CAD and Link CAD Tools | 59
TIP Make sure you import the geometric data needed for the Revit capability that you plan to use. For more
information, see Suitability of Imported Geometry on page 57.

To import CAD files using i-drop

1 From an i-drop–enabled web page, click the thumbnail image of the object.
2 Drag the file from the web page into Revit Structure.
3 Release the object directly into the active view.

Importing Files from SketchUp

Google™ SketchUp® is a general purpose modeling and visualization tool. Revit Structure uses building
information modeling (BIM), in which building elements understand their relationship to each other. When
working on a design project, you can use both products to leverage the unique strengths of each. For example:

■ If you want to model an initial design pass or quickly model a single element, start with SketchUp. Later,
use Revit Structure to refine the design.

■ If you want to design entire building masses and then associate real building elements to them, use
SketchUp for the design phase. Later use Revit Structure for the detailed planning phase.

To use a SketchUp design in Revit Structure, import a SKP file from SketchUp directly into Revit Structure.
As an alternative, you can use SketchUp to export a DWG file, and then import that DWG file into Revit
Structure.
To incorporate a SketchUp design into a Revit project, use the following general process:

1 Use Revit Structure to create a family outside the project or an in-place family within the project.

2 Import the SketchUp file into the family.

3 If you created the family outside the project, load the family into the project.

NOTE Revit Structure does not support linking of SketchUp files. As a result, if you import a SketchUp file into a
Revit project and later make changes to the SketchUp file, you cannot easily update the Revit project to reflect
the changes. Therefore, complete as much of the design in SketchUp as possible before importing it into Revit
Structure.

Related topic

■ Importing Massing Studies from Other Applications on page 1366

Importing SKP Files

Before importing a SKP file from SketchUp into Revit Structure, do the following:

■ Make sure you import the geometric data needed for the Revit capability that you plan to use. See
Suitability of Imported Geometry on page 57.

■ Review Limitations of SketchUp Data Imported to Revit Structure.

■ Review Best Practices When Importing Masses on page 1367.

To import SketchUp files

1 Create an in-place family in a Revit project, or create a family in the Family Editor.

60 | Chapter 6 Using Information from Other Sources

See Revit Families on page 677.

2 Click Insert tab ➤ Import panel ➤ (Import CAD).

3 In the Import CAD Formats dialog, navigate to the folder that contains the SketchUp file.
4 For Files of Type, select the SKP file type
5 Select the file to import.
6 Specify the desired import settings.
The following settings are recommended:
■ Colors: Preserve

■ Layers: All

■ Import Units: Auto-Detect

■ Positioning: Auto - Origin to Origin

■ Place at: Level 1 or Ref. Level

■ Orient to View

7 Click Open.
You may need to do the following to see the SketchUp-based form:

■ Switch to a 3D view.

■ To improve visibility, on the View Control Bar, for Visual Style, select (Shaded with Edges).

■ Click Home tab ➤ Work Plane panel ➤ (Set). In the Work Plane dialog, select a plane.

■ Type ZF (Zoom to Fit) to adjust the drawing area to show the entire mass.

■ If you are creating a mass family, click Architect & Site tab ➤ Conceptual Mass panel ➤ (Show
Mass

Limitations of SketchUp Data Imported to Revit Structure

Revit Structure treats the data imported from SketchUp as a large block of geometry that resists being
manipulated (in the ways that you can usually manipulate geometry that is native to Revit Structure).
However, you can change the layer settings from SketchUp. (For example, to assign colors or materials on
a by-layer basis, click Manage tab ➤ Settings panel ➤ Object Styles, and change settings on the Imported
Objects tab.) When you import a SketchUp design into a Revit mass family and then load the mass family
into a Revit project, you can convert mass faces (from the SketchUp design) into walls, floors, and roofs.
(See Importing Massing Studies from Other Applications on page 1366.)
When creating content in SketchUp for use in Revit Structure, consider the following restrictions:
■ Exploding 3D data: In Revit Structure, you will not be able to explode 3D data. If you try this, 3D faces
will disappear, and you will receive a warning message.

■ Parameters: In Revit Structure, you cannot add parameters to control geometric flexing. However, you
can add some controls that manipulate imported data, such as the location of an imported element and
its material assignments.

Importing Files from SketchUp | 61

■ Visibility/graphics: In Revit Structure, you cannot manipulate the geometry or isolate parts of whole
elements with visibility/graphics settings.

■ Two-sided surfaces: If a material or color is assigned to only one side of a surface in SketchUp, Revit
Structure applies the material or color to both sides of the surface by default. If there is material on both
sides of the surface, Revit Structure applies the Face 1 material to both sides. If faces are flipped and
painted differently in SketchUp, they may not display the correct material in Revit Structure.

■ SketchUp properties: The following SketchUp properties are currently not supported in Revit Structure
import: Texture Image Maps, Transparency, “Smooth” Curved Surfaces, Text and Dimensions, Raster
Images, and saved “Pages”.

■ Cut planes: Imports cannot be cut by a cut plane unless imported into a cuttable family category.

■ SketchUp and massing: Not all SketchUp imports are appropriate to massing. See Suitability of Imported
Geometry on page 57. Also see Importing Massing Studies from Other Applications on page 1366.

■ Scaling: Groups or components that have been scaled in their entirety with the SketchUp Scaling tool
may be incorrectly scaled when imported to Revit Structure. Exploded SketchUp models should import
at the correct scale.

Importing ACIS Objects

Revit Structure supports the import of ACIS objects contained in DWG, DXF, and SAT files. (ACIS objects
describe solids or trimmed surfaces.) For example, you can create ACIS objects using the AutoCAD commands
Draw Solids and Draw Region. You can also import SmartSolids™ from MicroStation® into Revit Structure.
To import ACIS objects, use the procedure Importing or Linking CAD Files Using the Import CAD and Link
CAD Tools on page 59.
Revit Structure supports the following types of surfaces when importing ACIS objects:

■ Plane

■ Sphere

■ Torus

■ Cylinder

■ Cone

■ Elliptical cylinder

■ Elliptical cone

■ Extruded surface

■ Revolved surface

■ NURB surfaces

You can import NURB (non-uniform rational B-splines) surfaces on ACIS objects in DWG or SAT files into
Revit mass or generic model families while you are creating the family. You can then use the Roof by Face
and Curtain System by Face tools to create roofs and curtain systems on these imported surfaces.
To use ACIS imports for face-based host tools, import geometry into an in-place family of category Mass or
Generic Model. Face-based tools work best on ACIS solids. For example, if you create walls by face on a cube,
the walls join and miter correctly. If you create a curtain system by face on a solid, you can add corner
mullions onto the joins between faces of the curtain system. For more information on face-based tools, see
Creating Building Elements from Mass Instances on page 1356.

62 | Chapter 6 Using Information from Other Sources

TIP Make sure you import the geometric data needed for the Revit capability that you plan to use. For more
information, see Suitability of Imported Geometry on page 57.

Import and Link Options for CAD Formats and Revit Models
The following options apply to linked or imported CAD format files (on the Import CAD Formats and Link
CAD Formats dialogs that display when you click Insert tab ➤ Import panel ➤ Import CAD, or Insert
tab ➤ Link panel ➤ Link CAD). Positioning options also apply to linked Revit models (when you click Insert
tab ➤ Link panel ➤ Link Revit).

Option Definition

Current View Only Imports a CAD drawing into the active Revit view only. For example, you might want
an AutoCAD object to appear only in a Revit floor plan view and not in a 3D view. If
you set this option, any text in the imported file is visible and can be cropped by the
crop region of the view. If you are using worksharing, the import will belong to a view
workset.
If the option is not selected, only lines and geometry are imported, and the import be-
haves like model geometry: it can be cropped by the crop region of the view. This option
is not available in 3D views. If you are using worksharing, the import will belong to a
model workset.

NOTE If you are importing data from a CAD file for use in creating a toposurface, do
not select this option.

Colors

Invert Inverts the colors of all line and text objects from the imported file to Revit-specific colors.
Dark colors become lighter, and light colors become darker. This can improve readability
when the file is in Revit Structure. This option is set by default.

Preserve Preserves the colors defined in the imported document.

Black and White Imports the document in black and white.

Layers

All Imports or links all layers. Layers that are not visible in the link are turned off in the
current view in Revit Structure.

Visible Imports or links only visible layers.

Specify Allows you to select the layers and levels to import or link (on the dialog that displays).
Layers not selected are deleted.
If you select Visible or Specify and you are linking the file, when you later reload the
linked file, still only the selected or visible layers originally linked are loaded. Any layers
not selected or visible are not linked. If you later want omitted layers to be linked, you
must delete the link and relink the file.

TIP If you want to be able to see and hide layers as needed, you can link to all layers,
and then click View tab ➤ Graphics panel ➤ Visibility/Graphics to control the visibility
of different categories in a view. (See Visibility and Graphic Display in Project Views on
page 801.) Or you can link to all layers, and then query the import and hide a selected
layer in the active view. (See Querying Objects in Layers on page 75.)

Import and Link Options for CAD Formats and Revit Models | 63
Option Definition

Import Units Explicitly sets the unit of measure for imported geometry. The values are Auto-Detect,
feet, inch, meter, decimeter, centimeter, millimeter, and Custom factor.
If you specify Auto-Detect for an AutoCAD file created in Imperial (English), then the
file imports with feet and inches as the units. If the AutoCAD file was created in metric,
then the file imports into Revit Structure with millimeters as the units.
For MicroStation® files, Revit Structure reads the units from the file and uses them. Feet,
inches, meters, centimeters, decimeters, millimeters are all supported. If the DGN file
has custom units, then the unit in Revit Structure defaults to feet.

NOTE If you import a file into a project with opposing units (for example, a metric file
into an Imperial project), the units in the host project prevail. If the imported file has a
custom unit, select Custom factor for Import Units. This enables the text box adjacent
to the selection list so that you can enter a scale value.

For example, the file has a unit called widget where one widget equals 10 meters. When
importing the file, select Custom factor for Import Units and specify a value of 10 in the
adjacent text box. Each unit from the source file is now equal to 10 meters in the Revit
file.
The value you enter here displays in the Scale Factor type property of the import symbol.
If the units are known, you can select Custom factor and enter a scale factor. This can
increase or decrease the size of the imported elements in Revit Structure.

Positioning

Auto - Center to Center Revit Structure places the center of the import at the center of the Revit model. The
center of a Revit model is calculated by finding the center of a bounding box around
the model.
If most of the Revit Structure model is not visible, this center point may not be visible
in the current view. To make the point visible in the current view, set the zoom to Zoom
View to Fit. This centers the view on the Revit Structure model.

Auto - Origin to Origin Revit Structure places the import’s world origin at the Revit project’s internal origin. If
the import object has been drawn at a large distance from its origin, it may display at
a large distance from the model. To test this, set the zoom to Zoom View to Fit.

Auto - By Shared Coordinates Revit Structure places the imported geometry according to its position with respect to
the shared coordinates between the 2 files.
If there is no current shared coordinate system between the files, Revit Structure notifies
you, and uses Auto - Center to Center positioning. See Shared Positioning on page 1265.

NOTE This option is for Revit files only.

Manual - Origin The imported document's origin is centered on the cursor.

Manual - Base Point The imported document's base point is centered on the cursor. Use this option only for
AutoCAD files that have a defined base point.

Manual - Center Sets the cursor at the center of the imported geometry. You can drag the imported
geometry to its position.

Place at Select the level to place the origin/base point.

Orient to View Revit Structure places the import at the same orientation as the current view. This option
is available only for non–view-specific imports.

64 | Chapter 6 Using Information from Other Sources

Setting Scaling for Imported DWG or DXF Files

1 Select an import symbol and click Modify | <File Name> tab ➤ Properties panel ➤ (Type
Properties).
2 In the Type Properties dialog, modify Import Units or Scale Factor.
If you change the import units, the scale factor automatically updates. See Import and Link
Options for CAD Formats and Revit Models on page 63.

NOTE If no values display for these parameters, you must reload the link or reimport the file.

3 Click OK.

Setting Line Weights for Imported DWG or DXF Files

When you import a DWG or DXF file, each layer in the file is assigned a line weight based on the pen
number-line weight settings. Revit Structure can import pen numbers from a DWG or DXF file and map
them to a Revit line weight. You can then save these mappings in a text file, and they become the set
mappings for the project.
Revit Structure includes the following files with pen and line weight mappings:

■ importlineweights-dwg-AIA.txt

■ importlineweights-dwg-BS1192.txt

■ importlineweights-dwg-ISO13657.txt

■ importlineweights-dwg-CP83.txt

These files reside in the Data folder of the Revit Structure installation directory.

To set line weights

1 Click Insert tab ➤ Import panel ➤ .

The Import Line Weights dialog displays the mappings in the importlineweights-dwg-default.txt
file.

2 If this is not the file that you want to edit, click Load, navigate to the correct mappings file, and
open it.
3 In the dialog, match the appropriate pen to the appropriate line weight (for example: Pen
Number 1 to Line Weight Number 1, Pen Number 2 to Line Weight Number 2, and so on). Set
as many pen-line weight mappings as desired.
4 Click OK, or to save the mappings in a new file, click Save As.

Mapping AutoCAD SHX Fonts to TrueType Fonts

When you import AutoCAD drawings that contain text, you can map the AutoCAD SHX fonts to TrueType
fonts so they appear correctly in Revit Structure. You can map to any of your existing fonts.

NOTE For SHX fonts that are not mapped, Revit Structure will use a similar font, but the results are unpredictable.

Setting Scaling for Imported DWG or DXF Files | 65

To map TrueType fonts
1 Open the shxfontmap.txt file in a text editor.
This file resides in the Data folder of the Revit Structure installation directory.

2 On a new line, enter the SHX file name.

3 Press Tab.
4 Enter the name of the font to map it to.
5 Save and close the file.
You do not need to restart Revit Structure for the font mapping to take effect. If you have already imported
the file, you will need to import it again.

Setting Constraint Parameters for Imported Geometry

If you have imported geometry into all views, you can set the base level for it and specify a height offset
from that level.

To set constraint parameters

1 Select the imported geometry.
2 On the Properties palette, set the Base Level and Base Offset instance parameters.
Alternatively, you can select the geometry in an elevation view and move it to adjust the base offset value.

Moving a View-Specific Import to the Foreground or Background

You can move a view-specific import symbol between the foreground and the background of a view, with
respect to model elements in the view. If the import symbol is in the foregound of the view, it is in front of
model elements, such as walls. It is still behind detail components and annotations.

NOTE View-specific import symbols are those files that are imported with the Current View Only option selected.

1 Select the import symbol.

2 On the Properties palette, for Draw Layer, specify Background or Foreground.
Alternatively, select Background or Foreground from the Options Bar.
You can also use the sort order for detail components to move an import symbol in front of or behind detail
components. For more information on sort order tools, see Sorting the Draw Order of Detail Components
on page 958.

Importing Images
You can import raster images to a Revit project to use as background images or as visual aids needed during
the creation of a model. By default, images are imported behind the model and annotation symbols; however,
you can change the display order. You can import images into 2D views only.
You can import images using the Image tool or by dragging and dropping them from Windows® Explorer.

To import an image

1 Click Insert tab ➤ Import panel ➤ (Image).

2 In the Import Image dialog, navigate to the folder containing the image file to import.

66 | Chapter 6 Using Information from Other Sources

3 Select the file, and click Open.
The imported image displays in the drawing area and moves with the cursor. The image displays
symbolically, with 2 crossing lines indicating the extents of the image.

4 Click to place the image.

Related topic

■ Adding an Image to a Sheet on page 993

Modifying Imported Images

You can modify imported images using tools (such as Rotate and Copy) on the Modify Raster Images tab.
This tab displays when you select an imported image in the drawing area.

NOTE These tools also affect captured, rendered 3D images.

To modify an imported image

1 Select the image so that handles display on the image, and modify the image as follows:
■ To scale the image, drag the corner handles.

■ To move the image, drag it to the desired location.

■ To keep width and height settings proportional while scaling, on the Properties palette, select
Lock Proportions.

2 On the Properties palette, specify values for the height and width of the image.

3 If you want to rotate the image, click Modify | Raster Images tab ➤ Modify panel ➤
(Rotate). See Rotating Elements on page 1481.
4 If you want to change the draw order, select the image and use the tools on the Arrange panel
of the Modify | Raster Images tab.
The draw order of raster images can be controlled in the same manner as detail elements. See
Sorting the Draw Order of Detail Components on page 958.

Related topics

■ Importing Images on page 66

■ Deleting Raster Images on page 67

Deleting Raster Images

The Manage Images tool lists all raster images in the project, including any rendered images that you have
captured. The tool offers the only way for you to delete an image from the project. You cannot remove an
image from the project by deleting it from a view or a sheet.

To delete a raster image

1 Click Insert tab ➤ Import panel ➤ (Manage Images).

The Manage Images dialog lists all raster images in the project.

Modifying Imported Images | 67

2 Select the image name, and click Delete.
3 Click OK when prompted to confirm the deletion.

Importing Building Components

Manufactured building components that are formatted as Autodesk Exchange (ADSK) files provide design
and connection data that you can use to accurately place the component in a Revit project. These building
components can be designed in mechanical applications, such as Autodesk® Inventor® and used in Revit
Architecture, Revit MEP, and Revit Structure.
To open a building component ADSK file, do one of the following:

■ Click ➤ Open ➤ (Building Component).

■ Click Home tab ➤ Model panel ➤ Component drop-down ➤ Place a Component. Then click Modify |
Place Component tab ➤ Mode panel ➤ Load Family, select the ADSK file, and place it in the project.

Building Component ADSK Files

A building component ADSK file provides the following information to aid in the design process:

■ Physical appearance of the component in views, such as 3D, which lets you determine clearance for
accurate placement

■ Connectors and their placement

NOTE Although conduit and cable tray connectors are displayed in the Autodesk Inventor Translation report,
they are not imported into Revit Structure.

■ Data about the component, such as its identity data

Opening or loading an ADSK file automatically creates a family from the category that is based on the
OmniClass assignment made on export.

You can also save the ADSK file as an RFA file ( ➤ Save As ➤ Family), which lets you create a family
that can be used in multiple projects. See Revit Families on page 677 for more information about using families
in Revit Structure.

Working with Building Components

Using a building component ADSK file, you can:

■ View the component's bounding box at a coarse detail level. Connectors will still display in their correct
locations in the coarse scale view.

■ View the component’s detailed appearance at fine and medium detail levels.

■ Change the component's graphic display by changing the detail level in the project. You can also modify
the component’s visibility settings in the Family Editor to coarse, medium, or fine.

■ View the component in a 3D, plan, elevation, or section view.

■ Place connectors on the component using the Family Editor. See Connectors on page 696.

68 | Chapter 6 Using Information from Other Sources

■ Create new family types from the original component by adding new parameters or changing existing
ones using the Family Editor.

■ View or change the component's identity data.

■ Use the component's reference planes or some of its geometry for dimensioning.

■ Tag and schedule the component's parameters.

■ Render the component.

Restrictions to using a building component ADSK file include the following:

■ The geometry of the component cannot be changed in Revit Structure. Changes to geometry can only
be made in the application in which the building component was originally designed.

■ Although the materials assigned in the mechanical application are not imported into Revit Structure,
you can assign a material in Revit Structure that applies to the whole component.

■ Currently, the workflow is only one-way from Inventor to Revit Structure. Inventor cannot open ADSK
files.

Tips for Working with Building Components

Consider the following when working with building components:

■ To optimize model performance in Revit Structure, whenever possible, work with the building component
as a bounding box at coarse scale.

■ Because building components can have large quantities of detailed geometry, they might take a few
minutes to open. If opening the component takes too long, or if zooming and panning performance is
slow, ask its creator to further simplify the model prior to exporting.

■ If the component opens in Revit Structure with a different orientation than expected, either rotate the
component in the Family Editor or ask its creator to create a custom Universal Coordinate System (UCS)
and re-export the ADSK file using the new UCS.

■ Use the Autodesk Inventor Translation report to review the export results. The report lists the contents
of the ADSK file. Verify that the model elements were exported as you expected. Double-click the ADSK
file to open the report in your Web browser.

Building Component Workflow

The following steps describe a typical workflow for using a building component in a Revit project. For
example, suppose a manufacturer published the contents of a rooftop HVAC unit to its website as an ADSK
file to be used by engineers and architects. You want to incorporate this building component in your model.
Using the component's geometry and data, you can properly place the component in the project and also
create connectors on it, so the component can be used in Revit MEP.
Your workflow looks like the following:

1 Download the building component ADSK file from the manufacturer's website.

2 To open the ADSK file in Revit Structure, click ➤ Open ➤ (Building Component).

NOTE You cannot open ADSK files that are associated with a later version of Revit.

Tips for Working with Building Components | 69

3 Load the ADSK file into the project from the Family Editor.

NOTE You can load the ADSK file directly into the project. Click Home tab ➤ Model panel ➤ Component
drop-down ➤ Place a Component. Then click Modify | Place Component tab ➤ Mode panel ➤ Load Family,
select the ADSK file, and place it in the project.

4 Place the component in the project.

5 Display the component as a bounding box at a coarse level of detail.

6 Display the full geometry at medium and fine levels of detail.

7 View the component in any view.

8 Run an interference check to ensure proper clearance.

9 Tag and schedule the component using its parameters.

10 Dimension the component to its reference planes and to some of its geometry.

11 Create any extra connectors on the component in the Family Editor. When they are connected to
building services in Revit MEP, the connectors can be used in flow analysis.

Opening Industry Foundation Class (IFC) Files

Revit Structure opens Industry Foundation Classes (IFC) based on the latest International Alliance for
Interoperability (IAI) IFC 2x3 data exchange standard. (If you open a file that uses an earlier standard [IFC
2x or 2x2], Revit Structure supports the format and opens it properly.) For information about the IFC file
format, see Exporting to Industry Foundation Classes (IFC) on page 1132.
When you open an IFC file, Revit Structure creates a new file based on the default template. For information
about selecting the default template, see Selecting a Template for IFC Files on page 70.
You can load your own IFC class mapping files and override the categories and subcategories for IFC objects.

TIP Make sure you import the geometric data needed for the Revit capability that you plan to use. For more
information, see Suitability of Imported Geometry on page 57.

To open an IFC file

1 Click ➤ Open ➤ (IFC).

2 In the Open IFC File dialog, navigate to the IFC file to import.
3 Select the IFC file, and click Open.
Revit Structure creates a new file based on the default template.

Selecting a Template for IFC Files

1 Click ➤ Open ➤ (IFC Options).

2 In the Import IFC Options dialog, click Browse.
3 In the Browse for Template File dialog, navigate to the desired IFC template file, select it, and
click Open.
4 In the Import IFC Options dialog, click OK.

70 | Chapter 6 Using Information from Other Sources

Loading an IFC Class Mapping File

1 Click ➤ Open ➤ (IFC Options).

2 In the Import IFC Options dialog, click Load.
3 In the Load IFC Class Mapping File dialog, navigate to an IFC class mapping file, select it, and
click Open.
4 In the Import IFC Options dialog, click OK.

Overriding Categories and Subcategories for IFC Objects

1 Click ➤ Open ➤ (IFC Options).

2 In the Import IFC Options dialog, double-click in a category or subcategory, and enter a new
value to override the current value.
As an alternative, you can click Standard to reset all values to the standard (default) settings.

3 Click OK, or to save the mappings in a new file, click Save As.

Linking AutoCAD Files to a Revit Project

You can link AutoCAD files to a Revit project. For example, you may want to use linked files as follows:

■ Some team members use AutoCAD to create details or elevations, but the rest of the project is created
using Revit Structure. You want to link the AutoCAD drawings to the Revit project and place them on
sheets. These drawings can then be included in the set of construction documents that Revit Structure
generates.

■ Team members from other disciplines (such as architects or electrical engineers) use AutoCAD to plan
their part of the project. You want to link their AutoCAD drawings to a Revit project to use them as
underlays for your project views.

For example, the following floor plan shows a linked file that will be used as an underlay to trace and create
structural walls in Revit Structure.

Loading an IFC Class Mapping File | 71

Related topics

■ Managing Links on page 1203

■ Managing Layers in Linked and Imported Files on page 75

How Linking to AutoCAD Files Works

When you link an AutoCAD file to a project, Revit Structure maintains a link to that file. Whenever you
open the Revit project, Revit Structure retrieves the current, saved version of the linked file and displays it
in the project. Any changes to the linked file are displayed in the Revit project. If the linked file changes
while the Revit project is open, reload the file to retrieve the latest changes. (See Managing Links on page
1203.)
This ability to retrieve the latest changes to an AutoCAD file is the difference between linking and importing.
When you import an AutoCAD file, Revit Structure uses the version of the file that you imported. It does
not retrieve or display changes to the imported file.
When you link (or import) an AutoCAD file to a Revit project, you can do the following:
■ Query objects in the file on page 75

■ Hide or delete selected layers in the file on page 76.

■ Change the graphic display of layers in the file on page 78.

When you link a file to a Revit project, you can control whether the linked file is visible only in the current
view, or in all views. As a 2D drawing, the linked file is displayed only in relevant 2D Revit drawings, such
as floor plans. In a 3D view, the linked file is displayed as flat, 2D shapes.

Linking to an AutoCAD File

1 Open the Revit project.
2 If you want the linked file to display only in a particular view, open that view.

72 | Chapter 6 Using Information from Other Sources

3 Click Insert tab ➤ Link panel ➤ (Link CAD).
4 Specify the file to link, as follows:
■ For Look in, navigate to the location of the file.

■ For File name, specify the name of the file.

■ For Files of type, specify DWG.

5 Specify the following options for the linked file:

a If you want the linked file to display in the current view only, select Current view only.
If you do not select this option, the linked file is displayed in all relevant 2D views, such
as floor plans.

b For Layers, select one of the following values:

■ All: Displays all linked file layers in the Revit project, including hidden layers.

■ Visible: Displays visible layers of the linked file in the Revit project. Layers that are
currently hidden in AutoCAD do not display in Revit Structure.

■ Specify: Allows you to select the layers to display in the Revit project from a list. After
you click Open, Revit Structure displays the list of layers from which to choose.

6 Specify the desired import options.

For details about these options, see Import and Link Options for CAD Formats and Revit Models
on page 63.

7 Click Open.
8 If, for Layers, you chose Specify, the Select Layers/Levels to Import/Link dialog lists the layers
in the file. Select the desired layers, and click OK.
Unselected layers are not available in the Revit project. (However, the layers still exist in the
AutoCAD file.)

Revit Structure retrieves the current version of the linked file and displays it in the current Revit view.

Related topics

■ Querying Objects in Layers on page 75

■ Hiding and Deleting Layers on page 76

■ Changing the Graphic Display of Layers on page 78

■ Managing Links on page 1203

Location of the Linked File

Whenever you open a Revit project that is linked to a file, Revit Structure retrieves the current saved version
of the linked file. The path to the linked file displays in the Saved Path column of the Manage Links dialog.
See Unresolved References on page 1205.
If Revit Structure cannot locate the linked file, it displays the path to the version of the linked file that it
retrieved most recently. Revit Structure is not able to update the link. To reload the linked file from a different
location, use the Reload From function of the Manage Links dialog. See Managing Links on page 1203.

Location of the Linked File | 73

Use the Path Type column to indicate whether the path is absolute or relative. In general, use a relative path
instead of an absolute path.

■ If you use a relative path and later move the project and the linked file together to a new directory, the
link is maintained. The new working directory becomes the relative path for the linked file.

■ If you use an absolute path and later move the project and the linked file to a new directory, the link is
broken.

Use an absolute path when you link to a workshared file, such as a central file that other users need to access.
This file is likely not to move from its location on the disk.

Linking DWF Markup Files

1 Click Insert tab ➤ Link panel ➤ (DWF Markup).

2 In the Import/Link DWF File dialog, navigate to the DWF markup file, select it, and click Open.
The Link Markup Page to Revit Sheets dialog opens. Under the DWF View column, the dialog
displays the sheet view names that are marked up in the DWF file. The Revit View column
displays the corresponding Revit sheet view. If the sheet name from the DWF file is the same
as the sheet name from the Revit file, then the Revit sheet name is automatically filled in the
Revit View column.
If the Revit sheet view name changed after it was exported to DWF, the Revit View column
displays <Not linked> next to the DWF sheet view.

3 If the Revit View value is <Not linked>, select a Revit sheet view by clicking the box below the
Revit View column, and selecting a name from the list.
You might also do this if you have several other sheet views in the Revit file, and you want to
apply the markups to one of the other sheet views. This would make sense only if the other
sheet title blocks were the same size as the original.

4 Click OK.
The DWF markups are placed on the sheet view as an import symbol. The markups are pinned, which means
that you cannot modify their position or copy, rotate, mirror, delete, or group them unless they were created
in Autodesk Design Review. See Modifying DWF Markups Created in Design Review on page 74.

Modifying DWF Markups Created in Design Review

If markups were created in Autodesk Design Review using its markup tools, you can modify the Status and
Notes properties in Revit Structure. This feature allows you to add information to the markup or maintain
information about its status.

To modify markups created in Design Review

1 Select a markup object that was created in Design Review.

74 | Chapter 6 Using Information from Other Sources

A markup object might look as follows.

2 On the Properties palette, modify the Status and Notes properties as desired.
The changes are saved to the linked DWF file. The changes can be viewed in the DWF file by selecting the
corresponding markup object.

Exploding Imported Geometry

When you import a drawing into Revit Structure, you are importing all the elements, such as blocks and
external references (xrefs) from the drawing. (See Implications of Importing vs. Linking for Xrefs on page
58.) They are all contained inside a Revit element called an import symbol.
You can explode (disassemble) the import symbol into its next highest level elements: nested import symbols.
This is a partial explode. A partial explode of an import symbol yields more import symbols, which, in turn,
can be exploded into either elements or other import symbols. This is analogous to exploding in AutoCAD
with nested xrefs and blocks. For example, you explode an xref into other xrefs and blocks. Those xrefs and
blocks can, in turn, be exploded into more blocks and xrefs.
You can also explode the import symbol immediately into Revit text, curves, lines, and filled regions. This
is a full explode.

NOTE You cannot explode linked files or an import symbol that would yield more than 10,000 elements.

To explode imported geometry

1 Select the import symbol.
2 Click Modify | <File Name> tab ➤ Import Instance panel ➤ Explode drop-down ➤ Partial Explode
or Full Explode.
Resulting partial explode import symbols can be exploded again by selecting them and clicking Partial
Explode. You can continue to do this until all import symbols are converted to Revit elements.

Managing Layers in Linked and Imported Files

When you import or link a CAD file to a Revit project, you can query, hide, delete, or change the graphic
display of layers in the file.

Querying Objects in Layers

When you import or link a file to a Revit project, you can query the file for information about its objects.
This allows you to determine the identity of an object and the layer on which it resides. You can also hide
the object’s layer or delete it.

Exploding Imported Geometry | 75

To query objects in layers
1 Open a project view in Revit Structure.
2 Highlight the import symbol for the file, and click to select it.
When you highlight the import symbol, the status bar displays the following:
<imported file name> : Import Symbol : location <Shared> or <Not Shared>.

3 Click Modify | <File Name> tab ➤ Import Instance panel ➤ (Query).

4 Select the object to query, as follows:
■ Move the cursor over the import symbol in the view.
Revit Structure highlights lower-level objects (such as lines) first. Press Tab to switch to
highlighting of higher-level objects, such as blocks.

■ Watch the status bar. When it describes the target object, click to select it.

The Import Instance Query dialog opens and displays the following information:
■ Type: object type

■ Block Name: the block that contains the object, if applicable

■ Layer: the name of the layer containing the object

■ Style By: indicates whether the object style comes from the layer or by color

5 To hide the object’s layer in the current view, click Hide in view.
The selected layer may still be visible in other views.

TIP To see the hidden layer temporarily, click Reveal Hidden Elements on the View Control Bar.
To redisplay the layer, click View tab ➤ Graphics panel ➤ Visibility/Graphics. On the Imported
Categories tab, select the layer, and click OK.

6 To delete the object’s layer from the Revit project, click Delete.
The selected layer is no longer visible in any project views.

7 To close the Import Instance Query dialog, click OK.

The query editor remains active so that you can select other entities.

8 Press Esc to exit the query editor.

Hiding and Deleting Layers

When you import or link a file to a Revit project, you may not want all of the file’s layers to be visible in
Revit Structure. To control the visibility of layers, you can do either of the following:

■ Hide layers: When you hide layers, they are still available to the Revit project, but they do not display
in views. You can make them visible again as needed.

■ Delete layers: When you delete layers, they are not available to the Revit project. (However, they still
exist in the original CAD file.) If you want to restore the layers, you must delete the file and either import
or link it to the project again.

Related topic

■ Changing the Graphic Display of Layers on page 78

76 | Chapter 6 Using Information from Other Sources

Hiding Layers
When you import or link a file, you can specify how to hide its layers in each Revit view. For example, you
can display all layers in one view, but hide some layers in another view. You can redisplay the layers later,
if needed.
If you are not sure on which layer an object resides, see Querying Objects in Layers on page 75.

To hide layers
1 Open a project view in Revit Structure.

2 Click View tab ➤ Graphics panel ➤ (Visibility/Graphics).

3 Click the Imported Categories tab.
4 In the Visibility column, click to expand the DWG file name of the linked or imported file.
Revit Structure lists the layers in the file.

5 Clear the check boxes for any layers that you want to hide in the current view.
6 Click OK.
The layers are hidden in the current view only. To redisplay hidden layers, repeat this process and select the
desired layers.

Deleting Layers
When you delete layers in either an imported file or a linked file, the layers are no longer available to the
Revit project. (However, they still exist in the original CAD file.) If you want to restore the layers, you must
delete the file from the Revit project and link to or import it again.
To delete layers in a linked or imported file, use one of the following methods:
■ When you link or import the file to the Revit project, in the Import or Link dialog, for Layers, select
Visible to display only the layers that are currently visible in AutoCAD, or select to specify the layers to
display in Revit Structure. Any omitted layers are effectively deleted. They are not available to the Revit
project.

■ If you want to delete an object in a CAD file, and you are not sure on which layer it resides, see Querying
Objects in Layers on page 75.

■ Delete specified layers, as described in the following procedure.

To delete known layers

1 Open a project view in Revit Structure.
2 Highlight the import symbol for the file, and click to select it.
The status bar displays the following:
<imported file name> : Import Symbol : location <Shared> or <Not Shared>.

3 Click Modify | <File Name> tab ➤ Import Instance panel ➤ (Delete Layers).
4 In the Select Layers/Levels to Delete dialog, select the layers to delete, and click OK.
The deleted layers do not display in any views in the Revit project.

Hiding and Deleting Layers | 77

Changing the Graphic Display of Layers
When you import or link a file to a Revit project, you can control the graphic display of each layer in the
file. For example, you can change the line color, weight, and style of the objects. For example, when using
a file as an underlay, you can display the entire file in halftone to distinguish it from the Revit model.

Related topic

■ Hiding and Deleting Layers on page 76

Preserving or Discarding Graphic Overrides for Linked Files

When you change the graphic display of layers in a linked file, you can specify whether Revit Structure
preserves or discards the graphic overrides.

NOTE This feature is available for linked CAD files only. It is not available for imported CAD files.

When you preserve graphic overrides, Revit Structure retains any changes made to the graphic display of its
layers when it reloads the linked file. Otherwise, Revit Structure discards graphic overrides when reloading
the linked file. This option applies to all CAD files that are linked to the project.

To preserve or discard graphic overrides for linked files

1 Open the Revit project.

2 Click Manage tab ➤ Manage Project panel ➤ (Manage Links).

3 In the Manage Links dialog, do either of the following:
■ To retain the overrides, select Preserve graphic overrides.

■ To discard the overrides, clear Preserve graphic overrides.

4 Click OK.

Making Global Changes to the Graphic Display of Layers

When you import or link a file to a Revit project, you can control the graphic display of file layers in all
views.

To make global changes to the graphic display of layers

1 Open the Revit project.

2 Click Manage tab ➤ Settings panel ➤ (Object Styles).

3 In the Object Styles dialog, click the Imported Objects tab.
4 Click to expand the DWG file name of the file.
Revit Structure lists the layers in the file.

5 For each layer, change the values for Line Weight, Line Color, or Line Pattern, as desired.
See Object Styles on page 1601.

6 Click OK.

78 | Chapter 6 Using Information from Other Sources

Related topics

■ Preserving or Discarding Graphic Overrides for Linked Files on page 78

■ Hiding and Deleting Layers on page 76

Making View-Specific Changes to the Graphic Display of Layers

When you import or link a file to a Revit project, you can control the graphic display of its layers in individual
views.

To make view-specific changes to the graphic display of layers

1 Open a project view that shows the file.

2 Click View tab ➤ Graphics panel ➤ (Visibility/Graphics).

3 Click the Imported Categories tab.
4 If you want the entire file to appear in halftone, select Halftone.
See Halftone/Underlay on page 1605.

5 In the Visibility column, click to expand the DWG file name.

Revit Structure lists the layers in the file.

6 To change the graphic display of a visible layer in the file:

a Click the Lines column for the layer, and click Override.

b In the Line Graphics dialog, specify the line weight, color, and pattern, and click OK.

7 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog, click OK.

Related topics

■ Preserving or Discarding Graphic Overrides for Linked Files on page 78

■ Hiding and Deleting Layers on page 76

Troubleshooting Problems with Linked Files

The following topics describe issues that you may encounter when linking files to Revit projects.

Changes in the DWG File Are Not Reflected in the Revit Project
Symptom: After linking a DWG file to a Revit project, you made changes to the DWG file in AutoCAD.
However, the Revit project does not display these changes.
Issues and Solutions: This issue can have several causes:

■ The linked file was changed after it was loaded into the Revit project, and the Revit project is still open.
To correct this situation, reload the linked file. In Revit Structure, click Manage tab ➤ Manage Projects
panel ➤ Manage Links. In the Manage Links dialog, on the CAD Formats tab, select the linked file in the
list, and click Reload. Click OK. Revit Structure retrieves the most recently saved version of the linked
file and displays it in the Revit project.
See How Linking to AutoCAD Files Works on page 72.

Troubleshooting Problems with Linked Files | 79

■ The file was imported, not linked.
When a file is imported, Revit Structure does not retrieve or display changes to the imported file. To
confirm that the file was linked and not imported, click Manage tab ➤ Manage Projects panel ➤ Manage
Links. In the Manage Links dialog, the CAD Formats tab lists all linked files. It does not list files that are
imported. Therefore, if the file is not listed here, then it was imported.
To correct this situation, go to the view in which the imported file displays, select it, and press Delete.
Then link to the file. See Linking to an AutoCAD File on page 72.

■ Revit Structure cannot locate the linked file in its saved path.
If the linked file was moved, Revit Structure cannot locate it, and so it cannot retrieve the latest saved
version of the file. To reload the file from a different location, use the Reload From function of the Manage
Links dialog. (See Managing Links on page 1203.)

Changes to the Layer Color and Line Style Do Not Display in the Revit Project
Symptom: You made changes to the graphic display of layers in the linked file. After the linked file was
reloaded into the Revit project, these changes disappeared.
Issue: To save changes to the graphic display of layers in linked files, select the Preserve Graphic Overrides
option on the Manage Links dialog. If this option is not selected, Revit Structure discards graphic overrides
when the linked file is reloaded.
Solution: See Preserving or Discarding Graphic Overrides for Linked Files on page 78.

Layers in the DWG File Do Not Display in the Revit Project

Symptom: Some layers in the linked file do not display in the Revit project.
Issue: The layers may be hidden or deleted.

Solution: To determine whether the layers are hidden or deleted, click View tab ➤ Graphics
panel ➤ Visibility/Graphics. On the Imported Categories tab, click to expand the DWG file. Revit Structure
lists the layers in the file.
Layers that are not listed here have been deleted; they are not available to the Revit project. If you want to
restore the layers, you must first delete the linked file and then link it to the project again. When linking,
be sure that for Layers, you select All or Select. See Linking to an AutoCAD File on page 72.
If the Visibility option for a layer is cleared, the layer is hidden in the current view. To display the layer,
select the Visibility option, and click OK. Revit Structure displays the layer in the current view.

File Operations (Open, Save, Synchronize) Are Blocked or Slow

Symptom: In some cases, Revit cannot open, save, or synchronize with files.
Issue: Some antivirus software solutions lock files, preventing other applications from accessing them.
Solution: You or your network administrator can define the following file extensions as exceptions in your
antivirus filter.

■ Revit Projects (RVT)

■ Revit Families (RFA)

■ Revit Templates (RTE)

■ Autodesk Design Package (ADSK)

80 | Chapter 6 Using Information from Other Sources

■ Industry Foundation Classes (IFC)

■ AutoCAD drawings (DWG)

■ CAD Data Transfer (DXF)

■ MicroStation drawings (DGN)

■ ACIS models (SAT)

■ SketchUp drawings (SKP)

■ Images (BMP, JPG, and PNG)

■ Data (RWS and DAT)

NOTE It may be necessary to contact your network administrator to add these exceptions.

File Operations (Open, Save, Synchronize) Are Blocked or Slow | 81

82
Opening Revit Files
7
To open a Revit file, use any of the following methods:
■ On the Recent Files on page 40 window, under Projects or Families, click the desired option.
■ Press CTRL+O.

■ Click ➤ (Open).

■ Click ➤ (Open), and select a Revit file type.

■ Click and select a file from the Recent Documents list.

■ Click (Open) on the Quick Access toolbar.

NOTE If you are editing a non-workshared file, other users will have read-only access to the file.

Opening a Revit Project File

1 Click ➤ Open ➤ (Project).
2 In the Open dialog, navigate to the folder where the project file resides. To see only files of a
certain type, select that type from the Files of type drop-down list.
3 Select the desired options:
■ Audit: Scans, detects, and fixes corrupt elements in the project. This option can greatly
increase the time required to open files. Use this option only for periodic maintenance of
large workshared files or when you are preparing to upgrade.

■ Detach from Central: Opens a workshared local model separate from the central model. See
Opening Workshared Files Independent of the Central Model on page 1229.

■ Create new local: Opens a local copy of the central model. See Creating a Local Copy of the
Central Model on page 1218.

4 Select the project file, and click Open.

83
NOTE If you are editing a non-workshared file, other users will have read-only access to the file.

Opening Families and Training Files

1 Click ➤ Open ➤ (Family).
2 On the left side of the Open dialog, select a family library or folder.
3 Navigate to the appropriate directory, select the file, and click Open.
To make other directories available from the Open dialog, see Setting Options on page 1623.

NOTE If you are editing a non-workshared file, other users will have read-only access to the file.

Opening Files from the Conceptual Design Environment

The conceptual design environment contains family files and templates that you can download and use in
a massing study. See Template Files for the Conceptual Design Environment on page 140.

To open files from the conceptual design environment

1 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ User Interface drop-down ➤ Recent Files.
2 Under Families, click New Conceptual Mass.
The New Concept Mass Model - Select Template File window opens.

3 In the browser window, navigate to the desired file, and click Open.
See Conceptual Design Environment on page 135.

Opening Files from the Web Library

To download family files or templates from the web library for use in a project, do the following:

1 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ User Interface drop-down ➤ Recent Files.
2 Under Families, click Web Library.
The web library opens in a browser window.

3 In the browser window, navigate to the desired collection, and click the family or template to
download.
4 In the File Download dialog, click Open to open the item in Revit Structure, or click Save to
save it in a specified folder, from which it can be loaded into a project.
5 If you opened a family and want to immediately use it in a project, do the following:

a Click Home tab ➤ Family Editor panel ➤ (Load into Project).

b In the Load into Projects dialog, select the open projects to receive the family, and click
OK.

You can see the new family in the Project Browser under Families.

84 | Chapter 7 Opening Revit Files

Opening Revit Files from Windows Explorer
The following alternative methods open Revit files from Windows Explorer.

■ Double-click a project or family file.

■ Drag a project file from Windows Explorer into Revit Structure.

■ Drag a family file from Windows Explorer into the Project Browser or drawing area of Revit Structure to
load it into the project.

■ Drag a family file from Windows Explorer into anywhere other than the Project Browser or the drawing
area (such as the ribbon, Quick Access toolbar, or the title bar) to open the family in the Family Editor.

■ Drag multiple files from Windows Explorer into an active session of Revit Structure. A dialog opens,
asking whether you want to open dropped files in separate windows or load dropped families into the
current project.

NOTE If you are editing a non-workshared file and another user attempts to open the same file, the user will be
given access to the file in a read-only state.

Opening Revit Files from Windows Explorer | 85

86
Saving Revit Files
8
The Save tool saves the active file to its current name and folder.
To save a file, do any of the following:

■ Click ➤ (Save).
■ Press Ctrl+S.

■ On the Quick Access toolbar, click (Save).

If you want to save the current file to a different file name or location, click ➤ (Save As).
If you are working in a project that has worksharing enabled and you want to save your changes to the central model,
click Collaborate tab ➤ Synchronize panel ➤ Synchronize with Central drop-down ➤ (Synchronize Now). See
Synchronizing with the Central Model on page 1226.

Saving a File with a Different Name or Location

1 Click ➤ (Save As).
2 Select a Project, Family, Template, or Library file type to save.
3 In the Save As dialog, navigate to the desired folder.
4 If desired, change the file name.
5 To specify save options, click Options, set the options as desired, and click OK.
See Save Options on page 88.

6 Click Save.

87
Save Options
When using Save As from the application menu, click Options in the Save As dialog, and specify the following
in the File Save Options dialog:

■ Maximum backups. Specifies the maximum number of backup files. By default, non-workshared projects
have 3 backups, and workshared projects have up to 20 backups. See Backup and Journal Files on page
89.

■ Make this a Central File after save: Sets the current workset-enabled file to be the central model. See
Creating a Central Model from an Existing Workshared File on page 1235.

■ Compact File. Reduces file sizes when saving workset-enabled files. During a normal save, Revit Structure
only writes new and changed elements to the existing files. This can cause files to become large, but it
increases the speed of the save operation. The compacting process rewrites the entire file and removes
obsolete parts to save space. Because it takes more time than a normal save, use the compact option when
the workflow can be interrupted. See Using Workshared Files on page 1217.

■ Open workset default. Sets the workset default for the central model when opened locally. From this
list, you save a worksharing file to always default to one of the following options: All, Editable, Last
Viewed, or Specify. See Creating a Central Model from an Existing Workshared File on page 1235. The only
way a user can change this option is to resave a new central model by selecting "Make this a Central File
after save" on the File Save Options dialog. The local model can use the Reload Latest tool to update the
changed option.
To change this setting in an existing central model, resave the file using Save As and adjust the Save
Options.
When opened locally, you can override this default setting each time the project is opened. The override
only affects that work session, and will revert to defaults the next time the file is opened.

■ Preview. Specifies the preview image that displays when you open or save a project. The default value
for this option is Active View/Sheet. Revit Structure can create a preview image only from open views.
If you select Regenerate if View/Sheet is not up-to-date, Revit Structure updates the preview image
whenever you open or save the project. This option can consume considerable resources on a complex
model. Use it only if you want the preview image to update frequently.

Setting Save Reminders

You can specify how often Revit Structure reminds you to save an open project, or you can turn off the
reminder.

To set save reminders

1 Click ➤ Options.
2 In the Options dialog, click the General tab.
3 To change how often Revit Structure reminds you to save an open project, select a time interval
for Save reminder Interval.
4 To turn off the save reminder, for Save reminder Interval, select No reminders.
5 Click OK.

Related topics

■ General Options on page 1623

■ Revit Options on page 1623

88 | Chapter 8 Saving Revit Files

Backup and Journal Files
All backup operations (such as copying, purging, and so on) occur when you save changes to a project. If
necessary, you can use backup files to roll back the latest changes to a project, restoring the project to a
previously saved state.

NOTE This topic describes backup files for non-workshared projects. For information about backup files for
workshared projects, see Workshared Project Rollback on page 1233.

When you save a non-workshared project, Revit Structure makes a backup copy of the previous version of
the project (that is, the project file before the current save). This backup copy has the name
<project_name>.<nnnn>.rvt, where <nnnn> is a 4-digit number indicating how many times the file has
been saved. The backup file resides in the same folder as the project file.
You can specify the maximum number of backup files that Revit Structure saves. (See Specifying the Number
of Backup Files on page 89.) If the number of backup files exceeds the maximum, then Revit Structure purges
the oldest files. For example, if the maximum is 3 backup files, and the project folder contains 5 backup
files, then Revit Structure deletes the oldest 2 backup files.

Specifying the Number of Backup Files

By default, Revit Structure saves up to 3 backup files for each project. You can change the number of backup
files that Revit Structure saves for a project.

To specify the number of backup files

1 Click ➤ (Save As).

2 In the Save As dialog, click Options.
3 In the File Save Options dialog, for Maximum backups, specify the number of backup files to
save.

Backup Files for Network Saves

Suppose you work on a project whose file is stored in a network location, and the project is not workshared.
When you save changes to the project, Revit Structure does the following:

■ Saves the current changes to the project file in the network location.

■ Makes a backup copy of the saved file, and places it in the Journal folder on the local computer. (See
Journal Files on page 90.)

The local backup file provides protection in case the network save fails. Revit Structure saves up to 3 local
backup files. It purges older backup files.
The local backup file uses the same name as the project file, with a GMT (Greenwich Mean Time) date and
time stamp appended to it. For example, when you save project.rvt, Revit Structure saves a local copy to the
Journal folder, using the file name format project_YYYYMMDD-hhmmss-mmm.rvt.

Backup and Journal Files | 89

Journal Files
Journal files capture the actions taken by the software during a session of Revit Structure, from the time the
software starts to the time it stops. These text files can be used to troubleshoot technical problems with the
software.
Revit Structure creates a new journal file each time you use the software. The journal file with the highest
number is the most recent file. By default, journal files reside in the following location:
C:\Program Files\<Revit product name and version>\Journals
If you encounter problems during a Revit session, your support provider may ask you to send the journal
file and any backup files to help with the troubleshooting process. If you do not encounter problems during
a Revit session, the journal file is of little use and can be deleted. To automate the deletion of old journal
files, see General Options on page 1623.

90 | Chapter 8 Saving Revit Files

Preliminary Design

Start designing the model by defining levels, grids, and the project location, creating a site plan, and performing a massing
study.

91
92
Levels and Grids
9
To establish context and guidelines for the project, create levels and grids.

Levels
Use the Level tool to define a vertical height or story within a building. You create a level for each known
story or other needed reference of the building (for example, first floor, top of wall, or bottom of foundation).
To add levels, you must be in a section or elevation view. When you add levels, you can create an associated
plan view.

93
Levels are finite horizontal planes that act as a reference for level-hosted elements, such as roofs, floors, and
ceilings. You can resize their extents so that they do not display in certain views. For more information, see
Datum Extents and Visibility on page 1527.
When you start a new project using the default template in Revit Structure, 2 levels display: level 1 and level
2.
You can hide level annotations after you add them. For more information, see Hiding Elements in a View
on page 811.

Adding Levels
1 Open the section or elevation view to add levels to.

2 Click Home tab ➤ Datum panel ➤ (Level).

3 Place the cursor in the drawing area and click.

NOTE As you place the cursor to create a level, if the cursor aligns to an existing level line, a temporary
vertical dimension displays between the cursor and that level line.

4 Draw level lines by moving the cursor horizontally.

On the Options Bar, Make Plan View is selected by default. As a result, each level you create is
a story level and has an associated floor plan view and a reflected ceiling plan view. If you click
Plan View Types on the Options Bar, you can choose to create only the view types that you
specify in the Plan View Types dialog. If you clear Make Plan View, the level is considered to be
a non-story level or a reference level; no associated plan view is created. Walls and other
level-based elements can use reference levels as their top or base constraint.
As you draw level lines, the heads and tails of the lines can align to one another. When you
select a level line that is aligned with others, a lock appears to show the alignment. If you move
the level line horizontally, all aligned level lines move with it.

5 Click when the level line is the correct length.

You can change the name of the level by clicking the number to select it. You can also change
the height of the level by clicking the dimension.

Revit Structure assigns the label (for example, Level 1) and the level symbol to the new
level. Use the Project Browser to rename the level, if desired. See Project Browser on page 28. If

94 | Chapter 9 Levels and Grids

you rename the level, the associated name for the floor plan and the reflected ceiling plan update
as well.

Related topics

■ Levels on page 93

■ Modifying Levels on page 95

■ Level Properties on page 97

Modifying Levels
You can modify the appearance of levels in many ways.

Changing the Level Type

To change the level type on placement

1 Click Home tab ➤ Datum panel ➤ Level.

2 In the Type Selector on page 35, select a different level type.

To change the level type in a section or elevation view

1 Select the level line in the drawing area.
2 In the Type Selector on page 35, select a different level type.

Editing Level Lines in an Elevation View

You can change level lines in the following ways:

■ Resize level lines. Select the level line, click on the blue sizing handles, and drag the cursor left or right.

■ Raise or lower levels. Select the level line, and click the dimension value associated with it. Enter a new
value for the dimension.

■ Relabel the level. Select the level and click the label box. Enter a new label for the level.

Moving Levels
You can move level lines in the following ways:

■ Select a level line. A temporary dimension displays between that level line and any level lines immediately
above and below.

Modifying Levels | 95
Selected level line shown with temporary dimensions above and below it

To move the selected level up or down, click the temporary dimension, type a new value, and press
ENTER.

■ Drag the selected level line up or down.

■ To move multiple level lines, select the desired number of level lines and move them up or down.

Offsetting a Level Line from Its Bubble

There may be times when you sketch a level line and want to offset its bubble from the rest of the level line.
1 Sketch a level line, or select an existing level line.
The end of the line near the bubble has drag controls.
Selected level with drag controls

2 Select and move the end drag control near the bubble to resize the level line.

3 Click the Add Elbow drag control ( ), then drag the control to the desired location to move
the bubble away from the level line.
Bubble dragged from level line

When you move the bubble end out of line, the effect appears only in that view, no other views
are affected. The segments created from dragging the bubble have a solid line style. You cannot
change this style.

As you drag a control, the cursor snaps at points similar to the neighboring level lines. The cursor also snaps
as the segments form straight lines.

96 | Chapter 9 Levels and Grids

Level Properties
Most parameter names, values, and descriptions for levels can be modified.

Modifying Level Properties

1 In a project view, select a level line.
2 On the Properties palette, edit instance properties.

3 To edit type properties, on the Properties palette, click (Edit Type).

Changes made to type properties affect all level lines of that type in the project. You can click
Duplicate to create a new level line type.

4 Click OK.

Level Type Properties

Name Description

Constraints

Elevation Base If the elevation base value is set to Project, the elevation reported on a level is with
respect to the project origin. If the base value is set to Shared, then the elevation
reported is with respect to the shared origin. To change the shared origin, you can
relocate the project. See Relocating and Mirroring a Project on page 1269.

Graphics

Line Weight Sets the line weight for the level type. You can change the definition of the line
weight number using the Line Weights tool. See Line Weights on page 1603.

Color Sets the color of the level line. You can choose from a list of colors defined in Revit
Structure, or define your own color.

Line Pattern Sets the line pattern of level lines. The line pattern can be solid or a combination of
dashes and dots. You can choose from a list of values defined in Revit Structure, or
define your own line pattern.

Symbol Determines whether the head of a level line displays a level number in a bubble
(Level Head–Circle), a level number but no bubble (Level Head–No Bubble), or no
level number (<none>).

Symbol at End 1 Default Places a bubble by default at the left end of the level line. When you select a level
line, a check box appears next to the level bubble. Clear the check box to hide the
bubble. Select it again to display the bubble.

Symbol at End 2 Default Places a bubble by default at the right end of the level line.

Dimensions

Automatic Room Computation Height Computation height for the perimeter of a room is measured at a defined distance
above the base level of the room. To use the default computation height (4’ or 1200
mm above the base level of the room), select this option.

Level Properties | 97
Name Description

Computation Height To enable this parameter, clear Automatic Room Computation Height. Enter the
distance above the base level to use when computing the room area and perimeter.If
the room includes a sloped wall, consider using a computation height of 0 (zero).

Level Instance Properties

Name Description

Constraints

Elevation The vertical height of the level.

Identity Data

Name A label for the level. You can assign any label or name you wish to this property.

Design Option A read-only field that indicates the design option in which the level lines display.

Extents

Scope Box The scope box applied to the level. See Controlling Visibility of Datums Using Scope
Boxes on page 1531.

Grids
Use the Grid tool to place column grid lines in the building design. You can then add columns along the
column grid lines. Grid lines are finite planes. You can drag their extents in elevation views so that they do
not intersect level lines. This allows you to determine whether grid lines appear in each new plan view that
you create for a project. See Datum Extents and Visibility on page 1527 and Visibility of Arc Grids in Views
on page 1529.
Grids can be straight lines or arcs.

98 | Chapter 9 Levels and Grids

You can hide grid lines after you add them. For more information, see Hiding Elements in a View on page
811.

Related topic

■ Visibility of Arc Grids in Views on page 1529

Adding Grids
1 Click Home tab ➤ Datum panel ➤ (Grid).
2 Click Modify | Place Grid tab ➤ Draw panel, and select a sketch option.

Use (Pick Lines) to snap the grid to an existing line, such as a wall.
For more information about sketch options, see Sketching on page 1405.

3 Click when the grid is the correct length.

Revit Structure automatically numbers each grid. To change the grid number, click the number, enter the
new value, and press ENTER. You can use letters for grid line values. If you change the first grid number to
a letter, all subsequent grid lines update appropriately.
As you draw grid lines, the heads and tails of the lines can align to one another. If grid lines are aligned and
you select a line, a lock appears to indicate the alignment. If you move the grid extents, all aligned grid lines
move with it.

Related topics

■ Grids on page 98

■ Modifying Grids on page 99

■ Grid Properties on page 105

Modifying Grids
You can modify the appearance of grids in many ways.

Changing the Grid Type

To change the grid type on placement

1 Click Home tab ➤ Datum panel ➤ (Grid).

2 In the Type Selector on page 35, select a different grid type.

To change the grid type in a project view

1 Select the grid line in the drawing area.
2 In the Type Selector on page 35, select a different grid type.

Changing Grid Value

1 Click the grid header, then click the value in the grid header.
2 Enter a new value.

Adding Grids | 99
You can enter a number or a letter.

You can also change the value by selecting the grid line, and on the Properties palette, entering a different
value for the Name property.

Offsetting a Grid Line from Its Bubble

There may be times when you sketch a grid line and want to offset its bubble from the rest of the grid line.
1 Sketch a grid line, or select an existing grid line.
The end of the line near the bubble has drag controls.
Selected grid with drag controls

2 To resize the grid line, select and move the end drag control near the bubble.

3 Click the Add Elbow drag control ( ), then drag the control to the desired location to move
the bubble away from the grid line.
Bubble dragged from grid line

When you move the bubble end out of line, the effect appears only in that view. The segments
created from dragging the bubble have a solid line style. You cannot change this style.

As you drag a control, the cursor snaps at points similar to the neighboring grids. The cursor also snaps as
the segments form straight lines.

Showing and Hiding Grid Bubbles

You can control whether grid bubbles display at either end of a grid line. You can do this graphically for an
individual grid line in a view, or for all grid lines of a particular type by changing type properties.

To show or hide individual grid bubbles

1 Open a view that displays grid lines.
2 Select a grid line.

100 | Chapter 9 Levels and Grids

Revit Structure displays a check box near the grid bubble. You may need to zoom in to see it
clearly.

3 Clear the check box to hide the bubble, or select it to show the bubble.
You can repeat this process to show or hide the bubble at the opposite end of the grid line.

To show or hide grid bubbles using type properties

1 Open a view that displays grid lines.

2 Select a grid line, and click Modify | Grids tab ➤ Properties panel ➤ (Type Properties).
3 In the Type Properties dialog, do any of the following:
■ To display grid bubbles at the start point of grid lines in a plan view, select Plan View Symbols
End 1 (Default).

■ To display grid bubbles at the endpoint of grid lines in a plan view, select Plan View Symbols
End 2 (Default).

■ In views other than plan views (such as elevations and sections), indicate where to display
grid bubbles. For Non-Plan View Symbols (Default), select Top, Bottom, Both (top and
bottom), or None.

4 Click OK.
Revit Structure updates all grid lines of this type in all views.

Adjusting the Center Segment of a Grid Line

You can adjust the length of the gap or center segment in an individual grid line. For example, you may
want to adjust the gap so the grid line does not display through the middle of a model element. This feature
is available when the grid line uses a grid type for which the Center Segment parameter is Custom or Gap.
(See Customizing Grid Lines on page 103.)

Modifying Grids | 101

A grid line that has been adjusted to end at
the wall

To adjust the center segment of a grid line

1 Select the grid line in the view.
Revit Structure displays a blue dot on the grid line. You may need to zoom in to see it clearly.

NOTE If you do not see a blue dot indicating the segment boundary, move the 3D extent for the
grid line outward until the dot is visible. In addition, check the setting of the Center Segment

parameter. To do this, select the grid line, click Modify | Grids tab ➤ Properties panel ➤ (Type
Properties). In the Type Properties dialog, change the value for Center Segment to None or Custom.

The default length of the end segments of a grid line is defined by the End Segments Length
parameter of the grid type.

2 Drag the blue dot along the grid line to the desired position.
The end segment adjusts its length accordingly.

102 | Chapter 9 Levels and Grids

Customizing Grid Lines
You can customize grid types in the following ways:

■ Change the line color, weight, and pattern of the entire grid line. (Modify the Bubble grid type, or create
your own. See Changing a Continuous Grid Line on page 103.)

■ Hide the center segment of the grid lines to create a gap, displaying only the end segments in views.
(Modify the Bubble Gap grid type, or create your own. See Creating a Grid Line with a Center Gap on
page 104.)

■ Display the center segment of the grid line using a different line color, weight, and pattern than the end
segments. (Modify the Bubble Custom Gap grid type, or create your own. See Creating a Grid Line with
a Center Segment on page 104.)

To make these customizations, you modify a grid type. In views, all grid lines of that type reflect the changes.

Changing a Continuous Grid Line

1 Open a view that displays grid lines.

2 Select a grid line, and click Modify | Grids tab ➤ Properties panel ➤ (Type Properties).

Modifying Grids | 103

3 In the Type Properties dialog, do the following:
■ For Center Segment, select Continuous.

■ For End Segment Weight, End Segment Color, and End Segment Pattern, specify the line
weight, color, and pattern of the grid line.

■ Use the other parameters to indicate which grid bubble to use and where it should display.
See Grid Type Properties on page 105.

4 Click OK.
Revit Structure updates all grid lines of this type in all views.

Creating a Grid Line with a Center Gap

1 Open a view that displays grid lines.

2 Select a grid line, and click Modify | Grids tab ➤ Properties panel ➤ (Type Properties).
3 In the Type Properties dialog, do the following:
■ For Center Segment, select None.

■ For End Segment Weight, End Segment Color, and End Segment Pattern, specify the line
weight, color, and pattern of the segments to display on each end of the grid line.

■ For End Segments Length, enter the length of the segments (in paper space) to display on
each end of the grid line.

■ Use the other parameters to indicate which grid bubble to use and where it should display.
See Grid Type Properties on page 105.

4 Click OK.
Revit Structure updates all grid lines of this type in all views.

Creating a Grid Line with a Center Segment

1 Open a view that displays grid lines.

2 Select a grid line, and click Modify | Grids tab ➤ Properties panel ➤ (Type Properties).
3 In the Type Properties dialog, do the following:
■ For Center Segment, select Custom.

■ For Center Segment Weight, Center Segment Color, and Center Segment Pattern, specify
the line weight, color, and pattern of the center segment of the grid line.

■ For End Segment Weight, End Segment Color, and End Segment Pattern, specify the line
weight, color, and pattern of the end segments of the grid line.

■ For End Segments Length, enter the length of the segments (in paper space) to display on
each end of the grid line.

■ Use the other parameters to indicate which grid bubble to use and where it should display.
See Grid Type Properties on page 105.

4 Click OK.
Revit Structure updates all grid lines of this type in all views.

104 | Chapter 9 Levels and Grids

Grid Properties
You can change properties for individual grid lines or for grid types.

Modifying Grid Properties

1 In a project view, select a grid line.
2 On the Properties palette, edit instance properties.
See Grid Instance Properties on page 106.

3 To edit type properties, on the Properties palette, click (Edit Type).

See Grid Type Properties on page 105. Changes made to type properties affect all grid lines of
that type in the project. You can click Duplicate to create a new grid line type.

4 Click OK.

Grid Type Properties

Name Description

Graphics

Symbol The symbol to use for the ends of a grid line. The symbol can display a grid number
in a bubble (Grid Head–Circle), a grid number but no bubble (Grid Head–No Bubble),
or no grid bubble or number (none).

Center Segment The type of center segment to display in the grid line. Select None, Continuous, or
Custom. See Customizing Grid Lines on page 103.

Center Segment Weight If the Center Segment parameter is Custom, the line weight is used for the center
segment.

Center Segment Color If the Center Segment parameter is Custom, the line color is used for the center
segment. Select a color defined in Revit Structure, or define your own color. See
Colors on page 1622.

Center Segment Pattern If the Center Segment parameter is Custom, the pattern is used for the center seg-
ment. The line pattern can be solid or a combination of dashes and dots.

End Segment Weight The line weight to use for a continuous grid line, or if Center Segment is None or
Custom, the line weight for the end segments.

End Segment Color The line color to use for a continuous grid line, or if Center Segment is None or
Custom, the line color for the end segments.

End Segment Pattern The line style to use for a continuous grid line, or if Center Segment is None or
Custom, the line style for the end segments.

End Segments Length If the Center Segment parameter is None or Custom, the length of the end segments
(in paper space).

Plan View Symbols End 1 (Default) In a plan view, the default setting to display a bubble at the start point of a grid
line. (That is, when you draw a grid line, the bubble displays at its start point.) If

Grid Properties | 105

Name Description
desired, you can show or hide bubbles for individual grid lines in views. See Showing
and Hiding Grid Bubbles on page 100.

Plan View Symbols End 2 (Default) In a plan view, the default setting to display a bubble at the endpoint of a grid line.
(That is, when you draw a grid line, the bubble displays at its endpoint.) If desired,
you can show or hide bubbles for individual grid lines in views. See Showing and
Hiding Grid Bubbles on page 100.

Non-Plan View Symbols (Default) In project views other than plan views (such as elevations and sections), the default
location where bubbles display on the grid line: Top, Bottom, Both (top and bottom),
or None. If desired, you can show or hide bubbles for individual grid lines in views.
See Showing and Hiding Grid Bubbles on page 100.

Grid Instance Properties

Name Description

Graphics

Center Mark Visible For an arc grid line, displays its center mark.

Identity Data

Name A value for the grid line. This can be a numeric or alphanumeric value. The first in-
stance defaults to 1.

Design Option The design option in which the grid lines display. Read-only.

Extent

Scope Box The scope box applied to the grid. See Controlling Visibility of Datums Using Scope
Boxes on page 1531.

106 | Chapter 9 Levels and Grids

Project Location and
Orientation 10
When you create a project, specify the geographic location using the street address, nearest major city, or the latitude and
longitude. This project-wide setting is useful for generating location-specific shadows for views that use them, such as
solar studies, walkthroughs, and rendered images.
You can also rotate a view to reflect True North (instead of Project North, which is the top of the view). Rotating a view
to True North ensures that natural light falls on the correct sides of the building model and that the sun’s path through
the sky is accurately simulated.

Related topics

■ Shared Positioning on page 1265

■ Relocating and Mirroring a Project on page 1269
■ Mirroring a Project on page 1270

Specifying the Project Location

1 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Location panel ➤ Location.

The Location Weather and Site dialog opens. You can also access this dialog from the Sun Settings
dialog on page 1390.

2 Click the Location tab.

3 For Define Location by, select one of the following:
■ Internet Mapping Service. When your computer is connected to the Internet, this option
displays an interactive map through the Google Maps™ mapping service. Until you specify
a different project location, the location is defined as <Default> and is set to the longitude
and latitude of the major city specified by Revit Structure for your locale.

NOTE As its name implies, the Internet Mapping Service requires a working Internet connection
in order to be fully functional. If Internet service is unavailable, you can still use this method to
specify a project location; however, the corresponding longitude and latitude for the location
cannot be set until your Internet connection is restored, as described in this topic.

107
■ Default City List. Displays a list of major cities from which to select a location. Until you
specify a different project location, the location is defined as <Default> and is set to the
longitude and latitude of the major city specified by Revit Structure for your locale. The
Default City List option is recommended for HVAC sizing. No Internet connection is required.

4 Specify the project location using one of these methods:

Internet Mapping Service

a For Project Address, enter the street address, city and state, or latitude and longitude of the
project, and click Search. Enter latitude and longitude coordinates as <latitude>,<longitude>.
The value you enter for Project Address in this dialog does not affect the project address
that displays in the title blocks of sheets for the project.
Your search results display.

b If necessary, respond to any of the following alerts as described. For additional information,
see Troubleshooting Location Dialog Issues on page 109.
■ Address not found. Either refine the project address and click Search or, for a newly
established address, enter a nearby address, click Search, and then drag the project

location map pin to the appropriate location.

■ Multiple results found. Click one of the hyperlinked locations displayed in the project
location tooltip, and click Search.

■ No Internet connection. Check your Internet connection. If no connection is available,

click OK to close the Location dialog and save your project address. When a dialog
notifies you of a mismatch between the project address you entered and the selected
map location, click Continue. If you do not have access to the Internet at all, no further
steps are needed; the project address is stored as text. If the Internet is only temporarily
unavailable, when Internet service is restored, re-open the Location dialog, click Search,
and continue with the steps in this procedure.

c Use the following tools to adjust the map as needed:

■ Pan. When you place the cursor over the map, the cursor changes to a hand, and you

can drag the map to pan the view. You can also use these controls: (Pan up),

(Pan down), (Pan left), and (Pan right).

■ Zoom. Click (Zoom in) or (Zoom out), or drag the zoom slider to adjust
the zoom level.

■ Return to last result. Click if you have adjusted the map and want to restore the
last search result.

■ Map views. Click a map view to select it:

■ Map. Shows street map.

■ Satellite. Shows satellite imagery.

■ Hybrid. Shows street map superimposed on satellite imagery.

■ Terrain. Default view. Shows street map superimposed on topographical map.

108 | Chapter 10 Project Location and Orientation

d Drag the project location map pin to move the project location as needed.
When you move the project location pin, the Project Address field displays a searchable
latitude/longitude value. Click Search to resolve the address and display it in the Project
Address field. If multiple results are found, click one of the hyperlinked locations displayed
in the project location tooltip, and then click Search.

NOTE Unlike the Google Maps™ mapping service, the Location dialog does not support adding
placemarks.

e If the project is located in an area that observes daylight savings time and you want shadows
to be adjusted accordingly, then select Use Daylight Savings time.

Default City List

a Specify the project location using one of the following methods:

■ Nearest major city. For City, select a city from the list.
The corresponding Latitude, Longitude, and Time Zone values are displayed.

■ Exact location. Enter values for Latitude and Longitude.

b If the project is located in an area that observes daylight savings time and you want shadows
to be adjusted accordingly, then select Use Daylight Savings time.

5 Click OK.

Related topics

■ Defining Named Positions on page 1265

■ Creating Solar Studies on page 1376

■ Rendering an Image on page 1076

Troubleshooting Location Dialog Issues

The following sections provide tips to help you identify and resolve commonly encountered Location dialog
alerts and issues:

Internet service has been disrupted

Issue: Either your computer is not configured for Internet access, or your Internet connection is temporarily
down.
Solution: Check your Internet connection. If you are able to restore the connection, enter a project address,
and then click Search to resolve the address. If no connection is available, enter a project address, and then
click OK. When the Project Address Not Resolved dialog displays, click Close.
If you do not have access to the Internet at all, no further steps are needed; the project address is stored as
text. If Internet service is only temporarily unavailable, when service is restored, re-open the Location dialog,
and click Search.

Could not establish connection to Internet Mapping Service

Issue: Your access to the Internet Mapping Service may be blocked by your network settings.

Troubleshooting Location Dialog Issues | 109

Solution: Check your access settings to autodesk.com. If this site is blocked by your company's firewall or
some other network security system, contact your network administrator.

Address not found

Issue: The project address you entered could not be found by the Google Maps™ mapping service.
Solution: Either refine the project address and click Search or, for a newly established address, enter a nearby
address, click Search, and then drag the project location map pin to the appropriate location.

Project address not resolved

Issue: The project address you entered cannot be resolved because no Internet service is detected.
Solution: Click Close to clear the alert. Keep the Location dialog open, and check your Internet connection.
If you are able to restore the connection, click Search to resolve the project address. If no connection is
available, then click OK.
If you do not have access to the Internet at all, no further steps are needed; the project address is stored as
text. If Internet service is only temporarily unavailable, when service is restored, re-open the Location dialog,
and click Search.

Setting project address

Issue: After you enter a project address, if you click OK before you click Search, the Google Maps™ mapping
service cannot resolve the address and update the map. Therefore, the project address does not match selected
map location.
Solution: Select one of the options in the Setting Project Address dialog: 1) Go back to the Location dialog,
and click Search to resolve the address you entered, or 2) Continue using the project address you entered,
and store it as text.

Multiple results are displayed in the project location tooltip

Issue: More than one address matches your entry.
Solution: Click one of the hyperlinked locations displayed in the project location tooltip, and click Search.

Numbers display for project address

Issue: When you drag the project location map pin to a new location, the corresponding longitude and
latitude display in the Project Address field.
Solution: Click Search to resolve the project address.

Rotating a View to True North

1 Open a plan view.

NOTE If you need to rotate a 3D view to True North, use the ViewCube.

2 Change the view orientation to True North, as follows:

a Access view properties.

b On the Properties palette, for Orientation, select True North, and click Apply.

This change allows you to see accurate shadows in the plan view. See Displaying Sun and Shadows
on page 1375.

110 | Chapter 10 Project Location and Orientation

3 Rotate the project to True North, as follows:

a Click Manage tab ➤ Project Location panel ➤ Position drop-down ➤ Rotate True
North.

b Rotate the building model, using one of the following methods:

■ On the Options Bar, for Angle from Project to True North, enter a value to set the angle
of rotation.
For example, if the difference between Project North (the top of the view) and True
North is 45 degrees, enter 45. The model rotates in the view to the specified angle.

■ Click in the view to rotate the model to True North graphically (similar to using the
Rotate tool).

Rotating a building model in a plan view that is oriented to True North

Plan view with the building model rotated to True North

Related topics

■ Project Location and Orientation on page 107

■ Shared Positioning on page 1265

Rotating Project North

Drafting conventions dictate that Project North is the top of the view. If you need to change Project North,
use the Rotate Project North tool. This tool changes Project North for all views in the project.

Rotating Project North | 111

1 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Location panel ➤ Position drop-down ➤ Rotate Project
North.
2 In the Rotate Project dialog, select the desired option.
3 Click OK.
A message displays to indicate that the project was rotated. It also shows errors, if any. You can export errors
to review and correct them. See Exporting Warnings to a File on page 1681.

112 | Chapter 10 Project Location and Orientation

Site Design
11
Revit Structure features several tools to help you lay out a site plan. You can start by sketching a toposurface, add property
lines, a building pad, and parking and site components. You can then create a 3D view or render it for a more realistic
presentation.

Site Settings
You can modify a project's global site settings at any time. You can define contour line intervals, add
user-defined contour lines, and select the section cut material.

Defining Site Settings

Concepts
You can modify a project's global site settings at any time. You can define contour line intervals, add
user-defined contour lines, and select the section cut material.

113
To see the results of your changes to the contour line settings, open a site plan view. To see the results of
your changes to the section cut material, open a section view.

■ Select At Intervals Of, and enter a value for contour line intervals. This value determines the elevation
at which contour lines display.

■ For Passing Through Elevation, enter a value to set the starting elevation for contour lines.
By default, Passing Through Elevation is set to zero. If you set the contour interval to 10, for example,
lines display at -20, -10, 0, 10, 20. If you set the Passing Through Elevation value to 5, lines display at
-25, -15, -5, 5, 15, 25.

Adding Custom Contour Lines to a Site Plan

■ Start. Enter the elevation where additional contour lines begin to display.

■ Stop. Enter the elevation at which additional contour lines no longer display. This value is enabled when
you select Multiple Values for Range Type.

■ Increment. Specify the increment for each additional contour line. This value is enabled when you select
Multiple Values for Range Type.

■ Range Type. For one additional contour line, select Single Value. For multiple contour lines, select
Multiple Values.

■ Subcategory. Specify the line style for the contour line. The default styles are Hidden Lines, Primary
Contours, Secondary Contours, and Triangulation Edges. To create a custom line style, see Object Styles
on page 1601.

NOTE If you clear At Intervals of, custom contour lines still display.

Setting Section Graphics

■ For Section cut material, select a material to use to display the site in a section view. Appropriate materials
include Site-Earth, Site-Grass, and Site-Sand.

■ For Elevation of poche base, enter a value to control the depth of the cross-section of earth, for example,
–30 feet or –25 meters. This value controls the poche depth for all topography elements in your project.

Setting Property Data

■ Specify an option for Angle Display. If you select Degrees, property lines display in the Property Lines
bearings table using the 360-degree bearing standard. Property line tags display using the same
notation.

■ Specify an option for Units. If you select Decimal degrees, the angles in the Property Lines bearings
table display as decimals rather than as degrees, minutes, and seconds.

How do I get here?

Click Architect & Site tab ➤ Model Site panel ➤ .

Related Topics
■ Contour Line Labels on page 130

■ Project Location and Orientation on page 107

■ Site Settings Properties on page 115

114 | Chapter 11 Site Design

Site Settings Properties
Name Description

Contour Line Display Displays contour lines. If you clear the check box, custom contour lines still display
in the drawing area.

At Intervals of Sets the interval between contour lines.

Passing Through Elevation Contour intervals are based on this value. For example, if you set the contour interval
at 10, contour lines display at -20, -10, 0, 10, 20. If the Passing Through Elevation
value is set to 5, lines display at -25, -15, -5, 5, 15, 25.

Additional Contours

Start Sets the elevation where additional contour lines begin.

Stop Sets the elevation where additional contour lines no longer display.

Increment Sets the interval for additional contour lines.

Range Type Select Single Value to insert one additional contour line. Select Multiple Values to
insert additional incremental contour lines.

Subcategory Sets the type of contour lines to display. Select a value from the list. You can define
custom contour line types using the Object Styles tool, in the Topography category.

Section Graphics

Section cut material Sets the material that displays in a section view.

Elevation of poche base Controls the depth of the cross-section of earth (for example, –30 feet or –25 meters).
This value controls the poche depth for all topography elements in your project.

Property Data

Angle Display Specifies the display of angular values on property line tags.

Units Specifies the units to use when displaying bearing values in the Property Lines table.

Toposurfaces
The Toposurface tool defines a topographical surface (a toposurface) using points. You can create toposurfaces
in 3D views or site plans.

Creating a Toposurface by Picking Points

1 Open a 3D or site plan view.

2 On the Options Bar, set a value for Elevation.

The points and their elevations are used to create the surface.

3 Next to the Elevation text box, select one of the following:

■ Absolute Elevation. Points display at the specified elevation. You can place points anywhere in the
active drawing area.

Site Settings Properties | 115

■ Relative to Surface. Allows you to edit an existing toposurface by placing points on it at the elevation
you specify. To use this option effectively, you may want to work in a shaded 3D view.

4 Click in the drawing area to place points. If needed, change the elevation on the Options Bar as you
place additional points.

How do I get here?

Click Architect & Site tab ➤ Model Site panel ➤ (Toposurface).

Related Topics
■ Splitting a Toposurface on page 119

■ Toposurface Subregions on page 118

■ Toposurface and Subregion Properties on page 122

Create from Import

Creating a Toposurface from Imported 3D Data

You can automatically generate a toposurface based on 3D contour data imported in DWG, DXF, or DGN
formats. Revit Structure analyzes the 3D contour data and places a series of elevation points along the contour
lines.

1 Open a 3D view of the site plan.

2 Select the imported 3D contour data in the drawing area.

The Add Points from Selected Layers dialog displays.

3 Select the layers to which you want to apply elevation points, and click OK.

How do I get here?

Click Massing & Site tab ➤ Model Site panel ➤ (Toposurface).

On the Modify | Edit Surface tab, click Tools panel ➤ Create From Import drop-down ➤ (Select Import
Instance).

Related Topics

Related topics

■ Splitting a Toposurface on page 119

■ Toposurface Subregions on page 118

■ Toposurface and Subregion Properties on page 122

Creating a Toposurface from a Points File

Preparing a Points File

A points file is typically generated by a civil engineering software application. The file provides contour data
using a regularized grid of elevation points.

116 | Chapter 11 Site Design

The points file must contain x, y, and z coordinate numbers as the first numeric values in the file. The file
must also be in a comma-delimited file format (a CSV or TXT file). Additional information in the file (such
as a point name) is ignored. Any additional numeric information for a point must occur after the x, y, and
z coordinate values. If the file contains 2 points with the same x and y coordinates, Revit Structure uses the
point with the largest z value.

1 Open a 3D or site plan view.

2 In the Open dialog, navigate to the location of the points file.

3 In the Format dialog, specify the units used to measure the points in the points file (for example, decimal
feet or meters), and click OK.
Revit Structure generates points and a toposurface from the coordinate information in the file.

How do I get here?

Click Architect & Site tab ➤ Model Site panel ➤ (Toposurface).

On the Modify | Edit Surface tab, click Tools panel ➤ Create From Import drop-down ➤ (Specify Points
File).

Related Topics
■ Splitting a Toposurface on page 119

■ Toposurface Subregions on page 118

■ Toposurface and Subregion Properties on page 122

Best Practices
When viewing a toposurface, consider the following:

■ Visibility. You can control the visibility of topographic points. There are 2 topographic point subcategories,
Boundary and Interior. Revit Structure classifies points automatically.

■ Triangulation edges. Triangulation edges for toposurfaces are turned off by default. You can turn them
on by selecting them from the Model Categories/Topography category in the Visibility/Graphics dialog.

Example
Sample topographical surface defined by picking points in a site plan view

Toposurfaces | 117
Simplifying a Toposurface
Simplifying a surface can improve system performance, particularly on surfaces with a large number of
points.

1 Open the site plan view and select the toposurface.

2 Enter a value for surface accuracy, and click OK.

3 Click (Finish Surface).

How do I get here?

Click Modify | Topography tab ➤ Surface panel ➤ (Edit Surface).

Click Edit Surface tab ➤ Tools panel ➤ (Simplify Surface).

Related topics
Merging Toposurfaces on page 120
Toposurface and Subregion Properties on page 122
Toposurfaces on page 115

Toposurface Subregions
Adding a Toposurface Subregion

■ Click (Pick Lines) or use other sketch tools to create a subregion on the toposurface.

Changing a Toposurface Subregion

1 Select the subregion.

2 On the Subregion panel, click (Edit Boundary).

3 Click (Pick Lines) or use other sketch tools to modify a subregion on the toposurface.

Example
Toposurface subregions are areas that you sketch inside existing toposurfaces. For example, you can use
subregions to draw parking lots on a graded surface, roads, or islands. Creating a subregion does not result
in separate surfaces. It merely defines an area of the surface where you can apply a different set of properties,
such as material.
The following image shows a toposurface that has a toposurface subregion, shown in gray.

118 | Chapter 11 Site Design

How do I get here?

■ Click Architect & Site tab ➤ Model Site panel ➤ (Subregion).

Related Topics
■ Splitting a Toposurface on page 119

■ Graded Regions on page 121

■ Toposurface and Subregion Properties on page 122

Splitting a Toposurface
Splitting a Toposurface
1 Open a site plan or 3D view.

2 In the drawing area, select the toposurface to split.

Revit Structure enters sketch mode.

3 Click Modify | Split Surface tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ (Pick Lines), or use other sketch tools to split the
toposurface.
You cannot pick toposurface lines with the Pick Lines tool. You can pick other valid lines, such as walls.

Sketching the Split Surface

1 Sketch a single closed loop that does not touch boundaries of the surface.

Splitting a Toposurface | 119

2 Sketch any number of open loops. Both ends of an open loop must lay on the boundary of the surface.
No part of the open loop can intersect or be coincident with the boundary of the surface.

Example
You can split a toposurface into 2 distinct surfaces and then edit those surfaces independently. After splitting
a surface, you can assign different materials to these surfaces to depict roads, lakes, plazas, or hills. You can
also delete entire portions of the toposurface.
Sample split surface

How do I get here?

Click Architect & Site tab ➤ Modify Site panel ➤ (Split Surface).

Merging Toposurfaces
Merging Toposurfaces
1 Select the primary surface.

2 Select the secondary surface.

The 2 surfaces merge into one.

Removing Points on Common Edges

■ Clear Remove points on common edges on the Options Bar.
This option removes excess points that were inserted after a surface was split. The option is selected by
default.

Examples
You can merge 2 separate toposurfaces into one surface. This tool is useful after previously splitting the
surface.
The surfaces to be merged must share a common edge or overlap.
Valid split surfaces for merging

120 | Chapter 11 Site Design

Invalid split surfaces for merging

How do I get here?

Click Architect & Site tab ➤ Modify Site panel ➤ (Merge Surfaces).

Graded Regions
To create a graded region, you select a toposurface, which should be an existing surface in the current phase.
Revit Structure marks the original surface as demolished and makes a copy with a matching boundary. Revit
Structure marks the copy as new in the current phase.

To grade a toposurface

1 In the Edit Graded Region dialog, select one of the following:

■ Create a new toposurface exactly like the existing one.

■ Create a new toposurface based on the perimeter points only.

2 Select the toposurface.

If you are editing the surface, Revit Structure enters sketch mode.

Example

How do I get here?

Click Architect & Site tab ➤ Modify Site panel ➤ (Graded Region).

Related topics
■ Reporting Cut and Fill Volumes on a Site on page 124

■ Toposurface Subregions on page 118

■ Toposurface and Subregion Properties on page 122

Graded Regions | 121

Toposurface and Subregion Properties
Name Description

Materials and Finishes

Material Select the surface material from the list. You can create your own toposurface ma-
terial. Topographical surfaces do not support materials with surface patterns. See
Materials on page 1573.

Dimensions

Projected Area The projected area is the area that the surface covers when you look down on it.
This is a read-only value.

Surface Area Displays the total surface area. This is a read-only value.

Identity Data

Comments User-defined comments about the toposurface, which can display in schedules.

Name The name of the toposurface, which can display in schedules.

Mark A unique identifier you can assign.

Phasing

Phase Created The phase when the toposurface is created.

Phase Demolished The phase when the toposurface is demolished.

Property Lines
To create property lines, you can use the sketching tools in Revit Structure or enter survey data directly into
the project. Revit Structure aligns the survey data with True North.

Create by Sketching
1 Open a site plan view.

2 In the Create Property Line dialog, select Create by sketching.

3 Click (Pick Lines) or other sketch tools to sketch lines.

4 Sketch the property lines.

Lines should form a closed loop. If you sketch an open loop, and click Finish Property Line, Revit
Structure issues a warning that it will not calculate the area. You can ignore the warning to continue,
or close the loop.

Create by Entering Distances and Bearings

1 Open a site plan view.

2 In the Create Property Lines dialog, select Create by entering distances and bearings.

3 In the Property Lines dialog, click Insert, and add the distances and bearings from your survey data.

122 | Chapter 11 Site Design

4 (Optional) Describe a property line as an arc.

How to

a For Distance and Bearing, enter values that describe a line segment between 2 points on the arc.

b For Type, select Arc.

c For Radius, enter a value.

The radius value must be greater than half the length of the line segment. The larger the radius,
the larger the circle becomes, resulting in a flatter arc.

d For L/R, select L if the arc appears to the left of the line segment. Select R if the arc appears to the
right of the line segment.

5 Insert additional lines as needed.

6 Click Up and Down to modify the order of the property lines.

7 In the drawing area, move the property lines to their exact placement, and click to place.

NOTE You can snap the property line to a benchmark using the Move tool..

Property Lines Example

Property lines on a topographical surface

Options
In addition to viewing property lines in a drawing, you can do the following with them:

■ Scheduling. You can schedule property lines. The schedule can include the Name and Area property line
parameters. (The format of the area comes from the Area Units Format type property of the property
lines.) When you create the schedule, select Property Lines as the category to schedule.

■ Tagging. You can tag property lines that can report square footage or acreage. Load the tags from the
Annotations folder of the Revit Structure family library. The tags are Property Tag - Acres.rfa (acreage),
Property Tag - SF.rfa (square footage), and M_Property Tag.rfa (metric).

■ Exporting. You can export property line area information when you export your project to an ODBC
database. For more information about creating an ODBC database.

How do I get here?

Click Architect & Site tab ➤ Modify Site panel ➤ (Property Line).

Related Topic
■ Converting Sketched Property Lines to Table-Based Property Lines on page 124

Property Lines | 123

Converting Sketched Property Lines to Table-Based Property Lines
1 Open a site plan view.
2 In the drawing area, select the sketched property line.

3 Click Modify | Property Lines tab ➤ Property Lines panel ➤ (Edit Table).
4 Read the Constraints Lost warning, and click Yes to continue.
5 In the Property Lines dialog, make any necessary changes and click OK.

Reporting Cut and Fill Volumes on a Site

Revit Structure can report cut and fill volumes on a site to aid in determining the costs of landscape
modification during site development.
Revit Structure reports the values by making a comparison between a surface from one phase and, from a
later phase, another surface whose boundary lies within the earlier surface. For example, Revit Structure can
compare a toposurface created in Phase 1 and a toposurface created in Phase 2 that lies within the boundary
of the surface from Phase 1. (See Project Phasing on page 877.)
When you select the later surface and click Element Properties, you see the following instance properties:

■ The Cut value is the volume removed (where the later surface is lower than the earlier surface).

■ The Fill value is the volume added (where the later surface is higher than the earlier surface).

■ Net Cut/Fill value comes from subtracting the cut value from the fill value.

Viewing the Cut/Fill Volumes

This procedure is a general method of reporting cut/fill values. There are other ways to report values, including
sketching a new surface within an existing surface.
1 Create a toposurface in a site plan view. See Toposurfaces on page 115.
2 Select the finished toposurface.
3 On the Properties palette, set Phase Created to a phase earlier than the view's phase.
For example, when the view's phase is New Construction, set the Phase Created value to Existing.

4 To create a graded region on the toposurface, do the following:

■ Click Architect & Site tab ➤ Modify Site panel ➤ (Graded Region).

■ In the Edit Graded Region dialog, select Create a new toposurface exactly like the existing
one.

■ Select the toposurface.

This demolishes the original surface and creates a copy that occupies the same boundary as the
original.

5 Click (Finish Surface).

6 Select the toposurface copy, and notice in the Properties palette that Revit Structure lists the
new cut/fill properties for the toposurface.

NOTE You may need to press Tab to select the copied surface. You can apply a phase filter to the
view to see only new elements, and not demolished ones. See Phase Filters on page 879.

124 | Chapter 11 Site Design

Cut and Fill in a Schedule
You can create a topography schedule that includes cut, fill, and net cut/fill values. You should also name
the different surfaces to distinguish them in your schedule. See Creating a Schedule or Quantity on page
772.

Cut and Fill Reporting with Building Pads

If you add a building pad to a graded surface, you will see cut and fill reported separately for the pad and
the toposurface in a topography schedule. This is because the pad divides the graded surface into 2 surfaces:
one is the surface under the pad (the graded surface), and one is the surface that is not under the pad (the
pad surface).
You should name both the graded surface and the pad surface to distinguish them in your schedule.
To select the surface under the pad, press Tab to highlight it, or turn off the pad's visibility. See Overriding
Visibility and Graphic Display of Individual Elements on page 802.

Building Pads
You can add a building pad to a toposurface and then modify the pad's structure and depth. You add a
building pad by sketching a closed loop on a toposurface. After sketching the pad, you can specify a value
to control the height offset from the level and other properties. You can define openings in the pad by
sketching closed loops inside the perimeter of the building pad, and you can define a slope for the building
pad.
You can add a building pad to a toposurface only. It is recommended that you create the building pad within
a site plan. However, you can add a building pad to a toposurface in a floor plan view. The pad may not be
immediately visible in the floor plan view if the view range or building pad offset are not adjusted
appropriately. For example, suppose that you sketch a toposurface at an elevation of 10 meters in a floor
plan view. You then sketch a pad on the surface at an offset of –20 meters from the surface. If the view depth
of the plan view is not low enough, you will not see the pad. See View Range on page 864.

Adding a Building Pad

Add a Building Pad
1 Open a site plan view.

2 Use the draw tools to sketch the building pad as a closed loop.

3 On the Properties palette, set the Height Offset From Level and other properties as needed.

TIP To see the building pad in a Floor Plan view, set the building pad offset to a value higher than Level One, or
adjust the view range.

Concepts
You can add a building pad to a toposurface and then modify the pad's structure and depth. You add a
building pad by sketching a closed loop on a toposurface. After sketching the pad, you can specify a value
to control the height offset from the level and other properties. You can define openings in the pad by
sketching closed loops inside the perimeter of the building pad, and you can define a slope for the building
pad.

Cut and Fill in a Schedule | 125

You can add a building pad to a toposurface only. It is recommended that you create the building pad within
a site plan. However, you can add a building pad to a toposurface in a floor plan view. The pad may not be
immediately visible in the floor plan view if the view range or building pad offset are not adjusted
appropriately. For example, suppose that you sketch a toposurface at an elevation of 10 meters in a floor
plan view. You then sketch a pad on the surface at an offset of –20 meters from the surface. If the view depth
of the plan view is not low enough, you will not see the pad.

Examples
The following image shows a section view of a building pad offset from the surface.

The following image shows a 3D view of a building pad on a graded toposurface.

The following image shows a 3D view of a sloped building pad on a toposurface.

How do I get here?

Click Architect & Site tab ➤ Modify Site panel ➤ (Building Pad).

Click the tools on the Modify | Create Pad Boundary tab ➤ Draw panel.

126 | Chapter 11 Site Design

Related topics
■ Modifying Building Pads on page 127

■ Modifying the Structure of a Building Pad on page 127

■ Building Pad Properties on page 128

Modifying Building Pads

1 Open the site plan that contains the building pad.
2 Select the building pad.

NOTE Use Tab to cycle through the selection options. Selection options are displayed on the left side
of the status bar.

3 Click Modify | Pads tab ➤ Mode panel ➤ (Edit Boundary).

4 Click Modify | Pads ➤ Edit Boundary tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ (Boundary Line, and use the
sketch tools to make the necessary changes.
5 To slope the building pad, use a slope arrow.

6 Click (Finish Edit Mode).

Modifying the Structure of a Building Pad

1 Open the site plan that contains the building pad.
2 Select the building pad.

NOTE Use Tab to cycle through the selection options. Selection options are displayed on the left side
of the status bar.

3 Click Modify | Pads tab ➤ Properties panel ➤ (Type Properties).

4 In the Type Properties dialog, for Structure, click Edit.
5 In the Edit Assembly dialog, set the function for each layer.
Each layer must have a function assigned to it, so Revit Structure can match layers accurately.
Layers can be assigned for the following functions:
■ Structure. A layer that supports the remainder of the building pad.

■ Substrate. A material that acts as a foundation for another material.

■ Thermal/Air Layer. A layer that provides insulation and prevents air penetration

■ Finish 1. A finish layer, for example, the top surface of the building pad.

■ Finish 2. A finish layer, for example, the bottom surface of the building pad.

■ Membrane Layer. A membrane of zero thickness that prevents water vapor penetration.

NOTE The Wraps check box can be left unchecked.

6 Set the Material and Thickness for each layer.

7 Click Insert to add a new layer. Click Up or Down to change the layer order.

Modifying Building Pads | 127

8 Click OK twice.

Related topics

■ Compound Structure on page 573

■ Modifying Building Pads on page 127

■ Building Pad Properties on page 128

Building Pad Properties

You can change the properties of building pad types and building pad instances.

Related topic

■ Slope Arrow Properties on page 584

Modifying Building Pad Properties

1 Open a site or plan view.
2 Select the building pad.

NOTE Use Tab to cycle through the selection options. Selection options are displayed on the left side
of the status bar.

3 Modify instance and type properties:

■ To change the properties of the building pad instance, change the values in the Properties
palette.

■ To change the properties of the building pad type, click (Edit Type) in the Properties
palette, and change the properties as desired.

4 Property changes made to a building pad type affect all building pads of this type in the project.
(To create a new building pad type, click Duplicate.)
5 When finished, click Apply on the Properties palette, or OK in the Type Properties dialog.

Building Pad Type Properties

Name Description

Construction

Structure Defines the building pad structure. See Modifying the Structure of a Building Pad
on page 127.

Thickness Displays the total building pad thickness. This is a read-only parameter.

Graphics

Coarse Scale Fill Pattern Sets a fill pattern for a building pad in coarse-scale view. Click in the value box to
open the Fill Patterns dialog.

128 | Chapter 11 Site Design

Name Description

Coarse Scale Fill Color Applies a color to the fill pattern for a building pad in coarse-scale view.

Building Pad Instance Properties

Name Description

Constraints

Level Sets the level of the building pad.

Height Offset From Level Sets the height from which the building pad is offset from the level.

Room Bounding Used to define the extents of a room.

Dimensions

Slope The building pad slope. This is a read-only parameter.

Perimeter The building pad perimeter. This is a read-only parameter.

Area The area of the building pad. This is a read-only parameter.

Volume The volume of the building pad. This is a read-only parameter.

Phasing

Phase Created Sets the phase when the building pad is created.

Phase Demolished Sets the phase when the building pad is demolished.

Parking Components
You can add parking spaces to a toposurface and define the toposurface as the parking component’s host.

To add parking components

1 Open a view that displays the toposurface to modify.

2 Place the cursor on the toposurface and click to place the component. Place as many components as
desired.
You can create an array of parking components.

How do I get here?

Click Architect & Site tab ➤ Model Site panel ➤ (Parking Component).

To rehost parking components

1 Select the parking components.

2 Click Modify | Parking tab ➤ Host panel ➤ (Pick New Host).

Parking Components | 129

3 Select the toposurface.
When you use the Pick Host tool, you are deliberately setting the parking component on top of the
toposurface. If you move the parking component around on the toposurface, it remains attached to
the toposurface.

Example

Site Components
You can place site-specific components, such as trees, utility poles, and fire hydrants, in a site plan. If no
site components are loaded into your project, a message indicates that no appropriate families are loaded.

To add site components

1 Open a view that displays the toposurface to modify.

2 Click the Site Component tool and select the desired component from the Type Selector on page 35.

3 Click in the drawing area to add one or more components.

Example

How do I get here?

Click Architect & Site tab ➤ Model Site panel ➤ (Site Component.

Related topics
■ Toposurfaces on page 115

■ Parking Components on page 129

Contour Line Labels

You can label contour lines to indicate their elevation. Contour labels display in site plan views.

130 | Chapter 11 Site Design

Labeled contour lines

Labeling Contour Lines

You can label contour lines to indicate their elevation. Contour labels display in site plan views.

1 Create a topographic surface with different elevations.

2 Open a site plan view.

3 Sketch a line that intersects one or more contour lines.

If the line does not intersect a contour line, Revit Structure issues an error.

Labels display on the contour lines. (You may need to zoom in to see the labels.) The label line itself is not
visible, unless you select a label.

Example
Labeled contour lines

How do I get here?

Click Architect & Site tab ➤ Modify Site panel ➤ (Label Contours).

Related topics
■ Modifying the Label Line on page 132

■ Changing the Appearance of Contour Line Labels on page 132

■ Contour Label Type Properties on page 132

Labeling Contour Lines | 131

Modifying the Label Line
1 Open a site plan view.
2 Click a contour line label.
The label line is selected and visible.

3 Drag the end controls to resize the contour label line.

You can also move the contour label line on the toposurface to obtain different elevation values.

Changing the Appearance of Contour Line Labels

You can change the display characteristics of labels for contour lines. For example, you can use a different
font, size, or typeface setting (such as bold or italics). Also, you can specify label units and whether labels
display for primary contour lines only, or for both primary and secondary contour lines.

To change the appearance of contour line labels

1 Open a site plan view, and select a contour line label.

2 Click Modify | Contour Labels tab ➤ Properties panel ➤ (Type Properties).

3 In the Type Properties dialog, do either of the following:
■ To change parameters for the current contour label type, change the parameters as desired,
and click OK.

■ To create a new type of contour label, do the following:

a Click Duplicate.

b Enter a name for the new contour label type, and click OK.

c Change the parameters as desired, and click OK.

See Contour Label Type Properties on page 132.

Revit Structure displays labels for the contour lines using the new parameters.

Contour Label Type Properties

Name Description

Color Sets the color of label text.

Text Font Sets the font for label text.

Text Size Sets the size of label text.

Bold Applies bold to label text.

Italic Applies italics to label text.

Underline Applies underlining to label text.

Label primary contours only If selected, only the primary contour lines are labeled. See Site Settings on page 113.

132 | Chapter 11 Site Design

Name Description

Units Format Specifies units and rounding properties for contour lines. By default, this option uses
the project settings.

Elevation Base Specifies the source of the elevation base: project, shared, or relative.

Contour Label Type Properties | 133

134
Conceptual Design
Environment 12

The Revit conceptual design environment provides flexibility early in the design process for architects, structural engineers,
and interior designers to express ideas and create parametric massing families that can be integrated into building
information modeling (BIM). Use this environment to directly manipulate a design’s points, edges, and surfaces into
buildable forms.
The designs created in the conceptual design environment are massing families that can be used in the Revit project
environment as the basis from which you create more detailed architecture by applying walls, roofs, floors, and curtain
systems. You can also use the project environment to schedule floor areas, and to conduct preliminary spatial analysis.

Related topics

■ Revit Families on page 677

■ Massing Studies on page 1329

135
Conceptual Design Environment Overview
The conceptual design environment is a type of family editor in which you create conceptual designs using
in-place and loadable mass family elements. When a conceptual design is ready, it can be loaded into the
Revit project environment (RVT file). Creating designs in this environment can accelerate the design process.
See Massing Studies on page 1329.

NOTE The standard Family Editor is used when working with families outside the conceptual design environment.
When a family is loaded from the conceptual design environment into a project, the standard massing tools are
available.

To enter the conceptual design environment, use one of the following methods:

■ Conceptual Design Environment

Use the Revit user interface and create new massing families that reside outside the project environment.
If desired, you can load these massing families into a project.

■ Revit Project Environment

Use the In-Place Mass tool in a Revit project to create or manipulate massing families. When accessed
through the In-Place Mass tool, the conceptual design environment does not have 3D reference planes
and 3D levels.

NOTE The Revit conceptual design environment creates new masses. Masses created using a previous release of
Revit Structure use the same massing tools originally used to create them, and remain dedicated to these tools
throughout the duration of the project.

Exploring Conceptual Designs

The Revit conceptual design environment is used for the following:

■ Early conceptual study models. See Early Conceptual Study Models on page 136.

■ Integrated study models. See Integrated Study Models on page 137.

■ Intelligent sub-components. See Intelligent Sub-Components on page 137.

Early Conceptual Study Models

Create and explore models before committing to a particular design. If a decision is made to use one, integrate
it into the main Revit project.
As conceptual designs are developed, they may go through several possible formations before meeting the
desired project requirements. The conceptual design environment provides direct form creation and
manipulation, making it easy to rapidly create different design possibilities.

1. Create a form. 2. Manipulate the form

shape.

136 | Chapter 12 Conceptual Design Environment

3. Rotate the top surface. 4. Divide and pattern the
top surface.

Integrated Study Models

You can reference the conceptual design into a Revit project file, and continue to modify it. For example, a
design can be used to provide important reference information for the building model. Conceptual designs
that have been saved as Revit project files can continue to be developed in the conceptual design environment.
See Switching between Conceptual Design and Project Environments on page 138.

Intelligent Sub-Components
Use conceptual designs as intelligent sub-components that are nested in other models. For example, when
the conceptual design is referenced into a larger building model, it can be used in multiple locations and
regenerated.
In the conceptual design environment, you can create parametric components that have the intelligence
to adapt to a divided surface. See Rationalizing Surfaces on page 190.
The following table shows a parametric component that is added to a divided surface.

Parametric compon- Divided surface with paramet-

ent ric component

Conceptual Design Environment Interface

The tools for developing conceptual designs are all accessed from the ribbon, which changes depending on
what is required to accomplish an action. For example, if you draw a rectangle and select it, Create Form
becomes available. The Create Form tool allows you to instantly extrude the drawing and make it a solid
or void form. See Ribbon on page 21.
If you then select a surface on the form, Divide Surface becomes available. This tool allows you to divide
surface areas into buildable components. See Rationalizing Surfaces on page 190.
As you work on a conceptual design, you manipulate it directly in the drawing area, using several available
controls. See Manipulating Forms on page 187.

Integrated Study Models | 137

Conceptual Massing Family Creation
As you create massing families in the conceptual design environment, many of the important tools are
accessed from the Home tab and the Options Bar. See Creating Solid Forms on page 168.

This panel... Contains tools that let you...

Selection complete an action in the drawing area.

Draw draw the shapes used to create forms and

surfaces.

Datum create 3D levels, and reference geometry.

Model load families into the conceptual design

environment.

Dimension dimension lines and set their type proper-

ties.

Work Plane set and show a work plane.

Form create a solid or void form from selected

lines.

Family Editor load a massing family file into a Revit pro-

ject file.

Family Properties set the family category, parameter, and

family type rules.

In the conceptual design environment, when forms or lines are selected, the Options Bar displays useful
options. The Options Bar displays options for:

■ Selecting the work plane. See 3D Work Planes on page 145.

■ Making a surface from the lines. See Surface Forms on page 173.

■ Enabling 3D snapping. See 3D Snapping on page 141.

■ creating a chain of lines

■ setting the offset value

■ setting the radius

Switching between Conceptual Design and Project Environments

When a concept is ready, you can switch to the Revit project environment. For example, you may want to
perform area analyses, evaluate floors, or add curtain walls. Then, if the evaluation indicates that you need
more floor area on a level, you can move the design back into the conceptual design environment to make
the adjustment.
The following procedures define:

■ how to move a massing family between the conceptual design and project environments, and how to
edit it in the conceptual design environment.

138 | Chapter 12 Conceptual Design Environment

■ how to move an in-place massing family between the conceptual design and project environments, and
how to edit it in the conceptual design environment.

TIP An easy way to switch views is to click ➤ Recent Documents, and select one of the views you have used.

Related topics

■ Loadable Families on page 687

■ In-Place Elements on page 696

■ Revit Families on page 677

Moving Loadable Massing Families

Use the following procedure to move a loadable massing family from the conceptual design into a project.
See Loading the Current Family into a Project on page 690.

1 In the contextual design environment, click Home tab ➤ Family Editor panel ➤ Load into Project.
The family loads into the Revit project.

NOTE If the family has not been placed into the project before, drag the preview image to the desired
location, and click to place it. If the family has been placed, you are prompted to specify whether you want
to overwrite the existing version and its parameter values.

2 Analyze the mass. See Analyzing a Conceptual Design on page 1335.

If necessary, return to the conceptual design environment and make adjustments to the mass, as explained
in the following procedure.
See Conceptual Design Environment Overview on page 136.

Editing Loadable Massing Families

Use the following procedure to edit a massing family that has been loaded into the conceptual design
environment from a project.

1 In the project, select the mass that needs to be adjusted.

2 Click Modify | Mass tab ➤ Mode panel ➤ Edit Family, and select Yes from the Revit dialog. The
conceptual design environment opens.

3 Adjust the mass. For example, use the drag controls to make the mass larger.

4 Click Home tab ➤ Family Editor panel ➤ Load into Project. The project environment opens, and
you can continue to develop the design.

See Conceptual Design Environment Overview on page 136.

Switching between Conceptual Design and Project Environments | 139

Moving In-Place Massing Families
Use the following procedure to move an in-place massing family from the project environment to the
conceptual design environment.

1 Open a Revit project.

2 Click Architect & Site tab ➤ Conceptual Mass panel ➤ In-Place Mass.

3 Name the in-place mass in the Name dialog. The conceptual design environment opens.

4 (Optional) Create a form or manipulate the mass in some way using the available tools. See Forms on
page 167.

5 Click Modify | Form Element tab ➤ In-Place Editor panel ➤ Finish Mass. The mass moves back to
the project environment.

See Conceptual Design Environment Overview on page 136.

Editing In-Place Massing Families

Depending on how you access it, the editing tools for in-place mass manipulation are different. For example,
the shape handles used while editing an in-place mass in the project environment are 2D. However, when
you edit the in-place mass in the conceptual design environment, 3D controls allow you to further modify
the mass by moving vertices, surfaces, edges, and points.
Use the following procedure to edit an in-place massing family that has been moved to the conceptual design
environment from a project.
See Conceptual Design Environment Overview on page 136.
1 Open a project file.

2 Click Architect & Site tab ➤ Conceptual Mass panel ➤ Show Mass.
3 Select the mass.

NOTE 2D shape handles are available to modify the mass.

4 Click Modify | Mass tab ➤ Model panel ➤ Edit In-Place. The conceptual design environment
opens.

NOTE 3D controls are available to modify the mass.

5 Modify the mass.

6 Click Model In-Place Mass tab ➤ In-Place Editor panel ➤ Finish Mass.

Template Files for the Conceptual Design Environment

The conceptual design environment provides 3 standard family template files.

■ Mass.rft
This template is used to create new conceptual massing families.

To create a new massing family, click ➤ New ➤ Conceptual Mass. In the dialog, select Mass.rft.

140 | Chapter 12 Conceptual Design Environment

■ Curtain Panel Pattern Based.rft
This template is used to create a Pattern Component Families on page 201.

To create a new component family, click ➤ New ➤ Family, and select the template from New Family
Select Template dialog.

■ Adaptive Component
This template is used to create new adaptive component on page 207 families.

Drawing in the Conceptual Design Environment

When you access the conceptual design environment, you can immediately start to draw a concept in 3D.
Select a drawing tool, such as a line, and click anywhere in the drawing area to start creating a form. See
Forms on page 167.

NOTE To draw in a 2D view, open it from the Project Browser.

Drawing Overview
You draw when you are placing lines and points to create a form. You can draw on the following elements:

■ 3D levels

■ 3D reference planes

■ reference points

3D levels and 3D reference planes are automatically detected. They highlight in the drawing area as the
cursor moves over them. Click to select one of these to set it as the active work plane.

To draw in the conceptual design environment

1 Click Home tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ Line.

NOTE If you want to draw a reference-based form, click Home tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ Reference
before selecting a drawing tool. See Unconstrained and Referenced-Based Forms on page 171.

Several options become available on the Options Bar. You can set the placement plane, create
a surface by drawing closed profiles, draw a chain of lines, and set an offset or radius value. See
Conceptual Design Environment Interface on page 137.

2 Click Modify | Lines ➤ Draw panel ➤ Draw on Face to draw on a surface, or click Modify |
Lines ➤ Draw panel ➤ Draw on Work Plane to draw on a work plane.
3 Click in the drawing area, and draw a line.

4 Click Home tab ➤ Select panel ➤ Modify.

3D Snapping
Use 3D snapping to ensure an exact location for placing points on a model vertex. For example, you can
use 3D snapping to help place a surface on a mass that you can later use in the project as a floor or a roof.
To enable 3D snapping, select 3D Snapping on the Options Bar.

Drawing in the Conceptual Design Environment | 141

To create a surface using 3D snapping
1 Create 2 forms. See Forms on page 167.

2 Click Home tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ Line.

3 On the Options Bar, select 3D snapping.
4 (Optional) On the Options Bar, select Chain and a named reference from the Placement Plane
list.
5 Draw a line from one vertex to the another vertex.

NOTE The lines snap to the vertex.

6 Select the line and click Modify | Lines tab ➤ Home tab ➤ Create Form.

3D Aligning
Use the align tool in 3D view to align one or more elements with a selected element. See Aligning Elements
on page 1479.
Select the align tool, click on the element to use as a target (vertex, edge, face, surface, point, line, arc,
reference plane, or level) and click again to pick the element to align with the target.

142 | Chapter 12 Conceptual Design Environment

Side view of unaligned elements

Aerial view of unaligned elements

Click to select element face to align

3D Aligning | 143
Click to select element face to align to

Elements are aligned

Conceptual Design Model Line Instance Properties

You can modify many line properties for a conceptual design massing family. Lines have instance properties
because they are not yet part of a family. Select a line and modify properties on the Properties palette.

Name Description

Constraints

Work Plane The work plane to which the line is related.

Graphics

Visible Turns visibility on or off, and accesses the

Associate Family Parameter dialog for
viewing existing parameters and adding
new ones.

Visibility/Graphics Overrides Sets the 3D views for the View Specific

Display and sets the Detail Levels to
Coarse, Medium, or Fine.

Dimensions

Length The actual line length.

144 | Chapter 12 Conceptual Design Environment

Name Description

Identity Data

Subcategory Sets the line subcategory to Form [projec-

tion] or Void.

Is Reference Line Changes the unconstrained reference line

to a reference line. Displays the Associate
Family Parameter dialog that lists existing
parameters and adds new parameters.

Other

Reference Sets the reference type to Not a Reference,

Weak Reference, or Strong Reference.

Model or Symbolic The actual type of line.

Related topics

■ Creating Solid Forms on page 168

■ Creating Void Forms on page 170

3D Work Planes
When you select a drawing tool in the conceptual design environment, the available 3D work planes are
automatically detected as the cursor passes over them in the drawing area. You can click to select one of
these work planes, or explicitly set one from the named references listed in the Placement Plane list on the
Options Bar. If you have several tiled 3D views, and you change the active work plane in one of the views,
it changes for every 3D view.

NOTE Only named reference planes are available in the Placement Planes list.

NOTE You can directly align elements in 3D views without selecting the work plane. See Aligning Elements on
page 1479.

When a drawing tool is selected, 2 tools become available:

■ Draw on Face: allows a planar surface to be the work plane.

■ Draw on Work Plane: allows a level or reference plane to be explicitly set as the work plane.

■ Workplane Viewer: allows editing a temporary 2D view of the current active workplane.

Setting and Showing Work Planes

Use the Set and Show tools to set an active work plane and to display or hide the work plane. See Setting
the Work Plane on page 1517.
When the work plane is not automatically detected, use the Options Bar to explicitly set a work plane.

3D Work Planes | 145

To set and show a work plane

1 Click Home tab ➤ Work Plane panel ➤ Set.

2 Move the cursor over the drawing area to highlight available work planes.
3 Click to select the work plane when it highlights.

4 Click Home tab ➤ Work Plane panel ➤ Show. The active work plane becomes visible.

To explicitly set a work plane

1 Click Home tab ➤ Work Plane panel ➤ Set.

2 On the Options Bar, select the work plane from the Placement Plane drop-down list. Alternatively,
you can click a work plane in the drawing area.

TIP The Placement Plane list is also available when you select a new tool from the Draw panel.

See 3D Work Planes on page 145.

Editing with the Workplane Viewer

Use the Workplane Viewer to modify work plane dependent elements of your conceptual model. It is a
temporary view that is not maintained in the Project Browser. This is useful for editing profiles in forms,
sweeps, and swept blends.

1 Select a work plane or element profile.

146 | Chapter 12 Conceptual Design Environment

2 Select Modify | <Element> tab ➤ Work Plane panel ➤ Workplane Viewer.
The Workplane Viewer opens to the appropriate 2D view.

3 Edit the conceptual model as needed.

3D Work Planes | 147

Modifications in either the project views or Workplane Viewer update other views in real time.

3D Levels
In the default view for the conceptual design environment, levels display in 3D as lines around the back
side of a box.

148 | Chapter 12 Conceptual Design Environment

When a level is selected, the following information displays in the drawing area:

■ the level elevation

■ the level name

■ the distances between the selected level and its surrounding levels

■ the drag handles used to change the level area

Creating 3D Levels
1 Click Home tab ➤ Datum panel ➤ Level.

2 Move the cursor in the drawing area until the desired elevation displays, and click to place the level.
Continue to place levels, as needed.

3 Click Place Level tab ➤ Select panel ➤ Modify to stop placing levels.

Changing the Height Between 3D Levels

To change the height between levels, drag it a level the desired height, or explicitly set the height by typing
in a new height value. When you move a middle level, the top and bottom levels remain in place, and the
heights of the other levels adjust between them.

1 Click a 3D level. The level highlights and displays the dimension length value.

2 Click the value.

3 Enter a new dimension in the text box.

The 3D levels adjust so that their dimensions equal the parameter value.

Changing 3D Level Elevations

1 Click a 3D level.

2 Click an elevation value in the drawing area.

3D Levels | 149
3 Enter a new elevation value in the text box.

4 Press Enter.

The new 3D level elevations are set.

Changing 3D Level Names

1 Click a 3D level. The level name displays.

2 Click the level name. It displays in a text box.

3 Enter a new name.

4 Press Enter, or click outside the text box.

5 (Optional) If you clicked away from the text box, click Yes in the Revit dialog if you would like to
rename corresponding views.

The new level name displays on the level.

Explicitly Changing the 3D Level Area

1 Click a 3D level. The level bounding box highlights and displays circle-shaped drag handles.

2 Drag the bounding box to the desired size.

The new 3D level area is set.

Switching between a 3D Level and its Corresponding View

1 Double-click the circle at the end of a 3D level. The floor plan view displays.

2 Click (3D View) on the Quick Access toolbar. The 3D view displays.

3D Level Graphics
You can set the 3D levels to display a level head symbol by setting parameters through the Type Properties
dialog. See Level Properties on page 97.

To display a level head symbol

1 Select a level.

2 Click Modify | Levels ➤ Properties panel ➤ Type Properties.

3 Select Symbol at End 1 Default.
4 Select Symbol at End 2 Default.

150 | Chapter 12 Conceptual Design Environment

3D Level Type Properties
You can modify many properties for 3D levels. Select a level, and click Modify | Levels tab ➤ Properties
panel ➤ Type Properties.

Name Description

Graphics

Line Weight Controls the thickness of the level line by

selecting from a list.

Color Controls the color of the level line by set-

ting the RGB value.

Line Pattern Controls the level line pattern by selecting

a value from a drop-down list

Symbol Sets the level head to none or Level Head

- Target.

Symbol at End 1 Default Sets the control at the beginning of the

level line by selecting a check box.

Symbol at End 2 Default Sets the control at the end of the level line
by selecting a check box.

3D Level Instance Properties

You can set 3D level instance properties on the Properties palette.

Name Description

Constraints

Elevation Sets the elevation for the level.

Identity Data

Name Sets the level name.

3D Reference Planes
Reference planes are displayed in the conceptual design environment in the 3D view. These reference planes
can be edited as 3D elements. For example, you can pin the 3D reference plane so that it cannot be moved,

3D Reference Planes | 151

and you can unpin it and drag it to change its size. When selected, the name of the reference plane displays
in the 3D view.

3D reference plane, pinned, and

showing circular drag handles

Reference Points
A reference point is an element that specifies a location in the XYZ work space of the conceptual design
environment. You place reference points to design and plot lines, splines, and forms. In the following
example, 5 reference points have been placed to define the path of a spline.

There are 3 types of reference points:

■ Free

■ Hosted on lines and surfaces

■ Geometry-driving

Free Points
Unlike driving points and hosted points, free points are reference points that are placed on a work plane.
Free points display 3D controls when selected, are moveable anywhere within the 3D work space, and
maintain their reference to the plane on which it was placed.

To place points on a work plane

1 Open a 3D view to work in if you are drawing in the Z axis; otherwise, open a floor plan view.

152 | Chapter 12 Conceptual Design Environment

2 If you are working in a 3D view, select a work plane in the drawing area of the conceptual design
environment.

3 Click Home tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ Point Element.

4 Click Modify | Lines ➤ Draw panel ➤ Draw on Work Plane.

5 If it was not selected in step 2, select a work plane from the Placement Plane list on the Options
Bar.
In 3D views, you can clear Relative to force the reference point along the bottom of vertical
work planes.

6 Place points along the work plane.

7 When you are finished placing points, click Modify | Lines ➤ Select panel ➤ Modify.
The free points can be repositioned if needed.

Hosted Points
Hosted points are reference points placed on an existing spline, line, edge, or surface. They are smaller than
driving points, and each one provides its own work plane for adding further geometry perpendicular to its
host. The hosted point will move with and can move along the host element.

Reference Points | 153

Hosted points are placed along any of the following elements:

■ Model lines and reference lines, such as lines, arcs, ellipses, and splines (Bezier and Hermite)

■ Form element edges and surfaces, including planar, ruled, resolved, cylindrical, and Hermite.

■ Joined form edges (geometry combination edges and surfaces)

■ Family instances (edges and surfaces)

As explained in the following topics, the procedure for placing hosted points varies depending what type
of host element.

NOTE If a host is deleted, hosted points will be deleted as well.

Placing Hosted Points along a Spline

Hosted points create work planes to add additional geometry that move with the host element.
1 Open a 3D view to work in if you are drawing in the Z axis; otherwise, open a floor plan view.

2 Click Home tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ Point Element.

3 Click Modify | Lines ➤ Draw panel ➤ Draw on Work Plane.

4 Select a work plane from the Placement Plane list on the Options Bar.
In 3D views, you can clear Relative to force the reference point along the bottom of vertical
work planes.

5 Place hosted points along a spline.

6 Click Modify | Lines ➤ Select panel ➤ Modify when complete.

A hosted point can be repositioned along the spline if needed.

Placing Hosted Points along an Edge or Surface

Surfaces and edges of forms can be used as an alternative work plane for placing hosted points.
1 Open a 3D view to work in if you are drawing in the Z axis; otherwise, open a floor plan view.

2 Click Home tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ Point Element.

3 Click Modify | Lines ➤ Draw panel ➤ Draw on Face.

4 In the drawing area, place the cursor over an edge or a surface, and click to place hosted points.

5 Click Modify | Lines ➤ Select panel ➤ Modify when complete.

154 | Chapter 12 Conceptual Design Environment

Driving Points
Driving points are reference points that control the geometry of a dependent spline. Driving points are
typically created automatically when free points are used to generate a line, curve, or spline.

When selected, driving points display 3D controls.

You create driving points from placed hosted points. See Placing Hosted Points along a Spline on page 154.

To place a driving point along a spline

1 Open a 3D view to work in if you are drawing in the Z-axis; otherwise, open a floor plan view.

2 Click Home tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ Point Element.

3 Place the hosted point along a spline.

4 Click Modify | Lines ➤ Select panel ➤ Modify.

5 Select the new hosted point.
6 On the Options Bar, click Make Point Driving.
The point is now a driving point and can be used to modify the geometry of the spline as needed.

Adaptive Placement Points

Adaptive points are modified reference points that are used when designing an adaptive component.
Adaptive points can be used for component placement (Placement Point) or as shape handles (Shape Handle
Point). If the adaptive points are used for placement, they will be numbered in order in which they will be
placed when the component is loaded.

Reference Points | 155

You create adaptive points by modifying reference points. When a reference point is made adaptive, it is a
placement point by default.

To create adaptive points

1 Place free, hosted, or driving reference points where the adaptive point is needed.
2 Select the reference point.

3 Modify | Reference Points tab ➤ Adaptive Component panel ➤ Make Adaptive.

The point is now adaptive. To revert the point back to a reference point, select it and click Make Adaptive
again.
Notice that adaptive points are numbered in the order of their placement. Click the point number in the
drawing area to change it. It will convert to an editable text box. If you enter a number that is currently
being used as an adaptive point, the points will swap their numbers. You can also change adaptive point
numbers on the Properties palette.
Geometry drawn using these adaptive points results in an adaptive component.

Adaptive Point Orientation

You can specify the vertical orientation of an adaptive point on the Properties palette. Under the Adaptive
Component section, specify the Orientation property to one of the following. The examples shown are
created with the following component family.

The yellow line represents top to bottom orientation; the red line represents front to back orientation; and
the blue line represents left to right orientation. Note this orientation is in the adaptive component family.
Notice how it changes when the orientation is set for the mass or component project environment.
By Host Reference. Vertically orients from the host surface of the point.

156 | Chapter 12 Conceptual Design Environment

Vertical on Placement. Vertically projects from the location of placement.

Auto-calculate. Generates optimal vertical projection for closed loop geometry.

Orthogonal on Placement. Vertically projects to the component or mass project environment. Orientation
is from Top to Bottom, Front to Back, and Right to Left.

Vertical in Family. Vertically projects as placed in the component family.

Reference Points | 157

Adaptive Shape Handle Points
You can use an adaptive point as a shape handle, meaning the point will not be used during placement but
will be available to be moved after the component is placed. Select an adaptive point and on the Properties
palette, select the Shape Handle Point (Adaptive) for the Adaptive Component Point.
Once the shape handle has been specified, you can constrain its movement. On the Properties palette, specify
the Constrained property to None, Center (Left/Right), Center (Front/Back), or Ref. Level.

Related Topic
■ Stitching Borders of Divided Surfaces on page 207

Plotting Lines from Reference Points

There are several methods to create splines that use driving reference points. The first, most common way
is to use the supplied drawing tools, which allow you to freehand splines into the design. If a more coordinate
driven model is required, plotting splines from points may be preferable, because it provides the parametric
relationships required to build forms.

Creating a Line from Reference Points

1 Select Home tab ➤ Select panel ➤ Modify.
2 Select 2 points.
These points can be free, hosted, or driving.

3 Click Modify | Reference Points tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ Line.

4 Click Modify | Reference Points tab ➤ Select panel ➤ Modify.

A line is created between the 2 points. The points maintain their reference type (hosted or driving) and will
modify the line when moved. Free points become driving points for the line.

Creating a Spline from Reference Points

A spline can be created from existing points. These points can be free, hosted, or driving, and be part of an
existing spline, edge, or surface.

158 | Chapter 12 Conceptual Design Environment

1 Select Home tab ➤ Select panel ➤ Modify.
2 Select the points that will comprise the spline.

3 Click Modify | Reference Points tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ Spline Through Points.

4 Click Modify | Reference Points tab ➤ Select panel ➤ Modify.

A spline will be created from the selected points. Free points become driving points for the line.

NOTE The Spline Through Points tool on the Draw panel creates reference points as you freehand a spline.

Rehosting Reference Points

You can rehost placed reference points from and to splines, reference planes, edges, and surfaces.
1 Select the point to be rehosted.

2 Click Modify | Reference Points tab ➤ Rehost Point panel ➤ Pick New Host.

3 Select Modify | Reference Points tab ➤ Placement panel ➤ Draw on Face or Draw on
Work Plane. If you are rehosting to a work plane, select a work plane from the Placement Plane
list.
4 Click to specify the location on a new host in the drawing area.

Rehosting Hosted Points

When you rehost a hosted point, any geometry that is applied to its work plane will move with the point.

Reference Points | 159

Rehosting a hosted point that is part of a spline

Rehosting a hosted point with splines applied to its work plane

Rehosting Driving Points

When you rehost a driving point, any geometry that is dependent on it will adjust accordingly. If the new
host is a spline, the driving point will become a hosted point along that spline. The spline that originally
hosted the point will remain modifiable and adjust to the new host position.

When rehosting to a different plane, the point remains driving, and it only changes position and work plane
orientation.

160 | Chapter 12 Conceptual Design Environment

Modifying Reference Point Properties
Reference points do not have type properties, but you can modify many instance properties for reference
points, such as constraints, graphics, and dimension data. The specific parameters available depend on
whether the selected points are free, driving, or hosted.
1 Select the point.
2 On the Properties palette, edit reference point instance parameters.
3 Click OK.
The following table lists the reference point instance properties.

Name Description

Constraints

Work Plane For driving points only, the plane hosting

the point.

Graphics

Show Reference Planes Specifies when the point's reference planes

are visible: Always, When Selected, or
Never.

Visibility/Graphics Overrides Click Edit to display the Visibility/Graphics

Overrides dialog for the reference point.
See Visibility and Graphic Display in Project
Views on page 801.

Show Normal Reference Plane Only For hosted and driving reference points,
specifies whether only the reference plane
perpendicular to the geometry of the host
will be visible.

Visible When selected, the reference point will be

visible when the mass is loaded into a
project. It is also important to note that
reference points must not be hidden by
either Category or Visibility/Graphics

Reference Points | 161

Name Description
Override settings if they are to be viewed
in the project.

Dimensions

Driving Curve(s) When selected, the reference point is a

driving point that affects geometry. When
cleared, this parameter is read-only, and
the reference point becomes free or hos-
ted.

Driven by Host When selected, the reference point is a

hosted point that moves along its hosted
geometry. When cleared, this parameter
is read-only and the reference point is free.

Hosted Parameter A ratio value (0 to 1) of the location of the

reference point along a line, curve, or sur-
face edge. This applies only to hosted ref-
erence points.
Note that for circles and ellipses, the sup-
ported values are 0-2 pi and for non-peri-
odic curves, 0-1.

Hosted U Parameter The location of the reference point along

the U grid. The parameter is a distance in
project units from the center of the surface.
This applies only to reference points hosted
on a surface.

Hosted V Parameter The location of the reference point along

the V grid. The parameter is a distance in
project units of the surface. This applies
only to reference points hosted on a sur-
face.

Offset The offset distance from the reference

plane of the reference point. This applies
only to driving and free reference points.

Adaptive Component

Point Either Reference Point, Placement Point

(Adaptive), or Shape Handle Point (Adapt-
ive). Specifies the reference point type.
Placement Point (Adaptive) moves freely
in a 3D environment.

Number Specifies the number which determines

the sequence of point placement of a cur-
tain panel by pattern or an adaptive com-
ponent.

162 | Chapter 12 Conceptual Design Environment

Name Description

Show Placement Number Either Never, When Selected, or Always.

Specifies if and when the adaptive point
number is displayed as annotation.

Orientation Either By Host Reference, Auto-calculate,

Vertical on Placement, Orthogonal on
Placement, or Vertical in Family. Specifies
the reference plane for the vertical orienta-
tionof the adaptive point.

Constrained Either None, Center (Left/Right), Center

(Front/Back), or Ref. Level. Specifies the
range in which an adaptive shape handle
point is constrained.

Other

Name User-defined name for the point. The name

will appear in a tooltip when the point is
highlighted by the cursor.

X-Ray Mode
X-Ray mode displays the underlying geometric skeleton of a selected form. In this mode, surfaces become
transparent, allowing you to more directly interact with the individual elements that comprise the form.
This mode is useful when you need to understand how a form is constructed, or when you need to select a
specific part of the form element for manipulation.
X-Ray mode is available for only one form at a time in all model views. For example, if several, tiled views
are displayed and you use X-Ray mode for a form in one view, the other views display X-Ray mode as well.
Likewise, switching X-Ray mode off in one view switches it off in all others.

NOTE X-Ray mode does not persist between sessions.

Accessing X-Ray Mode

1 Select a form. X-Ray becomes available on the ribbon. See Selecting Forms on page 172.

2 Click Modify | Form Element tab ➤ Form Element panel ➤ X-Ray.

The form displays its geometry and nodes.

Display of Elements in X-Ray Mode

When X-Ray mode is enabled, it displays profiles, explicit and implicit paths, form axes, and the control
nodes that were used to create a form.
X-Ray mode displays the following:
■ Profiles
The closed loops you drew to define the shape of extrusions, lofts, revolves, and sweeps.

X-Ray Mode | 163

■ Explicit paths
The line you drew to define a sweep.

■ Implicit paths
The line that the system creates to construct extrusions and lofts.

■ Axis
The line you created to define the rotation of a revolve.

■ Control node
The points that the system creates on the path that hosts individual profiles.

Manipulating Forms in X-Ray Mode

1 Select a form.

2 Click Modify | Form Element tab ➤ Form Element panel ➤ X-Ray. The form displays in
X-Ray mode.

164 | Chapter 12 Conceptual Design Environment

3 Select elements of the form and the 3D control displays.

4 Drag the 3D control arrow.

NOTE You can also select and delete profiles, edges, and vertices in X-Ray mode.

Profiles
A profile is a single line, chain of connected lines, or closed loop that can be used to generate a form. Profiles
can be manipulated to change the geometry of a form.
Profiles can be added to the following forms types:

■ extrusions

■ lofts

■ sweeps

See Adding a Profile to a Form on page 182.

Related topics

■ Locked Profiles on page 165

■ Locking and Unlocking Profiles on page 166

Locked Profiles
Profiles can be locked or unlocked. When profiles are locked, the form maintains a relationship between
the top and bottom profiles, and is limited in the way it can be manipulated. When profiles are unlocked,
the form can be manipulated in any way.

NOTE If the work plane is vertical, the constrained profile relationship would be between the left and right.

Profiles | 165
With locked profiles, when you manipulate one profile, it affects the other, and therefore, the entire shape.
For example, if the top profile is selected, and you lock it, all the profiles take on the shape of the top profile.
The following graphics display an unconstrained form that locks to the selected, bottom (square) profile.

Unconstrained form Resulting locked form

Click Modify | Form Element tab ➤ Form Element panel ➤ Lock Profiles to make the form-type
unconstrained. See Unconstrained and Referenced-Based Forms on page 171.
With unconstrained profiles, the profile edge or vertex can be manipulated.

Initial unconstrained Lower-right vertex Resulting uncon-

form modified strained form

Related topic

■ Locking and Unlocking Profiles on page 166

Locking and Unlocking Profiles

To unlock a profile
1 Select a locked form. See Selecting Forms on page 172.

2 Click Modify | Form Element tab ➤ Modify Form panel ➤ Unlock Profiles.

To lock a profile
1 Select a form. See Selecting Forms on page 172.

2 Click Modify | Form Element tab ➤ Modify Form Element ➤ Lock Profiles. The selected
profile controls the locked shape.
All the form profiles are locked, including any additional profiles that may have been added
after a previous unlocking of the profile.

NOTE Use X-Ray mode to view a form’s profiles. See X-Ray Mode on page 163.

166 | Chapter 12 Conceptual Design Environment

Forms
Start to explore a building concept by creating various geometric shapes, extrusions, sweeps, and lofts. Forms
are always created by drawing lines, selecting them, and clicking Create Form. Use this tool to develop
any surface, 3D solid, or void form, and then directly manipulate it using the 3D form manipulation controls.

Line types that can be used to make a form include the following:
■ Lines

■ Reference lines

■ Line by points

■ Imported lines

■ Edges of other form

■ Lines or edges from loaded families

Solid and Void Forms

The Create Form tool provides 2 tools:

■ Solid Form
The Solid Form tool is used to create solid geometry.

■ Void Form
The Void Form tool is used to create negative shapes (voids) that cut into solid geometry.

A void cut into a solid form

Forms | 167
3D controls on a selected void.

A void dragged to the middle of the solid

form (shown in X-Ray mode).

A void dragged from the middle of the

solid form to a surface, and cutting the
surface geometry.

Related topics

■ Profiles on page 165

■ X-Ray Mode on page 163

Creating Solid Forms

1 Click Home tab ➤ Draw panel, and select one of the drawing tools. See Drawing Overview on
page 141.
2 Click in the drawing area, and draw a closed loop.

3 Click Home tab ➤ Select panel ➤ Modify.

4 Select the lines.

5 Click Modify | Form Element tab ➤ Form panel ➤ Create Form. A solid form extrusion is
created.

6 (Optional) Click Modify | Form Element tab ➤ Form panel ➤ Void Form to convert this
form to a void.

168 | Chapter 12 Conceptual Design Environment

Cutting Geometry with Solids
You can use solid forms to cut other solids as you do with voids. However, when you use a solid, you remove
the overlapping area and the abutting solids remain. Cutting solid geometry with solids is available with
the following:

■ Form elements

■ Forms with divided surfaces

■ Forms with geometric combinations

■ Family instances inside of the massing editor.

To cut a solid with a solid form

1 Create two adjacent solids.

In this procedure, the solid form being cut has a divided surface to show how the cut is
represented.

2 Click Modify tab ➤ Geometry panel ➤ Cut.

3 Select the solid form to be cut.

4 Select the cutting solid form.

Creating Solid Forms | 169

The solids cut accordingly and can be edited with form editing tools while maintaining the cut
relationship.

NOTE When a solid cut geometry mass is imported into a project, you cannot interact with the
individual solids. Similarly, if the solid cut geometry had levels applied to it, they will not be recognized
in the project environment.

Creating Void Forms

1 Click Home tab ➤ Draw panel, and select one of the drawing tools. See Drawing Overview on
page 141.
2 Click in the drawing area, and draw a closed loop.

3 Click Home tab ➤ Select panel ➤ Modify.

4 Select the lines.

5 Click Modify | Form Element tab ➤ Form panel ➤ Create Form drop-down ➤ Void Form.
A void form extrusion is created.

6 (Optional) Click Modify | Form Element tab ➤ Form panel ➤ Solid Form to convert this
form to a solid.

Related Topic
■ Cut Geometry on page 1434

Accessing Create Form Tool

The Create Form tool is available in the mass family template (Mass.rft), the curtain panel pattern based
family template (Curtain Panel Pattern Based.rft), and through the In-Place Mass tool in a project. See

170 | Chapter 12 Conceptual Design Environment

Creating an In-Place Mass on page 1332. The access to the Create Form tool varies depending on whether
the conceptual design environment is accessed through the family mass template (RFT) or a project file
(RVT).

To access Create Form from a mass family template (RFT)

1 Click Home tab ➤ Draw panel, and click one of the drawing tools to sketch any type of line.

NOTE You can also create a line by points. See Reference Points on page 152.

2 Draw the line and select it.

The Create Form tool becomes available on Modify | Form Element tab ➤ Form panel. See Creating Solid
Forms on page 168.

To access Create Form from a project file (RVT)

1 Click Architect & Site tab ➤ Conceptual Mass panel ➤ In-Place Mass.
2 Name the in-place mass in the Name dialog. The conceptual design environment tools become
available.
3 Create a form. See Creating Solid Forms on page 168.

4 Click Modify | Form Element tab ➤ In-Place Editor panel ➤ Finish Mass.

Unconstrained and Referenced-Based Forms

Depending on the tools used to create them, 2 types of form are created in the conceptual design environment.

■ unconstrained form

■ reference-based form

The behavior of these 2 forms may differ when they are modified.

Unconstrained form Reference-based form

Displays a solid line when highlighted. Displays a dashed line when highlighted.

Created when there is no need to rely on Created when there is a need for a paramet-
another form or type of reference. ric relationship between the form and
other geometry or references.

Created using any line in the Draw panel. Created using reference lines, reference
points, or any part of another form. Click
Click Home tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ Line.
Home tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ Reference.

Unconstrained and Referenced-Based Forms | 171

Unconstrained form Reference-based form

Not dependent on other objects. Dependent on its references. When its de-
pendent reference changes, the reference-
based form changes.

Profiles are unlocked by default. Profiles are locked by default for extrusions
and sweeps.

The edges, surfaces, and vertices can be Edited by directly editing the reference
edited directly. element. For example, select a reference
line and drag it using the 3D controls.

Related topic

■ Form Types on page 173

Converting Reference-based Forms to Unconstrained Forms

1 Select the reference lines on a reference-based form.

2 On the Properties palette, clear Is Reference Line.

The form is unconstrained.

Related topics

■ Creating Solid Forms on page 168

■ Creating Void Forms on page 170

Selecting Forms
You can select an entire form, or any of its edges, surface or vertices. Move the cursor over any form element
to highlight it, and either click to select it, or press Tab to highlight all the form's elements, and then click
to select the entire form. Pressing Tab repeatedly cycles through the selectable elements, and you can click
to select the desired one when it highlights.
The following graphics display what can be selected on a form.

Form Element Selected Form Element

Edge

172 | Chapter 12 Conceptual Design Environment

Form Element Selected Form Element

Surface

Vertex

Entire form

Related topics

■ Manipulating Forms on page 187

■ Manipulating Forms in X-Ray Mode on page 164

Form Types
The conceptual design environment lets you create many types of forms that are useful for developing a
design concept. Every form type is created by accessing the Create Form tool. See Accessing Create Form
Tool on page 170.

Surface Forms
In the conceptual design environment, surfaces are created from open lines or edges, rather than from closed
profiles.

NOTE If the 2 lines are parallel, the result is a 2D surface that can be used to stitch together other models. See
3D Snapping on page 141.

To create a surface using a line

1 Select a work plane for the surface. See Setting and Showing Work Planes on page 145.

2 Click Home tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ Line.

3 Draw a line on the work plane.

4 Select another work plane.

Form Types | 173

5 Draw a line on this work plane.

6 Select the lines.

7 Click Create Form.

To create a surface using the Options Bar

1 Click Home tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ Line.

2 On the Options Bar, select Make surface from closed loops.

3 (Optional) On the Options Bar, select Chain to create a chain of lines.

4 Draw a closed profile.

The surface is automatically created.

Related topics

■ Unconstrained and Referenced-Based Forms on page 171

■ Creating Solid Forms on page 168

■ Creating Void Forms on page 170

Extrusions
In the conceptual design environment, an extrusion is created from closed profiles, or the surfaces derived
from closed profiles.

1 Draw a closed profile, for example, using Home tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ (Rectangle).

2 Select the profile.

3 Click Modify | Form Element tab ➤ Create Form.

You can change the dimension of an extrusion by using the 3D drag controls or editing the temporary
dimension in the drawing area. See Dimensioning Forms on page 184.

174 | Chapter 12 Conceptual Design Environment

Related topics

■ Creating Solid Forms on page 168

■ Creating Void Forms on page 170

Revolves
In the conceptual design environment, a revolve is created from a line and a 2D shape that are drawn on
the same work plane. The line defines the axis around which the shape is revolved to create a 3D form.

NOTE In Step 2, you can create a surface revolve using lines that do not form a closed loop.

1 Draw a line on a work plane.

2 Draw a closed profile on the same work plane next to the line.

3 Select the line and the closed profile.

4 Select Create Form. See Accessing Create Form Tool on page 170.

To open a revolve

1 TIP Using X-Ray mode helps identify the edge.

Select the outside edge of the revolve profile.

Form Types | 175

2 Drag the orange control arrow to a new position.

Related topic

■ Creating Solid Forms on page 168

Sweeps
In the conceptual design environment, a sweep is created from a 2D profile that is swept along a path. The
profile consists of linework drawn perpendicular to the line or series of lines that define the path. You create
a sweep by selecting the profile and the path, and then clicking Create Form.
Multi-segmented paths can be used to create a sweep if the profile is formed from closed loops. If the profile
is not closed, it does not sweep along a multi-segment path. If the path is a single-line segment, use an open
profile to create the sweep.

To create a multi-segmented sweep

1 Click Home tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ Line, and draw a series of connected lines to form a path.

2 Click Home tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ Point Element and click along the path to place a reference point.

3 Select the reference point. The work plane displays.

176 | Chapter 12 Conceptual Design Environment

4 Draw a closed profile on the work plane.

5 Select the line and profiles.

6 Click Modify | Lines tab ➤ Form panel ➤ Create Form. See Accessing Create Form Tool on page 170.

Related topics

■ Creating Solid Forms on page 168

■ Creating Void Forms on page 170

Swept Blends
In the conceptual design environment, a swept blend is created from two or more 2D profiles that are swept
along a path. The profile consists of linework drawn perpendicular to the line or series of lines that define
the path.

To create a swept blend.

1 Using the tools on the Home tab ➤ Draw panel, draw a series of connected lines to form a path.

Form Types | 177

2 Click Home tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ Point Element and place reference points for the swept blend
profiles along the path.

3 Select a reference point and draw a closed profile on its work plane.

4 Similarly, draw profiles for the remaining reference points.

178 | Chapter 12 Conceptual Design Environment

5 Select the path and profiles.

6 Click Modify | Lines tab ➤ Form panel ➤ Create Form. See Accessing Create Form Tool on page 170.

Related topics

■ Creating Solid Forms on page 168

■ Creating Void Forms on page 170

Lofts
A loft is a form that blends 2 profiles located on separate work planes.

NOTE Profiles can be open or closed when making lofted geometry.

To create a solid loft

1 Draw a closed profile on a work plane.

2 Click a reference plane or a level to select a different work plane.

3 Draw a new closed profile.

4 Click a reference plan or a level, to select a different work plane.

5 Draw a closed profile on the third reference plane.

6 Select all 3 profiles.

Form Types | 179

7 Click Create Form. See Accessing Create Form Tool on page 170.

Related topics

■ Creating Solid Forms on page 168

■ Creating Void Forms on page 170

Modifying Forms
Forms can be modified directly by using the 3D control arrows, and by adding, deleting, and modifying
edges and profiles.
When a form is selected in the conceptual design environment, the following modification tools are available.

Panel Tool Description

Selection Complete an action in the

Modify
drawing area.

Draw Line tools Create unconstrained and

reference-based forms. See
Unconstrained and Refer-
enced-Based Forms on page
171.

Element Element Properties Defines instance and type

properties.

Mode Modifies the sketch on

Edit Profile
which the form is based.
See Modifying Form Profiles
on page 183.

Form Creates solid forms. See Ac-

Create Form
cessing Create Form Tool
on page 170.

180 | Chapter 12 Conceptual Design Environment

Panel Tool Description

Creates a solid form or

Solid Form
changes a void form to a
solid. See Creating Solid
Forms on page 168.

Creates a void form or

Void Form
changes a solid form to a
void. Creating Void Forms
on page 170.

Divide Divides a surface. See Ration-

Divide Surface
alizing Surfaces on page 190.

Form Element Shows/hides the underlying

X-Ray
geometric skeleton of a
form, making it easier to
select form elements. See
X-Ray Mode on page 163.

Adds edges to a form. See

Add Edge
Adding an Edge to a Form
on page 182.

Adds profiles to a form. See

Add Profile
Adding a Profile to a Form
on page 182.

Removes the surfaces of a

Dissolve
form. See Dissolving Form
Elements on page 183.

Keeps the form locked to

Lock Profiles
the top and bottom pro-
files. See Profiles on page
165.

Unlocks the form. See Pro-

Unlock Profiles
files on page 165.

Moves the form to a new

Pick New Host
host. See Rehosting Forms
on page 184.

Related topics

■ Manipulating Forms on page 187

■ Selecting Forms on page 172

Adding Elements to a Form

Forms can be further modified by adding edges and profiles. The Add Edge tool is used to add edges to form
elements.

Modifying Forms | 181

The Add Profile tool is used to add profiles to form elements. Profiles can be manipulated to change the
form geometry. See Profiles on page 165.

Adding an Edge to a Form

1 Select a form.

2 Click Modify | Form Element tab ➤ Modify Form panel ➤ Add Edge
3 Move the cursor over the form to display a preview image of the edge, and click to add the edge.
The edge displays on the form.

4 Select the edge.

The 3D controls become available.

5 Click a 3D control arrow to manipulate the edge. The form geometry changes.

Adding a Profile to a Form

1 Select a form.

TIP Using X-Ray mode helps view the form geometry. See X-Ray Mode on page 163.

2 Click Modify | Form Element tab ➤ Form Element panel ➤ Add Profile.
3 Move the cursor over the form to preview the position the profile.
4 Click to place the profile.

182 | Chapter 12 Conceptual Design Environment

Modifying Form Profiles
You can edit profiles or paths from which forms have been created.
1 Select a profile, path, or surface to edit. You can select and edit.
In some cases, such as in sweeps or swept blend, this may be easier in X-Ray Mode on page 163.

2 Click Modify | Form Element ➤ Mode panel ➤ Edit Profile.

The drawing area will enter a sketching mode. However, forms made from reference geometry
will not have a sketch mode and will require direct modification to the reference geometry.

3 Use the drawing tools on the Modify | Form Element > Edit Profile tab to edit the profile.
Particularly useful is the Workplane Viewer.

NOTE When editing locked profiles, only the main profile will be editable. Typically this is the profile
hosted by a reference level or plane.

4 Click Finish Edit Mode.

Dissolving Form Elements

You can dissolve a form to its underlying editable curves. Once the curves you can recreate the form.

To dissolve a form
1 Select the form.

2 Click Modify | Form Element tab ➤ Form Element panel ➤ Dissolve.

The form drops all surfaces and leaves behind profile curves and paths.

3 Edit curves and paths as needed.

Modifying Forms | 183

Deleting Form Elements
Surfaces, edges, and vertices can be deleted from a form. You can use Ctrl to select elements separately, or
draw a pick box to select all the form elements.

NOTE Be careful not to select work planes when using a pick box, or they will be deleted.

1 Select a form.

NOTE Using X-Ray helps identify the form elements. See X-Ray Mode on page 163.

2 Move the cursor over the form, and press Tab to highlight the form elements.
3 Click to select the element.

4 Click Modify | Form Element tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Delete.

Rehosting Forms
Forms are hosted by the work plane, level, or surface on which they were drawn. You can view the hosted
work plane by clicking Home tab ➤ Work Plane panel ➤ Show.

To rehost a form
1 Select a form.

2 Click Modify | Form Element tab ➤ Form Element panel ➤ Pick New Host.
3 Select a host from the Placement Plane list on the Options Bar. The host highlights in the drawing
area, and the cursor is a purple circle shape.
4 Click to rehost the form to the work plane you selected.

Related topic

■ 3D Work Planes on page 145

Dimensioning Forms
The dimensions for a form can be set in a number of ways:

■ Use 3D direct manipulation controls.

Drag the 3D control arrows on a form until the dimension meets the required value. You can select an
edge, point, or vertex to enable the 3D controls. Drag a 3D control arrow. As you drag the arrow, element
dimension feedback is provided in the drawing area. See Manipulating Forms on page 187.

■ Set temporary dimensions directly in the drawing area.

Temporary dimensions display on the surface of a selected form. You can make this dimension permanent
by double-clicking the dimension and pressing Enter.

■ Select Show Dimensions on the Options Bar.

■ Set constraints on the Model Lines Properties palette. See Conceptual Design Model Line Instance
Properties on page 144.

184 | Chapter 12 Conceptual Design Environment

Labeled Dimensions
In the conceptual design environment, you can label dimensions by assigning parameters to them, and then
use direct manipulation to explore design variations. As a labeled dimension is manipulated, all its related
geometry adjusts, and the dimension labels change to reflect their new values. The dimension labels change
dynamically as they are manipulated in the drawing area.
As the labeled dimension values change, the family type parameter values also update in the Family Types
dialog, where you can enter formulas that define relationships between dimensions as shown.

For example, drag a labeled dimension to a new position. All the lines that are associated by formulas move
with respect to their parameter settings. For example if parameter B = A/2, the value of B is always half of
the value of parameter A. If the value of B changes to 8, the value of A changes to 16. You can see the
parameter values change in the drawing area when you directly manipulate these lines.
The formulas assigned to a parameter display in the Label drop-down list on the Options Bar. These can be
selected and applied to the labeled dimensions. When applied to a dimension, the formula displays as the
new label in the drawing area.

NOTE To display all the associated dimensions, on the Options Bar, click Related Dimensions, or select a parameter
in the Family Type dialog.

Labeling Dimensions
1 Select a line in the drawing area. The line’s temporary dimensions display.

2 Click (Make this temporary dimension permanent) to create a permanent dimension.

3 Click the dimension.
4 On the Options Bar, select <Add parameter> from the Label drop-down list.
5 In the Parameter Properties dialog, for Name, enter a name.
6 For Group parameter under, select Dimensions.
7 Click OK.

Associating Parameters
1 Click a dimension in the drawing area.

2 Click Modify | Dimensions tab ➤ Properties panel ➤ Family Types.

Dimensioning Forms | 185

3 Under Dimensions, enter a formula for one of the parameters in the Formula column.
4 Click OK.

Displaying Parameter Values

1 Click a dimension in the drawing area.
2 On the Options Bar, select a desired parameter value from the Label drop-down list.

Removing Parameter Values

1 Click a dimension in the drawing area.
2 On the Options Bar, select <None> from the Label drop-down list.

Locking Labeled Dimensions

You can maintain the parametric relationships between labeled dimensions by locking them. To lock a

dimension directly in the drawing area, click next to the dimension.

When a labeled dimension is locked, all of the associated parameters also lock. This means that as the
dimensions are moved in the drawing area, the associated parameters are constrained and the dimension
value is preserved.

NOTE Locked dimensions and their associated parameters cannot be changed in the drawing area. Use the Lock
column in the Family Types dialog to change them.

When a labeled dimension is unlocked, all of the referenced geometry unlocks and is unconstrained.

To lock a labeled dimension from the Family Types dialog

1 Click a dimension in the drawing area.

2 Click Modify | Dimensions tab ➤ Properties panel ➤ Family Types.

3 Select Lock to constrain a parameter.

Referencing Imported Geometry

Imported ACIS solid and surface geometry can be referenced in the conceptual design environment to create
a form, divide a surface, or host point elements.
The following table describes the available conceptual design environment tools that can reference imported
ACIS geometry.

ACIS Geometry Create Form Divide Surface Hosted Refer-

Type Tool Tool ence Point

Edge x x

Curve x x

Surface x x x

NOTE Unsupported references, such as a polymesh, cannot be used.

186 | Chapter 12 Conceptual Design Environment

■ Importing ACIS Objects on page 62

■ Importing or Linking CAD Formats on page 58

■ Importing Massing Studies from Other Applications on page 1366

■ Forms on page 167

■ Rationalizing Surfaces on page 190

■ Reference Points on page 152

Conceptual Design Environment Model Instance Properties

To view and modify the following instance properties of a selected form, use the Properties palette. See
Model Line Instance Properties on page 571.
In the conceptual design environment, forms can be specified as solid or void.

Name Description

Graphics

Solid/Void Specifies whether the form is a solid or a

void.

Manipulating Forms
Every reference point, surface, edge, vertex, or point in an unconstrained form has a 3D control that displays
when it is selected. Use this control to directly manipulate a form by dragging it along the axes or planes
defined by the local or global coordinate systems.

3D controls let you:

■ switch between local and global coordinates.

■ directly manipulate a form.

You can drag the 3D control arrows to adjust a form to a suitable size or location. The arrows are oriented
relative to the selected form, but you can also switch this orientation between a global XYZ, and local,
coordinate system by pressing the Spacebar.

Related topics

■ Modifying Forms on page 180

■ Dimensioning Forms on page 184

■ Solid and Void Forms on page 167

Conceptual Design Environment Model Instance Properties | 187

Coordinate Systems
A form’s global coordinate system is based on the North, East, South, and West coordinates of the ViewCube.
When a form is reoriented and has a different relationship with the global coordinate system, it is on the
local coordinate system.

Use the... To drag the object...

Blue arrow along the global Z axis

Red arrow along the global Y axis

Green arrow along the global X axis

Red planar control in the Y plane

Green planar control in the X plane

Orange arrow along a local axis

Orange planar control in a local plane

The following graphic displays a sweep that was manipulated by dragging the control arrows to change its
shape.

Original Sweep First Manipulated Sweep Second Manipulated

Sweep

When forms are defined by the local coordinate system, the 3D form controls display in orange color. Only
the coordinates that change to the local coordinate system display in orange color. For example, if you rotate
a cube by 15 degrees, the X and Y arrows display in orange, but the Z arrow remains blue because it still has
the same global Z coordinate value.

Related topics

■ Manipulating Forms on page 187

■ Sweeps on page 176

■ Creating Solid Forms on page 168

■ Creating Void Forms on page 170

Manipulating Joined Forms

In the conceptual design environment, the surfaces, edges, or vertices of joined forms can be modified using
the 3D controls.

188 | Chapter 12 Conceptual Design Environment

To join forms

1 Click Modify | Form Element tab ➤ Geometry panel ➤ Join.

2 Click the first form.

3 Click the second form.

The form is joined. See Joining Geometry on page 1506.

To manipulate joined forms

1 Click a joined surface, edge or vertex. The 3D control arrows display.

2 Drag a 3D control arrow in any direction.

The joined form remains as one unit.

Related topics

■ Manipulating Forms on page 187

■ Selecting Forms on page 172

Manipulating Joined Forms | 189

■ Creating Solid Forms on page 168

■ Creating Void Forms on page 170

■ Display of Elements in X-Ray Mode on page 163

■ Joining Geometry on page 1506

Rationalizing Surfaces
You can divide a range of surfaces (planar, ruled surfaces, revolved surfaces, and double-curved surfaces) to
rationalize the surface into parametric buildable components.

Use the following work flow to rationalize a surface.

1 Divide the surface. See Dividing a Surface with UV Grids on page 190.
2 Pattern the surface. See Patterning Surfaces on page 197.
3 The surface is divided with UV grids by default. Apply a pattern component family. See Pattern
Component Families on page 201.

Dividing a Surface with UV Grids

1 Select the surface.

2 Click Modify | Form Element tab ➤ Divide panel ➤ Divide Surface.

3 Adjust the spacing of the divided surface on the Options Bar. See Modifying the Spacing of UV
Grids on Divided Surfaces on page 192.

NOTE When dividing the surface, remember that applied patterns have footprint requirements that
may affect how many divisions a surface needs in the conceptual design. See Patterning Surfaces on
page 197.

4 Adjustments can be made with the Face Manager. You can adjust UV grid spacing, rotation, and
grid positioning. See Adjusting UV Grids with the Face Manager on page 192.

Understanding UV Grids
A surface can be divided by UV grids (the natural grid division of the surface). Patterns may be later applied
to the divided surface. See Patterning Surfaces on page 197.

190 | Chapter 12 Conceptual Design Environment

The UV grid acts as a guide in patterning the surface. Manipulating the divided surface also manipulates the
parametrically dependant patterns and components. Certain parameters of the divided surface can be edited
in the drawing area of the conceptual design environment.
Locations in 3D space are based on the XYZ coordinate system. This system can be applied globally to the
modeling space or to a work plane.
Since surfaces are not necessarily planar, the UVW coordinate system is used to plot location. This maps a
grid adjusting for the contours of a non-planar surface or form. UV grids, as used in the conceptual design
environment, are comparable to XY grids.

The default division of the surface is by number: 12x12 for imperial units and 10x10 for metric units.

Enabling and Disabling UV Grids

The UV grids are independent of one another and can be turned on and off as needed. By default, both U
and V grids are on when a surface is initially divided.
U grids

Click Modify | Divided Surface tab ➤ UV Grids and Intersects panel ➤ U Grid. Click again to enable.

Enabling and Disabling UV Grids | 191

V grids

Click Modify | Divided Surface tab ➤ UV Grids and Intersects panel ➤ V Grid. Click again to enable.

Modifying the Spacing of UV Grids on Divided Surfaces

Surfaces can be divided by a number of divisions or by distances between divisions.

When the divided surface is selected, the Options Bar displays settings for both the U and V grids. These
can be set independently of one another.
Spacing grids by a specific number of divisions
Select Number and enter the number of divisions that will distribute evenly along the surface.

NOTE The number of divisions can also be set on the Properties palette or the Face Manager. See Pattern Element
Instance Properties on page 213 and Adjusting UV Grids with the Face Manager on page 192.

Spacing grids by a defined distance

Select Distance and enter the distance between grids along the divided surface. The Distance drop-down list
also allows for a minimum or maximum distance, rather than an absolute distance.

NOTE Spacing can also be set on the Properties palette or the Face Manager. See Pattern Element Instance
Properties on page 213 and Adjusting UV Grids with the Face Manager on page 192.

Adjusting UV Grids with the Face Manager

The UV grids of the divided surface can be adjusted on the Properties palette (see Pattern Element Instance
Properties on page 213) or the Face Manager. The Face Manager is an editing mode accessed by clicking the
Face Manager icon at the center of the 3D Control Widget. To see this icon, select the divided surface.

192 | Chapter 12 Conceptual Design Environment

Once selected, UV grid editing controls display on the surface.

Editing Spacing between Divisions

Spacing for the distance and number of divisions of both U and V grids are located at the ends of their
respective belts. These parameters are the same as the spacing grids parameters previously seen on the Options
Bar. See Modifying the Spacing of UV Grids on Divided Surfaces on page 192.
To change these, click on them and type new parameters.

Rotating UV Grids
You can rotate the direction of each or both UV grids. Rotation angle controls are located at the ends of
their respective belts. Changing the values of these parameters will rotate the grids.
To change the rotation of a grid, click on the value field and type a new rotation angle.

Adjusting UV Grids with the Face Manager | 193

To rotate the direction of both grids, click on the angle value field located at the intersection of the UV grids
and type a new rotation angle.

Adjusting UV Grid Belts

Each belt represents the line along the surface from which the distance between grids is measured. The
distance is measured by chords, not curve lengths. You can move the belts along their respective grids to
adjust where the distance is measured. Click and drag the belt handles to reposition them.

NOTE Clicking a belt handle will slightly nudge the belt position in the respective direction of the handle.

The following image shows repositioning of one belt along the U grid.

194 | Chapter 12 Conceptual Design Environment

Justifying UV Grids to the Surface Borders
The Grid Justification tool defines the origin of the grids on the surface. Both U and V grids are centered in
a surface by default, but each can be repositioned to the left and right, as well as top and bottom, resulting
in the following 9 possible locations for grid justification.

Top Left Top Center Top Right

Left Center Center Right Center

Bottom Left Bottom Center Bottom Right

The Grid Justification tool will snap to any of these locations on a surface. In the following illustration,
notice how the positioning of the Grid Justification tool adjusts the location of the UV grids.

Adjusting UV Grids with the Face Manager | 195

Dividing a Surface by Intersection
You can also divide a surface by using intersecting 3D levels, reference planes, and curves drawn on reference
planes.
1 Add the necessary 3D Levels on page 148 and 3D Reference Planes on page 151. If necessary, draw
curves on work planes parallel to the form.
2 Select the surface to be intersected.

3 Click Modify | Form ➤ Divide panel ➤ Divide Surface.

4 Disable theUV Grids.

5 Click Modify | Form ➤ UV Grids and Intersects panel ➤ Intersects.

6 Select all levels, reference planes, and curves sketched on reference planes that will divide the
surface.
(Optional) Rather than manually selecting levels and planes, you can select them from a list of
named references. Click Modify | Form ➤ UV Grids and Intersects panel ➤ Intersects List.
In the Intersecting Named References dialog, select the levels and reference planes that will
intersect and divide your surface.

NOTE Curves drawn for reference will do not display in this list because they are unnamed elements.

196 | Chapter 12 Conceptual Design Environment

7 Click Modify | Form ➤ UV Grids and Intersects panel ➤ Finish.

Removing levels or planes will remove the corresponding divisions on the surface.
You can then pattern and apply pattern components to the resulting surface division.

Patterning Surfaces
After a surface is divided, it can be patterned. Still part of the conceptual design phase of the project, this
phase enables quick preview and editing of patterned surfaces. Unlike the UV Grids, the pattern lines are

Patterning Surfaces | 197

straight segments. A collection of patterns is available in the Type Selector on page 35 and can be applied
onto a selected divided surface.

Divided Surface Applied Octagon Pattern

Patterns are family-based and can be graphically previewed in the Type Selector on page 35 before being
applied.

To pattern a surface
1 Select a divided surface.
2 In the Type Selector on page 35, select the desired pattern.
Note that the divided surface is hidden when a pattern is applied. To display it again, click Modify | Divided
Surface tab ➤ Surface Representation panel ➤ Surface and select the checkboxes for Surface, Nodes and
UV Grids and Intersects.
Patterns become part of the surface and, depending on their shape, will require a specific number of surface
cells when applied. This is an important consideration when planning divisions and patterns for component
design. See Pattern Component Families on page 201.
The patterns available are as follows.

Pattern name Required number of Pattern layout

surface cells

0 Pattern is removed from

the divided surface.

No Pattern

2 (1 x 2)

1/2 Step

3 (1 x 3)

1/3 Step

198 | Chapter 12 Conceptual Design Environment

Pattern name Required number of Pattern layout
surface cells

12 (3 x 4)

Arrows

6 (2 x 3)

Hexagon

9 (3 x 3)

Octagon

9 (3 x 3)

Octagon Rotate

1 (1 x 1)

Rectangle

1 (1 x 1)

Rectangle Checkerboard

4 (2 x 2)

Rhomboid

Patterning Surfaces | 199

Pattern name Required number of Pattern layout
surface cells

4 (2 x 2)

Rhomboid Checker-
board

2 (1 x 2)

Triangle (bent)

2 (1 x 2)

Triangle (flat)

2 (1 x 2)

Triangle Checkerboard
(bent)

2 (1 x 2)

Triangle Checkerboard
(flat)

2 (1 x 2)

Triangle Step (bent)

2 (1 x 2)

Zig Zag

Editing the Patterned Surface

Modify the patterned surface by changing patterns, adjusting properties with the Face Manager, and changing
its border tiling.

Changing Patterns
Select the divided surface, and then select a new pattern from the Type Selector on page 35 drop-down. If
another component or a pattern component has been previously applied to the surface, it will be replaced
by the new pattern.

200 | Chapter 12 Conceptual Design Environment

Modifying the Pattern with the Face Manager
Pattern spacing is controlled by the spacing of the divided surface. See Modifying the Spacing of UV Grids
on Divided Surfaces on page 192.
Pattern orientation is controlled by the orientation of the direction of grids of the divided surface. See
Adjusting UV Grids with the Face Manager on page 192.

Modifying Pattern Border Tiling

Patterned surfaces may have border tiles that intersect the edge of the surface and are not complete tiles.
These border tile conditions can be set to be Partial, Overhanging, or Empty in the Border Tile instance
property of the patterned surface. See Pattern Element Instance Properties on page 213. Partial border tiling
is the default setting.

Empty Partial Overhanging

1 Select the patterned surface.

2 On the Properties palette, under Constraints, select Empty, Partial, or Overhanging.

3 Click OK.

When components are later applied to a surface, the border components inherit the condition of the border
tile set when the surface was patterned.

Pattern Component Families

You can use the Curtain Panel by Pattern family template (Curtain Panel Pattern Based.rft) to create pattern
panel components. These parametric components can be loaded into a conceptual mass family and applied
to divided and patterned surfaces to populate buildable architectural components across a large variety of
geometric surfaces. They can also be scheduled as curtain panels. When building a parametric component
based on the Curtain Panel by Pattern template, you can apply the form-making tools to create variety of
shapes. See Forms on page 167.
Pattern components are nested families, which are part of the larger conceptual mass family. When loaded
in the conceptual design mass, they are available to be applied to a divided or a patterned surface. They may
be modified individually after being applied to the divided surface.

To create and apply pattern components

1 Create a new pattern component family using the provided template family. See Creating New
Pattern Component Families on page 202.
2 Determine the tile pattern for the component. See Patterning Surfaces on page 197.
3 Using the same modeling tools as used in the conceptual design mass, sketch and extrude
geometry onto the pattern grid. See Modeling Pattern Component Families on page 203.
4 Load the pattern component family into the conceptual design mass. See Loading a Pattern
Component Family on page 204.
5 Apply the pattern component family to the divided or patterned surface. See Applying a Pattern
Component Family on page 204.

Pattern Component Families | 201

6 Modify the pattern component family to meet the needs of the conceptual design mass. See
Modifying the Pattern Component Family on page 205.

Creating New Pattern Component Families

You create pattern component families from a provided family template file. The family can then be saved
and edited as needed.

1 Click ➤ New ➤ Family.

2 In the New Family dialog, navigate to the family templates directory.
3 Select Curtain Panel Pattern Based.rft, and click Open.

4 Click ➤ Save As.

5 In the Save As dialog, navigate to the directory where you want to save your pattern component
family, and click Save.
You can now design the pattern component family for the conceptual design mass.

The Pattern Component Family Template

The component template consists of a grid, reference points, and reference lines.

The default reference points are locked to allow only vertical movement as seen in the following image. This
maintains the basic shape of the component so it will apply to the pattern proportionately.

Selecting the Tile Pattern Grid

Before designing the pattern component, you may need to select a tile pattern grid that matches your
patterned surface. These are grids on which you sketch and create 3D forms for your pattern component.
The grid layouts for pattern components are shown in the chart in Patterning Surfaces on page 197.
1 Open your pattern component family file. A square tile pattern grid displays by default.
2 Select the tile pattern grid in the drawing area.

202 | Chapter 12 Conceptual Design Environment

3 In the Type Selector on page 35, select the desired pattern grid.
The new tile pattern grid is applied.

NOTE Many of the predefined tile pattern grids appear identical to others, such as the Rectangle
and Rectangle Checkerboard, or Rhomboid and Rhomboid Checkerboard patterns. While they appear
similar, they are configured differently when applied to the conceptual design mass.

4 Click ➤ Save.
You can now design the pattern component family. See Modeling Pattern Component Families on page 203.

Modeling Pattern Component Families

Designing the pattern component is very similar to sketching the conceptual design mass. You use the same
modeling tools that are used to design forms, though with the following limitations:

■ There is only one floor plan (level) view, which is defined by the pattern tile grid.

■ There are no elevation views.

■ There are no default vertical reference planes, though reference planes can be defined by geometry.

Lines, Curves, and Splines

Draw reference points, lines, and closed loop geometry to design and modify a pattern component. While
the template reference points will not move horizontally, the template reference lines can have driving
points added to them to alter their geometry.

Related topics

■ Drawing in the Conceptual Design Environment on page 141

■ Reference Points on page 152

■ Forms on page 167

Pattern Component Families | 203

Extrusions and Forms
Using sketched lines and geometry, create extrusions, forms and voids to give the component dimension.

Related topic

■ Forms on page 167

Best Practices
■ Divide and pattern a surface before applying components.

■ Work with border tile conditions set to Empty or Overhanging when possible. When set to Partial, the
size of the file and resulting memory requirements increase. Loading pattern components and modifying
conceptual masses with applied pattern components in this state may take longer than anticipated.

■ When working with closed forms, select patterns that will seamlessly interlock.

■ Work with multiple windows to facilitate your pattern component family design workflow.

To design a pattern component

1 Open the pattern component family.

2 Open the conceptual design mass (3D view, floor plan view, or both).

3 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile.

Designing in this manner allows you to work in the pattern component family and see how it displays
in your conceptual design mass.

Loading a Pattern Component Family

1 Open the conceptual design mass.
2 Open the pattern component family.

3 Click Home tab ➤ Family Editor panel ➤ Load into Project.

4 If multiple projects are open, the Load into Projects dialog will open. Select which projects will
receive the pattern component family, and click OK.
The new pattern component is now available to be applied to a patterned surface. See Applying a Pattern
Component Family on page 204.

Applying a Pattern Component Family

1 Open the conceptual design mass.

204 | Chapter 12 Conceptual Design Environment

2 Select the divided or patterned surface.
3 In the Type Selector on page 35, select the pattern component family.

The component is applied to the patterned surface.

NOTE The pattern component may take a few moments to load.

Modifying the Pattern Component Family

Pattern component families can be edited using the following tools.

■ Change pattern component layout by adjusting the patterned surface. See Editing the Patterned Surface
on page 200.

■ Change pattern component family geometry by directly editing its family file. See Modeling Pattern
Component Families on page 203.

Pattern Component Families | 205

■ Change component family properties on the Properties palette. See Pattern Element Instance Properties
on page 213.

Modifying Individual Pattern Components

Individual instances of pattern components can be replaced with other pattern components.
1 Select a single pattern component. Use the tab key if you want to select any of the adjacent
pattern components.

2 Select a new pattern component in the Type Selector on page 35. Note that you will need to
select a pattern component created with a similar underlying pattern grid.

The pattern component is replaced.

To select All, Interior, or Border Pattern Components

1 Click on the surface on which you have applied pattern components.
2 Right click to select All, All Interior or All Border Components.
You can use the selection to swap pattern components on the border or the interior of the surface.

206 | Chapter 12 Conceptual Design Environment

Stitching Borders of Divided Surfaces
You can manually stitch surface borders with pattern components. Revit pattern components don't require
to be hosted on nodes of divided surface and can also address the problems of creating and placing pattern
component panels (triangular, pentagonal, hexagonal, etc.) on non-rectangular and non-evenly spaced
grids.

To stitch surface borders with pattern component

1 You can clean up the border conditions of applied pattern component families by using
individually placed pattern components. Notice the open edges in the following example.

This example requires a 3-point pattern component to fill the edges that were not filled by the
selected pattern component.
Create a new pattern component family.
2 Select the Triangle (flat) (a 3-point pattern component) tile pattern grid.
3 Create a component family from the tile pattern grid.
4 Load the component family into your adaptive component.
5 From the Project Browser in your adaptive component, drag the component family into the
drawing area. It is listed under Curtain Panel.

Notice the shape of the component family is represented on the cursor.

Pattern Component Families | 207

6 Place the three points on the component surface that will create the new panel.

NOTE The order of point placement is important. If the component family is an extrusion, the
direction of the extrusion will flip when the points are placed counterclockwise.

7 You can continue placing panels as needed.

Adaptive Components
The Adaptive Component functionality is an adaptation of the pattern-based curtain panel. This functionality
is designed to handle cases where components need to flexibly adapt to many unique contextual conditions.
For example, adaptive components could be used in repeating systems generated by arraying multiple
components that conform to user-defined constraints.
Adaptive points are created by modifying reference points. The geometry drawn by snapping to these flexible
points results in a flexible component.
You can assign a category to adaptive components.

NOTE The use of adaptive components is restricted to pattern panel families and adaptive component templates.
Adaptive points cannot be used in massing families, but families with adaptive points can be placed into massing.
It is not possible to load the Adaptive Component template into the project environment, but it can be placed in
an in-place family.

208 | Chapter 12 Conceptual Design Environment

To place an adaptive component
1 You can place the adaptive model within another adaptive component, in a conceptual mass,
in curtain panels, and in-place masses.
Open a new adaptive component and design a general model using adaptive points as references.
2 Load the adaptive component into design component or mass. The following illustrations use
the following general model which contains 4 adaptive points.

3 From the Project Browser in your design, drag the component family into the drawing area. It
is listed under General Model.

Notice the shape of the model is represented on the cursor.

4 Place the adaptive points of the model in the conceptual design.

TIP Press Esc at any time to place the model with the current adaptive points. For example, if your
model has 5 adaptive points, pressing escape after placing 2 points will place the model based on
those points.

Pattern Component Families | 209

NOTE The order of point placement is important. If the component is an extrusion, the direction of
the extrusion will flip when the points are placed counterclockwise.

5 You can continue placing multiple iterations of the model as needed. To manually array the
model, select one and Ctrl-move to place additional instances.

6 You can go back to the adaptive component model, add additional geometry, and reload it.

Surface Representation
While editing a surface in the conceptual design environment, you can choose which surface elements to
view with the Surface Representation tools. Select a divided surface and notice the Modify | Divided Surface
tab ➤ Surface Representation panel. The corresponding Surface, Pattern, and Component tools show or hide
their surface elements in the conceptual design environment.

NOTE Changes made from the Surface Representation panel will not carry into a project. To globally show or
hide surface elements, click View tab ➤ Graphics panel ➤ Visibility and Appearance. See Visibility and Graphic
Display in Project Views on page 801.

Each surface element has a subset of display properties for Surface Representation. To access these properties,

click Modify | Divided Surface tab ➤ Surface Representation panel ➤ . The Surface Representation dialog
opens with tabs for Surface, Pattern, and Component. Each tab has check boxes for surface element specific
items. Clicking a check box shows the change in the drawing area. Click OK to confirm any changes.

210 | Chapter 12 Conceptual Design Environment

Surface Properties Tab
These settings are used when the Surface tool on the Surface Representation panel is clicked.

■ Original Surface. Displays the original surface that was divided. Click Browse to change the surface
material. See Materials on page 1573.

■ Nodes. Displays nodes located at the intersection of UV grids. By default, nodes are not enabled.

Notice that the surface immediately updates when a dialog check box is selected.

■ UV Grids and Intersect Lines Displays the UV grids and Intersects on a divided surface.

Pattern Properties Tab

These settings are used when the Pattern tool on the Surface Representation panel is clicked.

■ Pattern Line. Displays the outlines of the pattern shapes.

■ Pattern Fill. Displays the surface fill of the pattern. Click Browse to change the surface material. See
Materials on page 1573.

Component Properties Tab

These settings are used when the Component tool on the Surface Representation panel is clicked.

■ Pattern Component. Displays the applied pattern component of the surface.

Pattern Element Properties

Use the following procedure to modify many properties such as constraints, grids, and application.
1 Select the patterned surface.
2 On the Properties palette, edit patterned surface instance parameters.
3 If you want to edit type properties, click Edit Type.
Type properties affect all instances (individual elements) of that family in the project and any
future instances that you place in the project. Edit type parameters and click OK.

4 Click OK.

Pattern Element Properties | 211

Pattern Element Type Properties
Name Description

Construction

Construction Type The type of construction for the compon-

ent.

Material and Finishes

Finish Texture of the finished surface of the

component.

Identity Data

Assembly Code Uniformat assembly code for the compon-

ent.

Keynote The component keynote. Add or edit the

value. Click in the value box to open the
Keynotes dialog. See Keynotes on page 938.

Model The manufacturer internal number.

Manufacturer The component manufacturer.

Type Comments A field for entering general comments

about the component type. This informa-
tion can be included in a schedule.

URL A link to a web page that may contain

type-specific information.

Description Description of the component.

Assembly Description Read-only description of the assembly

based on the assembly code selection.

Type Mark A value that designates the particular

component; possibly the shop mark. This
value must be unique for each element in
a project. You are warned if the number is
already used, but allows you to continue
using it. You can see the warning using the
Review Warnings tool. See Reviewing
Warning Messages on page 1680.

Cost The pricing of the component.

OmniClass Number The number from Table 23 of the Omni-

Class Construction Classification System
that best categorizes the family type.

212 | Chapter 12 Conceptual Design Environment

Name Description

OmniClass Title The name from Table 23 of the OmniClass

Construction Classification System that
best categorizes the family type.

Pattern Element Instance Properties

Name Description

Constraints

Border Tile Determines how a pattern intersects a sur-

face border: empty, partial, or over-
hanging. See Editing the Patterned Surface
on page 200.

All Grid Rotation The rotation of both U and V grids. See

Adjusting UV Grids with the Face Manager
on page 192.

U Grid

Layout The spacing units of the U grid: Fixed

Number or Fixed Distance. See Adjusting
UV Grids with the Face Manager on page
192.

Number The fixed number of divisions of the U grid.

See Adjusting UV Grids with the Face
Manager on page 192.

Distance The fixed distance of divisions of the U

grid. See Adjusting UV Grids with the Face
Manager on page 192.

Justification The position from which the U grid is

measured: Beginning, Center, or End. See
Adjusting UV Grids with the Face Manager
on page 192.

Grid Rotation The rotation of the U grid. See Adjusting

UV Grids with the Face Manager on page
192.

V Grid

Layout The spacing units of the V grid: Fixed

Number or Fixed Distance. See Adjusting
UV Grids with the Face Manager on page
192.

Number The fixed number of divisions of the V grid.

See Adjusting UV Grids with the Face
Manager on page 192.

Pattern Element Properties | 213

Name Description

Distance The fixed distance of divisions of the V grid.

See Adjusting UV Grids with the Face
Manager on page 192.

Justification The position from which the V grid is

measured: Beginning, Center, or End. See
Adjusting UV Grids with the Face Manager
on page 192.

Grid Rotation The rotation of the V grid. See Adjusting

UV Grids with the Face Manager on page
192.

Pattern Application

Indent 1 The number of U grid divisions by which

the pattern is shifted when applied.

Indent 2 The number of V grid divisions by which

the pattern is shifted when applied.

Component Rotation The rotation of a pattern component family

in its pattern cell: 0°, 90°, 180°, or 270°.

Component Mirror Mirrors the component horizontally along

the U grid.

Component Flip Flips the component along the W grid.

Identity Data

Comments Comments on the pattern element.

Mark A mark applied to a pattern element. This

can be a label that appears in a multi-cat-
egory tag with the pattern element. For
complete information about multi-category
tagging and setting up shared parameters,
see Shared Parameters on page 1541.

Area

Divided Surface Area The total area of the selected divided sur-
face.

Conceptual Design Environment Glossary

■ 3D control
A manipulation control that appears when surfaces, edges, or vertices are selected. This control also
displays on a selected point. See Modifying Forms on page 180.

214 | Chapter 12 Conceptual Design Environment

■ 3D level
A finite horizontal plane that acts as a reference for level-hosted forms and points. 3D levels display in
the conceptual design environment as the cursor moves over them in the drawing area. These can be set
as work planes.

■ 3D reference plane
A 3D plane used to draw lines that create a form. 3D reference planes display in the conceptual design
environment. These can be set as work planes.

■ 3D work plane
A planar surface on which to draw lines for creating a form. 3D levels and 3D reference planes can be
set as work planes. These automatically display in the conceptual design environment as the cursor moves
over them in the drawing area.

■ Form
The 3D or 2D surface or solid created using the Create Form tool. See Forms on page 167.

■ Loft
The form derived from multiple lines (single segment, chain, or loop) drawn on parallel or non-parallel
work planes.

■ Profile
A single curve, or collection of end-connected curves which are used singly or in combination to construct
form element geometry, using the supported geometry construction techniques: extrude, loft, sweep,
revolve, and surface.

Conceptual Design Environment Glossary | 215

216
Structural Modeling
13
This section contains information about the various structural tools and elements within Revit Structure.

Structural Template
A structural template is provided with the installation of Revit Structure. In this template, the view properties
and ranges have been modified to specifically work with structural components.
Although you can work with structural components in projects based on non-structural templates, you will
notice that you must modify view ranges in order to display the structural components within the view.
This is because structural components, such as beams and columns, are placed on the level below the view
you are working in. Therefore, they fall below the bottom cut plane of the view range and do not display.
The structural template has been modified specifically to take this into account.

Related Topics

■ Project Templates on page 1633

■ View Range on page 864

Starting a Project with the Structural Template

1 Click ➤ New ➤ Project.
2 In the New Project dialog, under Template File, click Browse.
3 In the Choose Template dialog, select the structural template, and click Open.

NOTE The name and location of the structural template will vary depending on your install options

and system settings. To view or modify file locations, click ➤ Options, and click the File Locations
tab.

4 In the New Project dialog, click OK.

217
Loading Structural Component Families
When you load structural families, Revit Structure provides a type catalog to assist you with the family
selection process. You can sort through the data and load only the specific structural family type required
for your project. This helps decrease project size and minimizes the length of the Type Selector list when
selecting structural types. For example, if you load the entire C-Channel family, you have to scroll through
a list of dozens of C-Channel types in order to make your selection. Simplify the choices by loading a single
C-Channel type, such as a C15x40.
After the family is loaded, it is saved with the project.

Loading Structural Families

1 Click Insert tab ➤ Load from Library panel ➤ Load Family.
2 Navigate to the directory containing the file you wish to open or use the web-based library of
Revit families. See Opening Files from the Web Library on page 84.
By default, the window displays the RFA file types.

3 Select a structural family file.

In the lower left-corner, the Type Catalog populates with family types.

4 In the Type column of the Type Catalog, select the family type or types to load. Select multiple
types by holding Ctrl during selection. You can filter the list of types by selecting specific
parameters from the list at the top of each column.
5 Click Open.
6 From the Type Selector, select the new family you just loaded and place it in the document
window.

Structural Columns
Structural columns are used to model vertical load-bearing elements in a building. Although structural
columns share many of the same properties as architectural columns, structural columns have additional
properties defined by their configuration and industry standards.
Structural columns differ from architectural columns in behavior as well.
Structural elements such as beams, braces, and isolated foundations join to structural columns; they do not
join to architectural columns. In addition, structural columns have an analytical model that is used for data
exchange. See Structural Member Analytical Models on page 1281.
Typically, drawings or models received from an architect may contain a grid and architectural columns. You
create structural columns by manually placing each column or by using the At Grids tool to add a column
to selected grid intersections.
Structural columns can be created in plan or 3D views.

218 | Chapter 13 Structural Modeling

Adding columns in 3D View

It is helpful to set up a grid before adding structural columns, as they snap to grid lines (see Adding Grids
on page 99).
Sample grid for placing structural elements

The grid lines also provide vertical planes for braces. Click Home tab ➤ Datum panel ➤ Grid.

Structural Columns | 219

You can place structural columns that attach to other structural elements. For more information, see Attaching
Columns on page 510.

Creating a Structural Column Family

You create column families by defining what the column looks like in plan view, elevation view, and 3D
view.
For detailed information about creating a family, see The Families Guide on page 680.
The following image shows what a column may look like in a 3D view.
3D view of
structural
column

Starting a Structural Column Family

When you start creating a column family, you see one of 3 views: a front elevation view of a lower reference
level tag and an upper reference level tag with reference planes, a plan view with reference planes and 2 sets
of equality dimensions, and a 3D view. The view in which you start creating geometry does not matter. You
can define geometry in any of these views. You may want to add an overall width and depth dimension to
the plan view and label it. This is useful if you are going to have a list of different-size columns.
When you create a column, Revit Structure automatically adds a rotation control symbol to the lower left
corner of the geometry in the plan view. You notice it when you add the column to a project. You can rotate
the column in the plan view by clicking Modify, selecting the column geometry, and then dragging the
rotation control arrow.
The following procedure is a general procedure for creating a column family. Your steps may differ based
on design intent.

1 Click ➤ New ➤ Family.

2 In the Open dialog, select column.rft from the templates folder, and click Open.
3 Create the geometry for the family. For more information on creating solid geometry, see Creating
Solid and Void Geometry on page 1420.
4 If desired, label any permanent dimensions that you may have added. Place the cursor over the
dimension text and right-click. Click Edit Label and enter a name for the dimension. This name

220 | Chapter 13 Structural Modeling

appears in the properties of the family. You can modify the name to change all occurrences of
that family type in the project or you can use it to create other family types with varying sizes.
5 Set the reference planes and sketch lines properties for Defines Origin and Is Reference properties.

6 Save the family by clicking ➤ Save. Revit Structure saves the file with an RFA extension.

Specifying How a Structural Column Displays in Plan View

For a column family, you can select the option Show family pre-cut in plan views, in the Family Category
and Parameters dialog. When you select this option and load the family into a project, the column displays
in a plan view using the cut plane specified in the plan view of the family.
1 Open a column family or start a new column family.
2 Click Home tab ➤ Properties panel ➤ Family Category and Parameters.
3 In the Family Category and Parameters dialog, under Family Parameters, select or clear the
parameter, Show family pre-cut in plan views.
When loaded into a project, if you want the then
column to display in plan view

based on the cut plane of the project’s plan view, clear the parameter, Show family pre-cut in plan views.

consistently, regardless of the cut plane of the select the parameter, Show family pre-cut in plan views.
project’s plan view, The column displays using the cut plane specified within
the Family Editor plan view.

4 Click OK.
5 Save the column family.
After you load the column family into a project, the column displays based on the parameter
settings you specified within the Family Editor.
A column with corbels family depicting “Show
family pre-cut in plan views” enabled (left) and
disabled (right). Notice the cut plane of the
project’s plan view has no affect on the display
of the column. The horizontal arrow marks the
cut plane for the section views to the right.

Creating a Structural Column Family | 221

Structural Column Family Parameters
To access the Structural Column Family Parameters in the Family Editor, click Modify | Structural Column
tab ➤ Mode panel ➤ Edit Family ➤ Properties panel ➤ Family Category and Parameters. Verify that Structural
Columns is selected as the Family Category. The Family Parameters display at the bottom of the dialog.

Parameter Value

Structural Material Type Controls hidden view display of the struc-

tural column family. See Material Physical
Type Parameters on page 1597.

Symbolic Representation Determines whether the Symbolic Repres-

entation of the structural column is defined
by the family or the settings of the project
in which its placed. See Symbolic Repres-
entation Settings Tab on page 1605.

Always export as geometry Ensures that the structural column family

is exported as geometry at all times. This
overrides the Export as Architectural
Desktop and Building System Objects op-
tion in the Export Options dialog. See Ex-
porting Structural Members on page 1167.

Beam cutback in plan Determines whether the symbolic repres-

entation of a beam is cutback from the
column bounding box or the physical
geometry of the column. See Beam to
Column Cutback on page 278.

Display in hidden views Defines the structural column family rules

for displaying edges in hidden views. See
Showing Hidden Element Lines on page
862.

Shared Denotes the structural column family as a

shared family. See Loading Families with
Shared Components into a Project on page
689.

Show family pre-cut in plan views Displays the structural column family in a
plan view using the cut plane specified in
the plan view of the family. See Specifying
How a Structural Column Displays in Plan
View on page 221.

Placing a Vertical Structural Column

1 Click Home tab ➤ Structure panel ➤ Column drop-down ➤ Structural Column.
2 Click Modify | Place Structural Column tab ➤ Placement panel ➤ Vertical Column.
3 If a structural column family has not been previously loaded, Revit Structure prompts you to
load one. See Loading Families on page 688.
4 On the Properties palette, select a column type from the Type Selector drop-down.

222 | Chapter 13 Structural Modeling

5 If you intend to rotate the column after placement, select Rotate after placement on the Options
Bar.
6 Optionally, click Modify | Place Structural Column tab ➤ Properties panel ➤ Properties (and
Type Properties when appropriate) to edit the properties of the column before adding it to your
model.

NOTE You can create your own column family by defining specific properties based on structural
requirements. For more information, see Creating a Structural Column Family on page 220. You can
control how a column family displays within a project plan view. In the Family Editor, select Show
family pre-cut in plan views if you want the column display to remain consistent despite the cut plan
for that project plan view. For more information, see Specifying How a Structural Column Displays
in Plan View on page 221.

7 The Height/Depth area of the Options Bar is shown in the following illustration.

You may pre-select the Height (top) or Depth (base) of a structural column on the Options Bar.

8 On the Options Bar, select either Height or Depth from the list.
9 In the Constraint list to the right of the Height/Depth selection, specify the constraint of the
top or base of the column by Level or select Unconnected.

If you select Unconnected, enter the Height or Depth measurement in the text box to the right
of the Constraint list. This measurement of Unconnected Height/Depth is relative to the current
Level.

10 Click to place the column.

Placing a column

Columns snap to existing geometry in Revit. When you place columns at grid intersections,
both grids are highlighted.

Placing a Vertical Structural Column | 223

Highlighted grids

To rotate the column during placement

While placing columns, use the SPACEBAR to change the column rotation before the column is placed. Each
time you press the SPACEBAR, the column rotates to align with the intersecting grids at the selected location.
In the absence of any grids, press the SPACEBAR to rotate the column 90 degrees.
Rotating a column

Placing Slanted Structural Columns

Slanted structural columns are becoming more common in large, high profile structures. These have been
implemented in Revit Structure to help engineers incorporate this functionality into their drawings and
allow proper analysis calculations.
The following general rules apply to the procedures for placing slanted columns.
When placing slanted columns, the top of the column will always have a higher elevation than its base.
When you place the column, the endpoint at the higher elevation is the top, and the lower elevation is the
base. Once defined, the top may not be set below the base.
When placed in a 3D view, your 1st Click and 2nd Click settings define the associated levels and offset of
the column. When placed in an elevation or cross section, the endpoints associate with their nearest level.
The distance between the endpoint and the elevation are the offset by default.
If 3D Snapping is disabled, snap references for elements not on the current work plane display, as well as
typical temporary dimensions. When you place columns with 3D snapping enabled, the 1st Click and 2nd
Click level settings are used if a snap reference is not found or utilized.

224 | Chapter 13 Structural Modeling

Upgrade Behaviors
When you first open a project modeled in versions earlier than Revit Structure 2010, new parameters and
column states will be applied to the existing elements. Browse the following references to determine the
changes that will be made to your project and to understand the limited functionality of some features.

■ New element properties have been implemented. See Structural Column Instance Properties on page 243.

■ Slanted columns do not appear in graphical column schedules. Columns in a slanted state will not display
element properties related to graphical column schedules, such as Column Location Mark.

■ In some cases, slanted concrete structural columns may display end trimming aberrations at joins, and
expected geometry may not be created.

■ Currently, the Copy/Monitor tool does not apply to slanted columns.

Placing a Slanted Structural Column in a Plan View

You place a slanted column in a plan view with 2 clicks—one to specify the column start point and one to
specify its endpoint. You define the elevation and offset of each click or use 3D snapping to join to previously
placed elements.
1 Open a plan view of your project.
2 Click Home tab ➤ Structure panel ➤ Column drop-down ➤ Structural Column.
3 Click Modify | Place Structural Column tab ➤ Placement panel ➤ Slanted Column.
4 On the Properties palette, select a column type from the Type Selector drop-down.
5 On the Options Bar, for 1st Click, select the level for the column start point, and for 2nd Click,
select the level for the column endpoint.
(Optional) In the text boxes next to the 1st Click and 2nd Click drop-downs, enter offset values
for the column ends.

6 (Optional) Select 3D snapping if you want either or both ends of the column to snap to previously
placed structural elements.
7 In the drawing area, click to specify the start point of the column at the level selected for 1st
Click.

8 Click to specify the endpoint of the column at the level selected for 2nd Click.

Placing Slanted Structural Columns | 225

The column is placed, defined by the 2 clicks, their associated levels, and defined offsets. The following
illustrations show slanted column placement from the level 2 structural plan of a project using the click
locations shown in steps 8 and 9.

1st Click: Level 1 and 2nd Click: Level 1st Click: Level 3 and 2nd Click: Level
2 2

Placing a Slanted Structural Column Using 3D Snapping

1 Open a 3D view of the project.
2 Click Home tab ➤ Structure panel ➤ Column drop-down ➤ Structural Column.
3 Click Modify | Place Structural Column tab ➤ Placement panel ➤ Slanted Column.
4 On the Properties palette, select a structural column type from the Type Selector drop-down.
5 On the Options Bar, select 3D Snapping. This enables the slanted column placement to snap to
points that are not within the work plane of the view, such as columns in different elevations.
6 Click along any structural element or on an element endpoint to place the first point of the
column.

226 | Chapter 13 Structural Modeling

7 Click another structural element to place the column.

8 The column is placed between the 2 structural elements.

NOTE If either of the placement clicks is not a snap reference to a structural element, the column
end location will be defined by the placement of the click and the appropriate elevation defined in
the Options Bar.

Placing a Slanted Structural Column Using 2-Click 3D View Placement

1 Open a 3D view of the project.
2 Click Home tab ➤ Structure panel ➤ Column drop-down ➤ Structural Column.
3 Click Modify | Place Structural Column tab ➤ Placement panel ➤ Slanted Column.
4 On the Properties palette, select a structural column type from the Type Selector drop-down.
5 On the Options Bar, define the 1st click and 2nd click column end elevations. See Placing Slanted
Structural Columns on page 224.

NOTE Select 3D Snapping on the Options Bar if you want a previously placed structural element to
define one end of the column. This is the most accurate placement method. See Placing a Slanted
Structural Column Using 3D Snapping on page 226.

6 In the drawing area, click where the column should begin in regard to the 1st Click elevation
setting on the Options Bar.

Placing Slanted Structural Columns | 227

7 Click where the column should end in regard to the 2nd Click elevation setting on the Options
Bar.

The column is placed, defined by the 2 clicks and their associated levels.

Placing a Slanted Structural Column in Elevations or Sections

1 Open an elevation or section view of the project.
2 Click Home tab ➤ Structure panel ➤ Column drop-down ➤ Structural Column.
3 Use the Work Plane dialog to define the column top and base if a snap reference is not available.
See Setting the Work Plane on page 1517.

NOTE Select 3D Snapping on the Options Bar if you want a previously placed structural element to
define one end of the column. This is the most accurate placement method.

4 Click Modify | Place Structural Column tab ➤ Placement panel ➤ Slanted Column.
5 On the Properties palette, select a structural column type from the Type Selector drop-down.
6 Click where the column should begin using the temporary dimensions as a reference.

228 | Chapter 13 Structural Modeling

7 Click where the column should end using the temporary dimensions as a reference.

The column is placed, defined by the 2 clicks and their associated levels.

Placing Multiple Columns by Grid

1 Click Home tab ➤ Structure panel ➤ Column drop-down ➤ Structural Column.
2 Click Modify | Place Structural Column tab ➤ Multiple panel ➤ At Grids.
3 Select multiple grid intersections. For more information, see Selecting Elements on page 1439.

Placing Multiple Columns by Grid | 229

Placing columns by grid

NOTE A column will be placed at every intersection of selected grid lines. No columns are actually
created until you click Finish.

4 Press the Spacebar to rotate all of the columns that you are creating.
5 Continue pressing Spacebar until the columns are in the desired orientation.
6 To add other columns to grid intersections, hold Ctrl and drag other pick boxes.
7 Click Modify | Place Structural Column > At Grid Intersection tab ➤ Multiple panel ➤ Finish to
create the columns.

Locking Columns to a Grid

You can constrain the current position of vertical columns or the tops and bases of slanted columns to a
grid. This state allows you to move the grid and keep columns or ends in their respective orientation to their
grid placement.

To lock vertical columns to a grid

1 Valid columns must be within a grid and have a valid column location mark (see Including
Off-Grid Columns on page 776).
To enable this state:
Select the vertical columns to lock to the grid.
2 On the Properties palette, under the Constraints section, select Moves with Grids.
3 Click Apply.
The modified columns may still be moved and modified but they will proportionately move
with the grid if it is repositioned.

To lock slanted columns to a grid

1 Because the ends of a slanted column move independently from one another, it is possible to
lock the column tops, bases, or both to the project grid.

230 | Chapter 13 Structural Modeling

To lock slanted column ends to a grid:
Select the slanted columns to be locked.
2 On the Properties palette, under the Constraints section, select Move Top With grids, Move Base
With Grids, or both parameters.
Because of the unique orientation properties of slanted column ends, locking to grids requires situational
guidelines.

■ If both ends are locked to a grid and the grids at each end are not a subset of each other, the Column
Style parameter (see Structural Column Instance Properties on page 243) of the columns will be changed
to Slanted - End Point Driven.

■ Movement of a grid to which an angle-driven column is locked will move the entire column.

■ Movement of a grid to which an endpoint-driven column is locked will move only that end of the
column. The column will lengthen or shorten to meet the new location of the grid.

Adding Structural Columns Inside Architectural Columns

1 Click Home tab ➤ Structure panel ➤ Column drop-down ➤ Structural Column.
2 On the Properties palette, select a column type from the Type Selector drop-down.
3 Click Modify | Place Structural Column tab ➤ Multiple panel ➤ At Columns.
4 Either select individual architectural columns or drag a pick box over architectural columns in
the view to select multiple columns.
Selecting a single architectural column

Adding Structural Columns Inside Architectural Columns | 231

Selecting multiple architectural
columns

The structural columns snap to the centers of the architectural columns. For more information
about creating a pick box, see Selecting Elements on page 1439.

5 Click Modify | Place Structural Column > At Architectural Columns tab ➤ Multiple panel ➤ Finish
when complete.

NOTE You can control how a column family displays within a project plan view. In the Family Editor,
select “Show family pre-cut in plan views” if you want the column display to remain consistent despite
the cut plan for that project plan view. For more information, see Specifying How a Structural Column
Displays in Plan View on page 221.

Adjusting Slanted Column Geometry End Position and Trim

You can modify instance properties to control the offset position and cut of end geometry of slanted columns.
The following properties are located under the Constraints section of the Properties palette.

Slanted Column Geometry Alignment with Beams

Beam elevation takes precedence when a beam mid-joins to a column. If the slanted column is moved, the
join position will adjust to maintain the beam elevation.
You can adjust the working point of slanted column geometry when it is attached to a beam. The working
point vertically offsets the column geometry centerline when you change the Top Geometry Alignment or
Base Geometry Alignment properties. Geometry alignment can specify the Location Line (of the beam), Top
of beam, Bottom of Beam, or Center of Beam. Change these values to shift the position of slanted column
geometry relative to its location line as illustrated below.

232 | Chapter 13 Structural Modeling

In the following illustrations, a blue line represents the location line of the column and beam. Orange lines
represent the geometry centerline. Green arrows show the vertical offset that determines the new centerline
alignment.

Options for the Geometry Alignment Instance Property

Location Line Top of Beam Bottom of Beam Center of Beam

Top Geometry
Alignment

Z-justification off- Default

set beam shown

Bottom Geo-
metry Alignment

Z-justification off- Default

set beam shown

When a column joins with a beam end, the Beam/Column Join Editor can adjust the cutback of the beam
to frame into the column.

Attachment Justification
You can define how a column end displays when it is attached to a structural floor or foundation slab.
Column end geometry is offset or cut according to the options selected for its Attachment Justification
properties.

Options for Attachment Justification Instance Property

Minimum In- Intersect Maximum In- Tangent
tersection Column Mid- tersection
line

Attachment
Justification at
Top

Attachment
Justification at
Base

Adjusting Slanted Column Geometry End Position and Trim | 233

You can further adjust the offset of the column with the Offset From Attachment at Top and Offset From
Attachment at Base properties.

Cut Style
You can define how a column end displays when it is not attached to an element. The column end geometry
is cut according to the options selected for its Cut Style properties in relation to its location line.

Cut Style Instance Property

Perpendicular Horizontal Vertical

Top Cut Style

Base Cut Style

You can offset the cut plane of the column end geometry by increasing or decreasing the Top Extension or
Base Extension properties.

Slanted Column Style Behaviors

The Column Style parameter for slanted structural columns defines how the column parametrically adjusts
to the model. The parameter value is either Slanted - Angle Driven or Slanted - End Point Driven.
Angle driven columns maintain the angle of the column when its attached elements are repositioned. End
point driven columns maintain their joined end positions when their attached elements are repositioned.
Depending on the column style, the column adjusts to maintain the join relationship with the beam when
the beam is repositioned.

Column style Original position Beam elevation Beam elevation

raised lowered

Angle driven

234 | Chapter 13 Structural Modeling

Column style Original position Beam elevation Beam elevation
raised lowered

End point
driven

Columns Joined at Both Ends

If both ends of a column mid-join to a beam, join another slanted column, or attach to a grid, the Column
Style parameter changes to Slanted - End Point driven.

Column Joined at Top or Base

If one end of an angle driven column mid-joins to a beam, joins another slanted column, or attaches to a
grid, the Column Style maintains its current setting. In the following examples, the top end of the concrete
slanted column mid-joins to a concrete beam.

If the joined element is repositioned in an angle driven relationship, the column moves with the element.

Slanted Column Style Behaviors | 235

Angle driven column, mid-joined at top

Beam elevation raised Beam elevation lowered

If the joined element is moved in an end point driven relationship, only the joined end of the column
moves.
End point driven column, mid-joined at top

Beam elevation raised Beam elevation lowered

Columns Attached to a Structural Floor or Roof

When an angle driven slanted column attaches to a structural floor or roof, the attached end of the column
moves along the location line to determine its join location.

Angle driven columns Structural floor eleva- Structural floor eleva-

attached to a structural tion raised tion lowered
floor

236 | Chapter 13 Structural Modeling

Conversely, the joined end of an end point driven column moves vertically when the attached element is
repositioned.

End point driven Structural floor eleva- Structural floor eleva-

columns attached to a tion raised tion lowered
structural floor

Modifying Structural Columns

You can align, move, copy, and adjust structural columns using common Revit Structure tools.

Related topics

■ Moving Elements on page 1474

■ Copying Elements on page 1491

■ Modifying Elements on page 1497

■ Locking Columns to a Grid on page 230

■ Structural Column Properties on page 241

■ Modifying Slanted Structural Columns on page 237

■ Modifying the Slant of Placed Structural Columns on page 239

Modifying Slanted Structural Columns

Slanted columns incorporate a unique implementation of dragging tools. The following controls are available
when the slanted column is selected.

NOTE If the base is moved higher than the top, or the top is moved lower than the base, a warning dialog displays,
disallowing the modification. The top and base can similarly not share the same elevation or the same warning
dialog is issued.

Related topic

■ Joins and Cutback on Framing Elements and Columns on page 273

Vertical Arrow Controls

Vertical arrow controls appear as blue arrows at either end of the endpoint-driven slanted column. Drag
these controls to adjust the elevation of the top or base of the column. The column end will only move
vertically.

Modifying Structural Columns | 237

These controls are only available when the property Column Style is set to Slanted - End Point Driven. See
Structural Column Instance Properties on page 243.
Vertical arrow controls are disabled when a column is attached to a structural floor, floor, roof, reference
plane, or mid-joined to or driven by a beam.

Endpoint Controls
Endpoint controls appear as a blue dot on either end of the column. Drag these controls to adjust the position
of the top or base of the column. The column end will move freely in accordance with the current view.

Text Controls
The text controls directly adjust the offset parameter displayed next to the endpoint control. Clicking this
control enables it to be manually edited. Enter an elevation to reposition the associated top or base. The
column end will only move vertically.

Text controls are disabled when a column is attached to a structural floor, floor, roof, reference plane, or
mid-joined to or driven by a beam.
The behavior of text controls is dependent on the Column Style instance parameter (see Slanted Column
Style Behaviors on page 234) and is consistent with changing the Base/Top Offset parameters.
If a column is endpoint-driven, the column endpoints move vertically when dependent elements of the
column are modified. If it is angle-driven, endpoints move along the dependent element to maintain its
angle. In the following illustration, columns adjust to meet a base offset increase. Notice how the angle-driven
column on the left maintains it angle, while the endpoint-driven column on the right adjusts vertically,
regardless of its original angle. The original column orientations are highlighted in blue.

238 | Chapter 13 Structural Modeling

Cross-Sectional Rotation
Press the Spacebar to rotate the selected column 90° clockwise (viewed from base to top) around its center.
To make more finite adjustments to this rotation on slanted columns, edit the Cross-Section Rotation
property. See Structural Column Instance Properties on page 243.

Modifying the Slant of Placed Structural Columns

This procedure will slant vertical columns or adjust existing slanted columns using the Properties palette,
and column modification tools.
1 Open a 3D View of your project.
2 Select the column to be modified.

3 On the Properties palette, under Constraints, select a slanted column style, Slanted - End Point
Driven or Slanted - Angle Driven, to define how the slant angle can be adjusted.

NOTE Other slanted column properties are available. See Structural Column Instance Properties on
page 243.

4 Click Apply.
5 Adjust the position of the top of the column with the column endpoint control. If the column
is set to Slanted - End Point Driven, you adjust the elevation of the top of the column using the
vertical arrow or text controls.

Modifying the Slant of Placed Structural Columns | 239

Angle-Driven Modification

6 Adjust the position of the base of the column with the column endpoint. If the column is set
to Slanted - End Point Driven, you adjust the elevation of the base of the column using the
vertical arrow or text controls.
Endpoint-Driven Editing

The column adjusts its length and slant based on your parameter settings and endpoint adjustments.

240 | Chapter 13 Structural Modeling

Adding a Splice Symbol or Plate Symbol to a Steel Structural Column
1 Select the column that is to be modified.
2 On the Properties palette, under Structural, select Top Connection (for top splice), or Base
Connection (for base plate symbol), as needed.
3 Click OK.

Structural Column Properties

There are several properties for structural columns, including base level, base offset, and materials.

Modifying Structural Column Properties

To modifying structural column properties
1 Select the structural column.
2 On the Properties palette, edit structural column instance parameters as required. (See Structural
Column Instance Properties on page 243.)
3 Click Apply.
4 To edit structural column type parameters, on the Properties palette, click Edit Type. (See
Structural Column Type Properties - Steel on page 241 or Structural Column Type Properties -
Concrete on page 243.)

NOTE Changes made to type parameters affect all structural columns of this type in the project. Click
Duplicate to create a new structural column type.

Structural Column Type Properties - Steel

Properties will vary depending on the column families that are specified during the installation process. The
following type properties apply to the steel column families that load during a typical installation:

Name Description

Structural (Family parameters)

Adding a Splice Symbol or Plate Symbol to a Steel Structural Column | 241

Name Description

A Section area.

W Nominal weight.

Dimensions (Family parameters)

bf Flange width.

d Actual depth of section.

k k distance.

kr kr distance, read only.

tf Flange thickness.

tw Web thickness.

Identity Data

Assembly Code Uniformat assembly code selected from a hierarchical list.

Keynote Add or edit the column keynote. Click the value box to open the Keynote dialog.
For more information, see Keynotes on page 938.

Model Manufacturer internal number.

Manufacturer The shape manufacturer.

Type Comments A field for entering general comments about the shape type. This information can
be included in a schedule.

URL Specifies a link to a web page that may contain type-specific information.

Description User can enter a description of the column here.

Assembly Description Description of the assembly based on the assembly code selection, a read-only
parameter.

Type Mark A value that designates the particular beam; possibly the shop mark. This value must
be unique for each element in a project. Revit Structure warns you if the number is
already used but allows you to continue using it. You can see the warning using the
Review Warnings tool. For more information, see Reviewing Warning Messages on
page 1680.

Cost The pricing of the column.

OmniClass Number The number from Table 23 of the OmniClass Construction Classification System
that best categorizes the family type.

OmniClass title The name from Table 23 of the OmniClass Construction Classification System that
best categorizes the family type.

242 | Chapter 13 Structural Modeling

Structural Column Type Properties - Concrete
Properties will vary depending on the column families that are specified during the installation process. The
following type properties apply to the concrete column families that load during a typical installation:

Name Description

Dimensions (Family parameters)

b Column width

h Column depth

Identity Data

Assembly Code Uniformat assembly code selected from a hierarchical list.

Keynote Add or edit the column keynote. Click the value box to open the Keynote dialog.
For more information, see Keynotes on page 938.

Model Manufacturer internal number.

Manufacturer The shape manufacturer.

Type Comments A field for entering general comments about the shape type. This information can
be included in a schedule.

URL Specifies a link to a web page that may contain type-specific information.

Description User can enter a description of the column here.

Assembly Description Description of the assembly based on the assembly code selection, a read-only
parameter.

Cost The pricing of the column.

OmniClass Number The number from Table 23 of the OmniClass Construction Classification System
that best categorizes the family type.

OmniClass title The name from Table 23 of the OmniClass Construction Classification System that
best categorizes the family type.

Structural Column Instance Properties

The following instance properties apply to column families that load during a typical installation. The
properties will vary depending on the column families that are specified during the installation process.

Name Description

Constraints

Structural Column Properties | 243

Name Description

Column Location Mark The coordinate location of a vertical column on the project grid.

Base Level Constraining level of the column base.

Base Offset Offset of base from base level.

Top Level Constraining level of the column top.

Top Offset Offset of top from top level.

Moves With Grids Changes the vertical column constraint to the grid. See Locking Columns to a Grid
on page 230.

Move Top With Grids Constrains the top endpoint of the slanted column to the grid.

Move Base With Grids Constrains the base endpoint of the slanted column to the grid.

Top Cut Style Either Perpendicular, Horizontal, or Vertical. Specifies the cut style at the top of the
column when unattached to a reference or element.

Top Extension Offset of the top of the column when unattached to a reference or element.

Base Cut Style Either Perpendicular, Horizontal, or Vertical. Specifies the cut style at the base of
the column when unattached to a reference or element.

Base Extension Offset of the base of the column when unattached to a reference or element.

Column Style Either Vertical, Slanted - End Point Driven, or Slanted - Angle Driven. Specifies the
slant style of the column which enables type specific modification tools. See
Modifying Slanted Structural Columns on page 237.

Base Geometry Alignment Either Location Line, Top of beam, Bottom of Beam, or Center of Beam. Specifies
the working point along an attached beam to which the centerline of a slanted
column adjusts at its base.

Top Geometry Alignment Either Location Line, Top of beam, Bottom of Beam, or Center of Beam. Specifies
the working point along an attached beam to which the centerline of a slanted
column adjusts at its top.

Base is Attached Read-only parameter specifying that the base of the column is mid-joined to a
beam or attached to a structural floor or roof.

Attachment Justification At Base Either Minimum Intersection, Intersect Column Midline, Maximum Intersection,
or Tangent. Specifies the degree of cutback or tangential justification at the base
of the column at the join.

Offset From Attachment At Base Offset of the base of the column from the mid-joined beam or attached elements.

Top is Attached Read-only parameter specifying that the top of the column is mid-joined to a beam
or attached to a structural floor or roof.

Attachment Justification At Top Either Minimum Intersection, Intersect Column Midline, Maximum Intersection,
or Tangent. Specifies the degree of cutback or tangential justification at the top of
the column at the join.

244 | Chapter 13 Structural Modeling

Name Description

Offset From Attachment At Top Offset of the top of the column from the mid-joined beam or attached elements.

Cross-Section Rotation The clockwise rotation angle of a slanted column (viewed from top to base). This
angle can be carried out to 3 decimal places. Negative numbers rotate counter-
clockwise. If a slanted column is in a vertical state, then this rotation is measured
from Project North. Otherwise, it is measured from the vertical position.

Room Bounding Changes column constraint to room-bounding conditions.

Graphics

Top Connection Symbol Applies to steel columns only. Turns on the visibility of a moment or shear connec-
tion symbol. The symbols are visible only in elevations and cuts parallel to the main
axis of the column in coarse view.

Base Plate Symbol Applies to steel columns only. Turns on the visibility of the base plate symbol. The
symbols are visible only in elevations and cuts parallel to the main axis of the column
in coarse view.

Materials and Finishes

Column Material Structural material. For more information, see Material Physical Type Parameters
on page 1597.

Structural

Top Attachment Type Either Distance or Ratio. Determines if the top join of a slanted column is measured
as a distance or a ratio of the length of the beam.

Top Attachment Distance Distance from the referenced end of the top attached beam to the join location
on the slanted column.

Top Attachment Ratio The ratio of distance from the referenced end of the attached beam to the top join
location on the slanted column to the total length of the beam.

Top Attachment Reference End Either Start or End. Specifies the end of the top attached beam from which to cal-
culate distance or ratio.

Base Attachment Type Either Distance or Ratio. Determines if the base join of a slanted column is measured
as a distance or a ratio of the length of the beam.

Base Attachment Distance Distance from the referenced end of the base attached beam to the join location
on the slanted column.

Base Attachment Ratio The ratio of distance from the referenced end of the attached beam to the base
join location on the slanted column to the total length of the beam.

Base Attachment Reference End Either Start or End. Specifies the end of the base attached beam from which to
calculate distance or ratio.

Rebar Cover - Top Face Applies to concrete columns only. Sets the rebar cover distance from the column
top face.

Structural Column Properties | 245

Name Description

Rebar Cover - Bottom Face Applies to concrete columns only. Sets the rebar cover distance from the column
bottom face.

Rebar Cover - Other Faces Applies to concrete columns only. Sets the rebar cover distance from the column
to other element faces.

Estimated Reinforcement Volume Specifies the estimated reinforcement volume of the selected element. This is a
read-only parameter that only displays when rebar has been placed.

Dimensions

Volume Volume of the selected column. A read-only value.

Identity Data

Comments User comments.

Mark A label created for the column. Possible use: shop mark. This value must be unique
for each element in a project. Revit Structure warns you if the number is already
used but allows you to continue using it. You can see the warning using the Review
Warnings tool. For more information, see Reviewing Warning Messages on page
1680.

Phasing

Phase Created Indicates in which phase the column component was created. For more information,
see Project Phasing on page 877.

Phase Demolished Indicates in which phase the column component was demolished. For more inform-
ation, see Project Phasing on page 877.

Structural Analysis (see Structural Analytical Model Overview on page 1277)

Top Release Either Fixed, Pinned, Bending Moment, or User-Defined. User-Defined allows you
to enable/disable each of the top release conditions.

Top Fx Translational release at the top end of the column along the x-axis.

Top Fy Translational release at the top end of the column along the y-axis.

Top Fz Translational release at the top end of the column along the z-axis.

Top Mx Rotational release at the top end of the column along the x-axis.

Top My Rotational release at the top end of the column along the y-axis.

Top Mz Rotational release at the top end of the column along the z-axis.

Bottom Release Either Fixed, Pinned, Bending Moment, or User-Defined. User-Defined allows you
to enable/disable each of the bottom release conditions.

Bottom Fx Translational release at the bottom end of the column along the x-axis.

Bottom Fy Translational release at the bottom end of the column along the y-axis.

246 | Chapter 13 Structural Modeling

Name Description

Bottom Fz Translational release at the bottom end of the column along the z-axis.

Bottom Mx Rotational release at the bottom end of the column along the x-axis.

Bottom My Rotational release at the bottom end of the column along the y-axis.

Bottom Mz Rotational release at the bottom end of the column along the z-axis.

Analyze As Either Hanger, Gravity, Lateral, or Not for analysis. Used by external analysis applic-
ations to determine whether the column contributes to lateral analysis.

Analytical Model

Rigid Links Infinitely rigid frame element with no weight. When Rigid Links is enabled, an ad-
ditional analytical segment is engaged in the model between the end of the ana-
lytical model of a beam and the analytical model of a column.

Horizontal Projection Either Auto-detect, Default, Center Line, Location Line, <Named Reference Plane>,
or <Grid>. Specifies the horizontal limits of the structural column analytical model.

Top Vertical Projection Either Auto-detect, Bottom of Column, <Named Reference Plane>, or <Level>.
Specifies the top vertical limit of the structural column analytical model.For more
information, see Projection Plane Options for each Structural Element Type on
page 1301.

Bottom Vertical Projection Either Auto-detect, Bottom of Column, <Named Reference Plane>, or <Level>.
Specifies the base vertical limit of the structural column analytical model.For more
information, see Projection Plane Options for each Structural Element Type on
page 1301.

Beams
Beams are structural elements used for load-bearing applications. Elements of each beam are defined through
the type properties of the specific beam family. In addition, various instance properties can be modified to
define the functionality of the beam.
Sample beams

Beams | 247
You can attach beams to any structural element, including structural walls, in your project. The beams join
to structural bearing walls when the Structural Usage property of the wall is set either to Bearing or to
Structural Combined.
Beams attached to structural walls

To draw beams between 2 points

1 Click Home tab ➤ Structure panel ➤ Beam.

2 Click in the drawing area to specify the start point.
3 Use the mouse to sketch the beam, moving the cursor to the endpoint.
4 Click to specify the endpoint.
You can use the Grid tool to add multiple beams to selected grids when columns are also present at the
working level.
Beam between points

To draw a beam to a specified length

1 Click Home tab ➤ Structure panel ➤ Beam.

2 Click in the drawing area to specify the start point.

248 | Chapter 13 Structural Modeling

3 Use the mouse to sketch the beam, moving the cursor toward the endpoint.
4 Type a length. A text box will appear to show your entry.
5 Click to specify the endpoint.
Use the Grid tool to add multiple beams to selected grids when columns are also present at the working
level.
Enter beam length

You should add beams after creating a grid since beams snap to grids. Add a grid by clicking Home
tab ➤ Datum panel ➤ Grid. However, structural beams can be added without an existing grid.
You can add beams using one of the following methods:

■ Sketch individual beams.

■ Select grid lines that lie between structural elements.

■ Create a chain of beams.

Structural Usage of Beams

Revit Structure determines the Structural Usage property of a beam automatically, based on the structural
elements that support the beam. The structural usage parameter value determines the line style of the beam
in a coarse-scale view.
Structural usage can be changed before or after the beam is placed. Use the Object Styles dialog to change
the structural usage. For more information, see Object Styles on page 1601. The structural usage parameter can
be included in a structural framing schedule, allowing quantity calculation of girders, joists, purlins, and
horizontal bracing. For more information, see Specifying Schedule Properties on page 788.
Structural usage values for beams

Beams can be attached to any other structural element, including structural walls. For more information,
see Structural Walls on page 345.

NOTE Beams will not automatically join to non-bearing walls.

Structural Usage of Beams | 249

The default Structural Usage setting can be changed using the Properties palette. The following table lists
the default automatic Structural Usage setting for beams, based on which elements are being connected:

- C B HB G J P O

Wall G O HB G J P O

Column G O HB G J P O

Brace O O O O O O

Horizontal HB HB HB HB O
Brace

Girder J J P O

Joist P P O

Purlin P O

Other O

For the properties of beams, see Beam Properties on page 267.

Beam Tips
■ If a beam end resides on a structural wall, the Beam End Pocket Seat parameter is displayed on the
Properties palette. Select this check box when the beam is supported by a structural wall. Then the beam
graphics extend to the centerline of the wall.

■ When you place a beam, a beam name tag appears by default with the beam. Also, you can load another
tag that displays beam name, camber, and number of studs. You must specify the values for Beam Camber
and Number of Studs parameters that display in a tagged beam. For information about loading a family,
see Loading Families on page 688.

Creating Beams
You should add grids and columns before creating beams.
When adding a beam to a plan view, you must set the bottom clip plane below the current level; otherwise,
the beam is not visible in the view. You may also want to use a structural template, which has view range
and visibility settings. See Structural Template on page 217.
Add beams using one of the following methods:

■ Sketch individual beams.

■ Create a chain of beams.

■ Select grid lines that lie between structural elements.

■ Create a beam system. For more information, see Beam Systems on page 286.

250 | Chapter 13 Structural Modeling

Sketching Individual Beams
The Beam tool is the primary means with which you sketch individual instances of beams.

To sketch individual beams

1 Click Home tab ➤ Structure panel ➤ Beam.

2 Load a structural beam family, if one has not been previously loaded.
3 On the Properties palette:
■ Select a beam type from the Type Selector drop-down.

■ Modify the beam parameters.

4 On the Options Bar, select a value from the Structural Usage drop-down list.
5 Sketch the beam by clicking the start point and endpoint in the drawing area.
The cursor snaps to other structural elements, such as the centroid of a column or the centerline
of a wall, when you sketch a beam. The status bar displays where the cursor is snapping.
Beam start point - snap to column

Using the Grid Tool to Place Beams

You can use the Grid tool to select grid lines to place beams automatically between other structural elements
(columns, structural walls, and other beams). For example, you might have 2 structural columns located on
a grid line. Beams are also added between columns and structural walls.

To place beams using the Grid tool

1 Click Home tab ➤ Structure panel ➤ Beam.

2 Click Modify | Place beam tab ➤ Multiple panel ➤ On Grids.
3 Select the grid to place beams.

Creating Beams | 251

Selecting the grid

The beams are placed between columns as shown.

Placing beams between columns

The grids in a project are a valuable tool in setting up beams, as well as columns. A selected span of grid
lines can automatically place beams.

To sketch beams automatically using the Grid tool

1 Click Home tab ➤ Structure panel ➤ Beam.

2 On the Properties palette:
■ Select a beam type from the Type Selector drop-down.

■ Modify the beam parameters.

3 On the Options Bar, select a value from the Structural Usage drop-down list.
4 Click Modify | Place Beam tab ➤ Multiple panel ➤ On Grids.

252 | Chapter 13 Structural Modeling

In the image below, you can see assorted columns, a beam, and structural walls in a plan and
3D view. In this case, you can use the Grid tool to add the majority of the beams automatically.

5 Select a grid line along which you want to place a beam.

Press and hold Ctrl to select multiple grids.
In the image shown below, grids have been selected and beams have been added automatically
between all columns, walls, and beams.

6 Click Modify | Place Beam > On Grid Lines ➤ Multiple panel ➤ Finish.

TIP You can also draw a pick box to select multiple grid lines.

In the image below, notice how the beams were added between all columns, walls, and other
supporting beams. The pre-existing beam was not cut by the beam perpendicular to it.

Creating Beams | 253

When Revit Structure places beams along a grid line, it uses the following conditions:

■ All the possible supports that intersect the grid line, such as columns, walls, or beams, are scanned.

■ If a wall is on the grid line, a beam is not placed in the wall. The ends of the wall are used as support.

■ If a beam intersects and crosses the grid line, that beam is considered to be an intermediate support,
because this beam supports new beams created on the grid line.

■ If a beam intersects but does not cross the grid line, this beam is supported by a new beam created on
the grid line.

For more information about beam structural usage, based on which elements are being created, see Structural
Usage of Beams on page 249.

Related topics

■ Creating Beams on page 250

■ Structural Usage of Beams on page 249

■ Beam Properties on page 267

■ Beams on page 247

Sketching Beams with the Chain Option

When the Chain option is selected, Revit Structure supplies the endpoint of the last beam as the start point
of the next beam.

254 | Chapter 13 Structural Modeling

To sketch beams using the Chain option

1 Click Home tab ➤ Structure panel ➤ Beam.

2 On the Options Bar, select Chain.
3 Place the first beam in the chain. See Sketching Individual Beams on page 251.
4 Place each additional beams by clicking the endpoints of the beams.
Sketching beams using the chain option

Curved Beam Modeling

Because the geometry of curved beams can bend, you can draw them in both plan and elevation views.

To sketch a curved beam

1 Click Home tab ➤ Structure panel ➤ Beam.

2 Click Modify | Place Beam tab ➤ Draw panel, and select a curved line tool:
■ Start-End-Radius Arc

■ Center-ends arc

■ Tangent end Arc

■ Fillet Arc

■ Spline

■ Partial Ellipse

3 Place the necessary points in the drawing area to complete your curved line selection. See
Sketching Elements on page 1406.

Creating Beams | 255

Defining the arc of a curved beam

For information about sketching a beam, see Creating Beams on page 250.
For information about beam properties, see Beam Properties on page 267.
Curved beams have an analytical model that can be smooth or segmented. If the analytical model is
segmented, you can adjust the number and location of the segments. For more information, see Segmented
Analytical Model on page 1302.
Smooth analytical model

256 | Chapter 13 Structural Modeling

Segmented analytical model

Sloped Beam Modeling

If your project contains complex sloped members for which you need to add beams, you can match beams
to uneven columns, roofs, structural floors, or walls using the following procedure.

To adjust sloped beams

1 Select a beam that is connected to 2 structural members or warped model objects at different
heights.
2 On the Properties palette:
■ Under Constraints, enter a value for the Start Level Offset of the beam.

■ Enter a value for the End Level Offset of the beam.

■ Click Apply.

3 Verify that you have entered the correct offset values.

Example of sloped beam modeling.

Creating Beams | 257

NOTE A beam that has adjusted offset values will become disassociated or free from the current work
plane. Similarly, any structural element attached to a sloped beam will also become free. You attach
free elements to another work plane using the Edit Work Plane or Pick New buttons on the Work
Plane panel of the Modify | Structural Framing tab.

3D Snapping
You can use the 3D Snapping option to create a new beam by snapping to other structural elements in any
view. This means that you can sketch beams and braces outside of the current work plane. For example,
when 3D snapping is enabled, roof beams will snap to the tops of columns, regardless of elevation.
3D snapping is also useful when creating sloped beam systems. See Sloped Beam Modeling on page 257.

To use 3D snapping

1 Click Home tab ➤ Structure panel ➤ Beam.

2 On the Options Bar, select 3D Snapping.
3 Click any structural element to specify the start point for the beam.

NOTE With 3D Snapping enabled, you can choose the exact endpoint of any structural element
regardless of the plane of the endpoint.

4 Click another structural element to specify the endpoint for the beam.

Editing Beams
You can edit any beam after it is placed within a project. The beam can be moved or rotated from the location
where it was originally placed, or the beam can be extended or reshaped using graphical controls. For more
information, see Editing Elements on page 1439.

To move a beam
1 In a project view, select the beam.
2 Drag the beam to a new location in the drawing area, or use the arrow keys on your keyboard.
For more information, see Moving Elements on page 1474.

To rotate a beam
1 Select the beam in a plan view.
2 Click Modify | Structural Framing tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Rotate.

258 | Chapter 13 Structural Modeling

3 Click the start point and the endpoint for the rotation. For more information, see Rotating
Elements on page 1481.

Beam Graphical Controls

When you sketch beams, you can use available graphical controls to modify the attachment points between
each beam and the structural element (column, structural wall).
You can either set the location of the controls when creating the beam or select and manually adjust it after
the beam is created.

Beam Handles
The beam handles of a beam are the attachment points of the beam. Beam handles display as small filled
circles that indicate where the end of the selected beam is attached to a column or wall.

NOTE Moving beam handles changes cope length.

Beam and column in plan with a beam handle at the column center

Columns have an invisible bounding box that controls the beam handle location.
The following illustration presents a section view of a beam that is attached to a wall. The beam handle is
visible at the top center of the wall.

Beam Graphical Controls | 259

The beam is constrained by level. As a result, beam attachment can be changed in a horizontal direction
only.

Changing Beam Geometry Using Shape Handles

The shape handle of a beam is used to change beam geometry. Shape handles display as small, filled
back-to-back triangles at each beam end when the beam is selected in the drawing area.

260 | Chapter 13 Structural Modeling

Beam and column in a plan with the shape handles displayed

You can adjust the endpoint location of a beam using shape handles. This lengthens or shortens the beam.
The other end of the beam remains fixed.

Shape handles change geometry along the axis of the component. To move a beam out of its original axis,
click and drag the beam into a new position.
Each beam shape handle provides properties that can be changed, based on the element type preferences.
To access the shape handle properties, right-click the back-to-back triangles, and select Properties..
Using shape handles manually adjusts the beam cutback settings. See also Cutback on page 275.

Moment Symbols
The moment parameters of a beam (Connection Start or Connection End) enable the display of moment
frame or cantilever connection symbols. These parameters refer to the applicable beam endpoint. The
available options for these parameters are: None, Moment Frame, or Cantilever Moment.

Beam Graphical Controls | 261

To display a moment symbol
1 Right-click on a beam, and select Properties.
2 On the Properties palette, under Structural, select a value for Start Connection or End Connection,
and click Apply.
Moment frame symbol displayed by
using a moment connection
parameter

Cantilever connection symbol

displayed by using a moment
connection parameter

You load and assign connection symbol families in the Symbolic Representation Settings Tab on page 1605.

Beam Tags
Beam tagging is an integral part of a structural framing plan. Designing a structure requires labeling from
the simple to the complex. Revit beam tags provide for this informational labeling.

Structural Framing Tag Families

The structural framing tag family annotates beams. You can adjust the default positions of these tags in the
Family Categories and Parameters dialog. See Family Category and Parameters on page 695.
The Structural Framing Tag category contains 2 parameters.
Rotate with component: When selected, the tag rotates with its beam. When deselected, the tag orients itself
with respect to the View Frame.
Attachment Point: Defines the initial location of the tag along a beam (start, middle, or end) and is the point
the tag tracks as the beam is lengthened and shortened.

When enabled, a tag leader extends from this point.

262 | Chapter 13 Structural Modeling

<None>: Locates the tag in the middle of the beam by default.

Beam Annotations Tool

The Beam Annotations tool allows you to place multiple beam tags, annotations, and spot elevations on
selected beams or all beams in the current view. It is only available when working in a structural plan or
ceiling plan view. Structural Framing Tags that are set to Rotate with Component must be loaded for the
dialog to launch.

To access the Beams Annotations tool, click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Beam Annotations.

Placement

The Placement section of the Beam Annotations tool allows you to specify which beams you intend to
annotate (either all in view or just the beams selected). As noted on the Beam Annotations tool, Revit
Structure does not overwrite existing tags.
To place new annotations in place of others, select Remove existing beam tags and spot elevations. All tags
and spot elevations will be removed from beams and replaced by those currently set in the Beam Annotations
tool. When deselected, no annotations will be placed on the beams.
Placement Settings: Click the Settings button to open the Placement Settings dialog and adjust the offset
of tags and spot elevations from beams.

The Horizontal End Offset and Vertical Offset settings adjust the distance of tags and spot elevations from
their attachment points (see Structural Framing Tag Families on page 262) by the entered measurement. This
measurement is representative of the drawing scale and its default is 0" horizontally and 3/8” vertically.

Annotation Location and Type

The lower section of the Beam Annotations tool defines the annotation types and locations specific to level
and sloped beams.
Level/Sloped Beams Tabs: Both level beams and sloped beams use the same tagging options. The tabs allow
you to make different annotations to either type of beam instance.
To make specific tags to level beams, make adjustments on the Level beams in plan tab.

Beam Tags | 263

To make specific tags to sloped beams, make adjustments on the Sloped beams in plan tab.

Annotation Location: At the center of the tabbed page is an image of a beam surrounded by six text fields.
The fields represent the locations of the tags as they appear around the beam. The buttons open the
Select Annotation Type dialog which defines and edits the tag.

None: Tags do not track any particular point on the beam. Changes to the length of the beam do not cause
the tag to move.
Structural Framing Tag: See Structural Framing Tags on page 265.
Spot Elevation: See Spot Elevations on page 265.

264 | Chapter 13 Structural Modeling

Structural Framing Tags
This selection enables a pull down menu of available structural family tags specific to the selected location
along the beam. Specific family parameters determine which tags display. Qualifying framing tags must have
the following parameters (see Structural Framing Tag Families on page 262) to be a viable annotations type:

■ Rotate with Component is selected.

■ The Attachment Point parameter is set to <None> or matches the position of the desired tag location in
the Beam Annotations tool.

For example, structural framing tags which have defined Attachment Point parameters of End are only
available to the beam location settings marked <End> in this tool.

Structural framing tags with attachment points of <None> are available to only the Middle location settings
provided they rotate with component.
These specifications also apply to the <Load Structural Framing Tag> option, which opens the Load Family
dialog (see Loading Families on page 688).
To appear in the Structural Framing Tag list, loaded families must follow these guidelines.

Spot Elevations
The Spot Elevations tool allows the placement of spot elevations when the type parameter Rotate with
Component is selected. This is similar to tags in that they are filtered by this parameter.
Beam Elevation (Project) calculates elevation from the lowest level of the project.
Create/modify types gives you the option of creating a custom spot elevation. When selected, the Family
Type Properties dialog opens to edit the spot elevation tag.
Beam Elevation (Relative) enables the Relative Base drop-down list, which allows selection of the base relative
level for elevation calculation.

NOTE Only one spot elevation type can be placed at a time. If you change the spot elevation type in any of the
12 locations (6 for the level and 6 for sloped), it will change all 12 spot elevation type settings in the Beam
Annotations tool.

Beam Tags | 265

The Display Elevation drop-down list selects the location of elevation measurement on the beam.
Actual (Selected) Elevation

NOTE Actual (Selected) Elevation tags the elevation of the location line, not the beam geometry.

Bottom Elevation

Top & Bottom Elevations

Top Elevation

The final option available in the Select Annotation Type dialog for spot elevations is a filter for defined
elevations.

266 | Chapter 13 Structural Modeling

This option enables a filter that prevents spot elevations from being created if it equals the entered value.
The default setting is 0 units as defined by the project.

Beam Properties
Several properties for beams, including work plane, materials, and angle, are accessible on the Properties
palette.

Modifying Beam Properties

To modify beam properties
1 Select the beam.
2 On the Properties palette, edit beam instance parameters. (See Beam Instance Properties on page
269.)
3 Click Apply.
4 To edit beam type parameters, on the Properties palette, click Edit Type. (See Beam Type Properties
- Steel on page 267 or Beam Type Properties - Concrete on page 268.)

NOTE Changes made to type parameters affect all beams of this type in the project. Click Duplicate
to create a beam type.

Beam Type Properties - Steel

Properties vary depending on the specified beam families during the installation process. The following type
properties apply to the steel beam families that load during a typical installation:

Name Description

Structural

A Section area.

W Nominal weight.

Dimensions

bf Flange width.

d Actual depth of section.

k k distance.

k2 k2 distance. This is a read-only value.

tf Flange thickness.

tw Web thickness.

Identity Data

Assembly Code Uniformat assembly code selected from a hierarchical list.

Beam Properties | 267

Name Description

Keynote The beam keynote. Add or edit the value. Click in the value box to open the Keynotes
dialog. See Keynotes on page 938.

Model The manufacturer internal number.

Manufacturer The shape manufacturer.

Type Comments A field for entering general comments about the shape type. This information can
be included in a schedule.

URL A link to a web page that may contain type-specific information.

Description Description of the beam. Enter a description.

Assembly description Description of the assembly based on the assembly code selection. This is a read-
only value.

Cost The pricing of the beam.

OmniClass Number The number from Table 23 of the OmniClass Construction Classification System
that best categorizes the family type.

OmniClass title The name from Table 23 of the OmniClass Construction Classification System that
best categorizes the family type.

Beam Type Properties - Concrete

Properties will vary depending on the beam families that are specified during the installation process. The
following type properties apply to the concrete beam families that load during a typical installation:

Name Description

Structural

b Beam width.

h Beam depth.

Identity Data

Assembly Code Uniformat assembly code selected from a hierarchical list.

Keynote The beam keynote. Add or edit the value. Click in the value box to open the Keynotes
dialog. See Keynotes on page 938.

Model The manufacturer internal number.

Manufacturer The shape manufacturer.

268 | Chapter 13 Structural Modeling

Name Description

Type Comments A field for entering general comments about the shape type. This information can
be included in a schedule.

URL A link to a web page that may contain type-specific information.

Description Description of the beam. Enter a description.

Assembly description Description of the assembly based on the assembly code selection. This is a read-
only value.

Cost The pricing of the beam.

OmniClass Number The number from Table 23 of the OmniClass Construction Classification System
that best categorizes the family type.

OmniClass title The name from Table 23 of the OmniClass Construction Classification System that
best categorizes the family type.

Beam Instance Properties

Properties will vary depending on the beam families that are specified during the installation process. The
following instance properties apply to beam families that load during a typical installation:

Name Description

Constraints

Reference Level The constraining level. This is a read-only value that is dependent on the work
plane on which the beam was placed.

Work Plane The current plane on which elements are placed. This is a read-only value.

Start Level Offset The distance of the beam start point from the reference level. Values entered
here are reset when the member is pinned. Read-only when pinned.

End Level Offset The distance of the beam endpoint from the reference level. Values entered
here are reset when the member is pinned. Read-only when pinned

z-Direction Justification Either center, top, bottom, or other. Selecting the option other enables an
additional parameter, z-Direction offset value.

z-Direction Offset Value The numeric value that offsets the geometry.

Lateral Justification The location of the physical geometry (in plan) with respect to the location
line. Either Side 1, Side 2 and Center. Read-only when pinned.

Orientation The beam orientation to the current plane on which elements are placed.
This is a read-only value.

Beam Properties | 269

Name Description

Cross-Section Rotation Parameter that controls rotating beams and braces. The angle of rotation is
measured from the beam’s work plane and the direction of the center reference
plane.

Construction

Start Extension Applies to steel beams only. The dimension between the edge of the start
end of the beam and the element to which it is connected.

End Extension Applies to steel beams only. The dimension between the edge of the finish
end of the beam and the element to which it is connected.

Materials and Finishes

Beam Material The structural material. See Material Physical Type Parameters on page 1597.

Structural

Stick Symbol Location Applies to steel beams only.

Moment Connection Start Applies to steel beams only. A moment frame, or cantilever symbol at the
start end of a beam.

Moment Connection End Applies to steel beams only. A moment frame, or cantilever symbol at the
finish end of a beam.

Cut Length The physical length of the beam. This is a read-only value.

Structural Usage Specifies the usage. Either Girder, Horizontal bracing, Joist, Other, or Purlin.

Start Attachment Type Either End Elevation or Distance. Specifies the elevation orientation of the
beam. End Elevation maintains the placement level and Distance orients to
the join location on a column. See Beam Elevation at Column Join on page
285.

Start Attachment Distance Specifies the offset of the beam start from the column connection point when
Start Attachment Type is set to Distance. See Beam Elevation at Column Join
on page 285.

End of Referenced Column Specifies either the Top or Bottom of the beam from which the Start Attach-
ment Distance is determined. See Beam Elevation at Column Join on page
285.

End Attachment Type Either End Elevation or Distance. Specifies the elevation orientation of the
beam. End Elevation maintains the placement level and Distance orients to
the join location on a column. See Beam Elevation at Column Join on page
285.

End Attachment Distance Specifies the offset of the bean end from the column connection point when
End Attachment Type is set to Distance. See Beam Elevation at Column Join
on page 285.

270 | Chapter 13 Structural Modeling

Name Description

End of Referenced Column Specifies either the Top or Bottom of the beam from which the End Attach-
ment Distance is determined. See Beam Elevation at Column Join on page
285.

Rebar Cover - Top Face Applies to concrete beams only. The rebar cover distance from the beam top
face.

Rebar Cover - Bottom Face Applies to concrete beams only. The rebar cover distance from the beam
bottom face.

Rebar Cover - Other Faces Applies to concrete beams only. The rebar cover distance from the beam to
adjacent element faces.

Estimated Reinforcement Volume Specifies the estimated reinforcement volume of the selected element. This
is a read-only parameter that only displays when rebar has been placed.

Camber Size Applies to steel beams only. The beam camber.

Number of Studs Applies to steel beams only. The number of studs per beam.

Dimensions

Length The length between beam handles. See Beam Handles on page 259. This is
the analytical length of the beam. This is a read-only value.

Volume The volume of the selected beam. This is a read-only value.

Identity Data

Comments User comments.

Mark A label created for the beam. Possible use: shop mark. This value must be
unique for each element in a project. Revit Structure warns you if the number
is already used but allows you to continue using it. You can see the warning
using the Review Warnings tool. See Reviewing Warning Messages on page
1680.

Phasing

Phase Created Indicates in which phase the beam component was created. See Project
Phasing on page 877.

Phase Demolished Indicates in which phase the beam component was demolished. See Project
Phasing on page 877.

Structural Analysis (see Structural Analytical Model Overview on page 1277)

Start Release Start release conditions. Either Fixed, Pinned, Bending Moment, or User
Defined. User Defined allows you to enable/disable each of the start release
conditions.

Start Fx Translational release at the start end of the beam along the x-axis.

Start Fy Translational release at the start end of the beam along the y-axis.

Beam Properties | 271

Name Description

Start Fz Translational release at the start end of the beam along the z-axis.

Start Mx Rotational release at the start end of the beam along the x-axis.

Start My Rotational release at the start end of the beam along the y-axis.

Start Mz Rotational release at the start end of the beam along the z-axis.

End Release End release conditions. Either Fixed, Pinned, Bending Moment, or User
Defined. User Defined allows you to enable/disable each of the end release
conditions.

End Fx Translational release at the end of the beam along the x-axis.

End Fy Translational release at the end of the beam along the y-axis.

End Fz Translational release at the end of the beam along the z-axis.

End Mx Rotational release at the end of the beam along the x-axis.

End My Rotational release at the end of the beam along the y-axis.

End Mz Rotational release at the end of the beam along the z-axis.

Analyze as Used by external analysis applications to determine whether beam conditions

contribute to lateral analysis. See Projection Plane Options for each Structural
Element Type on page 1301.

Analytical Model

Vertical Projection Either Auto-detect, Location Line, Top of Beam, Center of Beam, Bottom of
Beam, <Named Reference Plane>, or <Level>. Extends the beam analytical
model to the level specified, in the Z direction. See Automatic Adjustment of
the Analytical Model (Auto-Detect) on page 1288.

Rigid Links Either Yes, No, or From Column. Infinitely rigid frame element with no weight.
When Rigid Links is enabled, an additional analytical segment is engaged in
the model between the end of the analytical model of a beam and the analyt-
ical model of a column. From Column defines the rigid link of the beam to
that of its connected column. See Rigid Link on page 1283.

Horizontal Projection Either Auto-detect, Default, Center Line, Location Line, <Named Reference
Plane>, or <Grid>. Specifies the horizontal limits of the beam analytical model.

Other

Start Extension Calculation Applies to steel beams only. Specifies family parameters; defines maximum
distance of start extension parameter. This is a read-only value.

End Extension Calculation Applies to steel beams only. Specifies family parameters; defines maximum
distance of end extension parameter. This is a read-only value.

272 | Chapter 13 Structural Modeling

Joins and Cutback on Framing Elements and Columns
This section details the concepts and the procedures to adjust how framing elements join and cut back from
one another in Revit Structure. While most elements adhere to these approaches, they may behave differently
depending on their unique instance and settings. These differences are detailed here and in the sections
dedicated to framing-specific elements.

Related topics

■ Structural Columns on page 218

■ Beams on page 247

■ Braces on page 310

■ Trusses on page 320

Bounding Boxes
Before describing how structural framing elements join, attach, and cut back from one another, it is important
to understand how component families are perceived in a Revit project. Each element instance is enclosed
in a bounding box.

Overview
The bounding box is an invisible 3D rectangular space that contains all model elements, annotation elements,
and datum elements defined in a family-based element. Datum extents are the exception. For example, a
horizontal reference plane will only affect a top or bottom of the bounding box, not either of its sides. The
bounding box is oriented with respect to the family definition.
Bounding boxes of columns represented in orange

The top, bottom, and sides of the bounding box rotate accordingly to maintain its relationship with the
element as it rotates.

Joins and Cutback on Framing Elements and Columns | 273

Bounding boxes rotating with elements

General purposes of the bounding box

■ If a family does not have a family origin explicitly defined, the origin will default to the center of the
bounding box. This origin affects placement of instances and their behavior when the instance type or
family is changed. For detailed information about family origins, see The Families Guide on page 680.

■ The bounding box helps define the joining and cutback of structural framing elements.

Curved Beams
Curved beams present a unique instance of the bounding box. The bounding box bends to meet the needs
of the beam. This provides accurate joining and cutback with the beam.

Beam to Column Joins

The following illustration shows an example of a beam that is not centered on a column. The beam handle
of the beam in the illustration remains within a bounding box. Remember, the bounding box is not visible.

If the column is moved slightly, but not completely out of its existing bounding box, the beam handle
remains in position, unaffected by column movement.

274 | Chapter 13 Structural Modeling

However, if the column is moved out of its bounding box, the beam handles snap to the center of the
column. When placed, the column will maintain a bounding box.

Cutback
Beam cutback is the visible representative gap in beam geometry at the connection point in join relationships.
Fabricated materials require spatial and placement considerations for which they will be cut to fit. This gap
is evident when comparing the conceptual coarse (symbolic) view to the medium/fine view of non-concrete
beams.
Revit Structure adjusts the setback and cutback for non-concrete beams based on default cutback settings.
Concrete beams take precedence in mixed material joins, forcing non-concrete beams to set back and cut
back.

Cutback | 275
The shortest beam in a join extends to the furthest boundary of all joined beams. All other beams cut back.
See Beam to Beam Cutback on page 277.

Coarse level of detail (symbolic) Medium/Fine level of detail (physical geometry)

KEY

A. Beam into which others are framed E. Cutback

B. Cutback beam F. Beam end if cutback

C. Common endpoint in join G. Setback

D. Cutback

Bounding Box Considerations

Cutback is affected by the bounding box of an element. Notice how the beams framed into the L-beam
adjust based on its rotation.
An L-beam framed into by 2 beams

276 | Chapter 13 Structural Modeling

The same L-beam rotated 45 degrees

The extents of the bounding box force the framing lengths of the joined beams accordingly.

Modifying Beam Symbolic (Coarse Level of Detail) Cutback

Change structural cutback defaults for beams, columns, and braces with the Structural Settings dialog.

1 Click Manage tab ➤ Settings panel ➤ Structural Settings.

2 Select the Symbolic Representation Settings tab.

3 In the Symbolic Cutback Distance fields, adjust for braces, beams/trusses, and columns as needed.

These global parameters adjust the structural symbolic lines used in coarse level of detail views. Changes
apply to all beams, trusses, braces, and columns. See Changing Beam Geometry Using Shape Handles on
page 260 to manually configure cutback.

Modifying Beam Instance (Medium/Fine Level of Detail) Cutback

Set default cutback settings for beam instances on the Properties palette.

1 Select a beam instance (or instances).

2 On the Properties palette, under Construction, locate the Start Extension and End Extension parameters.
Adjust as needed.

These parameters adjust the cutback of beam instances used in medium/fine level of detail views. Positive
dimensions entered here extend the beam, effectively reducing the cutback. Negative values increase the
cutback. Adjustments do not affect symbolic representation. See Changing Beam Geometry Using Shape
Handles on page 260 to manually configure cutback.

Beam to Beam Cutback

Setback and cutback apply when connecting beams. Beams connect at their endpoints, and multiple beams
can connect to one endpoint.
An end join connection is achieved when 2 or more endpoints snap together or when the endpoint of a
beam is an origin point when you draw another beam. Structural beams drawn with the Chain option also
connect by their endpoints. See Sketching Beams with the Chain Option on page 254.

When 2 beams are end-joined at an angle, the shortest beam will not cut back, forcing the longer beams to
cut back. The setback of the shortest beam also adjusts to meet the perceived endpoint of the longer beam.
If further beams connect to the join, they will cut back from the shortest beam. If the new beam is shorter,
the join reconfigures so that the longer beams frame into the shortest beam. You can edit this visual
representation of a cutback with the Beam Join Editor.

Cutback | 277
Beam to Column Cutback
Setback and cutback apply when connecting beams to structural columns. The beams are independent of
one another, are only associated with the common column, and will cut back from the column accordingly.
The column, including its bounding box, must have overlapping geometry with the beams of the join for
the beams to cut back.
Beams joined to columns always adjust for setback and cutback, yet vertical columns cannot manually be
adjusted with the Beam/Column Join Editor.

278 | Chapter 13 Structural Modeling

Beam to Wall Cutback
Setback and cutback apply when connecting beams to structural walls. The beams are independent of one
another, are only associated with the common wall, and will cut back from the wall accordingly. Recessing
the beam into a beam pocket is possible by removing the cutback with the Beam Join Editor.

Cutback Beam to Wall Join Non-cutback Beam to Wall Join

Joining a beam to a wall is achieved by drawing a beam and attaching one of its endpoints to the center of
the total wall thickness.

Brace and Truss Cutback

Braces adjust for default setback and cutback through Properties or Structural Settings. Trusses only adjust
with Structural Settings. The Beam Join Editor can be used on truss chords. Truss webs and braces cannot
be modified by the editor.

Cutback | 279
Column Cutback
Columns can be set back and cut back using the Beam/Column Editor. With the exception of the following
rules, columns act as beams in the default setback and cutback settings.

■ Currently, columns cut back from beams but not from one another. Beams will frame into a column
when joined at the column top.

■ Mitering between beams and columns is not currently implemented.

■ When multiple cutback beams share a join with a column, they will frame into the column. However,
if the column is cut back, the shortest beam will extend and be framed into by others in the join.

■ When a beam is framed into by a column, the symbolic line will extend one cutback distance beyond
its endpoint.

Related topics

■ Beam to Column Joins on page 274

■ Beam to Column Cutback on page 278

■ Adjusting Slanted Column Geometry End Position and Trim on page 232

280 | Chapter 13 Structural Modeling

Beam Joins
There are 2 types of beam end joins: square-off and miter. The Beam Join Editor adjusts both by removing
or applying the visible cutback as it displays in your project.

Square-off Joins
In square-off joins, the ends of beams and braces maintain a plane perpendicular to the centerline of the
element. The beam into which others frame does not cut back, while its connecting beams cut back as
warranted. This beam will cut back from a neighboring beam. When cut back, a beam will adjust in a way
that prevents it from being closer to any other beam participating in the join by a distance equalling the
cutback.
The following examples detail both coarse and medium/fine levels of detail in a project.

Coarse level of detail (symbolic) Medium/Fine level of detail (physical geometry)

Miter Joins
Unlike square-off joins, miter joins do not cut back, allowing geometry to create a flush connection between
2 beams.

Coarse level of detail (symbolic) Medium/Fine level of detail (physical geometry)

Beam Joins | 281

The 2 beams must be co-planar to create a miter join. They must also be of the same family type. Any other
beams that share the join will cut back accordingly.
Beams in a co-planar join share the same plane and have unadjusted cross-sectional rotation parameters.

Beams that share the same vertical plane must have the same cross-sectional rotation to have a miter join.
The vertical plane is a plane perpendicular to the work plane. A miter join will be created by default for
beams that are created within the same vertical plane. This is the case for trusses.
Other beam join considerations include the following.

■ Hidden lines within the beam family do not trim or extend to a miter plane.

■ Beam shape handles do not participate in extensions.

■ The Beam/Column Join Editor is not available when a concrete beam is participating in the end join.

■ Mitered beams are cut by the Cut Plane in Plan Views using Medium/Fine Detail Level. This continues
if the miter join is removed.

282 | Chapter 13 Structural Modeling

Adjusting Cutback
1 Open a project to a plan or 3D view.
2 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit Geometry panel ➤ Beam/Column Joins.
The editing mode activates, showing cutback arrow controls at the end join of beams (and
columns if applicable, see Column Cutback on page 280).

3 On the Options Bar, filter the visible join controls based on Steel, Wood, Precast Concrete, and
Other materials if necessary.
4 Click the cutback arrow controls to change the cutback in the direction the arrow is pointing.

■ If a beam is cut back, the arrow points toward the join.

■ If a beam is not cut back, the arrow points away from the join.

NOTE Adjusting cutback with the Beam Join Editor will not reset or change default extension settings
in Element Properties, Symbolic Cutback Distance settings, or shape handle beam geometry
adjustments.

In this mode, beams without common end joins display in halftone. (Only shared end joins
display arrow controls.) If a perceived end join displays in halftone, exit the Beam Join Editor
and correct the endpoints. One way to determine whether beams are end-joined is to select each
beam with the Modify tool. If their common endpoint appears, they are end-joined.

5 On the Quick Access toolbar, click (Modify) when complete.

Creating a Miter Join

Miter joins are created by removing the cutback from 2 end-joined beams.
1 Open a project to a plan or 3D view.
2 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit Geometry panel ➤ Beam/Column Joins.
The editing mode activates, showing cutback arrow controls at the end join of beams.

Beam Joins | 283

3 On the Options Bar, filter the visible join controls based on Steel, Wood, Precast Concrete, and
Other materials if necessary.
4 Click the appropriate arrow controls to remove the cutback from both beams.

NOTE Remember that a miter join is only available to co-planar beams of the same family and type
without cross-sectional rotation. See Miter Joins on page 281.

The green line marks the plane of the miter join. Any other beams cut back to adjust from the
miter join.

5 Optionally, click the Miter Lock to lock the geometry in Medium/Fine levels of detail, so you
can adjust the symbolic representation.

When locked, the Beam Join Editor arrows do not display in Medium/Fine views but do display
in Coarse view.

Unlocked miter joins Locked miter joins

284 | Chapter 13 Structural Modeling

Unlocked miter joins Locked miter joins

6 On the Quick Access toolbar, click (Modify).

Beam Elevation at Column Join

You can define how a beam parametrically repositions vertically when a joined column is resized. The beam
instance properties Start Attachment Type and End Attachment Type specify how the beam ends are oriented.
You can set either attachment type to End Elevation (the default) or Distance.
End Elevation orients the beam ends to the elevation on which the beam was modeled. The following
illusatration shows the Start Attachment Type set to End Elevation and the left column shortened.

Distance orients the beam ends to the location of the column join. The following illusatration shows the
Start Attachment Type set to Distance and the left column shortened.

Beam Elevation at Column Join | 285

If necessary you can specify which column end is being referenced with the End of Referenced Column
instance property. This is defined as top or bottom and can be set for both the end and start attachment of
the beam.
Additionally, you can offset a distance attachment type by defining the Start Attachment Distance and End
Attachment Distance instance properties. This offset is determined from the End of Referenced Column
property. The following illustration shows both the Start and End Attachment Distances defined.

Beam Systems
Structural beam systems create a single structural framing element that contains a series of individual beams
placed in parallel. The beam system provides a quick method for framing an area of a structure that requires
additional support. There are 2 ways to create a beam system, using either the one-click method or by
sketching:

■ The one-click beam system method is active by default. See Creating a One-Click Beam System on page
288.

■ You can also sketch beam systems into a model. See Creating a Structural Beam System on page 287.

286 | Chapter 13 Structural Modeling

Example of a structural beam system

The Option Bar provides the beam system parameters for both creation methods, such as beam type,
justification, and layout requirements. For more information, see Beam System Layout Rules and Patterns
on page 299.
Beam system parameters adapt to changes in the design. If a column is relocated, the beam system parameters
adapt to the changes automatically.
Example of a structural beam system and parametric adaptation
after column is relocated

Creating a Structural Beam System

You can create a structural beam system either by picking the structural supporting elements, such as beams
and structural walls, or by sketching the border. After specifying the beam system boundaries, you can specify
the beam direction and beam system properties, such as spacing, justification, and beam type. For more
information, see Beam System Layout Rules and Patterns on page 299.

Creating a Structural Beam System | 287

To create a structural beam system

1 Click Home tab ➤ Structure panel ➤ Beam System.

2 Click Modify | Create Beam System Boundary tab ➤ Beam System panel ➤ Sketch Beam System.

3 Define the beam system boundary. For more information, see Defining the Boundary of a Structural
Beam System on page 289.

4 Specify beam direction. For more information, see Specifying Beam Direction in a Beam System on page
295.

5 Specify beam system properties. For more information, see Modifying Beam System Properties on page
308.

6 Click Modify | Create Beam System Boundary tab ➤ Mode panel ➤ Finish Edit Mode.

Creating a One-Click Beam System

You can create beam systems quickly, with one mouse click, as long as the following conditions are met:

■ The one-click beam system can only be added in plan or ceiling view with a horizontal sketch plane. If
the view or the default sketch plane is not a level and you click Beam System, you are redirected to the
Create Beam System Boundary tab.

■ There must be a closed loop of supporting elements (walls or beams) already drawn, or the program will
automatically redirect you to the Create Beam System Boundary tab. For more information, see Beam
System Layout Rules and Patterns on page 299.

WARNING Curved walls and beams can be used to create a loop, but cannot be the direction defining members
in the Beam System.

To create a beam system, using one click

1 Click Home tab ➤ Structure panel ➤ Beam System.

2 Click Modify | Create Beam System Boundary tab ➤ Beam System panel ➤ Automatic Beam System.

NOTE If you would like to sketch the beam system by hand, click Modify | Create Beam System Boundary
tab ➤ Beam System panel ➤ Sketch Beam System to open the Draw panel.

3 On the Properties palette:

■ Under Pattern, select a Beam Type.

■ Under Pattern, for Layout Rule, define the beam system spacing requirements.

■ If the beam system will be sloped or uneven in relation to the level, select the 3D option.

NOTE If you want the walls of the structure in your project to define the slope of the 3D beam system, from
the Options Bar, select Walls Define Slope.

4 (Optional) Define beam system tags for the placed system. See Tagging Beam Systems on Placement on
page 304.

5 Move your cursor to the structural members where you would like to add the beam system and click
to add it.

288 | Chapter 13 Structural Modeling

One-click beam system creation

NOTE The beam system will align its direction parallel to the nearest structural member you selected.

In the example shown above, you should not

■ Add a beam system that spans multiple quadrants. The intersecting beams would not cut the beam
system, therefore, any intersections between girders and joists in such a beam system would not display.

■ Copy and paste the beam system from quadrant to quadrant if their area, shape, and number of supports
differ significantly.

For information about Beam System Properties, see Beam System Type Properties on page 309.

Defining the Boundary of a Structural Beam System

To define the boundary of a structural beam system, you can pick the structural supporting elements that
exist on the edge of the proposed beam system, or you can use the drawing tools to sketch the lines. Of the
2 methods, you should try to use the Pick Supports tool whenever possible. When you pick the supports,
the beam system is automatically locked to those elements. Any changes to the location of the supporting
elements are automatically applied to the beam system.
Creating a beam system by picking supports

Creating a Structural Beam System | 289

Creating a beam system by sketching lines

You can define the beam system boundary in either a plan or 3D view. If you work in a 3D view, you should
specify the work plane before picking the supports. For more information, see Setting the Work Plane on
page 1517.

TIP Although you can sketch a beam system in a 3D view, it is recommended that you create the beam system
in a plan view to achieve greater accuracy and to ensure that the lines are on a parallel plane.

After the beam system boundary is defined, the beams are placed inside the specified area according to the
pattern specified in the beam system properties. For more information, see Modifying Beam System Properties
on page 308.

Picking Supports as the Beam System Boundary

In either a plan or 3D view, you can pick structural beams and walls to define the boundary of the structural
beam system.

1 Click Home tab ➤ Structure panel ➤ Beam System.

2 Click Modify | Place Structural Beam System tab ➤ Beam System panel ➤ Sketch Beam System.
3 Click Draw panel ➤ Pick Supports.

TIP When picking supports, the first support you pick specifies the beam direction. The beams within
the beam system will be parallel to this beam. You can modify this at any time. See Modifying a Beam
System on page 308.

4 Pick the first support member.

A sketch line with 2 drag handles displays over the picked support. Two shorter parallel lines
display on each side of the line, indicating the beam system direction.

290 | Chapter 13 Structural Modeling

Beam system with first support member
picked

5 Pick the remaining lines that define the beam system boundary.

NOTE The lines must result in a closed loop. Use the editing tools (Trim, Extend, and so on) on the
Options Bar as necessary to create a closed loop of sketch lines. For more information, see Editing
Elements on page 1439.

Beam system with entire boundary selected

After specifying the beam system boundary, you can

■ Modify the beam direction if necessary. For more information, see Specifying Beam Direction
in a Beam System on page 295.

■ Modify beam system properties if necessary. See Modifying Beam System Properties on page
308.

■ Use either the Pick Support or Lines tool to sketch an opening in the beam system. For more
information, see Cutting an Opening in a Beam System on page 294.

6 Click Modify | Create Beam System Boundary tab ➤ Mode panel ➤ Finish Edit Mode.

Creating a Structural Beam System | 291

Floor plan and 3D view of completed structural beam system.

Sketching a Beam System Boundary

You can use the sketching tools to define the perimeter of a beam system. You can also use these tools to
modify a beam system boundary, created using the Pick Supports method.

1 Click Home tab ➤ Structure panel ➤ Beam System.

2 Click Modify | Place Structural Beam System tab ➤ Beam System panel ➤ Sketch Beam System.
3 Click Draw panel ➤ Line to sketch, or click Draw panel ➤ Pick Lines to select existing lines.
4 Draw or pick the lines that define the beam system boundary.
Sketched beam system boundary with lines locked to
supports

RELATED For more information, see Sketching on page 1405.

292 | Chapter 13 Structural Modeling

After specifying the beam system boundary, you can
■ Modify the beam direction if necessary. For more information, see Specifying Beam Direction
in a Beam System on page 295.

■ Modify the beam system.

■ Use either the Pick Support or Lines tool to sketch an opening in the beam system. For more
information, see Cutting an Opening in a Beam System on page 294.

5 Click Modify | Create Beam System Boundary tab ➤ Mode panel ➤ Finish Edit Mode.
Floor plan and 3D view of completed structural beam system

Creating Beam Systems for Non-Identical Boundaries

When creating a beam system, if both areas are not identical in shape and supports, then the pasted beam
system area may not attach to supports as expected. In such a case, you may need to modify the beam
system.
In the plan view illustrated below, notice that there are 4 distinct quadrants. Quadrants 1 and 2 are identical
in area and support structure. Quadrants 3 and 4 are more complex.

Creating a Structural Beam System | 293

Structural design with 4 quadrants

In the example shown above, you could

■ Add a separate beam system to each quadrant. This is the best action to take because you can ensure that
the beam system boundaries are locked to the supporting members by using the Pick Supports tool.

■ Add a beam system to Quadrant 1 and copy it to Quadrant 2. You can do this since the area and support
structure is identical. However, make sure the pasted copy attaches to all supports. You may need to
modify the pasted beam system.

■ Add a beam system to Quadrants 1 and 3 and mirror it to Quadrants 2 and 4 by selecting Grid 2 as the
mirror axis. This process has the same limitations as copying and pasting. You may need to modify the
system and re-pick the supports to ensure that the system is locked to a supporting member.

In the example shown above, you should not

■ Add a beam system that spans multiple quadrants. The intersecting beams 2 and B would not cut the
beam system; therefore, any intersections between girders and joists in such a beam system would not
display.

■ Copy and paste the beam system from Quadrant 1 to Quadrant 3. The area, shape, and number of their
supports differ significantly.

Cutting an Opening in a Beam System

You can cut an opening in a structural beam system by sketching a loop of lines inside the beam system
boundary.

To cut an opening in a beam system

1 Select the beam system, and click Modify | Structural Beam System tab ➤ Mode panel ➤ Edit
Boundary.
2 Click Modify | Structural Beam Systems tab > Edit Boundary ➤ Draw panel ➤ Line. Define the
boundary of the opening.
3 Using the additional sketching tools available on the Draw panel and Options Bar, sketch a
complete loop within the beam system boundary.

294 | Chapter 13 Structural Modeling

Beam system boundary with sketched
opening

4 Click Modify | Structural Beam Systems > Edit Boundary tab ➤ Mode panel ➤ Finish Edit Mode.
Beam system with opening

Specifying Beam Direction in a Beam System

When sketching a beam system boundary, you can specify the beam direction within the structural beam
system. All beams within the beam system will be parallel to the boundary line you select.

NOTE Walls and beams curved in plan view cannot be used to define the direction of a beam system.

To specify beam direction:

1 Select the beam system, and click Mode panel ➤ (Edit Boundary) on the ribbon.

Creating a Structural Beam System | 295

2 Click Draw panel ➤ (Beam Direction) on the ribbon.
3 Select from one of the following tools on the Draw panel of the ribbon:
If you select... then...

sketch a line, or pick a model line, to define

(Line)
beam direction that is independent of the
sketched boundary lines. This line has no
other function than to define the direction
of the beams in a beam system and there-
fore cannot be used to close a loop. Select
the sketch line to which you want all
beams to be parallel.

select the sketch line to which you want

(Pick Lines)
all beams to be parallel.

select the beams or structural walls to

(Pick Supports)
which you want all beams to be parallel.

The following image shows the selected sketch line and the resulting beam direction.

Defining Beam System Justification

After you place a beam system, you can determine the placement of the first beam in the system. Each
subsequent beam is spaced a fixed distance from that point.

To specify beam system justification:

1 Select the beam system.
2 On the Properties palette, under Pattern, select Fixed Distance or Clear Spacing layout rule values.
3 (Optional) Specify a new direction line for the beam system direction.
4 On the Properties palette, under Pattern, select a justification: Beginning, End, Center, or
Direction Line.

NOTE In the following illustrations, green arrows indicate the direction of justification.

296 | Chapter 13 Structural Modeling

If you select Beginning, the first beam at the top or to the left of the beam system is used for
justification.

Horizontal Orientation

Vertical Orientation

If you select End places, the first beam at the bottom or the right of the beam system is used for
justification.

Horizontal Orientation

Vertical Orientation

Creating a Structural Beam System | 297

If you select Center, the first beam is placed in the center of the beam system and beams are
spaced at a fixed distance on each side.

Horizontal Orientation

Vertical Orientation

If you select Direction Line, the justification is set to the beam system direction line.

Boundary Direction Line

Sketched Internal Direction Line

298 | Chapter 13 Structural Modeling

External Support as Direction Line

Beam System Layout Rules and Patterns

You can specify the beam system layout properties: number of beams, justification, beam type, spacing,
layout rule, and slope. You can specify these values either when you create the beam system or modify them
afterwards.

Specify the beam system layout rule

1 On the Properties palette, under Pattern, select a value for Layout Rule:
■ Fixed Distance allows you to specify the distance between centerlines of beams within the
beam system. The number of beams in the beam system is calculated based on your selections.

■ Fixed Number allows you to specify the number of beams within the beam system. The
beams are evenly spaced and centered within the beam system.

■ Maximum Spacing allows you to specify the maximum distance between centerlines of
beams. The quantity of beams required for the beam system is calculated automatically and
centered within the beam system.

■ Clear Spacing is similar to the Fixed Distance value, but measures spacing between the
exteriors of the beams instead of between their centerlines. When you adjust the size of an
individual beam in a beam system with the clear spacing layout rule value, adjacent beams
move to maintain the distance between them.

Specify number of beams

2 Enter a value for the number of beams that you want in the beam system.
This option is active only when you select the Fixed Number layout rule.

Specify spacing

3 Enter a value representing the distance between each beam.

This option is active only when you select the Fixed Distance, Maximum Spacing, or Clear
Spacing layout rule value.

Specify justification

4 Select the Justification Type. This value determines the placement of the first beam in the system.
Each subsequent beam is spaced a fixed distance from that point. This option is active only
when you select either the Fixed Distance or Clear Spacing layout rule value.
Specify 3D Snapping

5 Select the 3D check box if you want the beam system to slope. 3D Snapping enables the beam
system to snap to points that are not within the work plane of the view such as columns in
different elevations. See 3D Snapping on page 258.

Creating a Structural Beam System | 299

Specify beam type

6 Select a value for the type of beam used in the beam system.

NOTE This is the same list available from the Type Selector drop-down. If the beam you require is
not listed in the beam system creation tool, load the beam into the project before specifying the
beam type within the beam system.

Dropping Beam Systems

You can drop a beam system from a project and leave its framing elements in place.
1 Select the beam system.
2 Click Modify | Structural Beam Systems tab ➤ Beam System panel ➤ Remove Beam System.

The beam system is removed from the project.

Creating a Cantilevered Beam System

You can use the beam system family to create various beam systems for bays of varying geometry, including
arced, polygonal, and cantilevered. The following example provides a method for creating a cantilevered
beam system.
Begin with a bay that is similar to the one shown in the following illustration of a partial plan view:
Partial Plan View

1 Click Home tab ➤ Structure panel ➤ Beam System.

2 Click Modify | Place Structural Beam System tab ➤ Beam System panel ➤ Sketch Beam

System ➤ Draw panel ➤ (Pick Supports) to select the beam system boundary or (Pick
Lines) to sketch the beam system boundary.

300 | Chapter 13 Structural Modeling

Pick supports

3 When the boundary has been created, click Modify | Create Beam System Boundary tab ➤ Mode
panel ➤ Finish Edit Mode.
The cantilevered beam system displays.
Finished cantilevered beam system

Creating a 3D Beam System

You can create non-planar beam systems in which the elevation of a beam is defined by its sketch lines.

Creating a 3D Beam System | 301

3D beam system

Note that sketched beam lines

■ Can only define slope when they are created using the Pick Supports tool.

■ That have a beam as their support always define slope.

■ That have a wall as their support have a Defines slope property that you can edit. The default value is
true.

The elevation of the end of a beam in a beam system is determined as follows:

■ If the end of the beam connects to a sketch line that defines slope, the beam is connected to the top of
the associated support.
Define slope

■ If the sketch line does not define slope, then the end of the beam is elevated to a plane defined by the
endpoints of the 2 nearest sketch lines that do define slope.

302 | Chapter 13 Structural Modeling

Beam system elevated by nearest sketch lines

■ If there are no lines in the sketch that define slope, the beam system behaves like a 2D beam system.

To add a 3D beam system

1 Click Home tab ➤ Structure panel ➤ Beam System.

2 On the Properties palette, under Constraints, select 3D.
3 Click Apply.

Tagging Beam Systems

You can tag the beam system with framing tags or with a beam system span tag.

Beam system framing tags Beam system span tags

Framing tags are structural framing tags that, by default, align parallel at the top center of the created beams
in the system. You can alter these tag locations using the beam annotation tool. See Beam Annotations Tool
on page 263.
Beam system span tags are unique to beam systems. This family is typically located in the following directory:
Imperial or Metric Library\Annotations\Structural\Structural Beam System Tag.rfa. These tags display as a
span arrow perpendicular to the created beams in the system. Their label indicates their structural framing
type and their spacing within the beam system (beam type @ spacing).

Tagging Beam Systems | 303

Placing Beam System Tags
You can apply two separate tags to existing beam systems using the following procedures.

To place a beam system span tag

1 Click Annotate tab ➤ Symbol panel ➤ Beam.

2 On the Properties palette, select the desired beam system tag type from the Type Selector
drop-down.
3 If prompted, load a beam system tag family into the project.
See Tagging Beam Systems on page 303.

4 (Optional) Select Auto place on the Options Bar to center the tag on the beam system.
5 Place the cursor on a beam system in the view to highlight it.
6 If you selected Auto place, click the highlighted beam system. The tag is placed at the center of
the beam system.
If you did not select Auto place, move the cursor to the desired location on the beam system,
and click to place it.

To place framing tags along individual beams

1 While pressing Ctrl, select each beam in the beam system.
You tag the individual beams of the system as you would other beams.

2 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Beam Annotations.

3 In the Placement section of the Beam Annotations dialog, select All selected beams in current
plan view.
4 In the Annotation location and type section, define the structural framing tag type and location
for the selected beam tags.
See Beam Annotations Tool on page 263.

5 Click OK.

Tagging Beam Systems on Placement

You can concurrently place tags in two ways from the Option bar when placing beam systems in an existing
grid bay. See Creating a One-Click Beam System on page 288.
After you click Beam Systems to place a new beam system instance, do the following.

1 Click Modify | Place Structural Beam System tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag on Placement.
2 On the Options Bar, select either System or Framing as the Tag Style.
System tags display a beam system span tag perpendicular to the beams of the system when
placed.

304 | Chapter 13 Structural Modeling

Framing tags display structural framing tags parallel to the individual beams of the system when
placed.

See Tagging Beam Systems on page 303 for more information on system and framing tags for
beam systems.

3 Place the beam system.

Modifying Beam System Tags

You can modify beam system tags and their labels to improve the clarity of your model annotations.

Repositioning Beam System Tags

To reposition a beam system tag, select the tag in the drawing area, and drag it. If moved within the beam
system, the symbol retains its span extents. It moves parallel to the beams and its label moves parallel to
the span symbol.

Editing Beam System Tag Families

You can modify beam system tags and their labels with the Family Editor.

1 Select the beam system tag in the drawing area.

2 Click Modify | Structural Beam System Tags tab ➤ Mode panel ➤ Edit Family.

3 Edit the beam system tag and label.

See Tags on page 944 and Labels on page 704.

Tagging Beam Systems | 305

4 Click Home tab ➤ Family Editor panel ➤ Load into Project.

Tagging New Beams in a Beam System

You can define a layer for future system member framing tags.

1 Select the beam system in the drawing area.

2 On the Properties palette, under Identity Data, select from the following in the Tag new members in
view drop-down:
■ None

■ the current structural plan level

■ the current analytical plan level

3 Click OK.

The selection will confine tags for future members of the beam system to a specific level. New members
must be added by editing the beam system. See Modifying a Beam System on page 308.
The following table shows the results of each option for Tag new members in view. New beam system
members are highlighted in blue.

Tag new members in Structural Plan: Level Structural Plan: Level -

view setting Analytical

None

Structural Plan: Level

Structural Plan: Level -

Analytical

306 | Chapter 13 Structural Modeling

Resetting Structural Beam Systems
The Reset Structural Beam System tool recreates a beam system using the original beam system parameters.
This tool can be used to undo changes to properties of individual beams in the system. After the beam system
is reset, all beams in the system will have uniform parameters and be in the default locations. Specifically,
the tool has the following reset effects:

■ Beams that have been moved are returned to their original locations.

■ Beams that have been deleted from the system are restored.

■ Parameters that have been changed on individual beams (such as Beam Type, Offset, Angle) are reset.

Note that if the sketch of a beam system is modified, the beams of a system will remain attached to their
original supports until the beam system is reset.
Original beam system

Beam system with changes

Using the Reset Structural Beam System tool

1 In the drawing area, click on the beam system you want to reset.
2 Click Modify | Structural Beam Systems tab ➤ Mode panel ➤ Edit Boundary.
3 Click Modify | Structural Beam Systems > Edit Boundary tab ➤ Adjust panel ➤ Reset System.

Resetting Structural Beam Systems | 307

Reset structural beam system

4 Click Modify | Structural Beam Systems > Edit Boundary tab ➤ Mode panel ➤ Finish Edit Mode.
Beam system reset

Modifying a Beam System

To edit a beam system
1 In the drawing area, click on the beam system you want to modify.
2 Click Modify | Structural Beam Systems tab ➤ Mode panel ➤ Edit Boundary.
3 Make any necessary changes with the available sketch tools and click Modify | Structural Beam
Systems > Edit Boundary tab ➤ Mode panel ➤ Finish Edit Mode.

Modifying Beam System Properties

You can modify many of the properties for beam systems.

To modify beam system properties

1 If you are currently sketching, click on the Properties palette.
If you are in a project view, right-click the beam system, and select Properties.

2 On the Properties palette, edit beam system instance parameters. (See Beam System Instance
Properties on page 309.)

308 | Chapter 13 Structural Modeling

3 Click Edit Type and edit beam system type parameters. (See Beam System Type Properties on
page 309.)

NOTE Changes made to type parameters affect all beam systems of this type in the project. You can
click Duplicate to create a new beam system type.

Beam System Type Properties

Name Description

Identity Data

Keynote The beam keynote. Add or edit the value. Click in the value
box to open the Keynotes dialog. See Keynotes on page 938.

Model The manufacturer internal number.

Manufacturer The shape manufacturer.

Type Comments A field for entering general comments about the shape type.
This information can be included in a schedule.

URL A link to a web page that may contain type-specific informa-

tion.

Description Description of the beam. Enter a description.

Assembly description Description of the assembly based on the assembly code se-
lection. This is a read-only value.

Type Mark A value that designates the particular beam; possibly the shop
mark. This value must be unique for each element in a project.
Revit Structure warns you if the number is already used but
allows you to continue using it. You can see the warning using
the Review Warnings tool. See Reviewing Warning Messages
on page 1680.

Cost The pricing of the beam.

Beam System Instance Properties

Name Description

Constraints

3D Creates a non-planar beam system in which the elevation of a beam is defined by

its sketch lines. See Creating a 3D Beam System on page 301.

Elevation The vertical offset of beam system beams from the beam system work plane.

Work Plane This is a read-only value that is dependent on the work plane where the element
was placed.

Modifying Beam System Properties | 309

Name Description

Pattern

Layout Rule Rules for beam spacing. See Beam System Layout Rules and Patterns on page 299.

Fixed Spacing The space between beams. This parameter is only accessible for certain values of
the Layout Rule parameter. See Beam System Layout Rules and Patterns on page
299.

Centerline Spacing The distance between beam centerlines. This is a read-only parameter.

Justification Specifies the starting location (beginning, end, or center) of the beam system in
relation to the selected boundary.

Beam Type The structural framing type to be used for creating beams in a beam system.

Identity Data

Tag new members in view Specifies the view in which to display new beam elements added to the beam
system. See Modifying Beam System Tags on page 305.

Comments User comments.

Mark A label created for the beam system. This value must be unique for each element
in a project. Revit Structure warns you if the number is already used but allows you
to continue using it. You can see the warning using the Review Warnings tool. See
Reviewing Warning Messages on page 1680.

Phasing

Phase Created Indicates in which phase the beam system was created. See Project Phasing on
page 877.

Phase Demolished Indicates in which phase the beam system was demolished. See Project Phasing
on page 877.

Braces
Braces are diagonal members connected to beams and columns. Like beams, you create braces by snapping
the pointer to another structural element, clicking a start point, snapping to another structural element,
and clicking an endpoint. For example, braces can appear between a structural column and a structural
beam.
You can add braces in either a plan view or a framing elevation view. Braces attach themselves to beams
and columns and adjust parametrically to changes in the building design. When attached to a beam, you
can specify the type of attachment, distance, or ratio. In addition, you can set which end of the referenced
element you want relative to the distance or ratio value; if the end is attached to a column or wall, you can
set the level and offset for the height of the point.
You can copy, move, mirror, array, and rotate braces out of the vertical plane in which they were created.
You can accomplish this in plan and 3D views.

310 | Chapter 13 Structural Modeling

Typical brace

Loading Structural Braces

You can load structural braces in several ways:

To load brace families

1 Click Home tab ➤ Structure panel ➤ Brace.

2 Click Modify | Place Brace tab ➤ Mode panel ➤ Load Family.
3 In the Open dialog, navigate to either the imperial or metric library, and open the
Structural/Framing folder.
4 Select a brace type folder: either Steel, Light Gauge Steel, Concrete, or Wood, and click Open.

NOTE When you open a framing family, you can select multiple brace sizes. In the Specify Types
dialog that displays after you click Open, press and hold the Ctrl key when selecting brace sizes. If
necessary, you can filter the Catalog by clicking the arrow at the column heading.

Adding Structural Braces

You can add braces in either a plan view or in a framing elevation view.

To add a brace in a framing elevation view

1 Open a framing elevation view.
2 If necessary, load additional braces from the Structural/Framing folder under the Library folder
of the Revit Structure program group. For more information, see Loading Structural Braces on
page 311.
3 Click Home tab ➤ Structure panel ➤ Brace.
4 On the Properties palette, select the appropriate brace from the Type Selector drop-down.
5 To edit the properties of the brace before adding the brace to your model, click on the Properties
palette.

Loading Structural Braces | 311

6 In the drawing area, highlight the snapping point where you want to begin the brace, such as
on a structural column. Click to place a start point.
Snap to begin brace

7 Move the pointer in a diagonal direction to sketch the brace and place the cursor near another
structural element to snap it. Click to place the endpoint.
Sample braces in a framing elevation view

To add a brace in a plan view

1 Open a plan view.
2 Click Home tab ➤ Structure panel ➤ Brace.
3 On the Options Bar, specify both the Start Level and offset distance and the End Level and offset
distance.
4 Click the start point and the endpoint of the brace in the project.

312 | Chapter 13 Structural Modeling

Modifying Braces

Controlling Brace Attachments

After adding a brace element, you can modify the brace properties to control how the brace maintains
position along a beam. Each brace endpoint can be maintained positionally with a beam by either a distance
or a length ratio from the beam endpoints. If you modify the position or length of the attached beam, the
brace adapts to the change, depending on the brace settings you select.

Brace Property Terminology

■ Start Attachment Type

■ Start Attachment Distance or Ratio

■ End of Referenced Element

■ End Attachment Type

■ End Attachment Distance or Ratio

■ End of Reference Element

Brace attachment properties

To modify brace properties

1 Select a brace.
2 Click on the Properties palette. (See Brace Properties on page 314.)
To specify attachment parameters

3 On the Properties palette, under Structural, select one of the following Start Attachment Type
options.
■ Distance: If the brace start point is placed on a beam, this value specifies the distance between
the nearest end of the beam and the brace start point.

Modifying Braces | 313

■ Ratio: If the brace start point is placed on a beam, this value specifies the percentage along
the beam where the start point is placed. For example, 0.5 would place the start point half
way between each end of the attached beam.

After selecting either option, enter a value for Start Attachment Ratio Property. Also, if the brace
start point is placed on a column, this option is not available.

To specify the end of referenced element

4 Select a value for End of Referenced Element Property. This specifies at which end of the
Referenced Element (the beam), the Distance or Ratio is measured from.

NOTE If the brace end is attached to a column or a wall, you can set the level and offset to specify
the height of the point.

5 On the Properties palette, under Other, select the End Attachment Type.
■ Distance: If the brace endpoint is placed on a beam, this value specifies the distance between
the nearest end of the beam and the brace endpoint.

■ Ratio: If the brace endpoint is placed on a beam, this value specifies the percentage along
the beam where the endpoint is placed. For example, 0.5 would place the endpoint half way
between each end of the attached beam.

After selecting either option, enter a value for Start Attachment Ratio Property. Also, if the brace
start point is placed on a column, this option is not available.

Brace Properties
You can modify many properties for braces, such as structural, dimensional, and identity data. Brace instance
properties depend on whether the brace is attached to a beam or to a column.

To modify brace properties

1 Select the brace.
2 On the Properties palette, edit brace instance parameters. (See Brace Instance Properties on page
318 or Steel Brace Instance Properties (When Attached to a Beam) on page 316.)
3 Click Edit Type to edit brace type parameters. (See Steel Brace Type Properties on page 314.)

NOTE Changes made to type parameters affect all braces of this type in the project. You can click
Duplicate to create a new brace type.

Steel Brace Type Properties

The following table lists the beam type properties for a typical steel brace:

Name Description

Structural

A The section area.

Shape Defines the shape of the selected type. Applies to HSS family type only.

W The nominal weight.

314 | Chapter 13 Structural Modeling

Name Description

Dimensions

Ht The flange height. Applies to HSS family type only.

b The flange width. Applies to HSS family type only.

kr The kr distance. Applies to HSS family type only.

t The flange thickness. Applies to HSS family type only.

bf The flange width.

d The actual depth of section.

k The k distance.

k2 The k2 distance. This is a read-only value.

tf The flange thickness.

tw The web thickness.

Identity Data

Assembly Code The Uniformat assembly code selected from a hierarchical list.

Keynote The keynote for the brace. See Keynotes on page 938.

Model The manufacturer internal number.

Manufacturer The brace manufacturer.

Type Comments A field for entering general comments about the brace type. This information can
be included in a schedule.

URL A link to a web page that may contain type-specific information.

Description An optional description of the brace.

Assembly description Description of the assembly based on the assembly code selection. This is a read-
only value.

Type Mark A value that specifies the particular brace; possibly the shop mark. This value must
be unique for each brace in a project. Revit Structure warns you if the number is
already used but allows you to continue using it. You can see the warning using the
Review Warnings tool. See Reviewing Warning Messages on page 1680.

Cost The pricing of the brace.

OmniClass Number The number from Table 23 of the OmniClass Construction Classification System
that best categorizes the family type.

OmniClass title The name from Table 23 of the OmniClass Construction Classification System that
best categorizes the family type.

Brace Properties | 315

Steel Brace Instance Properties (When Attached to a Beam)
The following table lists the brace instance properties for a typical steel brace when attached to a beam.

Name Description

Constraints

Reference Level The constraining level.

Construction

Start Extension The dimension between the physical edge of the start end of the brace and the
element to which it is connected.

End Extension The dimension between the physical edge of the finish end of the brace and the
element to which it is connected.

Materials and Finishes

Brace Material Specifies the user-defined structural material. See Material Physical Type Parameters
on page 1597.

Structural

Angle The rotation about the longitudinal axis of the brace.

Moment Connection Start The moment frame, or cantilever symbol at the start end of brace, if applicable.

Moment Connection End The moment frame, or cantilever symbol at the finish end of brace, if applicable.

Cut Length The physical length (not the analytical length). This is a read-only value.

Structural Usage Specifies Vertical Bracing, Kicker brace, or Other.

Start Attachment Level Reference Distance or Ratio (percentage relative to beam length); type of separation of brace
start end to a designated beam end. Applies to the brace end attached to the beam.

Start Attachment Elevation Distance from, or Ratio (percentage) of separation of brace start end to a designated
beam end. Applies to the brace end attached to the beam.

End Attachment Type Distance of separation of brace finish end to a designated beam end. Applies to the
brace end attached to the beam.

End Attachment Ratio Ratio (percentage) of separation of brace finish end to a designated beam end. Ap-
plies to the brace end attached to the beam.

End of Referenced Element Designated end (start or finish) of Referenced Element (beam) to which start end
of brace is attached. Applies to the brace end attached to the beam.

Dimensions

Length The distance between the component endpoints that define the element’s location.
This is a read-only value.

Volume The volume of the selected brace element. This is a read-only value.

316 | Chapter 13 Structural Modeling

Name Description

Identity Data

Comments A field for entering comments about the brace.

Mark A label created for the brace. Possible use: shop mark. This value must be unique
for each brace in a project. Revit Structure warns you if the number is already used
but allows you to continue using it. You can see the warning using the Review
Warnings tool. See Reviewing Warning Messages on page 1680.

Phasing

Phase Created Indicates in which phase the brace component was created. See Project Phasing on
page 877.

Phase Demolished Indicates in which phase the brace component was demolished. See Project Phasing
on page 877.

Structural Analysis (see Structural Analytical Model Overview on page 1277)

Start Release Specifies the start release condition: either Fixed, Pinned, Bending Moment, or User
Defined. User Defined allows you to enable/disable each of the start release condi-
tions.

Start Fx The translational release at the start end of the brace along the local x-axis.

Start Fy The translational release at the start end of the brace along the local y-axis.

Start Fz The translational release at the start end of the brace along the local z-axis.

Start Mx The rotational release at the start end of the brace along the local x-axis.

Start My The rotational release at the start end of the brace along the local y-axis.

Start Mz The rotational release at the start end of the brace along the local z-axis.

End Release Fixed, Pinned, Bending Moment or User Defined. User Defined allows you to en-
able/disable each of the end release conditions.

End Fx The translational release at the end of the brace along the local x-axis.

End Fy The translational release at the end of the brace along the local y-axis.

End Fz The translational release at the end of the brace along the local z-axis.

End Mx The rotational release at the end of the brace along the local x-axis.

End My The rotational release at the end of the brace along the local y-axis.

End Mz The rotational release at the end of the brace along the local z-axis.

Analyze As Determines whether brace conditions contribute to lateral analysis. Available for use
by external analysis applications. See Projection Plane Options for each Structural
Element Type on page 1301.

Brace Properties | 317

Name Description

Other

Start Extension Calculation Defines the maximum distance of start extension parameter. Set in family parameters.

End Extension Calculation Defines the maximum distance of end extension parameter. Set in family parameters.

Brace Instance Properties

The following table lists the default instance properties for a typical brace when not attached to a beam.

Name Description

Constraints

Reference Level The constraining level.

Construction

Start Extension The dimension between the edge of the start end of the brace and the element
to which it is connected.

End Extension The dimension between the edge of the finish end of the brace and the ele-
ment to which it is connected.

Materials and Finishes

Brace Material The user defined structural material. See Material Physical Type Parameters
on page 1597.

Structural

Angle The rotation about the longitudinal axis of the brace.

Moment Connection Start The moment frame or cantilever symbol at the start end of brace, if applicable.

Moment Connection End The moment frame or cantilever symbol at the finish end of brace, if applicable.

Cut Length The physical length. This is a read-only value.

Structural Usage Specifies structural usage: either Vertical Bracing, Kicker brace, or Other.

Start Attachment Level Reference The constraining level of the start end of the brace.

Start Attachment Elevation The elevation of the start end referenced from the start attachment level ref-
erence.

End Attachment Level Reference The constraining level of the finish end of the brace.

End Attachment Elevation The elevation of the finish end referenced from the end attachment level ref-
erence.

Rebar Cover - Top Face Applies to concrete beams only. The rebar cover distance from the column
top face.

318 | Chapter 13 Structural Modeling

Name Description

Rebar Cover - Bottom Face Applies to concrete beams only. The rebar cover distance from the column
bottom face.

Rebar Cover - Other Faces Applies to concrete beams only. The rebar cover distance from the column
to adjacent element faces.

Estimated Reinforcement Volume Specifies the estimated reinforcement volume of the selected element. This
is a read-only parameter that only displays when rebar has been placed.

Dimensions

Length The length of the brace location line. This is a read-only value.

Volume The volume of the selected brace element. This is a read-only value.

Identity Data

Comments User comments.

Mark A label created for the brace. Possible use: shop mark. This value must be
unique for each brace in a project. Revit Structure warns you if the number
is already used but allows you to continue using it. You can see the warning
using the Review Warnings tool. See Reviewing Warning Messages on page
1680.

Phasing

Phase Created Indicates in which phase the brace component was created. See Project
Phasing on page 877.

Phase Demolished Indicates in which phase the brace component was demolished. See Project
Phasing on page 877.

Structural Analysis (see Structural Analytical Model Overview on page 1277)

Start Release Specifies the start release condition: either Fixed, Pinned, Bending Moment,
or User Defined. User Defined allows you to enable/disable each of the start
release conditions.

Start Fx The translational release at the start end of the brace along the local x-axis.

Start Fy The translational release at the start end of the brace along the local y-axis.

Start Fz The translational release at the start end of the brace along the local z-axis.

Start Mx The rotational release at the start end of the brace along the local x-axis.

Start My The rotational release at the start end of the brace along the local y-axis.

Start Mz The rotational release at the start end of the brace along the local z-axis.

End Release Specifies the end release condition: either Fixed, Pinned, Bending Moment
or User Defined. User Defined allows you to enable/disable each of the end
release conditions.

Brace Properties | 319

Name Description

End Fx The translational release at the end of the brace along the local x-axis.

End Fy The translational release at the end of the brace along the local y-axis.

End Fz The translational release at the end of the brace along the local z-axis.

End Mx The rotational release at the end of the brace along the local x-axis.

End My The rotational release at the end of the brace along the local y-axis.

End Mz The rotational release at the end of the brace along the local z-axis.

Analyze As Used by external analysis applications to determine whether brace conditions

contribute to lateral analysis. See Projection Plane Options for each Structural
Element Type on page 1301.

Other

Start Extension Calculation Defines maximum distance of start extension parameter. Set in family para-
meters.

End Extension Calculation Defines maximum distance of end extension parameter. Set in family paramet-
ers.

Trusses
In Revit Structure, you can add a truss to your building model. Use the Truss tool, which creates the truss
according to the layout and other parameters specified in the truss family type you select. For information
about creating a truss family, see Creating a Truss Family on page 321.
The lines in the layout determine the placement of the sub elements that comprise the truss element, such
as the top chord, bottom chord, and web members.
All types within a truss family share the same layout. Individual types specify other parameters, such as the
structural framing families to be used for modeling chords and web members.
To use the Truss tool, select a truss family type and then specify the truss start point and endpoint in the
drawing area. Then Revit Structure creates structural framing elements as necessary, placing them on the
layout lines specified for the selected family.

NOTE When you move the cursor over a truss in the drawing area, the truss element displays as a set of dashed
blue lines. Clicking any of these dashed blue lines selects the truss element itself. The sub elements that comprise
the truss, such as the top chord, bottom chord, and web members, are individually selectable.

320 | Chapter 13 Structural Modeling

You create structural framing elements along each of these layout lines. You can define the structural framing
elements in the truss layout family. Several different types of the same family can have different pre-set
framing families using the same geometric layout.

NOTE Structural members associated with the truss type are included in the geometric layout. These structural
members can be changed to a different size, but they must be selected from sizes available within the specific
truss family. The structural framing type can be specified in the truss layout family definition file RFA file. For more
information, see Creating a Truss Family on page 321.

Creating a Truss Family

A truss layout family consists of lines that define truss elements such as chords and webs. Chord and web
members are created such that their center lines (local x axis) will lie along the layout lines that you define
in the truss layout family. The entire layout will be transformed such that the distance between the 2 end
reference planes will be determined by the truss instance based on its shape in the project. The Length
parameter may be used in your truss layout family to perform calculations to specify the exact location of
vertical web members or to calculate the number of panels to create in the project environment.

Truss family editor tools

■ Click Home tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Top Chord to draw the location and geometric configuration of the
top chord layout lines.

Creating a Truss Family | 321

■ Click Home tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Bottom Chord to draw the location and geometric configuration of
the bottom chord layout lines.

■ Click Home tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Web to draw the location of vertical and diagonal web layout lines.

■ Click Home tab ➤ Properties panel ➤ Family Type to select the types of structural framing families used
for chords and webs.

You may create different types of the same layout family. Differences between these types include the
following.

■ The types of structural framing families used for chords and webs

■ The member rotation of chords or webs about their local x axes

■ The member end releases

Creating a New Truss Layout Family File

1 Click ➤ New ➤ Family. Navigate to the Imperial or Metric template directory and select
the Structural Trusses.rft family template file. Click the Open button to open a new family file.
2 Click Home tab ➤ Properties panel ➤ Family Types. In the Family Types dialog, click New and
provide a name for this truss type. Repeat this step for each planned type of this truss family.
Click OK to close the dialog.
3 Click Insert tab ➤ Load from Library panel ➤ Load Framing Family.
In order to specify structural framing families for the truss layout family to use, you must load
them in your truss layout family. Navigate to the Imperial or Metric family directory and select
the structural framing families for chords and webs. These must be structural framing families
or generic annotation families. Repeat this step to specify for each type of truss.

4 Click Home tab ➤ Properties panel ➤ Family Types. For each truss family type, select the desired
framing type for top chord, bottom chord, vertical webs and diagonal webs. Click OK to close
the dialog.

5 Click ➤ Save As. Provide a name for the new truss family and click Save.

Adding Truss Family Parameters

1 In the Family Editor, click Home tab ➤ Properties panel ➤ Family Types.
2 Under parameters you have the option to add, modify, or remove parameters from the family
type. Adjust parameter settings and click OK.
3 Enter formulas and define the parameter settings. See Creating Parameters on page 692.
If you leave the structural framing type blank in a truss layout family, the truss will behave as
follows:
■ The value for truss members in the truss type will show Set Framing Type, which means that
the truss will use the default, or most recently created structural framing type in the project.

■ When set to Set Framing Type, Revit Structure will not change the values for framing members
in the family type properties when a truss is created in the project environment. The value
remains set to Set Framing Type, the default setting, until you change it in the family type
properties.

322 | Chapter 13 Structural Modeling

Sketching a Truss Family Layout
The structural truss family template provides 5 permanent reference planes: top, bottom, left, center and
right; the left and right planes indicate the span length of the truss. Truss layout lines which end at these
planes or are coincident with them will maintain this relationship during layout transformation in the
project environment.

To sketch truss chords

1 Click Home tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Top Chord.

2 Sketch along the top reference plane to define the top chord. For more information, see Sketching
on page 1405.

3 Click the lock symbol attached to the line to lock the chord to the plane.
4 Click Home tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Bottom Chord.
5 Sketch along the bottom reference plane to define the bottom chord.
6 Again, click the lock symbol to lock the chord to the plane.
Sketch a truss web

7 Click Home tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Web.

8 Sketch the panel webs.
9 If needed, place additional dimensions between sketched lines and reference planes.
10 Save this file to your Family directory. The truss type is now ready for loading into your model.
11 Click Home tab ➤ Family Editor panel ➤ Load into Project.

NOTE For information on loading a truss member into your model, see Loading Structural Component
Families on page 218. Remember to drag the truss into a plan view, not an elevation view.

Adding a Truss
Revit Structure transforms the truss layout to fit the span of the truss and creates framing elements that
correspond to lines in the transformed truss layout. For more information, see Creating a Truss Family on
page 321.

Adding a Truss | 323

To add a truss

1 Open a view of the building level where you want to add the truss.

2 Click Home tab ➤ Structure panel ➤ Truss.

3 On the Properties palette, from the Type Selector drop-down, select the truss type.

4 Click Modify | Place Truss tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ (Line) to specify the start point and endpoint for
the truss, or click (Pick Lines), and then select an edge or line to which you want to constrain the
truss model.

Attaching a Truss to a Roof or Structural Floor

Attaching a truss to a roof or structural floor will force the truss to conform its chords to that element. The
following rules apply to attached trusses.

■ Chord locations are dependent on their attachments and bearing chord assignments.
■ If the top chord of a truss is attached, its location line is the bottom face of the element to which it
is attached.

■ If the bottom chord of a truss is attached, its location line is the top face of the element to which it
is attached.

■ If only the non-bearing chord is attached, the bearing chord location will be the current location line
of the unattached chord.

■ If only the bearing chord is attached, the non-bearing chord location will be the truss location line
offset by the Truss Height property. The offset represents a positive distance for top chords and a
negative distance for bottom chords.

■ The location line of the truss chord must be below (when attaching the top chord) or above (when
attaching the bottom chord) the roof or structural floor.

■ The top chord must always have a higher elevation than the bottom chord. They may meet, but never
cross.

324 | Chapter 13 Structural Modeling

■ The width of the roof or structural floor must equal or exceed the width of the truss. Trusses cannot be
attached to structural floors or roofs that do not completely cover them.

To attach a truss

1 Verify that roof and structural floor visibility is turned on in the current view.

2 Select one or more trusses to attach.

3 On the ribbon, click (Attach Top/Bottom).

4 On the Options Bar, select Attach Trusses: Top or Bottom for the appropriate truss chord being attached.

5 Select the roof or structural floor.

Selecting the Roof/Structural Floor The Attached Truss

Top
Chords

Bottom
Chords

The truss is attached.

Attaching a Truss to a Roof or Structural Floor | 325

NOTE Not all truss families properly attach to a roof or structural floor. For the chord to conform to the shape
of the corresponding roof or structural floor, the layout family's chord sketch lines must coincide with the top
reference plane. The roof/structural floor profile defines the transformation of the family's reference plane, not the
shape of the chord. The truss profile shape is not discarded. The original profile will display if the truss is later
detached.

To detach a truss

1 Select the attached truss.

2 On the ribbon, click (Detach Top/Bottom).

3 Select the roof or structural floor from which to detach.

4 (Optional) Click Detach All on the Options Bar to detach top and bottom chords.

The truss detaches, retaining its original profile shape.

Removing Truss Families

You can remove a truss family from a project and leave its chords and webs in place.
1 Select the truss.
2 Click Modify | Structural Trusses tab ➤ Modify Truss panel ➤ Remove Truss Family.

The truss family drops from the selection, leaving its framing elements in place.

Editing a Truss Profile

In non-plan and perpendicular elevation, section, or 3D views, you can edit the extents of a truss. You can
create new lines, delete existing lines, and use the Trim/Edit tools to adjust the profile, as required. By editing
the profile of the truss, you can modify its top and bottom chords to any shape desired.

326 | Chapter 13 Structural Modeling

NOTE Not all truss families properly transform into a profile sketch. For the top and bottom chords to conform
to the shape of the profile, the layout family's top and bottom chord sketch lines must coincide with the top and
bottom reference planes respectively. The curves drawn using Top or Bottom Chord Reference tools in a profile
sketch define the transformation of the family's top and bottom reference planes, not the shape of the top or
bottom chords.

To edit a truss profile

1 Select a truss to edit.

2 On the ribbon, click (Edit Profile).

3 Click (Top Chord) or (Bottom Chord).

4 Select a line tool.

5 Sketch the profile to which the truss will constrain.

6 Select the old plane profile, and delete it.

Editing a Truss Profile | 327

7 On the ribbon, click (Finish Edit Mode).

The truss model shapes itself to fit within the constraints of the new profile. If necessary, you can edit
the chords of a truss while it is attached.

If the truss is attached at an edited chord, the profile will be ignored. The attached surface of a structural
floor or roof determines the chord geometry. The truss profile shape is not discarded and will display
if the truss is later detached.

TIP Click (Reset Profile) to reset the truss to its original profile.

328 | Chapter 13 Structural Modeling

Tagging a Truss
You can annotate a truss with either a structural truss tag or individual structural framing tags for the
individual truss members. Tags for the truss family are typically located in the following location: Imperial
or Metric Library\Annotations\Structural\Structural Truss Tag.rfa. These tags display the truss family type.
Truss Family Tag

Framing Tags

Placing a Truss Tag

1 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category.
2 (Optional) On the Options Bar, click Tags to select or Load the structural truss tag style. See
Loading Tag Styles on page 1612.
3 (Optional) On the Options Bar, select Vertical or Horizontal for the tag orientation.
4 (Optional) On the Options Bar, select Leader to include a leader line with the tag. Enter a value
for the length of the leader in the text box next to the Leader check box.
5 Click the truss.
The structural truss tag is placed. Click and reposition the tag if needed.

Placing Structural Framing Tags on Truss Elements

Structural framing tags align parallel at the top center of the created truss chords and webs.
1 While pressing Ctrl, select each chord and web in the truss.
2 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag All.

Tagging a Truss | 329

3 In the Tag All not Tagged dialog, select Only selected objects in the current view.
4 Click a structural framing tag category for the truss elements.
5 Click OK.
The structural framing tags are placed. Click and reposition tags if needed.

Tagging New Webs in a Truss

After a truss is placed, you can specify framing tag placement for new webs if the truss is resized.

NOTE A structural framing tag family must be loaded prior to resizing the truss.

1 Select the truss in the drawing area.

2 On the Properties palette, under Identity Data, select None or a parallel elevation view from the Tag
new members in view drop-down.

3 Click Apply.

The selection will place tags for future members of the tags in a specific elevation.

Truss starting position

Truss extended

New members must be added by increasing the length of the truss. Click and reposition tags if needed.

330 | Chapter 13 Structural Modeling

Editing Truss Tag Families
You can modify truss tags and their labels with the Family Editor.

1 Select the truss tag in the drawing area.

2 Click Modify | Structural Trusses tab ➤ Mode panel ➤ Edit Family.

3 Edit the truss tag and label.

See Tags on page 944 and Labels on page 704.

4 Click Home tab ➤ Family Editor panel ➤ Load into Project.

Resetting a Truss
You can undo many of the edits to truss members and restore the predefined values from the type definition
by using the Reset tool. The reset feature re-pins and sets truss members back to their default definition.

NOTE The Reset tool does not reset edits to the truss profile.

The Reset tool performs the following functions on trusses:

■ Sets overridden members’ sizes back to the size defined in the Structural Type parameter of the Truss
Object type properties.

■ Restores deleted members.

■ Restores any relocated members to their original locations.

■ Re-pins any unpinned elements, restoring overridden instance parameters to their default settings.

To use the Reset tool on trusses

1 Select a truss that you wish to reset.

2 Click Modify | Structural Trusses tab ➤ Modify Truss panel ➤ Reset Truss.

Truss Properties
You can modify many of the type and instance properties for structural trusses.

To modify truss properties

1 Select the truss.
2 On the Properties palette, edit truss instance parameters. (See Truss Object Instance Properties
on page 334 or Web Instance Properties on page 335 or Top/Bottom Chord Instance Properties
on page 338.)
3 Click Edit Type to edit truss type parameters. (See Truss Object Type Properties on page 332.)

NOTE Changes made to type parameters affect all trusses of this type in the project. You can click
Duplicate to create a new truss type.

Resetting a Truss | 331

Truss Object Type Properties
Name Description

Top Chords

Structural Framing Type Defines the structural framing type of the top chords.

Start Release Defines the release conditions: either Pinned, Fixed, and
Bending Moment.

End Release Defines the release conditions: Available choices are Pinned,
Fixed, and Bending Moment.

Angle The rotation about the longitudinal axis of the shape.

Analytical Vertical Projection Specifies the location for the respective analytical lines. If you
select Auto-detect, the analytical models follow the same
rules as beams. See Analytical Model Settings on page 1285.

Vertical Webs

Structural Framing Type Defines the structural framing type of the vertical webs.

Start Release Defines the release conditions: either Pinned, Fixed, and
Bending Moment.

End Release Defines the release conditions: either Pinned, Fixed, and
Bending Moment.

Angle The rotation about the longitudinal axis of the shape.

Diagonal Webs

Structural Framing Type Defines the structural framing type of the diagonal webs.

Start Release Defines the release conditions: either Pinned, Fixed, and
Bending Moment.

End Release Defines the release conditions: either Pinned, Fixed, and
Bending Moment.

Angle The rotation about the longitudinal axis of the shape.

Bottom Chords

Structural Framing Type Defines the structural framing type of the bottom chords.

Start Release Defines the release conditions: either Pinned, Fixed, and
Bending Moment.

End Release Defines the release conditions: either Pinned, Fixed, and
Bending Moment.

Angle Rotation about the longitudinal axis of the shape.

332 | Chapter 13 Structural Modeling

Name Description

Analytical Vertical Projection Specifies the location for the respective analytical lines. If
Auto-detect is chosen, the analytical models will follow the
same rules as beams. See Analytical Model Settings on page
1285.

Construction

Webs Have Symbolic Cutback Enables the cutback of the coarse representation of webs.
The cutback distance is defined by the Braces cutback setting
in the Structural Settings dialog. For more information, see
Structural Settings Dialog on page 1605.

Web Orientation Specifies the orientation of the web: either vertical or perpen-
dicular. The default setting is vertical. Webs set to vertical
maintain a vertical orientation in the project. If they are set
to perpendicular, they maintain a 90 degree angle with re-
spect to the bearing chord they are connected to.

Identity Data

Keynote Used to add or edit the truss keynote. Click in the value box
to open the Keynotes dialog. For more information, see
Keynotes on page 938.

Model The manufacturer internal number.

Manufacturer The truss manufacturer.

Type Comments A field for entering general comments about the truss type.
This information can be included in a schedule.

URL A link to a web page that may contain type-specific informa-

tion.

Description The description of the truss.

Assembly Code The description of the assembly, based on the assembly code
selection. This is a read-only value.

Type Mark A value that designates a particular truss; possibly the shop
mark. This value must be unique for each truss in a project.
Revit Structure warns you when the number is already used,
but allows you to continue using it. You can see the warning
using the Review Warnings tool. See Reviewing Warning
Messages on page 1680.

Cost The cost of the truss type.

OmniClass Number The number from Table 23 of the OmniClass Construction

Classification System that best categorizes the family type.

OmniClass title The name from Table 23 of the OmniClass Construction

Classification System that best categorizes the family type.

Truss Properties | 333

Truss Object Instance Properties
Name Description

Constraints

Reference Level The level from which the Start and End Level Offsets are
measured. This value is dependent on the work plane of the
truss. If the truss is detached from its work plane, you can set
this parameter.

Start Level Offset Specifies the vertical offset from the Reference Level for the
start point of the location line.

End Level Offset Specifies the vertical offset from the Reference Level for the
endpoint of the location line.

Structural

Create Top Chord Creates the Top Chord. Clear the check box when you do
not want the top chord to be created. This is useful for pre-
venting overlaps when creating 3D space trusses.

Create Bottom Chord Creates the Bottom Chord. Clear this check box when you
do not want the bottom chord to be created. This is useful
for preventing overlaps when creating 3D space trusses.

Bearing Chord Specifies the chord bearing, determining the position of the
truss with respect to the location line.

Rotation Angle Sets truss axial rotation.

Bearing Vertical Justification Sets the Vertical Justification parameter in bearing chord
members. See Top/Bottom Chord Instance Properties on
page 338.

Stick Symbol Location Specifies the location of the coarse view plan representation
of the truss: either Top Chord, Bottom Chord, or Bearing
Chord.

Dimensions

Truss Height Specifies the distance between the top and bottom reference
planes in the truss layout family.

Non Bearing Offset Specifies the horizontal offset of the non-bearing chord from
the location line.

Span Specifies the furthest extent of the truss along the location
line. In many cases, this parameter does not correspond to
the value of the Length parameter in the truss family.

Identity Data

Engineering Type The text field that can be used to tag trusses. The value is
non-unique.

334 | Chapter 13 Structural Modeling

Name Description

Comments A field for entering comments about the truss.

Mark The standard Object parameter. The value is unique per in-
stance.

Tag new members in view Specifies the view in which to display new beam elements
added to the truss.

Phasing

Phase Created Indicates in which phase the brace component was created.
For more information, see Project Phasing on page 877.

Phase Demolished Indicates in which phase the brace component was demol-
ished. See Project Phasing on page 877.

Other

Number Panels Displays the number of truss panels, based on the Actual
Panel Width. This is a read-only value.

Max Panel Width Specifies the width of a single truss panel.

Actual Panel Thickness Displays the width of each truss panel, based on the overall
width and number of panels for the selected truss. This is a
read-only value.

Web Instance Properties

Web (Instance Pinned) Web (Instance Unpinned)
Name Name Description

Constraints Constraints

Reference Level Reference Level Specifies the reference level for the
structural framing member. Read-only
when pinned.

Cross Section Rotation Cross Section Rotation Specifies the rotation angle of the
member about its location line. Paramet-
er is reset to the value specified in truss
family for top or bottom chord respect-
ively. Read-only when pinned.

Construction Construction

Start Extension Start Extension Specifies the distance between the

physical geometry and the end of the
location line for the start of the mem-
ber.

Truss Properties | 335

Web (Instance Pinned) Web (Instance Unpinned)
Name Name Description

End Extension End Extension Specifies the distance between the

physical geometry and the end of the
location line for the end of the member.

Materials and Finishes Materials and Finishes

Beam Material Beam Material Standard material parameter from the

structural framing family. This paramet-
er is not affected by re-pinning.

Structural Structural

Moment Connection Start Moment Connection Start Specifies whether a moment connection
symbol is shown at the start of the
member coarse representation when
viewed in elevation.

Moment Connection End Moment Connection End Specifies whether a moment connection
symbol is shown at the end of the
member coarse representation when
viewed in elevation.

Cut Length Cut Length A standard read-only parameter from

the structural framing family.

Structural Usage Structural Usage Specifies the structural usage for the
member: either Girder, Horizontal Bra-
cing, Joist, Other, Purlin, or Chord. The
value is not reset when the member is
re-pinned. This value is read-only when
pinned.

Dimensions Dimensions

Length Length A standard read-only parameter from

the structural framing family.

Volume Volume A standard read-only parameter from

the structural framing family.

Identity Data Identity Data

Comments Comments A field for entering comments about

the truss web.

Mark Mark The standard Object parameter. The

value is unique per instance.

Phasing Phasing

Phase Created Phase Created Indicates in which phase the truss

component was created. For more in-

336 | Chapter 13 Structural Modeling

Web (Instance Pinned) Web (Instance Unpinned)
Name Name Description
formation, see Project Phasing on page
877.

Phase Demolished Phase Demolished Indicates in which phase the truss

component was demolished. See Project
Phasing on page 877.

Structural Analysis Structural Analysis

Start Release Start Release Specifies one of 3 pre-defined member

end release conditions at the start of
the member: either Fixed, Pinned,
Bending Moment, or User Defined. Re-
pinning the member resets the paramet-
er to the setting in the truss layout
family. For more information, see
Structural Member Analytical Models
on page 1281. This value is read-only
when pinned.

Start FX Start FX The translational release at the start end

of the web along the x-axis. This value
is read-only when pinned.

Start FY Start FY The translational release at the start end

of the web along the y-axis. This value
is read-only when pinned.

Start FZ Start FZ The translational release at the start end

of the web along the z-axis. This value
is read-only when pinned.

Start MX Start MX The rotational release at the start end

of the web along the local x-axis. This
value is read-only when pinned.

Start MY Start MY The rotational release at the start end

of the web along the local y-axis. This
value is read-only when pinned.

Start MZ Start MZ The rotational release at the start end

of the web along the local z-axis. This
value is read-only when pinned.

End Release End Release Specifies one of 3 pre-defined member

end release conditions at the end of the
member: either Fixed, Pinned, Bending
Moment, or User Defined. Re-pinning
the member will reset the parameter to
the setting in the truss layout family.
This value is read-only when pinned.

Truss Properties | 337

Web (Instance Pinned) Web (Instance Unpinned)
Name Name Description

End FX End FX The translational release at the end of

the web along the x-axis. This value is
read-only when pinned.

End FY End FY The translational release at the end of

the web along the y-axis. This value is
read-only when pinned.

End FZ End FZ The translational release at the end of

the web along the z-axis. This value is
read-only when pinned.

End MX End MX The rotational release at the end of the

web along the local x-axis. This value is
read-only when pinned.

End MY End MY The rotational release at the end of the

web along the local y-axis. This value is
read-only when pinned.

End MZ End MZ The rotational release at the end of the

web along the local z-axis. This value is
read-only when pinned.

Other Other

Start Extension Calculation Start Extension Calculation This value is read-only.

End Extension Calculation End Extension Calculation This value is read-only.

Top/Bottom Chord Instance Properties

Top/Bottom Chord (Instance Top/Bottom Chord (Instance Un-
Pinned) pinned)
Name Name Description

Constraints Constraints

Reference Level Reference Level Specifies the reference level for the
structural framing member. This value
is read-only when pinned.

Start Level Offset Start Level Offset Specifies the distance of the chord start
point from the reference level. Values
entered here are reset when the mem-
ber is re-pinned. This value is read-only
when pinned.

End Level Offset End Level Offset Specifies the distance of the chord end-
point from the reference level. Values
entered here are reset when the mem-

338 | Chapter 13 Structural Modeling

Top/Bottom Chord (Instance Top/Bottom Chord (Instance Un-
Pinned) pinned)
Name Name Description
ber is re-pinned. This value is read-only
when pinned.

z-Direction Justification z-Direction Justification Specifies the location of the physical

geometry with respect to the truss
chord layout line: either Top, Center,
Bottom or Other. Changes to this para-
meter are reset to Center when the
member is re-pinned. This value is read-
only when pinned.

z-Direction Offset Value z-Direction Offset Value Enabled when the z-Direction Justifica-
tion is set to Other. The value sets the
location of the top flange of the chord
with respect to the truss chord layout
line. The parameter is ignored when the
member is re-pinned. This value is read-
only when pinned.

Lateral Justification Lateral Justification Specifies the location of the physical

geometry (in plan view) with respect to
the location line: either Side 1, Side 2
and Center. No change to this paramet-
er when re-pinned.

Cross Section Rotation Cross Section Rotation Specifies the rotation angle of the
member about its location line. The
parameter is reset to the value specified
in the truss family for the top or bottom
chord respectively. This value is read-
only when pinned.

Construction Construction

Start Extension Start Extension Specifies the distance between the

physical geometry and the end of the
location line for the start of the mem-
ber.

End Extension End Extension Specifies the distance between the

physical geometry and the end of the
location line for the end of the member.

Materials and Finishes Materials and Finishes

Beam Material Beam Material A standard material parameter from the

structural framing family. This paramet-
er is not affected by re-pinning.

Structural Structural

Truss Properties | 339

Top/Bottom Chord (Instance Top/Bottom Chord (Instance Un-
Pinned) pinned)
Name Name Description

Stick Symbol Location Stick Symbol Location Controls the location of the symbolic
coarse representation of the beam, rel-
ative to the member local axis: either
Top of Geometry, Center of Geometry,
Bottom of Geometry, or Location Line.
(The location line is the truss chord lay-
out line.) The parameter is not changed
when the member is re-pinned. This
value is read-only when pinned.

Moment Connection Start Moment Connection Start Controls whether a moment connection
symbol displays at the start of the
member coarse representation, when
viewed in elevation.

Moment Connection End Moment Connection End Controls whether a moment connection
symbol displays at the end of the
member coarse representation, when
viewed in elevation.

Cut Length Cut Length A standard read-only parameter from

the structural framing family. This value
is read-only when pinned.

Structural Usage Structural Usage Specifies the structural usage for the
member: either Girder, Horizontal Bra-
cing, Joist, Other, Purlin, and Chord.
The value is not reset when the member
is re-pinned. This value is read-only
when pinned.

Camber Size Camber Size A standard structural framing paramet-

er.

Number of Studs Number of Studs A standard structural framing paramet-

er.

Dimensions Dimensions

Length Length A standard read- only parameter from

the structural framing family.

Volume Volume A standard read-only parameter from

the structural framing family.

Identity Data Identity Data

Comments Comments A standard structural framing paramet-

er.

340 | Chapter 13 Structural Modeling

Top/Bottom Chord (Instance Top/Bottom Chord (Instance Un-
Pinned) pinned)
Name Name Description

Mark Mark A standard structural framing paramet-

er.

Phasing Phasing

Phase Created Phase Created Indicates in which phase the truss

component was created. For more in-
formation, see Project Phasing on page
877.

Phase Demolished Phase Demolished Indicates in which phase the truss

component was demolished. See Project
Phasing on page 877.

Structural Analysis Structural Analysis

Start Release Start Release Specify one of 3 pre-defined member

end release conditions at the start of
the member: either Fixed, Pinned,
Bending Moment, or User Defined. Re-
pinning the member will reset the
parameter to the setting in the truss
layout family. Refer to the analytical
model settings. This value is read-only
when pinned.

Start FX Start FX The translational release at the start of

the top/bottom chord along the x-axis.
This value is read-only when pinned.

Start FY Start FY The translational release at the start of

the top/bottom chord along the y-axis.
This value is read-only when pinned.

Start FZ Start FZ The translational release at the start of

the top/bottom chord along the z-axis.
This value is read-only when pinned.

Start MX Start MX The rotational release at the start end

of the top/bottom chord along the local
x-axis. This value is read-only when
pinned.

Start MY Start MY The rotational release at the start end

of the top/bottom chord along the local
y-axis. This value is read-only when
pinned.

Start MZ Start MZ The rotational release at the start end

of the top/bottom chord along the local

Truss Properties | 341

Top/Bottom Chord (Instance Top/Bottom Chord (Instance Un-
Pinned) pinned)
Name Name Description
z-axis. This value is read-only when
pinned.

End Release End Release Specify one of 3 pre-defined member

End FX End FX The translational release at the end of

the top/bottom chord along the x-axis.
This value is read-only when pinned.

End FY End FY The translational release at the end of

the top/bottom chord along the y-axis.
This value is read-only when pinned.

End FZ End FZ The translational release at the end of

the top/bottom chord along the z-axis.
This value is read-only when pinned.

End MX End MX The rotational release at the end of the

top/bottom chord along the local x-ax-
is. This value is read-only when pinned.

End MY End MY The rotational release at the end of the

top/bottom chord along the local y-ax-
is. This value is read-only when pinned.

End MZ End MZ The rotational release at the end of the

top/bottom chord along the local z-axis.
This value is read-only when pinned.

Analytical Model Analytical Model

Vertical Projection Vertical Projection Specifies the location of the member's

analytical model with respect to the
physical geometry: either Auto-detect,
Top of beam, Center of Beam, or any
of the available data (Levels or named
reference planes). For more information,
see the help section on the analytical
model. This value is read-only when
pinned.

Other Other

Start Extension Calculation Start Extension Calculation This value is read-only.

End Extension Calculation End Extension Calculation This value is read-only.

342 | Chapter 13 Structural Modeling

Openings in a Structural Beam, Brace, or Structural Column
You can cut openings through different structural elements such as beams, braces, or structural columns,
using the Opening by Face tool. For more information, see Openings on page 561. The following behavior
applies to all structural elements:

■ A beam opening is applied to a face that is vertical or horizontal through the major or minor axis (typically
vertical or horizontal) of the beam.

■ A beam opening cuts through the entire element (for example, it cannot cut only one flange of a
wide-flange beam).

■ Two perpendicular planes for openings are provided by each beam, brace, or column. These planes align
with the major and minor axis of the member.

NOTE Curved beams are not valid hosts for beam openings.

To cut an opening in a structural beam, brace, or structural column

1 Click Home tab ➤ Opening panel ➤ By Face.

2 Select the desired plane of the member to which you want to add an opening.
Selecting the plane
of the column

3 Using the Draw panel sketching tools, sketch the opening on the beam, brace, or column.

Openings in a Structural Beam, Brace, or Structural Column | 343

Sketching the
opening

When you sketch an opening for a structural beam, brace, or structural column using the
rectangle option, you can specify a radius, which allows you to sketch rectangles with fillets.
This helps to avoid sharp corners on the opening that can concentrate stresses.
Beam opening with radius

For more information, see Sketching on page 1405.

4 On the ribbon, click Mode panel ➤ Finish Edit Mode.

Finished sketch

344 | Chapter 13 Structural Modeling

For information about reinforcing openings, see Structural Stiffeners on page 345.

Structural Stiffeners
You use stiffeners to strengthen steel framing members, especially beams and columns in which there are
openings. Stiffeners are modeled as Revit loadable families that represent the additional steel reinforcing
material.
For information about openings in structural framing members, see Openings in a Structural Beam, Brace,
or Structural Column on page 343.

To add a stiffener to a structural member opening

1 Click Home tab ➤ Model panel ➤ Component drop-down ➤ Place a Component.

2 On the Properties palette, select a stiffener type from the Type Selector drop-down.

NOTE If the type of stiffener you want is not listed in the Type Selector, load additional stiffener families.
(See Loading Structural Families on page 218.)

3 Click Modify | Place Component tab ➤ Placement panel ➤ Place on Face or Place on Work Plane.

NOTE Structural stiffeners cannot be placed on structural element faces when the view is in wireframe mode.

4 Using the drawing tools, add the desired stiffener reinforcement to the beam opening. For more
information about sketching, see Sketching on page 1405.

Structural Walls
All wall types within the Basic Wall family have an instance property called Structural Usage, which can
have the following values:

Shear Rigid planar surfaces that inherently resist lateral thrusts of shear.

Bearing Walls that support a vertical load in addition to their own weight.

Non-bearing Walls that define and divide spaces and support no vertical load except their own weight.

Structural combined Walls that serve more than one purpose.

When you use the Wall tool, Revit Structure assumes you are placing partition walls. Whichever wall type
you select, the default Structural Usage value is non-bearing. When you use the Structural Wall tool, and
select the same wall type, the default Structural Usage value is bearing. In either case, the value is read-only,
but you can change it after the wall is placed.

Structural Stiffeners | 345

Typical structural wall

Creating a Structural Wall

1 Click Home tab ➤ Structure panel ➤ Wall drop-down ➤ Structural Wall.
2 On the Properties palette, select the family type of the wall from the Type Selector drop-down.
3 (Optional) Change the instance properties of the wall to be placed if desired by clicking on the
Properties palette. See Modifying Type Properties on page 38.
Modify the Type Parameters of the wall to be placed by clicking the Edit Type button on the
Properties palette. See Structural Wall Properties on page 351.

4 The Height/Depth area of the Options Bar is shown in the following illustration.

You may pre-select the height (top) or depth (base) of a structural wall from the Options Bar.
Select either Height or Depth from the list box, then use the Constraint list to the right of
Height/Depth selection to set the constraint of the top or base of the wall either by Level or as
Unconnected. If you select Unconnected, specify the height or depth by entering the value to
the right of the constraint list. The Unconnected Height/Depth measurement is relative to the
current Level.
5 On the Options Bar, select Chain if you intend to create a series of walls.

346 | Chapter 13 Structural Modeling

Creating a structural wall chain

Sketch the wall

6 Sketch the shape of the wall. If the walls do not appear after you draw them, you may need to
lower the view depth or create a foundation level to use as an underlay for the current level. See
View Range on page 864 and View Properties on page 873.
7 Optionally, edit structural walls. See Modifying Walls on page 454 and Splitting Elements on
page 1509.
8 Optionally, create arc walls. See Arc Walls on page 350.

NOTE For information about structural floors and hidden lines, see Display of Hidden Lines of Structural
Concrete Components on page 395.

Related topics

■ Modifying Structural Walls on page 347

■ Defining Structural Wall Shapes or Openings on page 348

■ Structural Walls on page 345

Modifying Structural Walls

You can modify the appearance of structural walls through their properties either before or after you place
the wall.

Modifying Structural Walls

You modify wall properties, on the Properties palette. To open the dialog, do one of the following:

■ Select the wall.

■ Right-click the wall and click Properties. The shortcut menu also contains several options for manipulating
the wall, such as changing the zoom scale.

Modifying Structural Walls | 347

Changing Structural Wall Types
Select a wall in the drawing area, and then select a different family type in the Type Selector at the top of
the Properties palette.

Interior and Exterior Structural Wall Properties

The properties of a wall vary, depending on whether it is an interior or an exterior wall. In addition, when
you modify type properties, all walls of that type are modified. When you modify instance properties, the
properties of a single instance of a wall are modified.

NOTE When you modify parameters, the type names do not update. For example, if you change the width of an
exterior wall from 200 mm to 250 mm, its name retains a reference to the original width.

Defining Structural Wall Shapes or Openings

When you sketch a wall by picking 2 points, Revit Structure draws a rectangular wall by default. You can
modify the shape of the wall or add openings to it by editing its elevation profile. To edit a wall's elevation
profile, the view must be parallel and can be either a section or elevation view. You cannot edit the elevation
profile of an arc wall.
Design with non-rectangular walls and cut openings

Modifying Structural Wall Elevation Profiles

1 In the drawing area, select a wall.

2 Click Modify | Walls tab ➤ Mode panel ➤ Edit Profile.

If you select a wall in a plan view, the Go To View dialog displays. Select an elevation view, and
click Open View.
Wall displayed as model lines

348 | Chapter 13 Structural Modeling

3 Edit the wall as desired:
■ Delete the lines and then sketch a completely different shape.

■ Split the existing lines and add arcs.

■ Draw openings or holes.

Wall modified

TIP As you edit the rectangle, datum planes display to indicate the original shape and size of the
wall. If the lines you sketch snap to the datum planes, the endpoints of the lines automatically align
to the planes, unless you explicitly unlock them. If you unlock the sketched lines, you can modify
them independently of the datum planes. If you exit sketch mode while the sketched lines are still
aligned, as you move a datum handle, the sketched lines move with it.
Sketch lines unlocked

4 Click Modify | Walls > Edit Profile tab ➤ Mode panel ➤ Finish Edit Mode.
Modified wall displayed in 3D

Modifying Structural Walls | 349

NOTE If you want an edited wall profile to revert to its original shape, select the wall, and click Modify | Walls
tab ➤ Mode panel ➤ Reset Profile.

Tips for Defining Structural Wall Shapes or Openings

■ When you define a wall shape on a wall that is not horizontal or vertical in a plan view, you should draw
a section parallel to the wall before sketching in the elevation. The Go To View dialog displays. Revit
Structure suggests the section view as the optimal view for editing the sketch.

■ When you edit the elevation profile of a wall attached to another element, the wall temporarily reverts
to its original shape and height. For example, the profile of a wall attached to a roof assumes its
unconnected height prior to being attached to the roof. As a result, you may find the wall is not at the
right height to edit the elevation profile. To change the unconnected height, click on the Properties
palette.
As you edit the elevation profile, keep in mind that after you finish the sketch, the wall top or bottom
attaches only where horizontal lines are coincident with the reference planes in the sketch.
The sample sketched profile. Note the top sketch lines are
coincident with reference planes.

The finished wall attached to roof. Non-coincidental

horizontal lines from the sketch did not attach.

Arc Walls

Resizing Arc Walls

You can resize arc walls using middle and end controls.
1 Select an arc wall.

350 | Chapter 13 Structural Modeling

2 Drag the end controls to change the arc length.
3 To change the arc radius while keeping it concentric, select Keep Concentric on the Options
Bar.
Leave this option deselected to retain existing end conditions, such as endpoint location or
tangency to a straight wall.

4 Drag the middle control.

Cutting Arc Walls

You can cut square or rectangular openings into an arc wall by editing the elevation of the wall. See Editing
the Profile of a Wall on page 455.
1 In either a 3D or elevation view, select an arc wall.
2 Click Modify | Walls tab ➤ Modify Wall panel ➤ Wall Opening.
The Rectangles tool becomes active.

3 Sketch rectangular openings in the arc wall.

4 When finished, click Select panel ➤ Modify.

As you sketch the openings, permanent dimensions appear. If the wall has a top constraint set to a level,
dimensions appear from both the top and base constraints. If the wall has a top constraint that is explicit,
dimensions appear from the base constraint only.

Structural Wall Properties

You can modify many properties for structural walls, as shown in the following 2 sections:

Structural Wall Properties | 351

Structural Wall Type Properties
Name Description

Construction

Structure Specifies a wall layer. Select the Edit button to add, change, or delete a wall layer.

Wrapping at Inserts Specifies the layer wrapping of walls at inserts. See Layer Wrapping on page 576.

Wrapping at Ends Specifies the layer wrapping of wall endcaps. See Setting Layer Wrapping on page
576.

Width Specifies the width of the wall.

Wall Function Specifies the function of the wall which identifies specific properties: either Interior,
Exterior, Foundation, Retaining, Soffit, or Core-shaft.

Additional Top/Exterior Offset Specifies an additional offset from the top/exterior rebar cover. This allows placing
multiple rebar elements together in different area reinforcement layers. See Rebar
Cover Element Properties on page 401.

Additional Bottom/Interior Offset Specifies an additional offset from the bottom/interior rebar cover. This allows placing
multiple rebar elements together in different area reinforcement layers. See Rebar
Cover Element Properties on page 401.

Additional Offset Specifies an additional offset from the rebar cover. This allows placing multiple rebar
elements together in different path reinforcement layers. See Rebar Cover Element
Properties on page 401.

Graphics

Coarse Scale Fill Pattern Specifies a fill pattern for a wall in a coarse-scale view. See View Properties on page
873.

Coarse Scale Fill Color Specifies a color for the fill pattern for a wall in a coarse-scale view.

Identity Data

Keynote Specifies or modifies the structural wall keynote. Click in the value box to open the
Keynotes dialog. See Keynotes on page 938.

Model The manufacturer internal number.

Manufacturer The wall manufacturer.

Type Comments A field for entering general comments about the wall type. This information can be
included in a schedule.

URL A link to a web page that may contain type-specific information.

Description A description of the wall.

Assembly Description A description of the assembly based on the assembly code selection. This is a read-
only value.

352 | Chapter 13 Structural Modeling

Name Description

Assembly Code A Uniformat assembly code selected from a hierarchical list.

Type Mark A value that designates the particular wall. This value must be unique for each ele-
ment in a project. Revit Structure warns you when the number is already used, but
allows you to continue using it. You can see the warning using the Review Warnings
tool. See Reviewing Warning Messages on page 1680.

Fire Rating The fire rating of the wall.

Cost The pricing of the wall.

Structural Wall Instance Properties

Name Description

Constraints

Location Line Specifies the position of the wall with respect to the line sketched in the project
elevation. For more information, see Placing Walls on page 452. The wall location
line remains the same for that wall, even if the type changes.

Base Constraint Specifies the level from which the wall base is referenced.

Base Offset Specifies the offset of the base of the wall from its base constraint.

Base is Attached Indicates whether the base of the wall is attached to another component, such
as a structural floor. This is a read-only value.

Base Extension Distance Indicates the distance you have moved the base of the layers in a wall. See
Compound Structure on page 573. This parameter is enabled when the layers of
a wall are set to extendable.

Top Constraint The name of the level to which the wall top is set.

Unconnected Height If top constraint is unconnected, you may set an unconnected height of the
wall. This value is read-only if there is a top constraint.

Top Offset Specifies the offset of the top of the wall from its top constraint; enabled only
when the top constraint is set to a level.

Top is Attached Indicates whether the top of the wall is attached to another component, such
as a structural floor. This is a read-only value.

Top Extension Distance Indicates the distance you have moved the top of the layers in a wall. See
Compound Structure on page 573. This parameter is enabled when the layers of
a wall are set to extendable.

Room Bounding Indicates whether the wall is part of a room boundary. This parameter is enabled
after you place the wall.

Structural Wall Properties | 353

Name Description

Rebar Cover - Exterior Face Specifies the rebar cover distance from the wall exterior face.

Rebar Cover - Interior Face Specifies the rebar cover distance from the wall interior face.

Rebar Cover - Other Face Specifies the rebar cover distance from the face of adjacent element.

Estimated Reinforcement Volume Specifies the estimated reinforcement volume of the selected element. This is a
read-only parameter that only displays when rebar has been placed.

Structural Usage The structural use of the wall.

Dimensions

Length Indicates the length of the wall. This is a read-only value.

Area Indicates the area of the wall. This is a read-only value.

Volume Indicates the volume of the wall. This is a read-only value.

Identity Data

Comments A field for entering comments about the wall.

Mark A label created for the wall. This value must be unique for each element in a
project. Revit Structure warns you when the number is already used but allows
you to continue using it. You can see the warning using the Review Warnings
tool. See Reviewing Warning Messages on page 1680.

Phasing

Phase Created Indicates in which phase the wall component was created. See Project Phasing
on page 877.

Phase Demolished Indicates in which phase the wall component was demolished. See Project
Phasing on page 877.

Analytical Model

Enable Analytical Model Changes the visibility of the wall analytical model.

Horizontal Projection Either Auto-detect, Center Line, Interior Face, Center of Core, or Exterior Face.
Specifies the horizontal limits of the structural wall analytical model.Specifies
the horizontal plane of the wall used for analysis and design. See Projection Plane
Options for each Structural Element Type on page 1301 and Analytical Projection
Rules on page 1289.

Top Vertical Projection The top vertical plane of the wall used for analysis and design. See Projection
Plane Options for each Structural Element Type on page 1301.

Bottom Vertical Projection The bottom vertical plane of the wall used for analysis and design. See Projection
Plane Options for each Structural Element Type on page 1301.

354 | Chapter 13 Structural Modeling

Wall Foundations
Wall foundations are members of the structural foundation category and are hosted by walls. You can place
these foundations along structural walls, in either a plan or 3D view.
Wall foundations are constrained to the walls that they support and move with them.
Related topics

■ Isolated Foundations on page 361

■ Foundation Slabs on page 382

■ Concrete Geometry Joins on page 393

Creating a Wall Foundation

1 Open a view that contains structural walls.
2 Click Home tab ➤ Foundation panel ➤ Wall , and select a wall foundation type from the Type
Selector drop-down.

NOTE There are both retaining and bearing wall foundation types available.

3 Select the wall to receive the wall foundation.

Plan view. 3D view.

The wall foundation is placed beneath the selected walls.

Plan view. Elevation view 3D view.

Wall Foundations | 355

NOTE The wall foundation is created at the bottom of the selected wall. If the created wall foundation
is beyond the view range of the active view, you are prompted with a warning.

Modifying a Wall Foundation

You edit the lengths of wall foundations with end controls. They display as small filled circles that indicate
where the end of the selected wall foundation is attached. End controls snap to other visible references.
This is useful when you need to extend a wall foundation to accommodate the needs of a building, such as
a footing for a run of stairs.

Use the following steps to extend the length of a wall foundation.

1 Select the wall foundation to display its end controls.

Plan view. 3D view.

356 | Chapter 13 Structural Modeling

2 Drag either end of the foundation as needed.
Plan view. 3D view.

Default End Extensions

You can define the default length that unjoined wall foundations extend beyond their host walls. This
default is defined in the Wall Foundation Type Properties on page 359.
Under the Dimensions section, enter a value in the Default End Extension Length parameter. Unjoined wall
foundation ends extend this distance beyond their host wall. The defined value applies to the entire project.

Wall Foundation Breaks Beneath Doors and Windows

When you create a door or window that extends to the base of the wall, the wall foundation breaks beneath
the new element.

To change the default behavior, access the type properties for the wall foundation and clear the Do Not
Break at Inserts option. See Wall Foundation Type Properties on page 359.

Modifying a Wall Foundation | 357

NOTE The wall opening tool will break the wall foundation if the opening extends to the base of the wall. These
openings are not affected by this parameter. See Cutting Rectangular Openings in Walls on page 562.

Tagging a Wall Foundation with Elevation

You can display the bottom elevation in a view by tagging the foundation with the Structural Foundation
Tag with Elevation tag. It is loaded from the family library, under Structural/Annotations. See Loading Tag
Styles on page 1612.
When the Structural Foundation Tag with Elevation is applied, the bottom elevation of structural foundations
(footings) is reported in a read-only instance parameter called Elevation at Bottom. See Applying a Tag By
Category on page 945.

Changing the Structural Usage of a Wall Foundation

You can change the Structural Usage (either Retaining or Bearing) of a wall foundation in two ways. You
can change the wall foundation to an appropriate wall foundation type or change its structural usage type
properties.

To change the wall foundation type

1 Select the wall foundation.
2 Select a retaining or bearing wall foundation type from the Type Selector drop-down on the
Properties palette.

To change the structural usage type properties

1 Select the wall foundation.
2 On the Properties palette, under Structural, select Retaining or Bearing for the Structural Usage
parameter.
If you select Retaining, you can specify values for Toe Length, Heel Length, and Foundation Thickness. Toe
and heel length define the width of the foundation. For more information, see Wall Foundation Properties
on page 358.
If you select Bearing, you can specify values for Width and Foundation Thickness.

Wall Foundation Properties

There are two types of wall foundations for structural use: bearing and retaining. You can modify the
properties for both types, including heel length, toe length, foundation thickness, and width.

358 | Chapter 13 Structural Modeling

Modifying Wall Foundation Properties
1 Select the wall foundation.
2 On the Properties palette, edit wall foundation instance parameters. (See Wall Foundation
Instance Properties on page 360.)
3 Click Edit Type to edit wall foundation type parameters. (See Wall Foundation Type Properties
on page 359.)

NOTE Changes made to type parameters affect all wall foundations of this type in the project. You
can click Duplicate to create a wall foundation type.

Wall Foundation Type Properties

Name Description

Materials and Finishes

Material Specifies the concrete type to be used.

Structural

Structural Usage Specifies the wall usage type: either Retaining or Bearing.

Dimensions

Toe Length Retaining walls only. Specifies the distance from the edge of the host wall to the
outside face of the foundation.

Heel Length Retaining walls only. Specifies the distance from the edge of the host wall to the
inside face of the foundation.

Width Bearing walls only. Specifies the overall width of the bearing wall foundation.

Foundation Thickness Specifies the foundation thickness.

Default End Extension Length Specifies the distance that the foundation will extend beyond the end of the wall.

Do Not Break At Inserts Specifies whether the foundation is continuous or breaks beneath inserts such as
doors and windows that extend to the base of the wall.

Identity Data

Model The manufacturer internal number.

Manufacturer The foundation manufacturer.

Type Comments A field for placing general comments about the foundation type. This information
can be included in a schedule.

URL A link to a web page that may contain type-specific information.

Description Enter an optional description of the wall foundation.

Wall Foundation Properties | 359

Name Description

Assembly description Describes the assembly, based on the assembly code selection. This is a read-only
parameter.

Assembly Code The Uniformat assembly code selected from a hierarchical list.

Type Mark A value that designates the particular foundation. This value must be unique for
each element in a project. Revit Structure warns you when the number value is
already used, but allows you to continue using it. You can see the warning using
the Review Warnings tool. See Reviewing Warning Messages on page 1680.

Cost The pricing of the foundation.

Wall Foundation Instance Properties

Name Description

Constraints

Eccentricity Bearing walls only.vSpecifies the offset from the wall center line to the bearing
foundation center line.

Structural

Rebar Cover - Top Face Specifies the rebar cover distance from the wall top face.

Rebar Cover - Bottom Face Specifies the rebar cover distance from the wall bottom face.

Rebar Cover - Other Faces Specifies the rebar cover distance from the wall to adjacent element faces.

Estimated Reinforcement Volume Specifies the estimated reinforcement volume of the selected element. This is a
read-only parameter that only displays when rebar has been placed.

Dimensions

Length Indicates the overall length. This is a read-only parameter.

Width Indicates the overall width. This is a read-only parameter.

Volume Indicates the volume of the foundation. This is a read-only parameter.

Elevation at Bottom Indicates the elevation used for tagging the Bottom of Foundation.
This parameter is affected by the family parameter Cap (see Family Category
and Parameters on page 695). The following image shows the difference between
the Cap parameter enabled (in red) and disabled (in green).

The Elevation at Bottom measurement is taken from this setting.

This is a read-only parameter.

Identity Data

360 | Chapter 13 Structural Modeling

Name Description

Comments A field for placing general comments about the foundation type.

Mark A label created for the foundation. This value must be unique for each element
in a project. Revit Structure warns you when the number value is already used
but allows you to continue using it. You can see the warning using the Review
Warnings tool. See Reviewing Warning Messages on page 1680.

Phasing

Phase Created Indicates in which phase the foundation component was created. See Project
Phasing on page 877.

Phase Demolished Indicates in which phase the foundation component was demolished. See Project
Phasing on page 877.

Structural Analysis

Analyze As Indicates the property type for structural analysis. Select either Foundation or
Not for Analysis.

Isolated Foundations
Isolated foundations are standalone families that are part of the structural foundation category. Several types
of isolated foundations can be loaded from the family library, including pile caps with multiple piles,
rectangular piles, and single piles.
Pile caps with multiple piles

Isolated Foundations | 361

Rectangular and triangular pile caps

HP shaped and pipe piles

Adding Isolated Foundations

1 Click Home tab ➤ Foundation panel ➤ Isolated.
You can load isolated foundation families by clicking Modify | Place Isolated Foundation
tab ➤ Model panel ➤ Load Family.

2 On the Properties palette, select an isolated foundation type from the Type Selector drop-down.
3 Place the isolated foundation in either a plan or 3D view.

362 | Chapter 13 Structural Modeling

Rectangular isolated foundation

The Bottom Elevation of structural foundations (footings) is reported in a read-only instance

parameter called Elevation at Bottom. You can then display this value in a view by tagging the
foundation with the Structural Foundation Tag with Elevation tag. It is available from the family
library, under Structural/Annotations. For more information, see Applying a Tag By Category
on page 945.

Isolated Foundation Properties

You can use several standard types of isolated foundations: either Rectangular Footings, Concrete Pile-Caps,
or Steel Pipe Piles.

Modifying Isolated Foundation Properties

You can edit isolated foundation properties, such as those indicating structure, dimension, and identity.

To edit isolated foundation properties

1 Select the isolated foundation.
2 On the Properties palette, edit isolated foundation instance parameters. (See Isolated Foundation
Instance Properties on page 364.)
3 Click Edit Type to edit isolated foundation type parameters. (See Isolated Foundation Type
Properties on page 363.)

NOTE Changes made to type parameters affect all isolated foundations of this type in the project.
You can click Duplicate to create a new isolated foundation type.

Isolated Foundation Type Properties

Name Description

Dimensions

Isolated Foundation Properties | 363

Name Description

Width Specifies the width of the isolated foundation type. Applies to the Pile Cap Pile
family type.

Length Specifies the length of the isolated foundation type. Applies to the Pile Cap Pile
family type.

Thickness Specifies the foundation thickness. Applies to the Pile Cap Pile family type.

Identity Data

Assembly Code A Uniformat assembly code selected from a hierarchical list.

Keynote Add or edit the isolated foundation keynote. Click in the value box to open the
Keynotes dialog. See Keynotes on page 938.

Model The manufacturer internal number.

Manufacturer The foundation manufacturer.

Type Comments A field for placing general comments about the foundation type. This information
can be included in a schedule.

URL A link to a web page that may contain type-specific information.

Description Enter an optional description of the foundation.

Assembly Description Describes the assembly based on the assembly code selection. This is a read-only
parameter.

Type Mark A value that designates the specific foundation. This value must be unique for each
element in a project. Revit Structure warns you when the number value is already
used but allows you to continue using it. You can see the warning using the Review
Warnings tool. See Reviewing Warning Messages on page 1680.

Cost The pricing of the foundation.

OmniClass Number The number from Table 23 of the OmniClass Construction Classification System
that best categorizes the family type.

OmniClass title The name from Table 23 of the OmniClass Construction Classification System that
best categorizes the family type.

Isolated Foundation Instance Properties

Name Description

Constraints

Level The level to which the slab is constrained.

Host The level to which the host of the isolated slab is constrained.

Offset Specifies the elevation of the top of the isolated foundation relative to its level.

364 | Chapter 13 Structural Modeling

Name Description

Moves With Grids Changes the column constraint to grid.

Materials and Finishes

Material Specifies the material of the isolated foundation.

Structural

Rebar Cover - Top Face Specifies the distance of the rebar cover from the element top face.

Rebar Cover - Bottom Face Specifies the distance of the rebar cover from the element bottom face.

Rebar Cover - Other Faces Specifies the distance of the rebar cover from the element to adjacent element
faces.

Estimated Reinforcement Volume Specifies the estimated reinforcement volume of the selected element. This is a
read-only parameter that only displays when rebar has been placed.

Dimensions

The Elevation at Bottom measurement is taken from this setting.

This is a read-only parameter.

Identity Data

Comments A field for entering comments about the wall.

Mark A label created for the element. This value must be unique for each element in
a project. Revit Structure warns you if the number is already used but allows you
to continue using it. You can see the warning using the Review Warnings tool.
See Reviewing Warning Messages on page 1680.

Phasing

Phase Created Indicates in which phase the component was created. See Project Phasing on
page 877.

Phase Demolished Indicates in which phase the component was demolished. See Project Phasing
on page 877.

Structural Analysis

Analyze As Indicates the property type for structural analysis. Select either Foundation or
Not for Analysis.

Isolated Foundation Properties | 365

Structural Floors
You add structural floors to the building model using a similar interface and functionality as those used
when creating floors. This functionality includes creating and editing slab edges, thickened slabs, drop
panels, or ramps, as well as user selection and user creation of structural floor types.
Typical structural floors

Related topics

■ Floors on page 555

■ Sloped Floors on page 556

■ Slab Edges on page 379

■ Ramps on page 607

Adding a Structural Floor or Deck

You create structural floors and decks by sketching them. You can sketch lines for the slab edges either by
picking walls or by using the Line tool. Typically you will sketch a floor in a plan view, although you can
sketch it in a 3D view, provided the work plane of the 3D view is set to the work plane in which you want
to place the structural floor. The top of the structural floor is offset relative to the level at which it is placed.
For information about Height Offset from Level, and other Structural Floor parameters, see Structural Floor
Properties on page 376.
For information about structural floors and hidden lines, see Display of Hidden Lines of Structural Concrete
Components on page 861.

To add a structural floor

1 Click Home tab ➤ Structure panel ➤ Floor drop-down ➤ (Structural Floor).

2 From the Type Selector, specify a structural floor type.

3 On the ribbon, click (Boundary Line).

4 Click (Pick Walls) and select the bounding walls.

366 | Chapter 13 Structural Modeling

NOTE Instead of picking walls you can sketch a structural floor. On the Draw panel of the ribbon,
use the sketch tools to form the boundary of the structural floor. The sketch must form a closed loop
or boundary condition.

5 Click (Span Direction).

6 (Optional) On the Options Bar:
■ specify an offset for slab edges.

■ select Extend into wall (to core).

7 On the ribbon, click (Finish Edit Mode).

NOTE To add openings to a structural floor, see Openings in Structural Floors on page 372.

Related topics

■ Cantilevers on page 367

■ Span Direction on page 369

■ Modifying Structural Floors on page 375

■ Structural Floors on page 366

Cantilevers
The Slab Cantilever property allows the sketch of the structural floor both to be constrained to its supports
and its edge to be extended beyond them. Cantilevers are applied to structural floors, either before or after
sketching the structural floor.
Cantilevers are created by adjusting 2 offset parameters that represent the concrete and steel deck of a
structural floor.

Cantilevers | 367
In composite concrete and metal decks, the steel cantilever parameter will always be the lesser of the 2
offsets. In the event that the structural floor is all concrete or metal, the appropriate offsets should be set.

Applying Cantilevers when Creating a Structural Floor

1 Open a plan view displaying the beams or bay that will support the structural floor.

2 Click Home tab ➤ Structure panel ➤ Floor drop-down ➤ Structural Floor.

3 Click Modify | Create Floor Boundary tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ Boundary Line and then click (Pick
Supports).

4 On the Properties palette, under Other, enter offset values for both Concrete Cantilever and Steel
Cantilever.

5 Click Apply.

6 Select the beams that will support the structural floor.

7 Click Modify | Create Floor Boundary tab ➤ Mode panel ➤ Finish Edit Mode.

NOTE The cantilever offset is applied in relation to the direction that the slab edge was created. This is applicable
to line sketching, Pick Supports, or Pick Walls structural floor creation. In instances where the cantilever appears
to be inside the structural floor: enter sketch mode, select the edge, and adjust the cantilever values to negative
numbers.

Applying Cantilevers to an Existing Structural Floor

1 Select a structural floor in a plan view.

368 | Chapter 13 Structural Modeling

2 Click Modify | Floors tab ➤ Mode panel ➤ Edit Boundary.

3 Select the slab edge that will receive the cantilever.

4 On the Options Bar, enter cantilever offset values for both of the concrete structural floor and metal
deck.

NOTE The cantilever is applied only to the specified selected sketch line, not the entire structural floor.

5 Repeat steps 1 through 4 for any slab edge that requires a cantilever.

6 Click Modify | Floors > Edit Boundary tab ➤ Mode panel ➤ Finish Edit Mode.

The following section view shows a concrete structural floor with a metal deck. The cantilevered concrete
edge extends beyond the supporting beam.

Span Direction
When you place a structural floor, a span direction component is placed in plan view along with the structural
floor. The span direction component is used to change the orientation of the steel deck in the plan. Deck
span direction is designated by the direction of the filled half-arrows.

Span Direction | 369

You can create new span direction types for decks and for one-way structural floors. For information about
creating family types, see The Families Guide on page 680.
Direction of span

Adding a Span Direction

1 Add a structural floor and specify boundary lines.

2 Click Modify | Create Floor Boundary tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ (Span Direction).
3 Select from one of the following tools on the Draw panel of the ribbon:
If you select... then...

sketch a line, or pick a model line, to define

(Line)
metal deck span direction that is independ-
ent of the sketched boundary lines. This
line has no other function than to define
the direction of the flutes in a metal deck
and therefore cannot be used to close a
loop.

370 | Chapter 13 Structural Modeling

If you select... then...

select the sketch boundary line to which

(Pick Lines)
you want all metal deck flutes to be paral-
lel.

4 Optionally, on the Properties palette, under Structure, select the Structural parameter to place
a Span Direction tag when Finish Edit Mode is selected.

5 On the ribbon, click (Finish Edit Mode).

To add a span direction to an existing structural floor

1 Click Annotate tab ➤ Symbol panel ➤ Span Direction.

2 (Optional) To place the tag in the center of the structural floor, select Auto place on the Options
Bar and click a structural floor to place the direction span.
3 If you did not select Auto place, select a structural floor.
4 Move the cursor to the desired location on the structural floor and click to place the direction
span.

Modifying Span Direction

To rotate a span direction symbol
1 Select the span direction component.
2 Click Modify | Span Direction Symbol tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Rotate.
3 Click a start angle for the rotation of the span direction.
4 Click an end angle to complete the angle of rotation.
The tag rotates to align with the span direction.

To align the span direction to a structural floor, beam, or grid line

1 Select the span direction component.
2 Click Modify | Span Direction Symbol tab ➤ Align Symbol panel ➤ Align Perpendicular.
3 Select a structural floor, beam, or grid line to which the span direction will be perpendicular.
The deck aligns to the selected element.

Span Direction | 371

Sloped Structural Floors
To create a sloped structural floor, use one of the following methods:

■ Draw a slope arrow while sketching or editing the floor boundary.

■ Specify a value for the Offset from Base property for parallel floor sketch lines.

■ Specify values for the Defines Slope and Slope properties for a single floor sketch line.

Structural floor sketch with slope arrow

Related topics

■ Sloped Surfaces Overview on page 579

■ Shape Editing for Structural Floors, Roofs, and Floors on page 386

Openings in Structural Floors

To allow for needs such as shafts or ramps between levels, you can cut openings in structural floors and
roofs.

372 | Chapter 13 Structural Modeling

Typical opening in a structural floor

1 Click Home tab ➤ Opening panel ➤ By Face.

2 Select a structural floor.
3 Using the sketch tools on the Modify | Create Opening Boundary tab ➤ Draw panel, sketch the
structural floor opening.
4 When finished, click Modify | Create Opening Boundary tab ➤ Mode panel ➤ Finish Edit Mode.

Drop Panels
You can add drop panels to reinforce a structural floor at column locations. This is achieved by sketching a
second smaller structural floor.
1 Open a plan view with a structural floor over a column.

Drop Panels | 373

2 Click Home tab ➤ Structure panel ➤ Floor drop-down ➤ Structural Floor.
3 Click Modify | Create Floor Boundary tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ Boundary Line, and use the sketching
tools to complete a sketch of the drop panel (see Sketching on page 1405). The sketch must form
a closed loop or boundary condition.

4 When finished, click Modify | Create Floor Boundary tab ➤ Mode panel ➤ Finish Edit Mode.
5 View the drop panel in an elevation or cross section view.
6 Select the new drop panel.
7 Right-click the new drop panel and select Properties.
8 On the Properties palette, adjust the Constraint parameters of the drop panel so that it is at the
correct elevation in your model.

374 | Chapter 13 Structural Modeling

9 Click Apply.
10 Join the geometry of the elements if necessary. See Joining Geometry on page 1506.

Modifying Structural Floors

You can modify structural floors either by editing structural floor properties or by directly changing structural
floor geometry in the drawing area. To modify a structural floor before you add it, you must select the
structural floor type in the Type Selector. When you activate the Structural Floor tool to place structural
floors, you can select different types of structural floors in the Type Selector.

Modifying Structural Floors | 375

Other available modifications include:

■ Edit the element properties. See Structural Floor Properties on page 376.

■ Edit the sketch. See Sketching on page 1405.

■ Edit the shape and thickness. See Shape Editing for Structural Floors, Roofs, and Floors on page 386.

■ Apply rebar cover settings. See Rebar Cover on page 399.

■ Add reinforcement. See Rebar Shapes on page 402.

■ Adjust span direction. See Span Direction on page 369.

■ Add cantilevers. See Cantilevers on page 367.

■ Add slab edges. See Slab Edges on page 379.

■ Apply drop panels. See Drop Panels on page 373.

Structural Floor Properties

You specify structural floor properties on the Properties palette. You can open this dialog in several ways,
such as to right-click the structural floor and click Properties. Structural floor properties include the structural
floor thickness and elevation of the structural floor relative to the associated level.
The following sections detail parameter names, values, and descriptions for structural floors.

Modifying Structural Floor Properties

1 Select the structural floor.
2 On the Properties palette, edit structural floor instance parameters. (See Structural Floor Instance
Properties on page 377.)
3 Click Edit Type to edit structural floor type parameters. (See Structural Floor Type Properties on
page 376.)

NOTE Changes made to type parameters affect all structural floors of this type in the project. You
can click Duplicate to create a new structural floor type.

Structural Floor Type Properties

Name Description

Construction

Structure Creates the composition of a compound floor. See Compound Structure on page
573.

Default Thickness Indicates the thickness of a floor type, which is determined by the cumulative
thickness of its layers. See Shape Editing for Structural Floors, Roofs, and Floors on
page 386.

Function Indicates whether a floor is interior or exterior. Function is used in scheduling and
to create filters to simplify a model when exporting.

376 | Chapter 13 Structural Modeling

Name Description

Graphics

Coarse Scale Fill Pattern Specifies a fill pattern for a floor in a coarse-scale view. See View Properties on page
873.

Coarse Scale Fill Color Applies a color to the fill pattern for a floor in a coarse-scale view.

Identity Data

Keynote Add or edit the floor keynote. Click in the value box to open the Keynotes dialog.
See Keynotes on page 938.

Model The model type of the floor.

Manufacturer The manufacturer of the flooring material.

Type Comments Comments about the floor type. This information can be included in a schedule.

URL Link for a manufacturer web page.

Description Provides a description of the floor.

Assembly description Describes the assembly based on the assembly code selection. This is a read-only
value.

Assembly Code Uniformat assembly code selected from a hierarchical list.

Type Mark A value to designate the specific floor. This value must be unique for each element
in a project. Revit Structure warns you when the number value is already used but
allows you to continue using it. You can see the warning using the Review Warnings
tool. See Reviewing Warning Messages on page 1680.

Cost Cost of the flooring. This can be included in a schedule.

Structural Floor Instance Properties

Name Description

Constraints

Level The level to which the floor is constrained.

Structural Floor Properties | 377

Name Description

Height Offset from Level Specifies the elevation of the top of the floor relative to the Level parameter.

Room Bounding Indicates that the floor is a room-bounding element.

Related to Mass Indicates the element was created from a mass element. This is a read-only value.

Structural

Structural Indicates that the element has an analytical model.

Rebar Cover - Top Face The rebar cover distance from the floor top face. See Rebar Cover on page 399.

Rebar Cover - Bottom Face The rebar cover distance from the floor bottom face. See Rebar Cover on page
399.

Rebar Cover - Other Faces The rebar cover distance from the floor to adjacent element faces. See Rebar
Cover on page 399.

Estimated Reinforcement Volume Specifies the estimated reinforcement volume of the selected element. This is a
read-only parameter that only displays when rebar has been placed.

Structural Floor Shape Edit

Curved Edge Condition Specifies the structural floor surface to either Conform to curve or Project to
side. This parameter is only available to curved edge structural floors. See Using
the Curved Edge Condition Tool on page 390.

Dimensions

Slope Angle Changes the slope-defining lines to the specified value, without the need to edit
the sketch. The parameter initially displays a value if there is a slope-defining
line. If there is no slope-defining line, the parameter is blank and disabled.

Perimeter The perimeter of the floor. This is a read-only value.

Area The area of the floor. This is a read-only value.

Volume The volume of the floor. This is a read-only value.

Thickness The thickness of the floor. This is a read-only value, unless a shape edit has been
applied and its type contains a variable layer. When the value is writable it can
be used to set a uniform thickness of the floor. The entry can be blank if the
thickness varies. See Shape Editing for Structural Floors, Roofs, and Floors on
page 386.

Identity Data

Comments Specific comments related to the floor that are not already defined in the descrip-
tion or type comments.

Mark A user-specified label for the floor. Possible use: shop mark. This value must be
unique for each element in a project. Revit Structure warns you when the number
value is already used but allows you to continue using it. You can see the warning
using the Review Warnings tool. See Reviewing Warning Messages on page 1680.

378 | Chapter 13 Structural Modeling

Name Description

Design Option If design options have been created, this property indicates the design option
in which the element exists. For more information see Design Options on page
653.

Phasing

Phase Created The phase when the floor was created. See Project Phasing on page 877.

Phase Demolished The phase when the floor was demolished. See Project Phasing on page 877.

Structural Analysis

Structural Usage Specifies the structural usage of the floor.

Analytical Model

Vertical Projection The plane of the floor used for analysis and design. See Projection Plane Options
for each Structural Element Type on page 1301.

Slab Edges
You apply slab edges by selecting horizontal edges of structural floors. You can also select model lines.

1 Click Home tab ➤ Structure panel ➤ Floor drop-down ➤ Slab Edge.

You can also access this tool by clicking Home tab ➤ Foundation panel ➤ Slab drop-down ➤ Slab
Edge.

2 Select horizontal edges of structural floors to place a slab edge.

You can also click model lines. As you click edges, Revit Structure treats this as one continuous
slab edge. If the slab edge segments are created in the same placement session and meet at
corners, they miter.

3 Click Modify | Place Slab Edge tab ➤ Placement panel ➤ Restart Slab Edge.
Slab edge added to a structural floor

Tips
■ You can place slab edges in 2D views (such as plan or section views) or in 3D views. Watch the status
bar to look for valid references. For example, if you are placing a slab edge on a floor, the status bar might
display: Floors : Basic Floor : Reference.

■ When placing a slab edge in a section view, place the cursor near the corners of the structural floor to
highlight the reference.

After placing slab edges, you can modify them in several ways.

Slab Edges | 379

Resizing or Flipping Slab Edges
You can resize structural floors. When you select the slab edge, a drag control appears at either end of it.
Click and drag this control to extend or shorten the slab edge.
You can flip structural floors by using the flip controls that appear in a 3D view, or, if you are in a 2D view
(such as section), you can right-click on the structural floor and select Flip About Horizontal Axis or Flip
About Vertical Axis. See Controls and Shape Handles on page 1449.

Adding or Removing Segments of the Slab Edge

1 Select an existing slab edge, and click Modify | Slab Edges tab ➤ Profile panel ➤ Add/Remove
Segments.
2 Click the edge of a structural floor to add a slab edge. Click the edge again to remove a slab edge.

NOTE You may need to press Tab to highlight a reference edge in section.

Changing Horizontal and Vertical Offsets of Slab Edges

You can change the horizontal or vertical offset of a slab edge either through its properties or by graphically
moving the slab edge. See Slab Edge Properties on page 380.

Horizontal Move
To move a single slab edge segment, select the slab edge, and drag it horizontally.
To move a multi-segmented slab edge, select the shape handle of the slab edge. Place the cursor over the
slab edge, and press Tab to highlight the shape handle. Watch the status bar to be sure you are highlighting
the shape handle. Click to select the shape handle. Move the cursor left or right to change the horizontal
offset. This affects the horizontal offset of all segments of the slab edge, so the segments are symmetrical.
Moving slab edge on the left also moves slab edge on the right

Vertical Move
Select the slab edge, and drag it up or down. If the slab edge is multi-segmented, all segments move up or
down the same distance.
Slab edge moving vertically in section

Slab Edge Properties

The following table shows parameter names, values, and descriptions for slab edges. You can modify values.

380 | Chapter 13 Structural Modeling

Slab Edge Type Properties
Name Description

Construction

Profile The profile shape for the particular slab edge. Select from a list of predefined profiles,
or create your own profile using the profile-hosted.rft template. For detailed information
about profile families, see The Families Guide on page 680.

Materials and Finishes

Material Specifies the appearance of the slab edge in various views. See Materials on page 1573.

Identity Data

Keynote Add or edit the slab edge keynote. Click in the value box to open the Keynotes dialog.
See Keynotes on page 938.

Model The manufacturer internal number.

Manufacturer The slab edge manufacturer.

Type Comments A field for placing general comments about the slab edge type. This information can
be included in a schedule.

URL A link to a web page that may contain type-specific information.

Description You may provide a description of the slab edge here.

Assembly description Describes the assembly based on the assembly code selection. This is a read-only value.

Assembly Code The Uniformat assembly code selected from a hierarchical list.

Type Mark A value to designate the specific slab edge. This value must be unique for each element
in a project. Revit Structure warns you when the number value is already used but allows
you to continue using it. You can see the warning using the Review Warnings tool.
See Reviewing Warning Messages on page 1680.

Cost The pricing of the slab edge.

Slab Edge Instance Properties

Name Description

Constraints

Vertical profile offset Moves the slab edge above or below the edge on which you created it.

Horizontal profile offset Moves the slab edge forward or backward from the edge on which you created it.

Dimensions

Length The actual length of the slab edge.

Volume (Slab edges only) The actual volume of the slab edge.

Slab Edges | 381

Name Description

Identity Data

Comments A field for placing general comments about the slab edge.

Mark A label created for the slab edge. Possible use: shop mark. This value must be unique
for each element in a project. Revit Structure warns you when the number value is
already used but allows you to continue using it. You can see the warning using the
Review Warnings tool. See Reviewing Warning Messages on page 1680.

Phasing

Phase Created Indicates in which phase the slab edge component was created. See Project Phasing
on page 877.

Phase Demolished Indicates in which phase the slab edge component was demolished. See Project
Phasing on page 877.

Profile

Angle Rotates the slab edge to the desired angle.

Foundation Slabs
The Foundation Slab type has 3 more foundation-specific values than a regular structural floor has. These
additional values, which are instance parameters displayed in the Properties palette, are: Width, Length,
and Elevation at Bottom. Using these values, an analysis tool can distinguish between a standard structural
floor and a foundation slab.
Foundation slabs may be used to model structural floors on a grade, which do not require support from
other structural elements. Foundation slabs may also be used to model complex foundation shapes that
cannot be created using Isolated or Wall Foundation tools.

Adding Foundation Slabs

1 Click Home tab ➤ Foundation panel ➤ Slab drop-down ➤ Foundation Slab.
2 On the Properties palette, click Edit Type.
3 On the Type Properties dialog, specify the structural floor type, and click OK.

4 Click Modify | Create Floor Boundary tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ Boundary Line and then click
(Pick Walls) to select the walls in your model.
5 On the Options Bar, click Extend into wall if you want the offset to be measured from the wall's
core.
6 On the Options Bar, specify an offset for slab edges in the Offset text box.

NOTE Instead of picking walls you can sketch a foundation slab. Use the sketch tools on the Modify
| Create Floor Boundary tab ➤ Draw panel to form the boundary of the foundation slab. The sketch
must form a closed loop or boundary condition. See Sketching on page 1405.

7 Click Modify | Create Floor Boundary tab ➤ Mode panel ➤ Finish Edit Mode.
8 Click the foundation, and select the desired Foundation family type on the Family drop-down
list.

382 | Chapter 13 Structural Modeling

NOTE Foundation slabs are added below the level in which they are drawn. Therefore, if you add a
foundation slab in Level 1, it is added below Level 1 and will not be visible in the Level 1 plan view.
To see the foundation slab in a plan view, create a new level below Level 1, for example, Foundation
Level. When you create a new level below Level 1, you will also be able to see the foundation slab as
an underlay (displayed in halftone) in Level 1.

Foundation slab below foundation level

Related topics

■ Openings in Structural Floors on page 372

■ Modifying Structural Floors on page 375

■ Structural Floors on page 366

Modifying Foundation Slab Properties

1 Select the foundation slab.
2 On the Properties palette, edit foundation slab instance parameters. (See Foundation Slab Instance
Properties on page 384.)
3 Click Edit Type to edit foundation slab type parameters. (See Foundation Slab Type Properties
on page 384.)

NOTE Changes made to type parameters affect all foundation slabs of this type in the project. You
can click Duplicate to create a new foundation slab type.

Foundation Slab Properties

You can specify the Structural Usage parameter of a Foundation slab: either Foundation or Slab on Grade.
If set to Foundation, the slab will provide support for other elements connected to it. If set to Slab on Grade,
the slab will only support itself. The Foundation Slab type also has an additional, read-only parameter,
Elevation at Bottom. The Elevation at Bottom parameter is used for tagging the Bottom of the Foundation
elevation. You can modify parameter names, values, and descriptions for Foundation Slabs.

Modifying Foundation Slab Properties | 383

Foundation Slab Type Properties
Name Description

Construction

Structure Select the Edit button to add, change, or delete slab layers.

Thickness Slab thickness. This is a read-only parameter.

Graphics

Coarse Scale Fill Pattern Specifies a fill pattern for a slab in coarse-scale view. Click in the value box to
open the Fill Patterns dialog. See View Properties on page 873.

Coarse Scale Fill Color Applies a color to the fill pattern for a slab in a coarse-scale view.

Identity Data

Keynote Add or edit the slab keynote. Click in the value box to open the Keynotes dialog.
See Keynotes on page 938.

Model The manufacturer internal number.

Manufacturer The slab manufacturer.

Type Comments A field for placing general comments about the slab type. This information can
be included in a schedule.

URL A link to a web page that may contain type specific information.

Description Enter or edit the description of the slab.

Assembly Description Describes the assembly based on the assembly code selection. This is a read-only
parameter.

Assembly Code A Uniformat assembly code selected from a hierarchical list.

Type Mark A value that designates the specific slab. This value must be unique for each
element in a project. Revit Structure warns you when the number value is already
used but allows you to continue using it. You can see the warning using the
Review Warnings tool. See Reviewing Warning Messages on page 1680.

Cost The pricing of the slab.

Foundation Slab Instance Properties

Name Description

Constraints

Level Specifies the level that the slab is constrained to.

Height Offset From Level Specifies the elevation of the top of the slab relative to the constrained level of
the slab.

384 | Chapter 13 Structural Modeling

Name Description

Structural

Structural If checked, Slab has an Analytical Model and is exported to analysis packages.

Rebar Cover - Top Face The rebar cover distance from the foundation slab top face. See Rebar Cover on
page 399.

Rebar Cover - Bottom Face The rebar cover distance from the foundation slab bottom face. See Rebar Cover
on page 399.

Rebar Cover - Other Faces The rebar cover distance from the foundation slab to adjacent element faces.
See Rebar Cover on page 399.

Estimated Reinforcement Volume Specifies the estimated reinforcement volume of the selected element. This is a
read-only parameter that only displays when rebar has been placed.

Dimensions

Slope Specifies the slope of the slab from the horizontal plane.

Perimeter Indicates the slab perimeter. This is a read-only parameter.

Area Indicates the area of the slab. This is a read-only parameter.

Volume Indicates the volume of the slab. This is a read-only parameter.

Width Indicates the width of the slab, if rectangular. This is a read-only parameter.

Length Indicates the length of the slab, if rectangular. This is a read-only parameter.

The Elevation at Bottom measurement is taken from this setting.

This is a read-only parameter.

Identity Data

Comments A field for placing general comments about the slab.

Mark A label created for the slab. Possible use: shop mark. This value must be unique
for each element in a project. Revit Structure warns you when the number value
is already used but allows you to continue using it. You can see the warning
using the Review Warnings tool. See Reviewing Warning Messages on page 1680.

Phasing

Phase Created Indicates in which phase the slab component was created. See Project Phasing
on page 877.

Foundation Slab Properties | 385

Name Description

Phase Demolished Indicates in which phase the slab component was demolished. See Project
Phasing on page 877.

Structural Analysis

Structural Usage If set to Foundation, the slab will provide support for other elements connected
to it. If set to Slab on Grade, the slab will only support itself.
See Verifying the Analytical Model on page 1322.

Analytical Model

Analytical Projection Plane The plane of the slab used for analysis and design.
See Projection Plane Options for each Structural Element Type on page 1301.

Shape Editing for Structural Floors, Roofs, and Floors

You can use shape editing tools to manipulate the surface of either an existing horizontal structural floor,
roof, or floor, by defining high and low points for drainage. By specifying the elevation of these points, you
split the surface into sub-regions that can slope independently.
Shape edit examples

386 | Chapter 13 Structural Modeling

Use shape editing tools to slope a constant thickness structural floor or the top surface of a structural floor
with a variable thickness layer, to model the following:

■ A constant thickness structural floor or roof supported by sloped non-planar framing.

■ A variable thickness material used to slope the surface of a horizontal plane (for example, tapered
insulation).

NOTE Structural floors and roofs that have been shape edited will not report a true thickness. The shape editing
tools were designed to allow for moderate slopes and in such cases, variances in true thickness are trivial. However,
more significant slopes will increase this variance. Revit Structure will issue a warning when a slope significantly
deviates from the expected thickness.

In order to enable shape editing tools, the following conditions must be met:

■ Structural floors must be flat and on a horizontal plane.

■ A roof cannot attach to another roof, and the roof cannot be a curtain roof. If either of these conditions
is not met, you cannot use the slab shape edit buttons.

NOTE If these conditions are violated later, by element editing, the slab shape edit will cause an error with a
callback, allowing the user to reset the slab shape edit.

You can use the following shape edit tools on the Modify Floors tab ➤ Shape Editing panel

■ Sub Elements

■ Add Point

■ Add Split Line

■ Pick Supports

■ Reset Shape

NOTE Editing the shape of a structural floor, roof, or floor with these tools does not affect the shape of its analytical
model. A single analytical model face, based on the original top face, remains unchanged.

Important Considerations
Automatic Split Lines. In order to maintain the accuracy of the structural floor/roof geometry, split lines are
sometimes created automatically. Automatically created split lines will be deleted when the condition that
caused them to be created is no longer valid. For example, when 4 non-planar vertices become planar, or
when you manually create a split line.
Warped Structural Floor/Roofs. A surface will warp when bounded by 4 non-planar boundary edges or
user-created split lines. To avoid warping, add a split line between opposite vertices.

Using the Modify Sub Elements Tool

You can use the Modify Sub Elements tool to manipulate one or more of the points or edges on a selected
structural floor, roof, or floor.

1 Select the structural floor, roof, or floor you want to modify.

2 Click Modify | Floors tab ➤ Shape Editing panel ➤ Modify Sub Elements.

Using the Modify Sub Elements Tool | 387

NOTE When you select the Modify Sub Elements tool, the Options Bar will display an Elevation edit box in
which you can enter a common elevation value for all the selected sub elements. This value is the vertical
offset between the vertices and the original top face of the structural floor.

3 Drag a point or edge to modify the location or elevation.

NOTE If you place the cursor over the structural floor, you can press Tab to pick specific sub elements.
Standard selection methods also apply. See Selecting Multiple Elements on page 1440.

■ Dragging a blue arrow moves the point vertically.

■ Dragging a red square (shape handle) moves the point horizontally.

4 Click the text control to enter a precise height value for the selected point or edge.
The value of the height represents the offset from the original top face of the structural floor.

NOTE For an edge this means that the center is moved to the specified height, but the relative heights of
the 2 ends are maintained.

Using the Add Point Tool

You can use the Add Point tool to add singular points to the element geometry. The points are used by the
shape modification tools to change the element geometry.

1 Select the structural floor, roof, or floor you want to modify.

2 Click Modify | Floors tab ➤ Shape Editing panel ➤ Add Point.

NOTE The Elevation edit box displays on the Options Bar with a Relative check box next to it. If you select
Relative, new points will be added at the specified value, relative to the surface on which they are added. So,
with the default value of 0 the points will lie in the surface that they were created on. If you clear the check
box, the value in the edit box represents the project elevation, and points will be added at this elevation.

3 Click on the face or edges of the structural floor, roof, or floor to add points that define a slope.

388 | Chapter 13 Structural Modeling

Using the Add Split Line Tool
You can use the Add Split Line tool to add linear edges and to split the existing face of a structural floor into
smaller sub-regions.

1 Select the structural floor you want to modify.

2 Click Modify | Floors tab ➤ Shape Editing panel ➤ Add Split Line.

3 Select a vertex, edge, face or point anywhere on the structural floor to start the split line.

NOTE Start points and endpoints can be added anywhere on the face of the structural floor. If your cursor
is over a vertex or edge, the editor will snap to 3D vertices and edges and present standard snap controls
with temporary dimensions along the edges. If no vertex or edge is snapped to, then on selection, the line
end will be projected to the closest point on the surface. No temporary dimensions will be created on the
face.

Using the Add Split Line Tool | 389

4 Select another vertex, edge, face or point anywhere on the structural floor to end the split line.
A new edge will be added to the face of the structural floor.

Using the Pick Supports Tool

You can use the Pick Supports tool to pick beams to define split lines and create constant bearing lines for
the structural floor.

1 Select the structural floor, roof, or floor you want to modify.

2 Click Modify | Floors tab ➤ Shape Editing panel ➤ Pick Supports.

3 Select an existing beam.

A new split edge is created using the endpoint elevations from the picked reference. The elevations are moved
up from the bottom face to the top face of the structural floor or roof using the structural floor or roof
thickness.

Using the Curved Edge Condition Tool

Structural floors drawn with arc segments can be altered using structural floor shape editing tools. The
Curved Edge Condition tool is an additional tool specific to curved edges. It sets them to project a flat surface
to the edge or a curved surface that conforms to the arc edge of the structural floor.

1 Right-click the shape edited curved edge structural floor you want to modify and select Properties.

390 | Chapter 13 Structural Modeling

2 On the Properties palette, click the Curved Edge Condition button located under Structural Floor Shape
Edit. This opens the Curved Edge Condition Dialog.

3 Select either Conform to curve for a scalloped surface, or Project to side for a flat surface.

4 Click OK to apply the condition.

5 Click Apply.

Using the Reset Shape Tool

To remove structural floor shape modifications and reset the element geometry to its original state, click
Click Modify | Floors tab ➤ Shape Editing panel ➤ Reset Shape.

Deleting Shape Modifiers

To delete shape edit elements:

1 Select the modified structural floor.

2 Click Modify | Floors tab ➤ Shape Editing panel ➤ Modify Sub Elements.

3 Click on the shape edit element to select it.

4 Either press Delete or right-click the element and select Delete.

Using the Reset Shape Tool | 391

The shape edit element is removed and the structural floor adjusts its geometry accordingly.

Variable Layer Thickness for Roofs and Structural Floors

The variable layer thickness parameter of roofs and structural floors affects the shape editing tools in the
following ways:

■ When there is no variable thickness layer, the whole roof or structural floor slopes and maintains constant
thickness between parallel top and bottom faces.

■ When there is a variable thickness layer, the top face of the roof or structural floor slopes, and the bottom
stays in a horizontal plane, creating a variable thickness structural floor.

NOTE There is a Thickness property for structural floors. If the structural floor has a structural floor shape edit,
and if the structural floor type contains a variable layer, then this parameter can be used to set the structural
floor to a uniform thickness by entering a desired value.

To modify the variable thickness layer of a structural floor or roof

1 Select the structural floor or roof.

2 On the Properties palette, click Edit Type.

392 | Chapter 13 Structural Modeling

3 In the value box of the Structure property, click Edit.

4 In the Edit Assembly dialog, specify the material for layers and the thickness of those layers. The variable
thickness parameter column will contain empty check boxes next to layers where variable thickness
can be enabled. For more information about the Edit Assembly dialog, see Compound Structure on
page 573.

5 Next to the desired layer of the roof or structural floor in the assembly, select the variable check box

6 Click OK until all of the dialogs are closed.

7 Click Modify | Floors tab ➤ Shape Editing panel ➤ Modify Sub Elements and make the desired changes
to your roof or structural floor. For more information, see Using the Modify Sub Elements Tool on page
387.

Concrete Modeling Concepts

This section covers Revit Structure concrete modeling concepts that do not pertain solely to specific elements
or components.
See also Reinforcement on page 397.

Concrete Geometry Joins

Concrete elements will automatically join each other without your intervention. They are represented in
the project as a single mass in all views as anticipated. While joined, you can edit and move the individual
elements within their normal ranges and limits.

NOTE If the Unjoin Geometry tool is used (see Unjoining Geometry on page 1508), automatic joining is disabled
for the elements. Use the Join Geometry tool (see Joining Geometry on page 1506) to re-enable automatic concrete
geometry joins.

Examples of joined concrete elements

3D View of 2 beams and a column join Cross section of a column and beam join

Cross section of a structural floor and slab edge join

Concrete Modeling Concepts | 393

Examples of joined concrete elements

Concrete beams must have either of the following properties to participate in these joins, otherwise they
exhibit legacy behaviors and must be manually joined.

■ Rectangular sections with a cross sectional rotations of 0, 90, 180, and 270 degrees.

■ Trapezoidal, t-shaped, and l-Shaped sections with cross sectional rotations of 0 degrees.

Other join related restrictions include the following.

■ Shape handles are not available for new participating elements.

■ Type parameter changes will not automatically update concrete join geometry.

■ Concrete elements that are reinforced will also share their cover references in a join. See Rebar Cover on
page 399.

Legacy Drawing Behaviors

In order to maintain the display of existing drawings when a project is upgraded, concrete elements from
legacy (upgraded) projects (created in versions earlier than Revit Structure 2009) will behave differently than
newly created objects.

■ Valid concrete elements that are not joined will not automatically join with each other. You can join
them with the Join Geometry tool, however. See Joining Geometry on page 1506.

■ Newly created elements will automatically join with upgraded legacy elements.

■ Newly created concrete elements will automatically join with one another as expected.

Valid Concrete Element Join Combinations

Concrete element combinations that may automatically join with one another include:

■ beam to beam

■ beam to column

■ isolated foundation to isolated foundation

■ isolated foundation to wall foundation

■ structural floor to beam

394 | Chapter 13 Structural Modeling

■ structural floor to column

■ structural floor to slab edge

■ wall to beam

■ wall to column

Dominant Elements in a Concrete Join

One element retains its geometry while the geometry of the elements sharing the join is cut to create the
single mass. Structural floors and walls possess dominant geometry characteristics and always maintain their
geometry when sharing a join with other elements. Because of this, they will not automatically join with
one another. Other concrete elements take precedence as follows.

Element Element Dominant Element

Beam Beam In order of creation

Beam Column Column

Isolated Foundation Isolated Foundation In order of creation

Isolated Foundation Wall Foundation Isolated Foundation

These joining rules cannot be changed and it is not possible to disable the automatic joining of geometry.
However, the joins can be manually un-joined.

NOTE Joined geometry may impact performance.

Display of Hidden Lines of Structural Concrete Components

Revit Structure controls the appearance of structural concrete components that are in a hidden state in a
view. The appearance of invisible lines of walls, floors, framing, columns, and foundation elements are
controlled by the following view parameters:

■ Discipline must be set to Structural to represent invisible lines as hidden.

■ Visual style must be set to either Hidden or to Shaded with Edges to represent invisible lines as hidden.

NOTE To set the desired hidden line pattern, click Manage tab ➤ Settings panel ➤ Additional Settings
drop-down ➤ Line Patterns. See Line Patterns on page 1604.

Display of Hidden Lines of Structural Concrete Components | 395

Structural floor and beams framed into
concrete walls

Note that the on-screen display of hidden lines may not precisely match vector output. Some edges of wall
ends will not show as hidden and all edges of a slab edge will show as hidden in a plan view if obstructed
by the slab.

396 | Chapter 13 Structural Modeling

Reinforcement
14
Revit Structure provides tools for modeling reinforcement in concrete columns, beams, walls, foundations, and structural
floors.
Reinforcing tools are available on the Reinforcement panel on either the Home tab or the appropriate Modify tab when
a concrete host is selected. See Reinforcement Tools on page 397.

Reinforcement Tools
Reinforcement tools are available on the active Modify tab when you select an appropriate host, such as a
concrete beam, column, structural floor, or foundation. Place reinforcement into concrete host elements
using the following tools.

Place Rebar Parallel to Work Plane

To place rebar parallel to the current work plane, select Reinforcement panel ➤ Rebar drop-down ➤
Place Rebar Parallel to Work Plane. The placed element is a rebar instance with the properties of the rebar
type and rebar shape that you select. To place, use the Rebar Shape Browser (see Rebar Shapes on page 402)
or sketching tools (see Sketch Placement of Rebar on page 417).

397
Place Rebar Perpendicular to Work Plane
To place rebar perpendicular to the current work plane, select Reinforcement panel ➤ Rebar drop-down ➤
Place Rebar Perpendicular to Work Plane. The placed element is a rebar instance with the properties of
the rebar type and rebar shape that you select. To place, use the Rebar Shape Browser (see Rebar Shapes on
page 402) or sketching tools (see Sketch Placement of Rebar on page 417).

Cover

Click Reinforcement panel ➤ Cover to edit the rebar cover settings of an entire rebar host or an individual
face. The cover settings define the offset distance for bars from the faces of the rebar host.

■ Click Pick Elements on the Options Bar to configure rebar cover settings for an entire element.

■ Click Pick Faces on the Options Bar to configure rebar cover settings for specific faces of an element.

■ Define a cover setting type from the Cover Setting drop-down on the Options Bar.

Area

Click Reinforcement panel ➤ Area to sketch lines indicating the boundary of an area to which you want
to add rebar. The finished sketch is an area reinforcement instance. For more information, see Area
Reinforcement on page 433.

Path

Click Reinforcement panel ➤ Path to sketch lines to indicate the path of the evenly placed reinforcing
bars that are created perpendicular to the sketch. The finished sketch is a path reinforcement instance. For
more information, see Path Reinforcement on page 439.

Valid Rebar Hosts

A valid rebar host consists of any beam, brace, column, or isolated foundation whose family Structural
Material Type parameter is either Concrete or Precast Concrete. Walls, structural floors, and slab edges can
also be valid hosts as long as they contain a concrete layer and have their Structural Usage instance property
set to something other than non-structural. See also Modifying Type Properties on page 38 and Changing
Material Physical Data on page 1596.
Valid hosts include the following families:

■ Structural Framing

■ Structural Columns

■ Structural Foundations

■ Walls

■ Structural Floors

■ Foundation Slabs

■ Wall Foundations

■ Slab Edges

398 | Chapter 14 Reinforcement

Rebar Cover
In Revit Structure, rebar cover is defined by a series of instance parameters that control the internal offset
of the rebar from the faces of the rebar host. When a rebar shape is placed within a host, it will expand to
the cover references. Rebar touching the cover reference is attached to that cover reference. The rebar cover
parameters only affect the rebar that touches its reference. Changing the cover settings will not offset other
rebar that you have placed within the host.

Rebar Cover References

Rebar Cover References act as a boundary for reinforcement within its host. You can define the amount of
offset in the Rebar Cover settings. Rebar elements automatically find and attach to the references.
Reinforcement snaps to these references during placement.

To change the appearance of host cover

1 Click View tab ➤ Graphics panel ➤ Visibility/Graphics.

2 Click Object Styles.

3 Click the Annotation Objects tab.

4 Modify the Concrete Cover References category.

Default host cover style Example modified host cover style

Editing Rebar Cover

While working with rebar and its host, you can edit the rebar cover of either the entire element or a particular
face. While using the rebar cover tools, determine the existing rebar cover settings by hovering your mouse
over either an individual face or the entire element.

Rebar Cover | 399

Set rebar cover for an entire element

1 Click Home tab ➤ Reinforcement panel ➤ Cover.

2 On the Options Bar, click Pick Elements.
3 Select the element you want to modify.
4 On the Options Bar, select a cover setting from the Cover Setting drop-down.
The new cover setting applies over the entire selected element.

Set rebar cover by face

1 Click Home tab ➤ Reinforcement panel ➤ Cover.

2 On the Options Bar, click Pick Faces.
3 Select a face on the concrete element you want to modify.
4 On the Options Bar, choose a cover setting from the Cover Setting drop-down menu.
The new cover setting applied itself over the selected element face.

NOTE If none of the cover settings in the drop-down list apply to your particular situation, click to add new
cover settings. See Modifying Rebar Cover Settings on page 400.

Modifying Rebar Cover Settings

In the Rebar Cover Settings dialog, you add, remove, or modify rebar cover settings. You may also create
and save multiple settings for future application.

To access the dialog box select Home tab ➤ Reinforcement panel drop-down ➤ Rebar Cover Settings or
click on the Options Bar.

Modify rebar cover settings

1 Select the cover type in the dialog.
2 Adjust the description of the cover type.
3 In the Setting column, adjust the offset distance for the cover type.

400 | Chapter 14 Reinforcement

Add rebar cover settings
1 Click Add or select an existing setting and click Duplicate.
2 In the Description column, enter the description of the cover type.
3 In the Setting column, enter the desired offset distance for the new cover type.
4 Click OK to finish adding cover settings, or click Duplicate to continue adding settings.

Delete rebar cover settings

1 Select a Cover Type to delete.
2 Click Delete.
3 Click OK in the warning dialog to proceed, or click Cancel to stop the delete operation.

Rebar Cover Element Properties

The following table describes cover related parameters in the Structural section of concrete element Properties
palettes.

Name Description

Rebar Cover - Top Face The cover settings for the highest face of an element instance.
See the Modifying Rebar Cover Settings on page 400 for the
definitions of the cover settings in this menu.

Rebar Cover - Bottom Face The cover settings for the lowest face of an element instance.
See the Modifying Rebar Cover Settings on page 400 for the
definitions of the cover settings in this menu.

Rebar Cover - Interior Face Walls only parameter. The cover settings for the interior face
of a concrete wall. See the Modifying Rebar Cover Settings
on page 400 for the definitions of the cover settings in this
menu.

Rebar Cover - Exterior Face Walls only parameter. The cover settings for the exterior face
of a concrete wall. See the Modifying Rebar Cover Settings
on page 400 for the definitions of the cover settings in this
menu.

Rebar Cover - Other Faces The default cover settings for element instances that do not
qualify as highest, lowest, interior, or exterior. This cover
setting applies to elements created with openings. See the
Modifying Rebar Cover Settings on page 400 for the definitions
of the cover settings in this menu.

Area Reinforcement Only

Additional Top/Exterior Offset Specifies an additional offset from the top/exterior rebar
cover. This allows placing multiple rebar elements together
in different area reinforcement layers.

Additional Bottom/Interior Offset Specifies an additional offset from the bottom/interior rebar
cover. This allows placing multiple rebar elements together
in different area reinforcement layers.

Rebar Cover Element Properties | 401

Name Description

Path Reinforcement Only

Additional Offset Specifies an additional offset from the rebar cover. This allows
placing multiple rebar elements together in different path
reinforcement layers.

Rebar Shapes
In Revit Structure, rebar shapes are 2D families that define the layout of the rebar type instance in the project.
When using a rebar tool the Rebar Shape Browser is active and displays the available shapes in the library.
Use the Rebar Shape Editor to modify existing shapes and create custom rebar instances.
You select Rebar Shapes from the Rebar Shape browser or the Rebar Shape type drop-down on the Options
Bar.

NOTE If you are working with a projects created in a version earlier than Revit Structure 2009, you will need to
load rebar shape families prior to applying reinforcement.

402 | Chapter 14 Reinforcement

Select the host in an elevation or cross section view.

Placing Rebar Shapes in a Host

The following steps provide the general workflow for adding rebar shapes to a concrete element.
1 In an elevation or cross section view, select the host to receive reinforcement.

2 Click Modify <Element> tab ➤ Reinforcement panel ➤ Rebar drop-down ➤ Place Rebar
Perpendicular to Work Plane or Place Rebar Parallel to Work Plane.
3 In the Type Selector on page 35 at the top of the Properties palette, select the desired rebar type.
4 In either the Type Rebar Shape type drop-down on the Options Bar or the Rebar Shape Browser,
select the desired rebar shape.
5 Place the rebar in the host.

Add Rebar to a Column

Place rebar perpendicular to the work plane
1 Select the column in a section view.

2 Click Modify Structural Columns tab ➤ Reinforcement panel ➤ Rebar drop-down ➤ Place
Rebar Perpendicular to Work Plane.
3 In the Type Selector on page 35 at the top of the Properties palette, select the desired rebar type.
4 In either the Type Rebar Shape type drop-down on the Options Bar or the Rebar Shape Browser,
select the desired rebar shape.
5 Hover over the rebar host and notice that as you move the cursor, the representation of the
rebar moves with it.
The rebar shape moves and changes orientation to accurately add rebar to the host. Stirrup
shapes freely rotate and move within the cover reference. Standard shapes flip their orientation.

6 Click the host to add the rebar shape in its current orientation.

Placing Rebar Shapes in a Host | 403

Rebar placed in column section view

Rebar lengths default to the length of the column or to other host elements within the constraints
of the cover reference. To edit lengths, change to either a plan or an elevation view, select the
rebar instance and revise the endpoints as needed. See Rebar Cover on page 399.

NOTE You can apply various predefined hooks to the ends of your rebar shape. For information on
how to change rebar hook types, see Rebar Hooks on page 426.

Place rebar parallel to the work plane

1 Select the column in a section view.

2 Click Modify Structural Columns tab ➤ Reinforcement panel ➤ Rebar ➤ Place Rebar Parallel
to Work Plane.
3 In the Type Selector on page 35 at the top of the Properties palette, select the desired rebar type.
4 In either the Type Rebar Shape type drop-down on the Options Bar or the Rebar Shape Browser,
select the desired rebar shape.
5 Hover over the rebar host and notice that as you move the cursor, the representation of the
rebar moves with it.
The rebar shape moves and changes orientation to accurately add rebar to the host. Stirrup
shapes freely rotate and move within the cover reference. Standard shapes flip their orientation.

6 Click the host to add the rebar shape in its current orientation.

404 | Chapter 14 Reinforcement

NOTE You can apply various predefined hooks to the ends of your rebar shape. See Rebar Hooks on
page 426.

Adding Rebar to a Beam

Place rebar perpendicular to the work plane
1 Select the beam in a section view.

2 Click Modify Structural Framing tab ➤ Reinforcement panel ➤ Place Rebar Perpendicular
to Work Plane.
3 In the Type Selector on page 35 at the top of the Properties palette, select the desired rebar type.
4 In either the Type Rebar Shape type drop-down on the Options Bar or the Rebar Shape Browser,
select the desired rebar shape.
5 Hover over the rebar host and notice that as you move the cursor, the representation of the
rebar moves with it.
The rebar shape moves and changes orientation to accurately add rebar to the host. Stirrup
shapes freely rotate and move within the cover reference. Standard shapes flip their orientation.

6 Click the host to add the rebar shape in its current orientation.
Rebar lengths default to the length of the beam or to other host elements within the constraints
of the cover reference. To edit lengths, change to either a plan or an elevation view, select the
rebar instance and revise the endpoints as needed. See Rebar Cover on page 399.

Placing Rebar Shapes in a Host | 405

Rebar placed perpendicular in a beam section view

NOTE You can apply various predefined hooks to the ends of your rebar shape. See Rebar Hooks on
page 426.

Place rebar parallel to the work plane

1 Select the beam in a section view.

2 Click Modify Structural Framing tab ➤ Reinforcement panel ➤ Place Rebar Parallel to Work
Plane.
3 In the Type Selector on page 35 at the top of the Properties palette, select the desired rebar type.
4 In either the Type Rebar Shape type drop-down on the Options Bar or the Rebar Shape Browser,
select the desired rebar shape.
5 Hover over the rebar host and notice that as you move the cursor, the representation of the
rebar moves with it.
The rebar shape moves and changes orientation to accurately add rebar to the host. Stirrup
shapes freely rotate and move within the cover reference. Standard shapes flip their orientation.

6 Click the host to add the rebar shape in its current orientation.

406 | Chapter 14 Reinforcement

Rebar placed parallel in a beam section view

NOTE You can apply various predefined hooks to the ends of your rebar shape. See Rebar Hooks on
page 426.

Plane Placement of Rebar in Walls and Structural Floors

Concrete walls and structural floors do not require section views to reinforce in Revit Structure. You can
place rebar in these elements using the Placement Plane drop-down on the Options Bar and an appropriate
elevation or structural plan view.

Place rebar in a wall using an elevation view

1 Open an appropriate elevation view that is parallel to the wall.

2 Click Home tab ➤ Reinforcement panel ➤ Rebar drop-down ➤ Place Rebar Parallel to Work
Plane.
3 From the Placement Plane drop-down on the Options Bar, select either of the following:
■ Far Cover Reference for the wall face furthest from your view.

■ Near Cover Reference for the wall face nearest to your view.

4 Click along the wall face to place the rebar.

Place rebar in a structural floor using a structural plan view

1 Open an appropriate structural plan view that is parallel to the structural floor.

■ Near Cover Reference for the structural floor face nearest to your view.

Placing Rebar Shapes in a Host | 407

4 Click along the structural floor face to place the rebar.
In the following image, three rebar instances are placed. They were placed (from top to bottom) in a
Near/Far/Near plane placement pattern.

South Elevation View

West Elevation View

In the following image, three rebar instances are placed. They were placed (from top to bottom) in a
Far/Near/Far plane placement pattern.

Structural Plan View

408 | Chapter 14 Reinforcement

West Elevation View

Rehosting Rebar Shapes

1 Select the rebar to be rehosted.

2 Click Modify Structural Rebar tab ➤ Rebar panel ➤ Pick New Host.
3 Select a new host to relocate the rebar.
See Valid Rebar Hosts on page 398.

Placing Rebar Shapes in a Host | 409

Changing the Orientation of Rebar Shapes
Press the SPACEBAR during placement to proceed through the orientation of the rebar shape within the
bounding box. Orientation can be shifted after placement by selecting the rebar and using the SPACEBAR
similarly.

Full Symmetry

Vertical or Horizontal Symmetry

Diagonal Symmetry

410 | Chapter 14 Reinforcement

No Symmetry

Auto-Expand Behavior of Rebar Shapes

The auto-expand behavior of rebar shapes causes the rebar to fill the space provided within a concrete
element. For example, a linear shape, such as a single segment bar with or without hooks, expands in both
directions until it finds the cover references. Also, a multi-segment shape expands in each cardinal direction
until it finds references.
See Rebar Cover References on page 399.
The following chart shows how the auto-expansion works with different rebar shapes and mouse positions.
The green dashed line represents the rebar cover and general shape of the host. The black arrows depict the
range of movement of the mouse. The black framed rectangles with gray arrows represent the expanding
bounding box into which the rebar shape adjusts and resizes.

Cross section shape of host Mouse cursor position Expanding bounding box

Auto-Expand Behavior of Rebar Shapes | 411

Cross section shape of host Mouse cursor position Expanding bounding box

412 | Chapter 14 Reinforcement

Cross section shape of host Mouse cursor position Expanding bounding box

Modifying Rebar Shape

You adjust rebar shapes with rebar shape controls. To use these controls, select the rebar instance.

Modifying Rebar Shape | 413

The triangle controls adjust the segment of the shape only in the direction they are pointing. The dot controls
are multi-directional and adjust the end or intersection location of the adjacent segments.
Segments snap and attach to the host cover when moved.

Rebar Shape Snapping Behaviors

Due to the nature of cover references and how rebar is placed, rebar does not snap to its relative Revit
Structure environment, such as snap points and snap lines. Resizing and other modifications to rebar will
react only to the cover reference of the host in which it is placed.

Cross section of concrete host Default placement of rebar in the Snap position to cover reference
showing cover reference cover reference using Rebar Shape Controls

To edit rebar in relation to its Revit Structure environment, overriding the cover reference snapping behaviors,
you can select individual elements of the rebar for adjustment.
Hover over the element of the rebar and press TAB. You can now edit the element with typical snapping
behavior.

Snap position to joined element edge using rebar line segment selection

414 | Chapter 14 Reinforcement

Select a New Rebar Shape
1 Select the rebar to be modified.
2 Select a new shape from the Rebar Shape Type drop-down on the Options Bar.

3 Optional.To select from the Rebar Shape browser, click on the Options Bar.
Rebar will retain its constraints to its host. However, significant shape changes can extend rebar beyond the
cover reference of the host.

Spiral Rebar
Spiral rebar is a unique rebar shape family in that it is non-planar and cannot be edited. However, because
it is fully dimensional, spiral rebar can be scaled, rotated, and resized with its own shape handles and controls
within a project.

Adjusting the Height of Spiral Rebar

To change the length of the spiral, use the triangle shape controls at the top and base of the rebar spiral.
Drag the arrows accordingly to lengthen or shorten the spiral.

These controls do not stretch the spiral. They add the proportionate number of coils required to maintain
the specified height of the spiral rebar.

Scaling the Diameter of Spiral Rebar

To scale the width of the spiral rebar coils, locate the scaling control opposite the rotation control which is
at the end of the actual rebar coil. Drag the control to adjust the diameter of the spiral.

Modifying Rebar Shape | 415

Rotating Spiral Rebar
The positioning of the spiral rebar can be rotated to align the end of the rebar as needed. Drag the rotation
control at the end of the top rebar coil to rotate the position of the end of the rebar.

Spiral Rebar Instance Properties

The following instance properties are unique to spiral rebar in the Instance Properties palette
Base Finishing Turns. Specifies a number of complete coils to close the spiral base.

Top Finishing Turns. Specifies a number of complete coils to close the spiral top.

Height. Specifies the total height of the spiral rebar.

Pitch. Specifies the distance between rebar coils in the spiral.

416 | Chapter 14 Reinforcement

Select a New Rebar Bar Type
1 Select the rebar to be modified.
2 In the Type Selector on page 35 at the top of the Properties palette, select the desired rebar type.
Rebar size can alter the rebar shape, possibly causing it to fail if the bend (fillet) radius of the bar is too big
for the current configuration.

Modify a Rebar Sketch

1 Select the rebar to be modified.

2 Click Modify | Structural Rebar tab ➤ Mode panel ➤ Edit Sketch.

The selected rebar is in sketch mode.

3 Using the tools on the Modify | Structural Rebar > Edit Rebar Sketch tab, adjust the rebar sketch.
4 Click Modify Structural Rebar > Edit Rebar Sketch tab ➤ Mode panel ➤ Finish Edit Mode.

Sketch Placement of Rebar

Sketch tools are available for manual placement of a rebar shape within a valid host. Rebar sketches will
map to an existing shape when they share the following attributes:

■ Number of line segments

■ The shape of the joined line segments

■ The number of hooks

■ The direction of the hooks

■ The bend dimensions of the hooks

■ Shape type: either standard or stirrup

If the sketch does not match an existing shape, a new shape will be created in the Rebar Shape browser and
Rebar Shape type drop-down in the Options Bar.

Place rebar with sketching tools

1 View a valid concrete host in a section view.

2 Click Home tab ➤ Reinforcement panel ➤ Rebar drop-down ➤ Place Rebar Parallel to Work
Plane.

3 Click Modify | Place Rebar tab ➤ Sketch panel ➤ Sketch Rebar.

4 When prompted, select the element that will host the rebar.
5 Use the sketching tools to sketch the rebar shape.

Sketch Placement of Rebar | 417

Sketching a rebar shape

6 Add hooks to the ends of your rebar shape.

Adding rebar hooks to the
sketched shape

7 Position and orient the rebar hooks with the Rebar Hook Graphical Controls on page 429.
8 Click Modify | Create Rebar Sketch tab ➤ Mode panel ➤ Finish Edit Mode to accept the
sketch and place the new shape. The new rebar shape adjusts its shape by snapping to the cover
reference.

Rebar Shape Family Editing Tools

Rebar Shape families possess additional tools for editing which have several requirements and limitations.
These include the following:

■ Rebar does not flex when its parameter values are adjusted.

■ Rebar does not move in the family environment as it does in the project environment.

■ Rebar has a single level of detail. Changing between Coarse, Medium, or Fine levels of detail have no
effect on its appearance.

418 | Chapter 14 Reinforcement

■ Reference planes and dimensions that are not used to define the rebar shape will be silently removed
from the family.

The tools described in this section are available when a shape family is opened for editing.

Rebar Line
In the Family Editor, click Home tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ Rebar Line and select a line tool from the gallery.
Use the Rebar Line tool to sketch lines and define the geometry of the family. This tool is similar to the
Model Lines command in the Family Editor on page 678. See The Families Guide on page 680.

Major Segment
In the Family Editor, click Home tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ Major Segment.
Use the Major Segment tool to select one segment of the rebar shape that will maintain its general position
in rotation and auto-expansion behaviors. A major segment adjusts its length to compensate the host, but
its orientation within the shape remains unchanged.

TIP All similar shapes should have the same Major Segment. This ensures they remain in the same position during
a shape change.

When selected, the major segment appears tagged with two parallel lines when viewed in the Rebar Shape
editor.

TIP Create symmetrical shapes about the center reference lines in a sketch.

Shape Status
In the Family Editor, click Home tab ➤ Family Editor panel ➤ Shape Status.
The Shape Status tool supplies two means of validating a rebar shape. First, it indicates whether the current
state of the shape is a valid rebar shape. If the control is disabled, the shape is valid and you can load it into
projects. If the Shape Status control is active, something is wrong with the current shape. See Warnings for
Selected Elements on page 1680.
Second, when active (indicating an error), click it to launch an error dialog. This dialog is similar to the
Review Warnings command, displaying all current errors within the shape.

Rebar Shape Family Editing Tools | 419

Rebar Shape Parameters
In the Family Editor, click Home tab ➤ Properties panel ➤ Family Types.
Use the Rebar Shape Parameters dialog to define the base attributes (parameters) of the rebar shape. The
parameters become the default settings in the rebar shape types when placed in a project.
The following table describes the editable properties of the Rebar Shape Parameters dialog:

Parameter Description

Construction

Style Select: <Standard> to use Bend Diameter or Stirrup/Tie to

use the Stirrup/Tie Bend Diameter.

Start Hook Offset Specifies the length of the Start Hook offset.

Start Hook Length Specifies the length of the Start Hook.

Hook at Start Lists appropriate hook angles defined by the Style selection.

Hook at End Lists of appropriate hook angles defined by the Style selection.

End Hook Offset Specifies the length of End Hook offset.

End Hook Length Specifies the length of End Hook.

Bend Diameter (default) Specifies the diameter of the bend of the bar type.

Bar Diameter (default) Specifies the diameter of the bar.

Dimensions

A, B, C,... (default) Specifies variable lengths whose quantities, parameters, and

formula names are defined by the content of the shape.

Allowable Bar Types

In the Family Editor, click Home tab ➤ Rebar Types panel ➤ Allowable Bar Types.
Use the Allowable Rebar Bar Types dialog to define the allowable rebar sizes of the shape. These settings
filter the displayed size options of the shape throughout the Revit Structure user interface.
In the dialog select the valid bar types in the Allowed column.

NOTE Shapes previously placed in a project do not update automatically. Verify all pre-existing instances after
adjusting Allowable Bar Types.

Rebar Schedule Mark

You flag rebar instances with a rebar schedule mark for both the scheduling and organization of logically
grouped reinforcement.

420 | Chapter 14 Reinforcement

Enter or add a schedule mark to rebar shapes
1 Select all rebar instances and rebar sets to be marked. To select multiple instances, hold down
the CTRL key while selecting.
2 On the Properties palette, find the Schedule Mark parameter in the Construction section. Enter
a new schedule mark or select a mark from the drop-down.

NOTE New schedule marks are available for all rebar instances in the project.

Selecting all rebar with similar schedule marks

1 Right click a rebar instance.
2 Click Select Rebar by Schedule Mark from the drop-down list.
Group the selection or mass edit using the Properties palette.

NOTE By default, the lowest numerical schedule mark available is assigned to the rebar. Typically,
this mark is 1, though modified projects can be different. Rebar in projects created in versions of Revit
Structure earlier than 2009 do not update with the lowest schedule mark. Therefore, rebar in these
legacy projects have an empty field in their schedule mark parameter.

Rebar View Visibility States

By default, rebar elements in a 3D solid model are contained within host elements, and in hidden line view
they are obscured by the host. You can set overrides for each view in a project, so the rebar design can be
documented. Each rebar element has a view visibility setting, which is an instance property.
View Visibility settings for new rebar defaults are as follows:

■ On in the current view.

■ On in all section views in the project.

■ Off in all other views in the project.

In all cases, rebar must be located between the top view range and the view depth in order for it to be visible.
Portions of the bar that are outside of the view range are not visible.
To access the Rebar Element View Visibility States dialog, select a rebar instance, and on the Properties
palette, click the View Visibility States Edit button. Select one or both of the visibility states for each view
in the project.

View Unobscured
This view parameter displays the selected rebar, regardless of its visual style. The rebar cannot be obscured
by other elements and is visible in front of all obscuring elements. Rebar elements that are cut by the cut
plane are always visible. This setting has no effect on the visibility of these rebar instances.

Rebar View Visibility States | 421

Disable this parameter to hide the rebar in all Visual style views other than Wireframe.

Obscured (default setting) Unobscured

View Solid
This parameter displays rebar in its true volumetric representation when the view level of detail is set to
fine. This view parameter is for 3D views only.

Default 3D view of rebar Rebar as a solid

Changing Rebar View Visibility

1 Select all rebar instances and rebar sets to be made visible. To select multiple instances, hold
down the CTRL key while selecting.
2 On the Properties palette, click the View Visibility States Edit button.
3 In the Rebar Element View Visibility States dialog, select the views in which you want the rebar
to be viewed unobscured.
4 Optionally, select the 3D views in which you want the rebar to be viewed as solid.

422 | Chapter 14 Reinforcement

Rebar Type Properties
The following table describes each parameter contained in the Rebar Type Properties dialog. To access this
table, select a rebar instance and then select Modify | Structural Rebar tab ➤ Properties panel ➤ Type
Properties.

Name Description

Graphics

Subcategory Used to provide graphic overrides of rebar by subcategory. To

create a new subcategory, click Manage tab ➤ Settings pan-
el ➤ Object Styles. In the Structural Rebar category add new
subcategories beneath the main category.

Materials and Finishes

Material Specifies rebar materials. Select materials in the Materials dialog.

Dimensions

Bar Diameter Specifies the diameter of the selected bar type. Refer to the im-
ages in Rebar Hook Length Parameters on page 427.

Standard Bend Diameter Specifies the diameter of non-hook bends for the selected bar
type. Refer to the images in Rebar Hook Length Parameters on
page 427. This parameter does not affect rebar shape.

Standard Hook Bend Diameter Specifies the diameter of hook bends for the selected bar type.
Refer to the images in Rebar Hook Length Parameters on page
427. This parameter does not affect rebar shape.

Stirrup/Tie Bend Diameter Specifies a rebar bend diameter that can be either a standard
bend or stirrup/tie bend. This parameter defines the radii for the
selected bend type. Refer to the images in Rebar Hook Length
Parameters on page 427.

Hook Lengths Specifies hooks based on a specific bar type. Click Edit to open
the Rebar Hook Length dialog. Refer to the images in Rebar Hook
Length Parameters on page 427.

Maximum Bend Radius Specifies the Maximum Bend Radius for rebar schedules. Its pur-
pose is to compensate for rebar that is bent in the field due to
larger bend diameters.

Identity Data

Keynote The keynote text.

Model The manufacturer internal number.

Manufacturer The rebar manufacturer.

Type Comments General comments about the rebar type. You can include this
information in a schedule.

Rebar Type Properties | 423

Name Description

URL Specifies a link to a web page that contains type-specific inform-

ation. Click the icon to establish a link.

Description An optional description of the rebar type.

Assembly Description The uniformat classification for the currently selected assembly
code.

Assembly Code Specifies the uniformat assembly code.

Type Mark A type-specific label used, for example, as a shop mark. This value
must be unique for each element in a project. Revit Structure
warns you if the value is in use, but allows you to continue using
it. You can see the warning using the Review Warnings command.
See Reviewing Warning Messages on page 1680.

Cost The user-defined cost of the rebar.

Rebar Instance Properties

The following table describes each parameter contained on the Properties palette. They consist of the
combined parameters of bar type, shape type, and hook type.

Name Description

Construction

Schedule Mark Specifies rebar instances with a rebar schedule mark. The mark improves
scheduling and organization.

Style Specifies the bend radii control, either Standard or Stirrup/Tie. See Rebar
Type Properties on page 423.

Shape Specifies the identification number of the rebar shape.

Hook at Start Lists appropriate rebar hook types for the selected style.

Hook at End Lists appropriate rebar hook types for the selected style.

Base Finishing Turn Spiral rebar only. Specifies the number of complete coils to close the
spiral base.

Top Finishing Turn Spiral rebar only. Specifies the number of complete coils to close the
spiral top.

424 | Chapter 14 Reinforcement

Name Description

Height Spiral rebar only. Specifies the total height of the spiral rebar.

Pitch Spiral rebar only. Specifies the distance between rebar coils in the spiral.

Rebar Set

Spacing Specifies the spacing for the rebar placed in the major direction. This
parameter is only accessible with the Maximum Spacing Layout Rule.

Quantity Specifies the number of rebar instances within the reinforcement. This
parameter is only accessible with the Fixed Number Layout Rule.

Layout Rule Specifies the type of rebar layout. Select either Maximum Spacing or Fixed
Number. See Rebar Sets on page 432.

Graphics

View Visibility States Accesses rebar view visibility states. Click Edit to either view or edit the
state. See Rebar View Visibility States on page 421.

Structural

Estimated Reinforcement Volume Displays the calculated estimate for reinforcement volume (read-only).

Dimensions

Bar Length Displays the length of individual rebar (read-only).

Total Bar Length Displays the total length of all individual rebar in a set (read-only).

A, B, C,... (default) Specifies the variable lengths whose quantities, parameters, and formula
names are defined by the content of the shape.

Identity Data

Comments General comments about the rebar instance. You can include this inform-
ation in a schedule.

Mark An instance-specific label used, for example, as a shop mark. This value
must be unique for each element in a project. Revit Structure warns you
if the value is in use, but allows you to continue using it. You can see the
warning using the Review Warnings command. See Reviewing Warning
Messages on page 1680.

Phasing

Phase Created Indicates the creation phase of the host element. See Project Phasing on
page 877.

Rebar Instance Properties | 425

Name Description

Phase Demolished Indicates the demolition phase of the host element. See Project Phasing
on page 877.

Rebar Hooks
Rebar hooks have a matrix relationship between the hook angle and rebar size. The rebar hook type comprises
a defined hook angle and initial hook length, as explained in Rebar Hook Type Properties on page 431. You
can change the hook lengths for the rebar type, as explained in Rebar Type Properties on page 423. After the
placement of rebar, Revit Structure provides graphical controls to modify the rebar orientation, as explained
in Rebar Hook Graphical Controls on page 429.

Place rebar hooks

1 Select either a rebar instance or a rebar set. This will require a section view or unobscured rebar
visibility settings.
2 On the Properties palette, add hooks as needed under the Construction section:
■ Select a hook type from the Hook at Start parameter.

■ Select a hook type from the Hook at End parameter.

Define a rebar hook type

1 In the Project Browser, navigate to Families ➤ Structural Rebar ➤ Rebar Hook.

2 Right-click a hook, and select Duplicate.
3 Double-click the new copy.
4 Define the Style, Hook Angle, and Extension Multiplier in Rebar Hook Type Properties on page
431.
5 Click OK.
6 Right-click the new hook type, and select Rename. Enter a name for the hook type.
You can now apply this hook type to instances within the project. For example, associate the hook with all
rebar instances to ensure accurate scheduling.
Applying new hook types

7 In the Project Browser, again navigate to Rebar Hook.

8 Double-click a rebar type.
9 Click the Hook Lengths Edit button in the Dimensions section to define the Rebar Hook Length
Parameters on page 427.
10 Select a hook type and adjust length parameters as needed.
11 Click OK.
12 Repeat steps 7-11 for all rebar instances that use the new hook.

426 | Chapter 14 Reinforcement

Rebar Hook Length Parameters
You define hook length parameters for a rebar type with the Rebar Hook Length Parameter dialog. Access
the dialog by clicking the Hook Lengths Edit button in Rebar Type Properties. See Rebar Type Properties on
page 423.

Name Description

Rebar Hook Type This is a self-populated list of valid rebar

hooks for this rebar type. Selecting the
check box indicates that the hook type is
visible in the Hook at Start or Hook at End
parameters of the rebar. See Rebar Instance
Properties on page 424.

Auto Calculation Clear this check box to override the auto-

matic calculation of Hook Length and Off-
set Length.

Hook Length Displays the length of the hook type.

Offset Length Displays the offset length of the hook type.

Use this optional parameter primarily for
scheduling.

Rebar Hook Definitions

The following images depict the parameters that define a rebar hook.

45° Hook

Rebar Hook Length Parameters | 427

90° Hook

135° Hook

180° Hook

428 | Chapter 14 Reinforcement

Rebar Hook Graphical Controls
When sketching rebar in place or for a family, you can use the following graphical controls to modify the
rebar hook orientation and location. See Sketch Placement of Rebar on page 417 and Rebar Shape Family
Editing Tools on page 418.

■ Toggle Hook Orientation: With rebar selected, separate controls display at each end of the rebar.
Click this control to toggle the hook up or down.

■ Swap Hooks: With rebar selected, click this control to swap the hooks at each end of the placed
rebar.

Moving Hooks
Toggle the SPACEBAR to move the hooks of ties and stirrups.

Moving tie and stirrup hooks

1 Select the rebar.

2 Press the SPACEBAR to toggle the rebar shape (and hook) orientation as detailed in Changing
the Orientation of Rebar Shapes on page 410.

Toggling Hook Orientation

A toggle hook orientation control is available at each end of the rebar. You access these controls through
sketch mode.

Rebar Hook Graphical Controls | 429

Change Hook Orientation
1 Select the rebar.

2 Click Modify | Structural Rebar tab ➤ Mode panel ➤ Edit Sketch.

3 Click to toggle the hook orientation down.

4 Click Modify | Structural Rebar > Edit Rebar Sketch tab ➤ Mode panel ➤ Finish Edit Mode.
to view the orientation of the hook.

430 | Chapter 14 Reinforcement

NOTE You can also reorient hooks using the SPACEBAR. Press the SPACEBAR to toggle the rebar
shape (and hook) orientation as explained in Changing the Orientation of Rebar Shapes on page 410.

Swapping Hooks
Use the swap hook control to change the position of the rebar hook. Access these controls through sketch
mode.

Swap Hooks on Rebar

1 Select the rebar.

2 Click Modify | Structural Rebar tab ➤ Mode panel ➤ Edit Sketch.

Notice the hook orientation controls.

3 Click the Swap Hook Control to swap the hooks at each end of the placed rebar.
Rebar Hooks Swap Sides

4 Click Modify | Structural Rebar > Edit Rebar Sketch tab ➤ Mode panel ➤ Finish Edit Mode.

NOTE You can also swap hooks using the SPACEBAR. Press the SPACEBAR to toggle the rebar shape
(and hook) orientation as explained in Changing the Orientation of Rebar Shapes on page 410.

Rebar Hook Type Properties

The following table describes each parameter contained in the Hook Type Properties dialog. To access this
table, double-click the desired rebar hook family in the Project Browser.

Name Description

Dimensions

Rebar Hook Type Properties | 431

Name Description

Style Specifies which of the 2 bend radii of the Standard or Stirrup/Tie to use for
bending the specified hook.

Hook Angle Specifies the angle (0 - 180 degrees) of the hook for the selected hook type.

Extension Multiplier Aids the calculation of the hook length of the rebar type until you override the
value for the rebar hook lengths. See Rebar Type Properties on page 423.

Rebar Sets
The rebar sets feature turns a single rebar element into a linear set. You create rebar sets perpendicular to
the sketch plane of the rebar and define the number of bars and bar spacing. Using rebar sets speeds up the
process of adding rebar by providing a quantity of identical bars. You tag and schedule rebar sets as a single
object that contains quantity and spacing information. Rebar sets provide better performance than standard
arrays of rebar.

Creating Rebar Sets

1 Select an existing rebar instance.

The rebar set layout properties display on the Options Bar.

2 Select a type of rebar layout from the Layout drop-down on the Options Bar.
■ Fixed Number: The spacing between the rebar is adjustable, but the number of bars is constant,
based on your input.

■ Maximum Spacing: You specify the maximum distance between rebar, but the number of
rebar changes, based on the distance between the first and last bars.

■ Number with Spacing: You specify constant values for quantity and spacing.

■ Minimum Clear Spacing: You specify the minimum distance between rebar, and the quantity
of rebar changes, based on the distance between the first and last bars. This spacing maintains
even if the rebar size changes.

3 Based on your selection, enter a value for Quantity or Spacing, or for both.
4 Press ENTER to complete the procedure.

To suppress the first and last bars of a rebar set

5 In either a section or 3D view, select the rebar set. Check boxes display on both sides of the
rebar set.

6 Deselecting a check box will hide the respective bar.

432 | Chapter 14 Reinforcement

The bar is hidden and not removed from the set. It responds to rebar cover and rebar set shape
handles.

Rebar Sets Shape Handles

You can resize rebar sets when the selected layout rule is either Fixed Number, Maximum Spacing, or
Minimum Clear Spacing. Select the rebar set by clicking any rebar instance in the set. Shape handles display
on the set.

Based on the layout rule, modifying the set by using shape handles has different results:

■ Fixed Number: Dragging the shape handles modifies the distance between the rebar instances in the set.

■ Maximum Spacing: Dragging the shape handles modifies the number of rebar instances in the set, while
maintaining a distance that is no larger than the maximum spacing you defined.

■ Minimum Clear Spacing: Dragging the shape handles modifies the number of rebar instances in the set,
while maintaining a distance that is no smaller than the minimum amount of clear spacing you defined.

Area Reinforcement
Use the Sketch Area Reinforcement tool to place large amounts of evenly spaced reinforcing bars in structural
floors and walls. Area reinforcement creates up to four layers of reinforcing bars in the host. You can create
two layers of rebar perpendicular to each adjacent face (top and bottom faces for structural floors, interior
and exterior faces for walls). You can define the bar size and spacing for each layer.
A sketched boundary defines the extents of the reinforcing bars. Apply rebar hook types to each layer using
the Properties palette. If you edit the properties of the area reinforcement sketch line, you can use hook
overrides.
Area reinforcement in a structural floor

Rebar Sets Shape Handles | 433

The instance properties of the host control the rebar cover settings (offset distance from the edge/face of
the host to the rebar) for each area reinforcement instance. Different rebar types require different coverage.
See Modifying Rebar Cover Settings on page 400.

Sketching Area Reinforcement

Sketch area reinforcement in structural floors and walls for large areas that need reinforcement.

1 Click Home tab ➤ Reinforcement panel ➤ Area.

2 Select the floor or wall to receive area reinforcement.

3 Click Modify | Create Reinforcement Boundary tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ Rebar Line.
4 Click once to select a starting point for the area reinforcement sketch.
5 Continue to select points until you form a closed loop.

A parallel line symbol indicates the major direction edge of the area reinforcement.

6 Click Modify | Create Reinforcement Boundary tab ➤ Mode panel ➤ Finish Edit Mode.

Revit places an area reinforcement symbol and tag on the completed sketch at the center of the
area reinforcement. For more information, see Tagging Area Reinforcement on page 438.

NOTE When you place area reinforcement, the rebar elements are not visible unless you create a
section view of the host element. For more information, see Viewing Area Reinforcement in a Cross
Section on page 435.

Whole Host Area Reinforcement

You can place reinforcement that spans the full extents of the host element. This method does not allow
for individual control of the rebar hooks.

434 | Chapter 14 Reinforcement

1 Open a 3D view of a structural floor or wall.

2 Click Home tab ➤ Reinforcement panel ➤ Area.

3 Select the host (such as a structural floor or wall) to receive reinforcement.

4 Click Modify | Create Reinforcement Boundary tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ Major Direction.
5 Using the tools in the sketch gallery, sketch a line along one edge of the host element to establish
the direction of reinforcement.

6 Click Modify | Create Reinforcement Boundary tab ➤ Mode panel ➤ Finish Edit Mode.

Viewing Area Reinforcement in a Cross Section

1 Sketch a section view, either parallel or perpendicular to the major direction of the area
reinforcement.
Create a section view of an area
reinforcement

Viewing Area Reinforcement in a Cross Section | 435

2 In the Project Browser, double-click the section view that you created to see a graphical
representation of the rebar area reinforcement.

Area Reinforcement Type Properties

NOTE Area Reinforcement Type properties are not available in Revit Structure 2009 or later releases. Newly created
area reinforcement instances will not have these properties. However, legacy projects maintain the properties for
editing purposes. View non-legacy rebar cover reference settings in the Structural section of Instance Properties
of a host. See Modifying Rebar Cover Settings on page 400.

The following table describes each parameter contained in the Area Reinforcement Type Properties dialog.
Select the legacy area reinforcement and then select Modify | Structural Area Reinforcement tab ➤ Properties
panel ➤ Type Properties to access this table.
Area reinforcement properties for structural walls are identified as either exterior or interior to reflect the
vertical orientation of the rebar. Properties for structural floors are identified as either top or bottom to
reflect the horizontal orientation.

Name Description

Structural

Rebar Cover Top/Exterior Specifies the offset from the top/exterior face of the host to the rebar.

436 | Chapter 14 Reinforcement

Name Description

Rebar Cover Bottom/Interior Specifies the offset from the bottom/interior face of the host to the rebar.

Rebar Cover Side/Edge Specifies the offset from the side/edge of the host to the rebar.

Area Reinforcement Instance Properties

The following table describes each parameter contained on the Area Reinforcement Properties palette.
Area reinforcement properties for structural walls are identified as either exterior or interior to reflect the
vertical orientation of the rebar. Properties for structural floors are identified as either top or bottom to
reflect the horizontal orientation.

Name Description

Construction

Layout Rule Specifies the type of rebar layout. Select either Maximum Spacing or Fixed
Number. See Rebar Sets on page 432.

Structural

Estimated Reinforcement Volume Calculates and displays the reinforcement volume (read-only).

Layers

Top Major Direction Creates rebar in this layer. Clear this box to disable rebar in this layer.

Top Major Bar Type Specifies the type for rebar placed in the major direction.

Top Major Hook Type Specifies the hook type for rebar placed in the major direction.

Top Major Hook Orientation Specifies the orientation of the hook for rebar placed in the major direction.

Top Major Spacing Specifies the spacing for rebar placed in the major direction. You can access
this parameter with the Maximum Spacing Layout Rule.

Top Major Number of Lines Specifies the number of rebar instances within the reinforcement. You can access
this parameter with the Fixed Number Layout Rule.

Top Minor Direction Creates rebar in this layer. Clear this box to disable rebar in this layer.

Top Minor Bar Type Specifies the type for rebar placed in the minor direction.

Top Minor Hook Type Specifies the hook type for rebar placed in the minor direction.

Top Minor Hook Orientation Specifies the orientation of the hook for rebar placed in the minor direction.

Top Minor Spacing Specifies the spacing for rebar placed in the minor direction.

Top Minor Number of Lines Specifies the number of rebar instances within the reinforcement. You can access
this parameter with the Fixed Number Layout Rule.

Bottom Major Direction Creates rebar in this layer. Clear this box to disable rebar in this layer.

Area Reinforcement Instance Properties | 437

Name Description

Bottom Major Bar Type Specifies the type for rebar placed in the major direction.

Bottom Major Hook Type Specifies the hook type for rebar placed in the major direction.

Bottom Major Hook Orientation Specifies the orientation of the hook for rebar placed in the major direction.

Bottom Major Spacing Specifies the spacing for rebar placed in the major direction. You can access
this parameter with the Maximum Spacing Layout Rule.

Bottom Major Number of Lines Specifies the number of rebar instances within the reinforcement. You can access
this parameter with the Fixed Number Layout Rule.

Bottom Minor Direction Creates rebar in this layer. Clear this box to disable rebar in this layer.

Bottom Minor Bar Type Specifies the type for rebar placed in the minor direction.

Bottom Minor Hook Type Specifies the hook type for rebar placed in the minor direction.

Bottom Minor Hook Orientation Specifies the orientation of the hook for rebar placed in the minor direction.

Bottom Minor Spacing Specifies the spacing for rebar placed in the minor direction.

Bottom Minor Number of Lines Specifies the number of rebar instances within the reinforcement. You can access
this parameter with the Fixed Number Layout Rule.

Identity Data

Comments User comments

Mark A label used, for example, as a shop mark. This value must be unique for each
element in a project. Revit Structure warns you if the value is in use, but allows
you to continue using it. You can see the warning using the Review Warnings
command. See Reviewing Warning Messages on page 1680.

Phasing

Phase Created Indicates the creation phase of the host element. See Project Phasing on page
877.

Phase Demolished Indicates the demolition phase of the host element. See Project Phasing on
page 877.

Tagging Area Reinforcement

You can annotate the area reinforcement region using custom symbols and tags. This provides information
about the type of reinforcement and specific boundary details.

Place an Area Reinforcement Symbol

1 Click Annotate tab ➤ Symbol panel ➤ Area Reinforcement Symbol.

438 | Chapter 14 Reinforcement

NOTE You can load reinforcement symbols from the Library if none exist in the project. See Symbols
on page 951.

2 Select the area reinforcement on which to place the symbol.

3 Position and click to place the area reinforcement symbol.

Place an Area Reinforcement Tag

4 Select Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag By Category.

NOTE You can load reinforcement tags from the Library if none exist in the project. See Tags on
page 944.

5 Select the area reinforcement on which to place the tag.

You can include major spacing properties by editing the tag label. Bottom/Interior Major Spacing
and Top/Exterior Major Spacing are available Category Parameters.

6 Press ESC to exit the Tag tool.

NOTE To resolve rounding errors that may manifest when tagging area reinforcement, you can
modify the units of measurement for reinforcement volume and length. Click Manage tab ➤ Settings
panel ➤ (Project Units). Under Reinforcement Volume or Reinforcement Length, adjust the units,
rounding, and symbol representation as needed.

See Modifying Reinforcement Tag Abbreviations on page 1610 for information about custom reinforcement
tags.

Path Reinforcement
Use the Sketch Path Reinforcement tool to lay out a large amount of rebar along a path. These bars have the
same length, but are not all parallel to each other. The rebar is perpendicular to the boundary you specify.
The hooked end of the rebar is near the specified boundary and the bars extend to one side of the path.

Path Reinforcement | 439

The instance properties of the host control the rebar cover settings (the offset distance from the edge/face
of the host to the rebar) for each path reinforcement instance. Different rebar types require different coverage.
See Modifying Rebar Cover Settings on page 400.

Sketching Path Reinforcement

1 Click Home tab ➤ Reinforcement panel ➤ Path.
2 Sketch the path for reinforcement on a concrete host, making sure not to form a closed loop.
3 Press ESC.

4 If necessary click on the Options Bar and click Flip Control, so the rebar extends to the
opposite side of the path.
5 Click Modify | Create Reinforcement Path tab ➤ Mode panel ➤ Finish Edit Mode.

NOTE The boundary of the path reinforcement is on by default. Turn it off by clicking View
tab ➤ Graphics panel ➤ Visibility Graphics and clearing the Boundary Visibility parameter under
Structural Path Reinforcement.

Revit Structure places a Path Reinforcement symbol and a Path Reinforcement tag on the
completed sketch at the center of the longest segment of the path. See Tagging Path
Reinforcement on page 443.

NOTE When you sketch path reinforcement, the rebar elements are not visible unless you create a
section view of the host element. For more information, see Viewing Path Reinforcement in Cross
Section on page 441.

440 | Chapter 14 Reinforcement

Viewing Path Reinforcement in Cross Section
1 Sketch a section view, either parallel or perpendicular to the sketch line of the path reinforcement.
2 Open the section view to see the path reinforcement.
Path reinforcement in section

Path Reinforcement Type Properties

NOTE Path Reinforcement Type properties are not available in Revit Structure 2009 or later releases. Newly created
path reinforcement instances will not have these properties. However, legacy projects maintain the properties for
editing purposes. View non-legacy rebar cover reference settings in the Structural section of Instance Properties
of a host. See Modifying Rebar Cover Settings on page 400.

The following table describes each parameter contained in the Path Reinforcement Type Properties dialog.
Select the legacy path reinforcement and then select Modify | Structural Path Reinforcement tab ➤ Properties
panel ➤ Type Properties to access this table.
Path reinforcement properties for structural walls are identified as either exterior or interior to reflect the
vertical orientation of the rebar. Properties for structural floors are identified as either top or bottom to
reflect the horizontal orientation.

Name Description

Construction

Rebar Cover Top/Exterior Specifies the offset from the top/exterior face of the host to the rebar.

Rebar Cover Bottom/Interior Specifies the offset from the bottom/interior face of the host to the rebar.

Rebar Cover Side/Edge Specifies the offset from the side/edge of the host to the rebar.

Viewing Path Reinforcement in Cross Section | 441

Path Reinforcement Instance Properties
The following table describes each parameter contained on the Path Reinforcement Properties palette.

Name Description

Construction

Layout Rule Specifies the type of rebar layout. Select either Maximum Spacing or Fixed Number.
See Rebar Sets on page 432.

Structural

Estimated Reinforcement Volume Calculates and displays reinforcement volume (read-only).

Layers

Face Specifies the face justification, either top or bottom.

Bar Spacing Specifies the spacing for rebar placed in the major direction. This parameter is only
accessible with the Maximum Spacing Layout Rule.

Number of Bars Specifies the number of rebar instances within the reinforcement. You can access this
parameter with the Fixed Number Layout Rule.

Primary Bar - Type Specifies the bar type.

Primary Bar - Length Specifies the length of the rebar.

Primary Bar - Start Hook Type Specifies the type of hook (either Standard or Stirrup/Tie) and the angle for the start
of the path reinforcement.

Primary Bar - End Hook Type Specifies the type of hook (either Standard or Stirrup/Tie) and the angle for the end
of the path reinforcement.

Primary Bar - Hook Orientation Specifies the orientation of the rebar hook, either up or down.

Alternating Bars When selected, enables alternate bar type.

Alternating Bar - Type Specifies the bar type. Selecting the Alternating Bars parameter enables this parameter.

Alternating Bar - Length Specifies the length of the rebar. Selecting the Alternating Bars parameter enables this
parameter.

Alternating Bar - Offset Specifies the offset distance from the primary bar. Selecting the Alternating Bars para-
meter enables this parameter.

Alternating Bar - Start Hook Type Specifies the type of hook (either Standard or Stirrup/Tie) and the angle for the start
of the path reinforcement. Selecting the Alternating Bars parameter enables this para-
meter.

Alternating Bar - End Hook Type Specifies the type of hook (either Standard or Stirrup/Tie) and the angle for the end
of the path reinforcement. Selecting the Alternating Bars parameter enables this para-
meter.

442 | Chapter 14 Reinforcement

Name Description

Alternating Bar - Hook Orientation Specifies the orientation of the rebar hook, either up or down. Selecting the Alternating
Bars parameter enables this parameter.

Identity Data

Comments User comments

Mark A label used, for example, as a shop mark. This value must be unique for each element
in a project. Revit Structure warns you if the value is in use, but allows you to continue
using it. You can see the warning using the Review Warnings command. See Reviewing
Warning Messages on page 1680.

Phasing

Phase Created Indicates the creation phase of the host element. See Project Phasing on page 877.

Phase Demolished Indicates the demolition phase of the host element. See Project Phasing on page 877.

Tagging Path Reinforcement

You can annotate the path reinforcement region using custom symbols and tags. This provides information
about the type of reinforcement and specific boundary details.

Place a Path Reinforcement Symbol

1 Click Annotate tab ➤ Symbol panel ➤ Path Reinforcement Symbol.

2 NOTE You can load reinforcement symbols from the Library if none exist in the project. For more
information, see Symbols on page 951.

3 Select the path reinforcement on which to place the symbol.

4 Position and click to place the path reinforcement symbol.

Place a Path Reinforcement Tag

5 Select Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag By Category.

Tagging Path Reinforcement | 443

NOTE You can load reinforcement tags from the Library if none exist in the project. For more
information, see Tags on page 944.

6 Select the path reinforcement on which to place the tag.

7 Press ESC to exit the Tag tool.

See Modifying Reinforcement Tag Abbreviations on page 1610 for information about custom reinforcement
tags.

444 | Chapter 14 Reinforcement

Architectural Modeling

Revit Structure provides various familiar components for building design. No programming language or coding is required
to create these components.

445
446
Building The Model

447
448
Walls
15
Like other basic elements in a Revit Structure building model, walls are instances of predefined system family types, which
represent standard varieties of wall function, composition, and thickness. You can customize these characteristics by
modifying a wall’s type properties to add or remove layers, divide them into regions, and change their thickness or assigned
material.
After you place a wall in a drawing, you can add sweeps or reveals, edit the wall’s profile, and insert hosted components
such as doors and windows.
This topic covers 2 of the 3 Revit wall families: Basic Wall and Stacked Wall. For information on the Curtain Wall family,
see Curtain Elements on page 623.
3D view of walls

449
Walls Overview
You add walls to a Revit Structure building model by clicking the Wall tool, selecting the desired wall type,
and placing instances of that type in a plan view or 3D view.
To place an instance, you select one of the draw tools on the ribbon, and either sketch the linear extents of
the wall in the drawing area, or define them by picking an existing line, edge, or face. The position of the
wall relative to the path you sketch or the existing element you select is determined by the value of one of
the wall’s instance properties: Location Line.

Location Line
A wall’s Location Line property specifies which of its vertical planes is used to position the wall in relation
to the path you sketch or otherwise specify in the drawing area. When laying out compound walls that join,
you can place them precisely with respect to a particular material layer of interest, such as the concrete
masonry units.
Regardless of the wall type, you can select any of the following planes, either on the Options Bar (before
placing the wall) or on the Properties palette (before or after):

■ Wall Centerline (default)

■ Core Centerline

■ Finish Face: Exterior

■ Finish Face: Interior

■ Core Face: Exterior

■ Core Face: Interior

NOTE In Revit terminology, the core of a wall refers to its main structural layer or layers. In a simple brick wall,
the Wall Centerline and Core Centerline planes would coincide, whereas they would likely differ in a compound
wall. When you draw a wall from left to right, its exterior face (Finish Face: Exterior) is at the top by default.

In the following example, with the Location Line value specified as Finish Face : Exterior, the cursor is placed
on a dashed reference line, and the wall is drawn from left to right.

If you change the Location Line value to Finish Face : Interior, and draw another segment along the reference
line in the same direction, the new segment is placed above the reference line.

When you select a single wall segment, the blue dots (Drag Wall End controls) indicate its location line.

450 | Chapter 15 Walls

Once a wall is placed, its location line persists, even if you modify the structure of its type or change to a
different type. Changing the value of the Location Line property for an existing wall does not change the

wall’s position. However, when you use the Spacebar or on-screen flip controls to switch the
interior/exterior orientation of a wall, the location line is the axis around which the wall flips. So if you
change the Location Line value and then change the orientation, it may change the wall position as well.
Note that the position of the blue dots does not change until you deselect and reselect the wall.

Wall Function
All wall types within the Basic Wall and Stacked Wall families have a type property called Function, which
can have the following values:

■ Interior

■ Exterior

■ Foundation

■ Retaining

■ Soffit

■ Core-Shaft

You can filter the display of walls in a view to show/hide only those walls that serve a particular function.
When creating a wall schedule, you can also use this property to include or exclude walls according to
function.

Related Topics

■ Function of Walls, Floors, and Building Pads on page 1138

■ Schedules on page 771

Compound Walls
Just as roofs, floors, and ceilings in Revit can consist of multiple horizontal layers, walls can consist of more
than one vertical layer or region. The position, thickness, and material for each layer and region are defined
through the type properties of the wall. You can add, delete, or modify individual layers and regions, or add
sweeps and reveals to customize the wall type.
For basic information common to multi-layer elements in Revit, see Compound Structure on page 573. For
information specific to compound walls, see Working with Compound Walls on page 465.

Stacked Walls
In addition to the Basic Wall and Curtain Wall families, Revit includes a Stacked Wall family for modeling
walls that consist of 2 or more distinct subwalls stacked on top of each other.

Structural Walls
All wall types within the Basic Wall family have an instance property called Structural Usage, which specifies
whether the wall is non-bearing or one of 3 kinds of structural wall (bearing, shear, or structural combined).

Walls Overview | 451

When you use the Wall tool, Revit assumes you are placing partition walls. Whichever wall type you select,
the default Structural Usage value is non-bearing. When you use the Structural Wall tool, and select the
same wall type, the default Structural Usage value is bearing. In either case, the value is read-only, but you
can change it after the wall is placed.
Documentation for structural walls is provided separately under Structural Modeling on page 217.

Embedded Walls
Walls can be embedded into a host wall, so that the embedded wall is associated with the host wall. For
example, a curtain wall can be embedded into an exterior wall, or a wall can be embedded into a curtain
panel. Like doors or windows in the host wall, the embedded wall does not resize if you resize its host. If
you move the host wall, the embedded wall moves with it.
Curtain wall embedded in host wall

For more information, see Embedding Curtain Walls on page 629.

Wall Joins
When walls intersect, Revit creates a butt join by default and cleans up the display in plan view by removing
visible edges between the walls and their corresponding component layers. The view’s Wall Join Display
instance property controls whether the cleanup applies to all wall types or only to walls of the same type.
You can change how the join displays in a plan view by selecting a different join option (Miter or Square-off)
or by specifying which one of the walls butts up or squares off against the other(s). You can also specify
whether the join cleans up, does not clean up, or cleans up according to the default setting for the view. For
more information, see Changing the Configuration of a Wall Join on page 458.

Placing Walls
Use this procedure to place one or more instances of a specific type of partition wall in your building model.

1 In a floor plan view or 3D view, click Home tab ➤ Structure panel ➤ Wall drop-down ➤
Partition Wall.
2 If you want to place a wall type other than the one displayed in the Type Selector on page 35
at the top of the Properties palette, select a different type from the drop-down.
You can use the bottom part of the Properties palette to modify some of the instance properties
for the selected wall type before you start placing instances. To open a dialog where you can

edit the type properties, click Edit Type. Any changes you make in the Type Properties
dialog will apply to all existing instances of the current wall type as well as the ones you are
about to place.

452 | Chapter 15 Walls

3 On the Options Bar, specify the following:
■ Level. (3D views only) Select a level for the wall’s base constraint. You can choose a non-story
level. See Levels on page 93.

■ Height. Select a level for the wall’s top constraint, or enter a value for the default setting of
Unconnected.

■ Location Line. Select which vertical plane of the wall you want to align with the cursor as
you draw, or with the line or face you will select in the drawing area. For examples, see
Location Line on page 450.

■ Chain. Select this option to draw a series of wall segments connected at endpoints.

■ Offset. Optionally enter a distance to specify how far the wall’s location line will be offset
from the cursor position or from a selected line or face (as described in the next step).

4 On the Draw panel, select a draw tool to place the wall using one of the following methods:

■ Draw the wall. Use the default Line tool to place a straight wall segment by specifying
both a start point and an endpoint in the drawing. Alternatively, you can specify the start
point, move the cursor in the desired direction, and then enter a value for the wall length.
Other tools on the Draw panel let you sketch rectangular, polygonal, circular, or arced layouts.
For detailed descriptions of these tools, see Sketching Elements on page 1406.
As you are drawing a wall with any of these tools, you can press the Spacebar to flip the
interior/exterior orientation of the wall in relation to its location line.

■ Place the wall along an existing line. Use the Pick Lines tool to place wall segments along
lines you select in the drawing. The lines can be model lines, reference planes, or edges of
elements, such as roofs, curtain panels, and other walls.

TIP To place walls simultaneously on an entire chain of lines, move the cursor over a line segment,
press Tab to highlight them all, and then click.

■ Place the wall on an existing face. Use the Pick Faces tool to place a wall on a massing
face or a generic model face that you select in the drawing. See Modeling by Face on page
1356.

TIP To place walls simultaneously on all vertical faces on the mass or generic model, move the
cursor over one of faces, press Tab to highlight them all, and then click.

5 To exit the Wall tool, click Modify.

You can now add dimensions if desired (see Placing Permanent Dimensions on page 889), or
adjust the layout and geometry of walls using the tools described under Editing Elements on
page 1439. For information on wall-specific modifications, such as changing the physical structure
of walls or editing joins, see Modifying Walls on page 454.

Attaching Walls to Other Elements

After placing a wall, you can override its initial top and base constraints by attaching its top or base to
another element in the same vertical plane. The other element can be a floor, a roof, a ceiling, a reference
plane, or another wall that is directly above or below. The height of the wall then increases or decreases as
necessary to conform to the boundary represented by the attached element.
By attaching a wall to another element, you can avoid having to manually edit the wall’s profile when your
design changes. In the following example, the image on the left shows a roof placed on walls that have been

Attaching Walls to Other Elements | 453

drawn with their top constraint specified as Level 2. The middle image shows the effect of attaching the
walls to the roof. The image on the right shows how the wall profile changes accordingly when the pitch
of the attached roof is changed.
Effect of attaching walls to a roof

The following guidelines apply:

■ You can attach wall tops to non-vertical reference planes.

■ You can attach walls to in-place roofs or floors.

■ If a wall's top is currently attached to a reference plane, attaching the top to a second reference plane
detaches it from the first.

■ You can attach walls that are parallel in the same vertical plane; that is, directly above or below one
another.

To attach walls to other elements

1 In the drawing area, select one or more walls you want to attach to other elements.

2 Click Modify | Walls tab ➤ Modify Wall panel ➤ Attach Top/Base.

3 On the Options Bar, for Attach Wall, select either Top or Base.
4 Select the elements to which the wall will attach.

To detach walls from other elements

1 In the drawing area, select the walls to detach.

2 Click Modify | Walls tab ➤ Modify Wall panel ➤ Detach Top/Base.

3 Select the individual elements from which to detach the walls. Alternatively, if you want to
detach the selected walls from all other elements at once (or you are not sure which elements
are attached), click Detach All on the Options Bar.

Modifying Walls
After placing walls in the drawing area, you can modify their layout and geometry using tools common to
most elements, as described under Editing Elements on page 1439. The current topic addresses wall-specific
modifications, such as changing the physical structure of walls or editing joins.

Changing the Type of a Wall

When you activate the Wall tool to place walls, you select the desired wall type from the Type Selector on
page 35 drop-down. You can also change the wall type after placement, by selecting the wall in the drawing
area and then changing the Type Selector setting. Alternatively you can select an existing wall and convert

454 | Chapter 15 Walls

other selected walls to the same type, as described under Changing Element Types Using the Match Type
Tool on page 1497

Editing the Profile of a Wall

In most cases, when you place a straight wall, it has a rectangular profile when viewed in elevations parallel
to its length. If your design calls for a different shape of profile, or for openings in the wall, use the following
procedure to edit the wall’s elevation profile in either a section or elevation view.
Design with non-rectangular walls and cut openings

NOTE You cannot edit the elevation profile of an arc wall. To place rectangular openings in an arc wall, use the
Wall Opening tool, which can also be used to place openings in straight walls.

To edit the profile of a wall

1 In the drawing area, select the wall.

2 Click Modify | Walls tab ➤ Mode panel ➤ Edit Profile.

If the active view is a plan view, the Go To View dialog displays, prompting you to select an
appropriate elevation or section view. For example, for a north wall, you could select either the
North or South elevation view.
When an appropriate view is open, the profile of the wall displays in magenta model lines, as
shown.

3 Use the tools on the Modify and Draw panels to edit the profile as needed.
■ Delete the lines and then sketch a completely different shape.

■ Split the existing lines and add arcs.

■ Draw openings or holes.

Wall modified

Editing the Profile of a Wall | 455

TIP As you move and edit the rectangle, datum planes appear to indicate the original shape and size
of the wall when you entered sketch mode. If the sketched lines snap to the datum planes, the
endpoints of the lines automatically align to the planes, unless you explicitly unlock them. If you
unlock the sketched lines, you can modify them independently of the datum planes. If you exit sketch
mode with the sketched lines still aligned, then as you move a datum handle, the sketched lines move
with it.

Sketch lines unlocked

4 When you are finished, click Finish Edit Mode.

NOTE If you want to restore an edited wall to its original shape, select it, and click Modify | Walls tab ➤ Mode

panel ➤ Reset Profile.

Creating Mid-End Faces

When you edit the elevation profile of a wall that spans multiple levels and create notches such as those
shown below, the new vertical edges represent jambs that are referred to in Revit as mid-end faces. Other
walls can form corner joins with mid-end faces. See Joining Walls to Mid-End Faces on page 461
Wall elevation profile edited to create notches

456 | Chapter 15 Walls

Edited wall in 3D view

You can also create mid-end faces using the Wall Opening tool. See Cutting Rectangular Openings in Walls
on page 562.

Working with Wall Joins

When walls intersect, Revit Structure creates a butt join by default and cleans up the display in plan view,
removing visible edges between the joined walls and their corresponding component layers.
Butt join with and without cleanup at coarse level of detail

Butt join with and without cleanup at fine level of detail

You can change how the join displays in a plan view by selecting a join option other than Butt (Miter or
Square-off) or by specifying a different order in which the walls butt up or square off against one another.
For detailed instructions, see Changing the Configuration of a Wall Join on page 458.
You can also specify whether the join cleans up, does not clean up, or cleans up according to the default
setting for the view. See Specifying Wall Join Cleanup Options on page 459.

Working with Wall Joins | 457

Related topics

■ Design Options and Wall Joins on page 671

Changing the Configuration of a Wall Join

Use this procedure to change the configuration of a join involving 4 walls or fewer by changing the type of
join or the order in which the walls join.

NOTE To edit a wall join with more than 4 walls, a wall join that spans multiple floors, or a wall join that is in
more than one workset, see Editing Complex Wall Joins on page 463.

1 Click Modify tab ➤ Geometry panel ➤ (Wall Joins).

2 Move the cursor over the wall join, and click within the gray square that displays.
3 On the Options Bar, select one of the available join types:
■ Butt (the default join type)

■ Miter

■ Square off: Squares a wall end to 90 degrees.

458 | Chapter 15 Walls

4 If the selected join type is Butt or Square off, you can click the Next and Previous buttons to
cycle through previews of the possible join orders. For the squared-off join shown above, the
following alternative order would be available.

NOTE You cannot square off or miter the join between a wall and the interior of another wall, nor
change the order of the butt join, because only one configuration of butt join is possible. An example
of this layout is shown below (with the Don’t Clean Join option selected).

5 When the desired configuration is displayed, click Modify to exit the tool.

Specifying Wall Join Cleanup Options

Use the following procedure to specify whether and how a wall join cleans up in an active plan view.

Working with Wall Joins | 459

1 Click Modify tab ➤ Geometry panel ➤ (Wall Joins).
2 Move the cursor over the wall join, and click within the gray square that displays.
3 On the Options Bar, for Display, select one of the following options:
■ Clean Join. Displays a smooth join. While the join is selected for editing, temporary solid
lines indicate where the wall layers actually end, as shown below; these lines disappear when
you exit the Wall Joins tool and do not print.

■ Don't Clean Join. Displays the wall ends butting up against one another as shown.

■ Use View Setting. Cleans wall joins according to the view’s Wall Join Display instance
property (see View Properties on page 873). This property controls whether the cleanup applies
to all wall types or only to walls of the same type.

4 Click Modify to exit the tool.

460 | Chapter 15 Walls

Joining Parallel Walls
Revit Structure automatically creates joins between intersecting walls. Use the following procedure to join
the geometry of closely-spaced parallel walls.
1 In a plan view, place the walls less than 6 inches apart.

2 Click Modify tab ➤ Geometry panel ➤ Join drop-down ➤ Join Geometry.

3 Select the walls to join.
If either wall has an insert (such as a window), it cuts through the joined wall. Any geometry
around the insert, such as a frame, does not display on the joined wall.
Parallel walls before geometry is joined

Parallel walls after geometry is joined

Joining Walls to Mid-End Faces

Use this procedure to place a wall that is joined to a mid-end face in another wall. When you drag either of
the joined walls, the join is maintained, and the other wall lengthens or shortens accordingly.
1 Open a plan view in which the mid-end face is visible.

TIP If only the ends of the wall with the mid-end face are visible, you may need to adjust the cut
plane height. For more information, see View Range on page 864.

2 Click Home tab ➤ Structure panel ➤ Partition Wall, and select the desired wall type from the
Type Selector on page 35.
3 Move the cursor over the mid-end face until an endpoint displays, and then click to specify the
new wall start point.
4 Move the cursor in the desired direction.

Working with Wall Joins | 461

Sketching a wall with its start point at a mid-end face

5 Click to specify the new wall’s endpoint. The join between the walls cleans up as shown.

When you drag either of the joined walls, the wall join moves with it.
Wall join moves with the preview of the wall being moved

NOTE When you edit the elevation profile of a wall with a mid-end face that is joined to another wall, the vertical
line representing the mid-end face is aligned to the center line of the joined wall, not the actual face of the wall.
When you cancel edit mode, the join cleans up and the vertical line moves to coincide with the face of the joined
wall.
Sketch line indicating mid-end face displays in the middle of the joined wall in edit
mode

462 | Chapter 15 Walls

Joins with Non-Editable Walls
When you are working in a team environment and have enabled worksharing, you can specify whether the
elements in a workset are editable (see Setting Up Worksets on page 1212). Non-editable walls can be joined
and unjoined according to the following guidelines:

■ You can join or unjoin an editable wall and the side face of a non-editable wall or a corner where 2 or
more non-editable walls are already joined.

■ You can delete an editable wall that is joined to a non-editable wall, except as noted below.

■ You cannot join or unjoin an editable wall to a non-editable wall if that would change the shape of the
non-editable wall.

■ You cannot join an editable wall to the end of a non-editable wall. Revit Structure keeps the walls close
together but does not join them and issues a warning. (You can make both walls editable later and join
them.)

■ A wall can resize, even if it is not editable, as happens if you move the wall to which it is joined.

Editing Complex Wall Joins

The Wall Joins tool is not recommended for editing wall joins that involve more than 4 walls, span multiple
floors, or exist in more than one workset. For these more complex joins, use the following basic procedure
to edit individual walls as needed.

NOTE Complex wall joins can have many possible configurations. You may have to step through hundreds of
them to find the desired one.

1 If applicable, set all involved worksets to editable. See Making Worksets Editable on page 1223.
2 Select one of the joined walls, and use its Drag Wall End control to move it out of the join.
3 Drag the wall end back to a different location within the join.

TIP Use snap points, snap lines, and the feedback on the status bar to help pinpoint the new location.

4 If the automatically created join does not produce the desired configuration, you can disallow
joins for the joined end of the selected wall, move it again, and then re-create the join using
the Join Geometry tool.
5 Repeat the previous 3 steps as needed for the selected wall and others in the join,

Allowing/Disallowing Wall Joins

By default, Revit Structure creates a join where 2 walls intersect. But you can disallow joins for a selected
wall whenever necessary. For example, if you want to keep small expansion spaces between walls, you can
do so by disallowing joins for either of the adjacent wall ends.
2 horizontal walls with 3/8-inch expansion space between them

Disallowing joins is also useful for resolving complex joins. For example, if you add a wall to a complex join
and it produces undesired results, you can disallow joins on the added wall and then use the Join Geometry
tool to clean the join between this wall and other walls.

Working with Wall Joins | 463

Selected wall with disallowed join

Wall cleaned up after Join Geometry used

The procedure for disallowing joins varies slightly for the ends of a wall as opposed to any of its mid-end
faces.

To disallow/allow joins for a wall end

1 Select the wall.
2 Right-click the wall end control where you want to disallow the join, and click Disallow Join.
The end of the wall now cannot join to another wall. If you want to allow joins again, right-click the wall
end control, and click Allow Join, or click (Allow Join) above the end of the wall.

To disallow a join on a mid-end face

1 Open a plan view in which the mid-end face is visible, and select the wall.

TIP If only the ends of the wall with the mid-end face are visible, you may need to adjust the cut
plane height. For more information, see View Range on page 864.

2 Click (Disallow Join) above the mid-end face, or right-click, and click Disallow Join. Notice
that changes to .
The mid-end face now cannot join to another wall.

464 | Chapter 15 Walls

Selected mid-end face with join disallowed

If you want to allow joins again, click above the mid-end face, or right-click and click Allow Join.
Selected mid-end face with join allowed

Working with Compound Walls

The structure of vertically compound walls is defined using either layers or regions. The following image
shows the Edit Assembly dialog.
Just as roofs, floors, and ceilings in Revit can consist of multiple horizontal layers, walls can consist of more
than one vertical layer or region. The position, thickness, and material for each layer and region are defined
in the Edit Assembly dialog, which is accessed through the type properties of the wall. You can add, delete,
or modify individual layers and regions, or add sweeps and reveals to customize the wall type.
For basic information common to multi-layer elements in Revit, see Compound Structure on page 573.

NOTE To access the Edit Assembly dialog, select a wall, and on the Properties palette, click Edit Type. In
the Type Properties dialog, for the Structure parameter, click Edit.

Layer rows: correspond to wall layers or regions

A layer is assigned to one row. It has a constant thickness and extends the height of the wall. You can change
its thickness in the row assigned to it.

Working with Compound Walls | 465

Wall layer: constant thickness and extends the height of the wall

A region is any shape in the wall that does not meet the criteria of a layer. Regions can have either constant
or variable thickness. In a row assigned to a region, if region has a constant thickness, a numeric value
appears for it. If the region has a variable thickness, the value is variable. You cannot change a region's
thickness in the row that is assigned to it. Note that the thickness value appears shaded, indicating that it
is unavailable for modification. You can only change its thickness and height graphically in the preview
pane.
Regions: neither region extends the full height of the wall

Because core thickness can vary in vertically compound walls, the core centerline and core face location
lines are determined by the core thickness at the bottom of the wall. For example, if the wall core is thicker
at the top than at the bottom, and you specify the location line as Core Centerline, the centerline of the
core is measured between the core boundaries at the bottom.
You can add wall sweeps or reveals to vertically compound walls. See Wall Sweeps on page 476 and Wall
Reveals on page 482.
You can use various tools to modify the structure of vertically compound walls.

Accessing Vertically Compound Wall Tools

1 In the drawing area, select the wall.

2 On the Properties palette, click Edit Type.

3 In the Type Properties dialog, click Preview to open the preview pane.
All changes you make to the wall occur in the preview pane.

4 Below the preview pane, for View, select Section: Modify type attributes.
5 For the Structure parameter, click Edit.

466 | Chapter 15 Walls

Notice the tools that display at the bottom right of the Edit Assembly dialog under Modify
Vertical Structure.

NOTE The vertically compound wall tools are available in the section preview only. Use them to
modify the wall type only, not an actual wall instance.

Sample Height
The sample height is the height of the wall in the preview pane only. You can specify any value for the
sample height, but it should be high enough to allow you to create the desired wall structure. The sample
height does not affect the height of any walls of that type in the project.

Modify Tool
To change a vertically compound wall, in the Edit Assembly dialog, click Modify. (See Accessing Vertically
Compound Wall Tools on page 466.) Then highlight and select either outer boundaries of the sample wall
or borders between regions in the preview pane. Watch for tools and status bar messages that indicate what
you are highlighting.
After you select a boundary, you can change thickness, set layer extension, or constrain a region's distance
from the top or bottom of the wall.

Changing Thickness
If you select an outer vertical boundary of the sample wall, a temporary dimension displays. If you change
the value of the temporary dimension, the thickness of the layer or region immediately adjacent to the
boundary changes.
If you select a vertical border between regions, 2 temporary dimensions appear which control the thickness
of the regions to the left and right of the border.

Allowing Layer Extension

If you select the horizontal outer boundary at the top or bottom of a layer, you can specify whether that
layer can be extended.
Select a horizontal boundary at the top of the wall, and a padlock displays. A locked padlock indicates that
the selected layer cannot be extended. Click the padlock to unlock it, and the layer can be extended.
Unlocked layer indicating extendability

When you unlock layers for extension, 2 instance properties of the wall become enabled: Top Extension
Distance (for layers at the top of the wall) or Base Extension Distance (for layers at the bottom of the wall).
You can enter values for these properties in the selected wall’s Element Properties, or you can drag the
unlocked wall layers in a view.

NOTE Unlocked layers must be adjacent. For example, you cannot have one layer locked and its adjacent layers
unlocked.

To drag wall layers, modify them in section, 3D, and elevation views.

Working with Compound Walls | 467

To drag wall layers
1 Place the cursor at the top or bottom of the wall and press Tab until you highlight the shape
handle for the extendable layers.
Watch the status bar to be sure you are highlighting the shape handle.

2 Click to select the shape handle.

3 Drag the shape handle up or down.
Dragging layers with the shape handle

TIP If you join 2 walls and they both have a vertical extension, the extended portions will be horizontally joined.
The extension joins must be the same, top-to-top or bottom-to-bottom.

Constraining a Region
To constrain a region a certain distance from the top or bottom of a wall, click the horizontal border between
2 regions. A blue control arrow displays. Clicking the arrow alternates the constraint from the top to the
bottom and displays a temporary dimension that you can edit.
When a region is constrained to the bottom of a wall, the region is always the same distance from the bottom
regardless of how high the wall becomes. Likewise, when a region is constrained from the top, the region
is always the same distance from the top.
Use constraints to keep a trim border or a brick soldier course at a specific height at the top of a building or
a CMU a specific distance from the base of the building. See Split Region Tool on page 469.
Soldier Course Constrained to Top of
Wall

468 | Chapter 15 Walls

Split Region Tool
When editing vertically compound walls, use the Split Region tool to divide a wall layer (or regions)
horizontally or vertically into new regions. When you split a region, the new regions assume the same
material as the original.

■ To split a layer or region horizontally, highlight one of the borders. A preview split line displays when
you highlight a border.
Horizontal split preview

After you split a region or layer horizontally, click the border between the regions. A blue control arrow
displays with a temporary dimension. If you click the arrow, it switches the constraint and its temporary
dimension between the top and bottom of the wall. See Modify Tool on page 467.
Blue control arrow displayed when border is selected

■ To split a layer or region vertically, highlight and select a horizontal boundary. That boundary can be
the outside boundary, or an inside boundary created if you previously split horizontally.
Vertical split preview

TIP Zoom in on the outer horizontal boundary to split it vertically.

Merge Regions Tool

When editing vertically compound walls, use the Merge Regions tool to merge wall regions together
horizontally or vertically into new regions. Highlight a border between regions and click to merge them.
When you merge regions, the position of the cursor when you highlight a border determines which material
prevails after the merge.
The material from the right region prevails when you merge

Working with Compound Walls | 469

The material from the left region prevails when you merge

Assign Layers Tool

When editing vertically compound walls, use the Assign Layers tool to assign a row to a layer or region. (It
assigns the number, material, and function of that row.)
It is more useful to assign layers to regions vertically, rather than horizontally. For example, you might split
finish layer 1 into several regions. Then you could assign another finish row to some of those regions and
create an alternating pattern, such as brick over concrete.
You should familiarize yourself with the layer functions of compound walls. See Applying a Function to a
Layer of a Compound Structure on page 574. Also see Layer Assignment Rules on page 470.

To assign wall layers:

1 Click a row number to select it.
All regions currently assigned to that row are highlighted in the preview pane.

NOTE If the row does not have any regions assigned to it, it displays as a line in the preview pane,
and its thickness is 0.

2 Click Assign Layers.

3 Click the boundary of a region to assign the row to that region.
4 Continue clicking other regions to continue assigning, or click Assign Layers to exit.

Layer Assignment Rules

When assigning layers in walls, consider the following guidelines:

■ Rows of the sample wall in the preview pane must remain in a sequential order from left to right. To test
the sample wall, select row numbers sequentially and observe the selection in the preview pane. If the
layers do not highlight in an order from left to right, Revit Structure cannot produce this wall.

■ A row cannot be assigned more than one layer.

■ You cannot have the same row assigned to regions on both sides of the core.

■ You cannot apply a thickness to a membrane layer.

■ Non-membrane layers cannot have a thickness smaller than 1/8" or 4 mm.

■ A layer in the core must have a thickness greater than 0. You cannot specify a layer in the core as a
membrane layer.

■ The exterior and interior core boundaries and the membrane layer cannot rise up and down.

470 | Chapter 15 Walls

Invalid boundary for core boundaries or membrane layers

■ You can add thickness only to a layer that is straight from the top of the wall to the bottom. You cannot
add thickness to a complex layer, such as the one shown in the following image.

■ You cannot split a wall horizontally and then move the outside boundary of one of the regions
independently of the other. For example, if you select the left outer boundary of the lower region, the
left outer boundary of the upper region is also selected.

■ Layer function priorities cannot ascend from the core boundary to the finish face. For example, you
cannot have a finish layer in the core boundary and then a structure layer at the exterior side.

Sweeps and Reveals Tools

When editing vertically compound walls, use the Sweeps and Reveals tools to control placement and display
of sweeps or reveals on all walls of that type.

To add a sweep to the wall type

1 In the Edit Assembly dialog, click Sweeps.
2 In the Wall Sweeps dialog, click Add.
3 Click in the Profile column, and select a profile from the drop-down.
4 Specify a material for the sweep.
5 For Distance, specify the distance from either the top or base of the wall (select top or base in
the From column).
6 For Side, specify the interior or exterior of the wall.

Working with Compound Walls | 471

7 Specify a value, if necessary, for Offset.
A negative value moves the sweep toward the wall core.

8 Select Flip to measure the distance from the top of the sweep profile rather than the bottom.
9 For Setback, specify the sweep setback distance from inserts, such as windows and doors.
10 Select Cuts Wall if you want the sweep to cut geometry out of the host wall.
When a sweep is offset and embedded in the wall, it cuts the geometry from the wall. In complex
models with many sweeps, you can increase performance by clearing this option.

11 Select Cuttable if you want the sweep to be cut by wall inserts, as shown.

12 Click OK.

To add a reveal to the wall type

1 In the Edit Assembly dialog, click Reveals.
2 In the Reveals dialog, click Add.
3 Select a profile from the list.

NOTE There is no material choice for reveals. The material for the reveal is the same as the material
it is cutting.

4 For Distance, specify the distance from either the top or base of the wall (select top or base in
the From column).
5 For Side, specify the interior or exterior of the wall.
6 Specify a value, if necessary, for Offset.
A negative value moves the reveal toward the wall core.

7 Select Flip to measure the distance from the top of the reveal profile rather than the bottom.
8 For Setback, specify the reveal setback distance from inserts, such as windows and doors.
9 Click OK.

Working with Stacked Walls

Revit Structure includes a Stacked Wall system family for modeling walls that comprise 2 or more subwalls
stacked on top of each other. The subwalls can have different wall thicknesses at different heights. All the
subwalls in a stacked wall are attached and their geometry is joined.

472 | Chapter 15 Walls

Only wall types in the Basic Wall system family can function as subwalls. For example, you can have a
stacked wall comprising an Exterior Brick on Metal Stud and an Exterior CMU on Metal Stud that are attached
and joined.
Using stacked wall types, you can define different wall thicknesses at different heights. You define its structure
using Type Properties.

Defining the Stacked Wall Structure

You can make various changes to a stacked wall to change its structure:

■ You can add or delete walls.

■ You can move subwalls up or down the height of the stacked wall.

■ You can define a reference line for the entire stacked wall, and then offset each subwall from that reference
line.

IMPORTANT Define the structure of vertically stacked walls before placing any instances in the project. Height
conflicts may occur when previously placed instances are lower than the defined height of the type.

To define the structure of a stacked wall:

1 Access the wall’s type properties using one of the following methods:
For example, in the Project Browser, under Families ➤ Walls ➤ Stacked Wall, right-click a stacked
wall type, and click Properties. Alternatively, if you have placed a stacked wall in the project,

select it in the drawing area, and on the Properties palette, click Edit Type.

2 In the Type Properties dialog, click Preview to open the preview pane, which shows a section
view of the selected wall type. All changes you make to the wall display in the preview pane.

Working with Stacked Walls | 473

3 For the Structure parameter, click Edit to open the Edit Assembly dialog. Each row in the Types
table defines a subwall within the stacked wall.
4 For Offset, select the plane that will be used to align the subwalls. (This value is used for the
Location Line instance property for each subwall.)
5 For Sample Height, specify the height for the wall in the preview pane. This value changes if
you insert subwalls whose unconnected height is greater than the sample height.
6 In the Types table, click a number in the left column to select the row defining a subwall, or
click Insert to add a new subwall.
7 In the Name column, click the value, and select the desired subwall type.
8 In the Height column, specify an unconnected height for the subwall.

NOTE One subwall must have a variable, non-editable height that changes relative to the heights of
the other subwalls. To change the height of the variable subwall, change another subwall to variable
by selecting its row and clicking Variable.

9 In the Offset column, specify the distance to offset the location line of the subwall from the
reference line (Offset) of the main wall. A positive value moves the subwall toward the exterior
side (left side in the preview pane) of the main wall.
10 If the subwall is unlocked at the top or bottom, you can enter a positive value in the Top or
Base column to specify a distance to raise the subwall, or a negative value to lower it. These
values determine the subwall’s Top Extension Distance and Base Extension Distance instance
properties respectively.
For more information on unlocking layers, see Allowing Layer Extension on page 467.
If you specify an extension distance for a subwall, the subwall below it attaches to it. For example,
if you specify a Base value of 2 feet for the top subwall, the top of the next subwall down moves
up to attach to the modified wall above it. The value in the Top column for the lower subwall
changes to Attach. The top wall shown below (highlighted in red) has a positive base extension
distance. The lower subwall attaches to it.

11 To flip the subwall about the reference line (Offset) of the main stacked wall, select Flip.
12 To rearrange rows, select a row and click Up or Down.
13 To delete a subwall type, select its row and click Delete.

474 | Chapter 15 Walls

If you delete a subwall with an explicit height, the variable subwall extends to the height of the
other subwalls. If you delete a variable subwall, the subwall above it becomes variable. If there
is only one subwall, you cannot delete it.

14 Click OK.

Breaking Up a Vertically Stacked Wall

To independently control subwalls within a stacked wall, right-click it, and click Break Up.
Once a stacked wall is broken up, the subwalls become independent walls. There is no reassemble tool to
restack them. The base constraint and base offset of each subwall are the same as for the stacked wall. You
can edit instance properties for any of the walls.

Instance Properties for Subwalls

When you define/modify the structure of a stacked wall type, you indirectly change instance properties of
the individual subwalls that compose the stacked wall. When you specify the height, offset, top, and base
of the stacked wall’s subwalls in the Edit Assembly dialog, you are also specifying the corresponding instance
properties of the subwalls: Unconnected Height, Location Line Offset, Top Extension Distance, and Base
Extension Distance, respectively). The only instance properties you can directly specify for subwalls are
Room Bounding and Structural Usage. The remaining properties are inherited from the stacked wall type
and are read-only.

To access the instance properties of a subwall within a stacked wall

1 Select the stacked wall in a section or elevation view.
2 Press Tab as many times as needed to highlight the subwall.
3 When the desired subwall is highlighted, click to display its instance properties on the Properties
palette.

Vertically Stacked Wall Notes

When using vertically stacked walls, consider the following guidelines:

■ All subwalls use the same base constraint and base offset as the stacked wall. This means that a subwall
can be on a certain level, but is actually based on the same level as its associated stacked wall. For example,
if a stacked wall is based on Level 1 but one of its subwalls is on Level 7, the Base Level of that subwall
is Level 1.

■ You can edit the type properties of a basic wall that is a also a subwall. To access the type properties of
the basic wall, in the Type Selector, select the basic wall type, and click Element Properties
drop-down ➤ Type Properties.

■ When you create a wall schedule, the vertically stacked wall does not schedule, but its subwalls do.

■ When you edit the elevation profile of a stacked wall, you edit one main profile. If you break up the
stacked wall, each subwall retains its edited profile.

■ When you highlight a vertically stacked wall in the drawing area, the entire wall highlights first. Press
Tab as needed to highlight individual subwalls. Using a pick box selects only the stacked wall.

■ You can embed a vertically stacked wall in another wall or a curtain panel.

■ Subwalls can host wall sweeps; stacked walls cannot.

Working with Stacked Walls | 475

■ Subwalls cannot be in different phases, worksets, or design options from that of the stacked wall.

■ To place inserts in a vertically stacked wall, you may need to use the Pick Primary Host tool to switch
between the vertically stacked wall and one of the walls that compose it. For example, the door panel in
the following illustration is outside the upper wall because the main host of the door is the bottom
subwall.

To place the door properly, select it, and click Modify | Doors tab ➤ Host panel ➤ Pick Primary
Host. Place the cursor on the wall, and select one of the component walls. You may need to press Tab to
select the desired wall.

Wall Sweeps
This section describes using the Wall Sweep tool to add a baseboard, crown molding, or other type of
decorative horizontal or vertical projection to a wall. You can add a wall sweep to a wall from a 3D or
elevation view. To add a sweep for all walls of a type, you modify the wall structure in the wall’s type
properties. See Sweeps and Reveals Tools on page 471.

476 | Chapter 15 Walls

You can schedule wall sweeps. Integral wall sweeps, which are part of the wall type definition, cannot be
scheduled independently. For more information on creating schedules, see Schedule Overview on page 771.

NOTE If you create wall sweeps at different heights and then later set them to the same height, the sweeps miter
at the joins.

Adding Wall Sweeps

1 Open a 3D or elevation view containing the wall to which you want to add the sweep.

2 Click Home tab ➤ Structure panel ➤ Wall drop-down ➤ Wall Sweep.

3 In the Type Selector on page 35 at the top of the Properties palette, select the desired type of
wall sweep.
4 Click Modify | Place Wall Sweep ➤ Placement panel, and select the orientation of the wall sweep:
Horizontal or Vertical.
5 Place the cursor over the wall to highlight the wall sweep location. Click to place the wall sweep.
6 Add the wall sweep to adjacent walls, if needed.
Revit Structure preselects the wall sweep location on each adjacent wall.
If you are in a 3D view, you can add a wall sweep to all exterior walls by using the ViewCube
to rotate the view. For more information, see ViewCube on page 819.

7 To start a wall sweep in a different location, click Modify | Place Wall Sweep tab ➤ Placement

panel ➤ Wall Sweep Restart. Move the cursor to the desired location on the wall, and
click to place the wall sweep.
8 To finish placing wall sweeps, click Modify.

Wall Sweeps | 477

Related topics

■ Changing the Wall Sweep Profile on page 478

■ Returning Wall Sweeps Back to the Wall on page 478

■ Adding or Removing Segments from a Wall Sweep on page 479

■ Adding a Wall Reveal on page 483

Changing the Wall Sweep Profile

Use this procedure to change the profile of an existing wall sweep or of one you are about to place.

1 Select a wall sweep in a 3D or elevation view, or click Home tab ➤ Structure panel ➤ Wall

drop-down ➤ Wall Sweep.

2 On the Properties palette, click Edit Type, or click Modify | Place Sweep tab ➤ Properties

panel Type Properties.

3 In the Type Properties dialog, for Profile, select the desired profile type.
4 Click OK.

Returning Wall Sweeps Back to the Wall

After placing a wall sweep, you can return its ends back toward the wall.

NOTE This procedure is also available for wall reveals.

1 In a 3D or elevation view, select the wall sweep segment. Be sure it is not already joined to
another segment.

2 Click Modify | Wall Sweeps tab ➤ Wall Sweep panel ➤ Modify Returns.
The Straight Cut and Return options display on the Options Bar. The Straight Cut is a perfectly
squared off edge. This option is not available if the sweep end is already in this state.

3 Select Return, and enter a value for Angle.

478 | Chapter 15 Walls

NOTE A positive return angle moves the sweep end toward the wall. A negative value moves the
sweep end away from the wall. For reveals, a positive return value moves the reveal end away from
the wall, and a negative value moves the end toward the wall.

4 Highlight the wall sweep end.

Highlighted wall sweep end

5 Click to apply the new return value.

Applied return value

In this example, the option Straight Cut becomes available. Select that option, and click the sweep end to
apply a straight cut to the sweep.
After you change the return, you can drag the end of the sweep or reveal to extend the return. Select the
wall sweep, and use the blue dot drag control.
Drag the right blue control

Changing the Wall Sweep Type

1 In the drawing area, select a wall sweep.
2 In the Type Selector on page 35 at the top of the Properties palette, select the desired wall sweep
type.

Adding or Removing Segments from a Wall Sweep

You can continue an existing sweep onto new walls, or remove segments from existing wall sweeps.
1 Open a 3D view and select the desired wall sweep.

2 Click Modify | Wall Sweeps tab ➤ Wall Sweep panel ➤ Add/Remove Walls.
3 Select the walls to continue adding to or removing from the wall sweep.

Wall Sweeps | 479

Resizing Unconnected Wall Sweeps
1 In a 3D or elevation view, select the wall sweep.
2 Drag the wall sweep end to resize it.

Dimensioning to a Wall Sweep

1 Place a dimension between the wall sweep end face reference and another reference.
Dimension references between wall sweep end face and wall

2 To change the dimension value, drag the wall sweep’s shape handle.
The dimension value adjusts accordingly.
Selected shape handle on sweep

Changing a Wall Sweep’s Horizontal or Vertical Offset

To move a single wall sweep segment
1 Select the segment.
2 Move it up or down (horizontal wall sweeps) or side to side (vertical wall sweeps).

To move a multi-segmented wall sweep

1 Place the cursor over the wall sweep and press TAB to select the shape handle of the wall sweep.
Watch the status bar to know when you are highlighting the shape handle.

2 Click to select the shape handle.

3 Move the wall sweep up or down (horizontal wall sweeps) or side to side (vertical wall sweeps).
This affects the offset of all segments of the wall sweep, so the segments are symmetrical.

480 | Chapter 15 Walls

Wall Sweep Type Properties
To modify a type property of a wall sweep, you change the value of the corresponding parameter as described
under Modifying Type Properties on page 38.

NOTE Changing a wall sweep type property will affect all wall sweeps of that type in the project. Note also that
the type name does not update when you change type parameter values. For example, you could use the type
parameter Structure to change the width of the Generic - 6” wall type to 6.5”, but the type name will remain
Generic - 6”. If you want to create a new wall sweep type, click Duplicate. For more information, see Creating a
New Family Type in a Project on page 38.

Common type properties for wall sweeps are described below.

Name Description

Constraints

Cuts Wall Specifies whether the sweep will cut geometry out of the host wall if there is an
overlap. Clearing this parameter can increase performance on large building models
with many sweeps.

Cut by Inserts Specifies whether inserts such as doors and windows cut geometry out of the sweep.
See Sweeps and Reveals Tools on page 471.

Default Setback This value specifies the distance the sweep is set back from each intersecting wall
insert.

Construction

Profile Specifies the profile family used to create the wall sweep.

Materials and Finishes

Material Sets the material of the wall sweep.

Identity Data

Subcategory of Walls By default, wall sweeps are set to the Wall Sweep subcategory of walls. In the Object
Styles dialog, you can create new Wall subcategories and subsequently select one
here. This allows you to modify wall sweep style at a project level using the Object
Styles dialog.

Keynote Add or edit the wall sweep keynote. Click in the value box to open the Keynotes
dialog. See Keynotes on page 938.

Model The model type of the wall sweep.

Manufacturer The manufacturer for the wall sweep’s materials

Type Comments Specific building or design comments.

URL Link to a web page (such as a manufacturer's web page).

Description Description of the wall sweep.

Assembly Description Description of the assembly based on the assembly code selection.

Wall Sweeps | 481

Name Description

Assembly Code Uniformat assembly code selected from a hierarchical list.

Type Mark A value to designate the particular wall sweep. This value must be unique for each
wall sweep in a project. Revit Structure warns you if the number is already used but
allows you to continue using it. You can see the warning using the Review Warnings
tool. See Reviewing Warning Messages on page 1680.

Cost Cost of the materials for constructing the wall sweep. This information can be in-
cluded in a schedule.

Wall Sweep Instance Properties

To modify an instance property of a wall sweep, you change the value of the corresponding parameter, as
described under Modifying Instance Properties on page 36.
Common instance properties for wall sweeps are described below.

Name Description

Constraints

Offset From Wall The distance from the wall face.

Level The level of the wall sweep. This property only appears for horizontal wall sweeps.

Offset From Level The wall sweep’s offset from the level. This property only appears for horizontal wall
sweeps.

Dimensions

Length The length of the wall sweep. This is a read-only parameter.

Identity Data

Comments Enter comments for the wall sweep.

Mark A value to designate the particular wall sweep. This value must be unique for each
wall sweep in a project. Revit Structure warns you if the number is already used but
allows you to continue using it. You can see the warning using the Review Warnings
tool. See Reviewing Warning Messages on page 1680.

Phasing

Phase Created The phase when the wall sweep was created.

Phase Demolished The phase when the wall sweep was demolished.

Wall Reveals
This section describes using the Reveal tool to add a decorative horizontal or vertical cutout to a wall in an
elevation or 3D view. To add a reveal for all walls of a type, you modify the wall structure in the wall’s type
properties. See Sweeps and Reveals Tools on page 471.

482 | Chapter 15 Walls

Adding a Wall Reveal
1 Open a 3D or non-parallel elevation view.

2 Click Home tab ➤ Structure panel ➤ Wall drop-down ➤ Reveal.

3 In the Type Selector on page 35 at the top of the Properties palette, select the desired type of
wall reveal.
4 Click Modify | Place Wall Reveal ➤ Placement panel, and select the orientation of the wall reveal:
Horizontal or Vertical.
5 Place the cursor over the wall to highlight the wall reveal location. Click to place the reveal.
6 Add the reveal to adjacent walls if needed.
Revit Structure preselects the reveal location on each adjacent wall.

7 To finish placing wall reveals, click in the view away from the wall.

Related topics

■ Changing the Wall Reveal Profile on page 484

■ Moving Wall Reveals Away from or Towards the Wall on page 484

■ Changing the Wall Reveal Type on page 484

Wall Reveals | 483

■ Wall Reveal Instance Properties on page 485

Adding or Removing Segments from a Wall Reveal

You can continue an existing reveal onto new walls, or remove segments from a reveal.
1 Open a view that displays the reveal, and select the reveal.

2 Click Modify | Reveals tab ➤ Reveal panel ➤ Add/Remove Walls.

3 Select the walls to continue adding to or removing from the reveal.
4 Click Modify to exit the tool.

Changing the Wall Reveal Profile

Use this procedure to change the profile of an existing wall reveal or of one you are about to place.

1 Select a wall reveal in a 3D or elevation view, or click Home tab ➤ Structure panel ➤ Wall

drop-down ➤ Reveal.

2 On the Properties palette, click Edit Type, or click Modify | Place Reveal tab ➤ Properties

panel ➤ Type Properties.

3 In the Type Properties dialog, for Profile, select the desired profile type.
4 Click OK.

Moving Wall Reveals Away from or Towards the Wall

After placing a wall reveal, you can move its ends away from or toward the wall. The procedure is the same
as moving wall sweeps back to the wall. See Returning Wall Sweeps Back to the Wall on page 478.

Changing the Wall Reveal Type

1 In the drawing area, select a wall reveal.
2 In the Type Selector on page 35 at the top of the Properties palette, select the desired wall reveal
type.

Wall Reveal Type Properties

To modify a type property of a wall reveal, you change the value of the corresponding parameter as described
under Modifying Type Properties on page 38.

NOTE Changing a wall reveal type property will affect all wall reveals of that type in the project. Note also that
the type name does not update when you change type parameter values. For example, you could use the type
parameter Structure to change the width of the Generic - 6” wall type to 6.5”, but the type name will remain
Generic - 6”. If you want to create a new wall reveal type, click Duplicate. For more information, see Creating a
New Family Type in a Project on page 38.

484 | Chapter 15 Walls

Common type properties for wall reveals are described below.

Name Description

Constraints

Default Setback A length value whose default is 0.0. When set to positive or negative values, the
ends of the wall reveal curve pull back or push forward by the designated amount
when they are interrupted at an insert. This allows you to quickly set wall reveals
properly near window or door trims. This value is overwritten when you pull the
ends manually.

Construction

Profile The profile family used to create the reveal.

Wall Reveal Instance Properties

To modify an instance property of a wall reveal, you change the value of the corresponding parameter, as
described under Modifying Instance Properties on page 36.
Common instance properties for wall reveals are described below.

Name Description

Constraints

Offset from wall The distance from the wall face. This setting changes the depth of the reveal.

Level The reveal's level. This property only appears with horizontal reveals.

Offset from level The reveal's offset from the level. This property only appears with horizontal reveals.

Dimensions

Length The length of the reveal.

Wall Best Practices

This section includes tips with working with Revit in the most efficient way.
Refer to the Autodesk white paper, Model Performance Technical Note, for additional information about
Revit best practices.

Tips for Adding Walls

■ When creating the exterior walls of a multi-level building to which you want to add windows before
adding the roof, specify Unconnected Height as the height of the wall on the next level. This ensures
that the wall is high enough to add windows and doors.

■ To flip the orientation of the wall between exterior and interior, select the wall and click the blue flip
controls that are displayed near it. The flip controls always are displayed on the side that Revit Structure
interprets as the exterior side.

Wall Best Practices | 485

■ Walls do not automatically attach to other modelling components, such as roofs and ceilings. You must
explicitly attach them using the Attach and Detach tools. See Attaching Walls to Other Elements on page
453.

■ As you draw a wall, you can offset it from the cursor by specifying a value for Offset on the Options Bar.
You can specify to which location line the offset is measured.

■ You can access wall type properties from the Project Browser. In the Project Browser, expand Families,
expand Walls, expand a wall family, and right-click wall type. Click Properties to access the Type Properties
dialog, where you can modify wall properties.

■ If you rename or create a wall type, indicate the function in the name and specify the Function Type
property (interior, exterior, foundation, retaining, soffit, or core-shaft) in the Type Properties dialog.

■ The top constraint for interior partition walls is set, by default, to the level above.

■ You can drag inserts, such as windows and doors, between 2 walls.
Window placed at a join between 2 walls

■ When an insert is placed between hosts of unequal thickness (as shown above), you can resize the
thickness of the insert relative to its hosts. Select the insert and click Pick Primary Host. Select the host
you want the insert to resize to match. The insert resizes to the selected host's thickness. If you later
delete the host, you delete the insert as well.

■ If you select Radius on the Options Bar, and then join the end of a straight wall to the end of another
straight wall, a fillet is created between the walls at the specified radius.

Tips for Defining Wall Shapes or Openings

■ If you are defining a shape on a wall that is not horizontal or vertical in a plan view, you should draw a
section parallel to the wall before going into the elevation sketch mode. When you go into sketch mode,
the Go To View dialog appears. Revit Structure suggests the section view as the optimal view for editing
the sketch. Click Open View to open that view.

■ You cannot edit the elevation profile of an arc wall.

■ While you edit the elevation profile of a wall that is attached to another element, the wall temporarily
reverts to its original shape and height. For example, if you edit the profile of a wall attached to a roof,
the wall assumes its unconnected height prior to attaching to the roof. As a result, you may find the wall
is not at the right height to complete the elevation profile edits. To change the height, while in sketch
mode, change the value of the Unconnected Height parameter on the Properties palette.
As you edit the elevation profile, keep in mind that after you finish the sketch, the wall top or bottom
attaches only where horizontal lines are coincident with the reference planes in the sketch.

486 | Chapter 15 Walls

Sample edited profile in sketch mode (note top sketch lines that are coincident with
reference planes)

Finished wall attached to roof (non-coincidental horizontal lines from sketch did not
attach)

Tips for Models and Files

■ Avoid over-modeling or over-constraining your model (and walls) to keep the size smaller and less
complicated.

■ Be judicious in showing wall layer information in views, and minimize the level of detail whenever
possible.

Wall Type Properties

To modify a type property of a wall, you change the value of the corresponding parameter as described under
Modifying Type Properties on page 38.

NOTE Changing a wall type property will affect all walls of that type in the project. Note also that the type name
does not update when you change type parameter values. For example, you could use the type parameter Structure
to change the width of the Generic - 6” wall type to 6.5”, but the type name will remain Generic - 6”. If you want
to create a new wall type, click Duplicate. For more information, see Creating a New Family Type in a Project on
page 38.

Common type properties for walls are described below.

Name Description

Construction

Structure Click Edit to create compound walls. See Compound Structure on page 573.

Wrapping at Inserts Sets the layer wrapping of walls at inserts. See Layer Wrapping on page 576.

Wrapping at Ends Sets the layer wrapping of wall end caps. See Setting Layer Wrapping on page 576.

Width Sets the width of the wall.

Tips for Models and Files | 487

Name Description

Function Categorizes the wall as Exterior, Interior, Retaining, Foundation, Soffit, or Core-shaft.
The value should be set to Soffit when the wall is attached to a ceiling. In this case,
the attachment is made to the surface of the ceiling, regardless of the shape of the
ceiling. Function can also be used in scheduling and to create filters that simplify a
model when exporting.

Graphics

Coarse Scale Fill Pattern Sets a fill pattern for a wall in a coarse-scale view. See View Properties on page 873.

Coarse Scale Fill Color Applies a color to the fill pattern for a wall in a coarse-scale view.

Identity Data

Model Generally, this is not an applicable property for walls.

Manufacturer Generally, this is not an applicable property for walls.

Type Comments A field for placing general comments about the wall type.

URL Link to a web page.

Description Description of the wall.

Assembly Description Description of the assembly based on the assembly code selection.

Assembly Code Uniformat assembly code selected from hierarchical list.

Type Mark A value to designate the particular wall. Generally, this is not an applicable property
for walls. This value must be unique for each wall in a project. Revit Structure warns
you if the number is already used but allows you to continue using it. You can see
the warning using the Review Warnings tool. See Reviewing Warning Messages on
page 1680.

Fire Rating Fire rating of the wall.

Cost Cost of the materials for constructing the wall.

Wall Instance Properties

To modify an instance property of a wall, you change the value of the corresponding parameter, as described
under Modifying Instance Properties on page 36.
Common instance properties for walls are described below.

Name Description

Constraints

Location Line A location line for the wall at the specified plane. The wall location line remains the
same for that wall, even if the type changes.

488 | Chapter 15 Walls

Name Description

Location Line Offset (for walls used as Offsets the wall panel the specified distance and in a direction perpendicular to the
panels only) face of the curtain wall.

Base Constraint The base level of the wall. For example, Level 1.

Base Offset The wall's height from its base constraint. This property is available only when the
Base Constraint is set to a level.

Base Is Attached Indicates whether the base of the wall is attached to another model component,
such as a floor (read-only).

Base Extension Distance The distance you have moved the base of the layers in a wall. See Compound
Structure on page 573. This parameter is enabled when layers of a wall are extendable.

Top Constraint Wall height extends to value specified in Unconnected Height.

Unconnected Height The height of the wall when it is sketched.

Top Offset The offset of the wall from the top level. This parameter is enabled only when the
Top Constraint is set to a level.

Top is Attached Indicates whether the wall top is attached to another model component, such as a
roof or ceiling (read-only).

Top Extension Distance The distance you have moved the top of the layers in a wall. See Compound Structure
on page 573. This parameter is enabled when layers of a wall are extendable.

Room Bounding If selected, the wall is part of a room boundary. If cleared, the wall is not part of a
room boundary. This property is read-only before creating a wall. After you draw
the wall, you can select it and then modify this property.

Related to Mass Indicates that the element was created from a mass element. This is a read-only
value.

Structural

Structural Usage The structural usage of the wall. This property is read-only before creating a wall.
After you draw the wall, you can select it and then modify this property.

Dimensions

Length The length of the wall (read-only).

Area The area of the wall (read-only).

Volume The volume of the wall (read-only).

Identity Data

Comments Specific comments added to describe the wall.

Mark A label applied to a wall. Usually a numeric value. This value must be unique for
each wall in a project. Revit Structure warns you if the number is already used but

Wall Instance Properties | 489

Name Description
allows you to continue using it. You can see the warning using the Review Warnings
tool. See Reviewing Warning Messages on page 1680.

Categorize as Indicates whether the wall panel should schedule as a curtain panel or a wall.

Phasing

Phase Created The phase when the wall was created.

Phase Demolished The phase when the wall was demolished.

Troubleshooting Walls

Slow Performance
In Revit 2010, multi-threaded methods for printing and wall join cleanup have been made available.
Multi-threaded hidden line removal for printing has been enabled by default.
■ Due to the operating system overhead of maintaining multiple threads, multiprocessing of wall join
cleanups can experience a minor degradation when only 2 CPU cores are present, but up to a 27%
performance increase when 4 hyper-threaded CPU cores are present. Because 2 CPU core systems remain
the most common configuration of Revit systems as reported by CIP data, multiprocessing of this features
is OFF by default.

■ To enable multiprocessing for wall join cleanup, add the following entries to the Revit.ini file:
[PerformanceOptimizations] ParallelWallJoins=ON

■ To disable multiprocessing for wall join cleanup, you may omit any entries in the
[PerformanceOptimizations] section of the Revit.ini file, or explicitly set the state of either one or both
multiprocessing optimizations: [PerformanceOptimizations] ParallelWallJoins=OFF
ParallelPrintProcessing=OFF

Avoid File Corruption

After creating walls, audit files so Revit will review data structures and correct problems found within the
model.

490 | Chapter 15 Walls

Doors
16
In Revit Structure, doors are hosted components that you can add to any type of wall. Doors can be added in plan, section,
elevation, or 3D views. You select the type of door to add, and then specify its location on the wall. Revit Structure
automatically cuts the opening and places the door.

Door layout in plan view

491
Placing Doors
1 Open a plan, section, elevation, or 3D view.

2 Click Architect & Site tab ➤ Architect panel ➤ Door.

3 If you want to place a door type other than the one displayed in the Type Selector on page 35
at the top of the Properties palette, select a different type from the drop-down.

NOTE To load additional door types from the Revit library, click Place Door tab ➤ Model panel ➤ Load
Family, navigate to the Doors folder, and open the desired family file. You can also download door
families from the Autodesk® Seek website (http://seek.autodesk.com).

4 If you want to tag doors automatically as you place them, click Modify | Place Door tab ➤ Tag

panel ➤ Tag on Placement. Then specify the following tagging options on the Options
Bar:
If you want to… then…

change the orientation of the tag select Horizontal or Vertical.

load additional tags click Tags (see Loading Tag Styles on page 1612).

include a leader line between the tag and the door select Leader.

change the default length of the leader enter a value in the text box to the right of the Leader
check box.

5 Move the cursor over a wall to display a preview image of the door.
When placing the door in plan view, press the Spacebar to flip the door hand from left to right.
To flip the door facing (make it swing in or out), move the cursor closer to the inner or outer
wall edge.
By default, the temporary dimensions indicate the distances from the door centerline to the
centerlines of the nearest perpendicular walls. To change these settings, see Temporary Dimension
Settings on page 1618.

6 When the preview image is at the desired location on the wall, click to place the door.

Related topics

■ Adding Doors to Curtain Walls on page 493

■ Door Tags on page 493

■ Changing the Door Type on page 494

■ Changing the Door Orientation on page 494

■ Moving a Door to a Different Wall on page 494

■ Door Instance Properties on page 495

■ Door Type Properties on page 496

492 | Chapter 16 Doors

Adding Doors to Curtain Walls
In Revit Structure, you add a door to a curtain wall by customizing a curtain panel so that it schedules as a
door.
1 Open a plan, elevation, or 3D view of the curtain wall.
2 Move the cursor over an edge of the curtain panel to be customized until one of its mullions or
the curtain wall highlights.
3 Press Tab until the panel highlights, and then click to select it and display the pin icon.
4 Click the pin icon to unpin the panel.
5 In the Type Selector on page 35 at the top of the Properties palette, select a curtain wall door
to replace the panel. Only curtain wall doors can replace a curtain wall panel.
If necessary, you can load a curtain wall door by clicking Insert tab ➤ Load from Library panel ➤

Load Family. In the Load Family dialog, open the Doors folder, select any door family
with curtain wall in its name, and click Open to load the family into the project.

6 Highlight the mullion under the door, and click to display its pin icon.
7 Click the pin icon to unpin the mullion, and then press Delete.
To delete a curtain wall door, select it and change it back to a curtain wall panel using the Type
Selector.
Curtain wall door

Door Tags
Door tags are annotations that are generally used to enumerate instances of doors within a project by
displaying the value of the door’s Mark property. This value is equal to 1 for the first door you place, and it
increases by 1 for each subsequent door, regardless of type. You can specify that the tags are attached
automatically as you place the doors (see Placing Doors on page 492) or you can attach them later, either
individually (see Applying a Tag By Category on page 945) or all at once (see Tag All Not Tagged on page 947).

Adding Doors to Curtain Walls | 493

A door tag does not display if any part of the tagged door is outside the annotation crop region. For more
information, see Crop Regions on page 849.
To delete a door tag, select the tag in the drawing area, and press Delete.

Changing the Door Type

1 In the drawing area, select the door.
2 In the Type Selector on page 35 at the top of the Properties palette, select a different type from
the drop-down.

Changing the Door Orientation

Use the following procedure to change a door’s hinge side (hand) or swing (facing).
1 In a plan view, select the door.
2 Right-click, and click the desired option:
If you want to… then select…

change the side (right or left) on which the door is Flip Hand. This option is available only for door famil-
hinged ies created with horizontal controls.

change the direction (in or out) in which the door Flip Facing. This option is available only for door
swings families created with vertical controls.

Alternatively, you can click either of the corresponding flip controls (Flip the instance hand or
Flip the instance facing) that display in the drawing when a door is selected.
Door flip controls in plan view and door
in 3D view

Moving a Door to a Different Wall

Note that the following procedure does not apply to curtain wall doors, which are created by customizing
curtain wall panels. For more information, see Adding Doors to Curtain Walls on page 493.
1 Select the door.

2 Click Modify | Doors tab ➤ Host panel ➤ Pick New Host.

3 Move the cursor over another wall, and when the preview image is in the desired location, click
to place the door.

494 | Chapter 16 Doors

Door Instance Properties
To modify an instance property of a door, you change the value of the corresponding parameter, as described
under Modifying Instance Properties on page 36.
Common instance properties for doors are described below.

Name Description

Constraints

Level Indicates the level on which this instance is placed.

Sill Height Specifies the height of the sill in relation to the level on which this
instance is placed.
Changing this value does not change the instance size.

Construction

Frame Type Specifies the type of frame around the door.

You can enter a value or select a previously entered value from the drop-down list.

Materials and Finishes

Frame Material Specifies the material used for the frame.

You can enter a value or select a previously entered value from the drop-down list.

Finish Specifies the finish applied to the frame and door.

You can enter a value or select a previously entered value from the drop-down list.

Identity Data

Comments Displays a comment that you enter or select from the drop-down list.
Once entered, a comment can be selected for other instances of elements in the
same category, regardless of type or family.

Mark Identifies or enumerates a particular instance as specified by the user.

For doors, this property enumerates instances within a category by increasing the
value by 1 for each instance placed. For example, the first door you place in a project
will have a Mark value of 1 by default. The next door you place, regardless of type,
will have a Mark value of 2. If you change this value to one that is already used by
another door, Revit Structure warns you, but allows you to continue using it. The
Mark property of the next door you place will then be assigned the next highest
unused number.

Phasing

Phase Created Specifies the phase when this instance was created.

Phase Demolished Specifies the phase when this instance was demolished.

Other

Head Height Specifies the height of the top of the instance in relation to the level
on which the instance is placed.
Changing this value does not change the instance size.

Door Instance Properties | 495

Door Type Properties
To modify a type property of a door, you change the value of the corresponding parameter as described
under Modifying Type Properties on page 38.

NOTE Changing a door type property will affect all doors of that type in the project. Note also that the type name
does not update when you change type parameter values. For example, you could use the type parameter Structure
to change the width of the Generic - 6” wall type to 6.5”, but the type name will remain Generic - 6”. If you want
to create a new door type, click Duplicate. For more information, see Creating a New Family Type in a Project on
page 38.

Common type properties for doors are described below.

Name Description

Construction

Wall Closure The layer wrapping around the door. It overrides any settings in the host.

Construction Type The type of construction for the door.

Function Indicates whether a door is interior (default value) or exterior. Function is used in
scheduling and to create filters to simplify a model when exporting.

Materials and Finishes

Door Material The material for the door (for example, metal or wood)

Frame Material The material for the door frame.

Dimensions

Thickness The thickness of the door.

Height The height of the door.

Trim Projection Ext The exterior trim projection.

Trim Projection Int The interior trim projection.

Trim Width The width of the door trim.

Width The width of the door.

Rough Width Can be scheduled or exported.

Rough Height Can be scheduled or exported.

Identity Data

Keynote Add or edit the door keynote. Click in the value box to open the Keynotes dialog.
See Keynotes on page 938.

Model The name of the model type of the door.

Manufacturer The name of the door manufacturer.

496 | Chapter 16 Doors

Name Description

Type Comments Comments about the door type. Information can appear in a schedule.

URL Sets a link to a manufacturer web page.

Description Provides a description for the door.

Assembly Description Description of the assembly based on the assembly code selection.

Assembly Code Uniformat assembly code selected from hierarchical list.

Type Mark A value to designate the particular door. This value must be unique for each door
in a project. Revit Structure warns you if the number is already used, but allows you
to continue using it. (You can see the warning using the Review Warnings tool. See
Reviewing Warning Messages on page 1680.) Marks are assigned sequentially. See
Creating Sequential Door or Window Tags on page 950.

Fire Rating The fire rating of the door.

Cost The cost of the door.

OmniClass Number The number from Table 23 of the OmniClass Construction Classification System
that best categorizes the family type.

OmniClass Title The name from Table 23 of the OmniClass Construction Classification System that
best categorizes the family type.

IFC Parameters

Operation The operation of the door, as defined by the current IFC description (for example,
single_swing_left or double_door_double_swing). These values are case-insensitive,
and underscores are optional. (SINGLE_SWING_LEFT and SingleSwingLeft are the
same.)

Door Type Properties | 497

498
Windows
17
In Revit Structure, windows are hosted components that you can add to any type of wall (or to an in-place roof, in the
case of a skylight). Windows can be added in plan, section, elevation, or 3D views. You select the type of window to add,
and then specify its location on the host element. Revit Structure automatically cuts the opening and places the window.

Placing Windows
Use this procedure to add a window to any kind of wall (or to add a skylight to an in-place roof). To add a
window to a curtain wall panel, you must first change the panel to a wall (see Wall Panels in Curtain Walls
on page 630).
1 Open a plan, elevation, section, or 3D view.

2 Click Architect & Site tab ➤ Architect panel ➤ Window.

3 If you want to place a window type other than the one displayed in the Type Selector on page
35 at the top of the Properties palette, select a different type from the drop-down.

499
NOTE To load additional window types from the Revit Library, click Modify | Place Window
tab ➤ Mode panel ➤ Load Family, navigate to the Windows folder, and open the desired family file.
You can also download window families from the Autodesk® Seek website (http://seek.autodesk.com).

4 If you want to tag windows automatically as you place them, click Modify | Place Window

tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag on Placement. Then specify the following tagging options on the
Options Bar:
If you want to… then…

change the orientation of the tag select Horizontal or Vertical.

load additional tags click Tags (see Loading Tag Styles on page 1612).

include a leader line between the tag and the window select Leader.

change the default length of the leader enter a value in the text box to the right of the Leader
check box.

5 Move the cursor over a wall to display a preview image of the window.
By default, the temporary dimensions indicate the distances from the window centerline to the
centerlines of nearest perpendicular walls. To change these settings, see Temporary Dimension
Settings on page 1618.

6 When the preview image is at the desired location on the wall, click to place the window.

Related Topics

■ Changing the Window Type on page 500

■ Window Tags on page 500

■ Changing the Window Orientation on page 501

■ Moving a Window to a Different Wall on page 501

■ Window Instance Properties on page 501

■ Window Type Properties on page 502

Window Tags
Window tags are annotations that generally identify particular types of windows in a drawing by displaying
the value of the window’s Type Mark property. You can specify that window tags are attached automatically
as you place windows (see Placing Windows on page 499) or you can attach them later, either individually
(see Applying a Tag By Category on page 945) or all at once (see Tag All Not Tagged on page 947).
A window tag does not display if any part of the tagged window is outside the annotation crop region. For
more information, see Crop Regions on page 849.
To delete a window tag, select the tag in the drawing area, and press Delete.

Changing the Window Type

1 In the drawing area, select the window.

500 | Chapter 17 Windows

2 In the Type Selector on page 35 at the top of the Properties palette, select a different type from
the drop-down.

Changing the Window Orientation

Use the following procedure to change a window’s horizontal orientation (hand) or vertical orientation
(facing).
1 In a plan view, select the window.
2 Right-click, and click the desired option:
If you want to… then select…

flip the window horizontally Flip Hand. This option is available only for window
families created with horizontal controls.

flip the window vertically Flip Facing. This option is available only for window
families created with vertical controls.

Alternatively, you can click either of the corresponding flip controls (Flip the instance hand or
Flip the instance facing) that display in the drawing when a window is selected.
Window flip controls in plan view and
window in 3D view

Moving a Window to a Different Wall

1 Select the window.

2 Click Modify | Windows tab ➤ Host panel ➤ Pick New Host.

3 Move the cursor over another wall, and when the preview image is in the desired location, click
to place the window.

Window Instance Properties

To modify an instance property of a window, you change the value of the corresponding parameter, as
described under Modifying Instance Properties on page 36.
Common instance properties for walls are described below.

Name Description

Constraints

Level Indicates the level on which this instance is placed.

Changing the Window Orientation | 501

Name Description

Sill Height Specifies the height of the sill in relation to the level on which this instance is placed.
Changing this value does not change the instance size.

Identity Data

Comments Displays a comment that you enter or select from the drop-down list. Once entered,
a comment can be selected for other instances of elements in the same category,
regardless of type or family.

Mark Enumerates instances within a category by increasing this value by 1 for each instance
placed. For example, the first window you place in a project will have a Mark value
of 1 by default. The next window you place, regardless of type, will have a Mark
value of 2. If you change this value to one that is already used by another window,
Revit Structure warns you, but allows you to continue using it. The Mark property
of the next window you place will then be assigned the next highest unused number.

Phasing

Phase Created Specifies the phase when this instance was created. See Creating Phases on page
878.

Phase Demolished Specifies the phase when this instance was demolished. See Demolishing Elements
on page 883.

Other

Head Height Specifies the height of the top of the instance in relation to the level on which the
instance is placed. Changing this value does not change the instance size.

Window Type Properties

To modify a type property of a window, you change the value of the corresponding parameter as described
under Modifying Type Properties on page 38.

NOTE Changing a window type property will affect all windows of that type in the project. Note also that the
type name does not update when you change type parameter values. For example, you could use the type
parameter Structure to change the width of the Generic - 6” wall type to 6.5”, but the type name will remain
Generic - 6”. If you want to create a new window type, click Duplicate. For more information, see Creating a New
Family Type in a Project on page 38.

Common type properties for windows are described below.

Name Description

Construction

Wall Closure This parameter sets the layer wrapping around the window. It overrides any settings
in the host.

Construction Type The type of construction for the window.

Materials and Finishes

502 | Chapter 17 Windows

Name Description

Glass Pane Material The material for the glass panes in the window.

Sash Material The material for the window sash.

Dimensions

Height The height of the opening of the window.

Default Sill Height The height of the bottom of the window above the level.

Width The width of the window.

Window Inset The inset of the window into the wall.

Rough Height The height of the rough opening for the window. Can be scheduled or exported.

Rough Width The width of the rough opening for the window. Can be scheduled or exported.

Identity Data

Assembly code Uniformat assembly code selected from hierarchical list.

Keynote Add or edit the window keynote. Click in the value box to open the Keynotes dialog.
See Keynotes on page 938.

Model The model number of the window.

Manufacturer The manufacturer of the window.

Type Comments Specific comments about the window type.

URL The link to the manufacturer's web page.

Description A specific description of the window type.

Assembly Description Description of the assembly based on the assembly code selection.

Type Mark A specific value to designate the particular window. This value must be unique for
each window in a project. Revit Structure warns you if the number is already used,
but allows you to continue using it. (You can see the warning using the Review
Warnings tool. See Reviewing Warning Messages on page 1680.) Values are assigned
sequentially. See Creating Sequential Door or Window Tags on page 950.

Cost Cost of the window.

OmniClass Number The number from Table 23 of the OmniClass Construction Classification System
that best categorizes the family type.

OmniClass Title The name from Table 23 of the OmniClass Construction Classification System that
best categorizes the family type.

IFC Parameters

Window Type Properties | 503

Name Description

Operation The operation of the window, as defined by the current IFC description (for example,
single_panel or triple_panel_horizontal). These values are case-insensitive, and un-
derscores are optional. (SINGLE_PANEL and SinglePanel are the same.)

504 | Chapter 17 Windows

Components
18
In Revit Structure, components are used to model building elements that are usually delivered and installed on site, such
as doors, windows, furniture, and so on. Components are instances of loadable families and are hosted by other elements,
which are instances of system families. (For more information, see Different Kinds of Families on page 678.) For example,
a door is hosted by a wall, while a freestanding component such as a desk is hosted by a floor or a level.

Revit Structure comes with many components already defined. To create additional components, you define them using
the Family Editor. See The Families Guide on page 680.
This topic describes how to place and move components other than doors and windows, which are placed using different
tools (see Doors on page 491 and Windows on page 499).

Related Topics

■ Placing Components on page 506

■ Moving Components to Different Hosts on page 507
■ Moving Lines and Components with Walls on page 1478

505
Placing Components
Use this procedure to place freestanding components (such as furniture, plumbing fixtures, or plantings)
into a project view.
1 Open a project view appropriate for the type of component you want to place. For example,
you can place a desk in a plan or 3D view, but not in a section or elevation.

2 Click Home tab ➤ Model panel ➤ Component drop-down ➤ Place a Component.

3 In the Type Selector at the top of the Properties palette, select the desired component type.
If the desired component family has not yet been loaded into the project, click Modify | Place

Component tab ➤ Mode panel ➤ Load Family. Then navigate to the appropriate category
folder in the Load Families dialog, select the family, and click Open to add the family to the
Type Selector.

4 If the selected component family has been defined as face-based or work plane-based (see the
Note following this procedure), click one of the following options on the Placement panel,
which displays on the Modify | Place Component tab:

■ Place on Vertical Face. This option is only available for some components and allows
placement only on vertical faces.

■ Place on Face. This option allows placement on faces regardless of orientation.

■ Place on Work Plane. This option requires an active work plane to be defined in the
view (see Setting the Work Plane on page 1517). You can place the component anywhere on
the work plane.

506 | Chapter 18 Components

5 In the drawing area, move the cursor until the preview image of the component is in the desired
location.
6 If you want to change the orientation of the component, press the Spacebar to rotate the preview
image through its available positioning options.
7 When the preview image is in the desired location and orientation, click to place the component.
After you place a component, you can specify that it moves when a nearby wall moves. See
Moving Lines and Components with Walls on page 1478.

NOTE How you can place a component depends on how the component family was originally defined. See The
Families Guide on page 680 for information about the different types of family templates.

Moving Components to Different Hosts

You can move a hosted component or element from its current host to another host using the Pick Host
tool. The procedure varies slightly according to whether the component is work plane-based or face-based
as opposed to level-based. This distinction depends on how the component family was defined. See The
Families Guide on page 680 for information about the different types of family templates.

Moving Work Plane-Based or Face-Based Elements and Components to Different

Hosts
Use the following procedure to move a work plane-based or face-based component or element to a different
work plane or face. Work plane-based elements include lines, beams, and family geometry.
1 In the drawing area, select the work plane-based or face-based element or component.

2 Click Modify | <family category> tab ➤ Work Plane panel ➤ Pick New.
3 On the Placement panel, select one of the following options:

■ Vertical Face (Place on Vertical Face). This option is only available for some
components and allows placement only on vertical faces.

Moving Components to Different Hosts | 507

■ Face (Place on Face). This option allows placement on faces regardless of orientation.

■ Work Plane (Place on Work Plane). This option requires an active work plane to be
defined in the view (see Setting the Work Plane on page 1517). You can place the component
anywhere on the work plane.

4 In the drawing area, move the cursor until the desired new host (face or work plane) is highlighted
and the preview image of the component is in the desired location, and then click to complete
the move.

Moving Level-Based Components to Different Hosts

Use the following procedure to move a level-based component to a different level, floor, or surface. Examples
of level-based components include furniture, plantings, and plumbing fixtures. When you place a level-based
component on a host, it remains on the host's infinite plane. For example, when you place a desk on a floor,
and then drag the desk beyond the confines of the floor, the desk remains on the same plane as the floor.
1 In a section or elevation view, select the level-based component.

2 Click Modify | <family category> ➤ Host panel ➤ Pick New Host.

3 In the drawing area, highlight the desired new host (floor, surface, or level), and click to complete
the move.

508 | Chapter 18 Components

Architectural Columns
19
This topic describes how to add architectural columns to a project. You can use architectural columns to model column
box-outs around structural columns and for decorative applications.

Adding a Column
You can add columns in plan view. The height of the column is defined in the properties of the component.
Using the properties, you can define the Base Level and the Top Level, as well as offsets.

509
1 Click Home tab ➤ Structure panel ➤ Column drop-down ➤ Architectural Column.
2 Click in the drawing area to place the column.

TIP Typically, you align columns when placing them by selecting a grid line or wall. If you randomly placed them

and you want to align them, click Modify tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Align, and select the columns to align.
In the middle of the columns are 2 perpendicular reference planes that you can select for alignment.

Attaching Columns
Columns do not automatically attach to roofs, floors, and ceilings. When you select a column (or multiple
columns) you can attach it to roofs, floors, ceilings, reference planes, structural framing members, and other
reference levels.

To attach columns
1 In the drawing area, select one or more columns.

2 Click Modify | Columns tab ➤ Modify Column panel ➤ Attach Top/Base.

3 On the Options Bar:
■ For Attach Column, select Top or Base to specify which part of the column you are attaching.

■ For Attachment Style, select Cut Column, Cut Target, or Do Not Cut. See Cut Column
Examples on page 510 and Cut Target Examples on page 513.

■ For Attachment Justification, select Minimum Intersection, Intersect Column Midline, or

Maximum Intersection.
The target (roofs, floors, ceilings) can be cut by the column, the column can be cut by the
target, or neither can be cut. After a column is attached to a target, you can edit its properties
and reset the values for the Attachment Justification at Top and Offset from Attachment at
Top instance parameters.

■ Specify Offset from Attachment. Offset from Attachment sets a value to be offset from the
target.

NOTE If the column and target are both structural concrete, they will be cleaned instead of cut. If
the column is structural and the target is non-structural, a warning message appears.

4 In the drawing area, select the target (for example, roof or floor) you want to attach the column
to.

Cut Column Examples

Following are examples of the cut column attachment style with different attachment justifications and
offsets from attachment.

■ Attachment Style: Cut Column

Attachment Justification: Minimum Intersection

510 | Chapter 19 Architectural Columns

■ Attachment Style: Cut Column
Attachment Justification: Maximum Intersection

■ Attachment Style: Cut Column

Attachment Justification: Minimum Intersection
Offset from Attachment: 0’ 6”

Cut Column Examples | 511

■ Attachment Style: Cut Column
Attachment Justification: Intersect Column Midline

512 | Chapter 19 Architectural Columns

Cut Target Examples
Following are examples of the cut target attachment style with different attachment justifications and offsets
from attachment.

■ Attachment Style: Cut Target

Attachment Justification: Minimum Intersection

■ Attachment Style: Cut Target

Attachment Justification: Maximum Intersection

Cut Target Examples | 513

■ Attachment Style: Cut Target
Attachment Justification: Minimum Intersection
Offset from Attachment: On

■ Attachment Style: Cut Target

Attachment Justification: Intersect Column Midline

514 | Chapter 19 Architectural Columns

Detaching Columns
1 In the drawing area, select the column you want to detach. You can select multiple columns.

2 Click Modify Columns tab ➤ Modify Column panel ➤ Detach Top/Base.

3 Click the target you want to detach the column from.
If the column is attached to the target by its top and bottom, click Detach All on the Options
Bar to detach the top and bottom of the column from the target.

Coarse-Scale Cut Patterns

If you join a wall and an architectural column, and the wall has a coarse-scale fill pattern defined, the joined
column assumes that pattern. See Wall Type Properties on page 487. This behavior is evident in coarse-scale
plan and section views. The section view plane must cut through the joined face of the 2 elements.
Wall and column joined (column assumes the fill pattern of the wall)

NOTE Structural columns do not assume the walls fill pattern, even when joined.

Detaching Columns | 515

Modifying Architectural Columns

Changing Column Types

When you activate the Column tool to place columns, you can select different types of columns in theType
Selector on page 35.

Moving a Column
You can move the column by selecting the column and dragging it to the new location.

Architectural Column Type Properties

To modify a type property of an architectural column, you change the value of the corresponding parameter
as described under Modifying Type Properties on page 38.

NOTE Changing an architectural column type property will affect all architectural columns of that type in the
project. Note also that the type name does not update when you change type parameter values. For example,
you could use the type parameter Structure to change the width of the Generic - 6” wall type to 6.5”, but the
type name will remain Generic - 6”. If you want to create a new architectural column type, click Duplicate. For
more information, see Creating a New Family Type in a Project on page 38.

Common type properties for architectural columns are described below.

Name Description

Graphics

Coarse Scale Fill Color Specifies the color of the Coarse Scale Fill Pattern in any coarse plan view.

Coarse Scale Fill Pattern Specifies the cut pattern that displays within the column in any coarse plan view.

Materials and Finishes

Material The material of the column.

Dimensions

Depth Sets the depth of columns when placed.

Offset Base Sets the offset of the column base.

Offset Top Sets the offset of the column top.

Width Sets the width of columns when placed.

Identity Data

Assembly Code Uniformat assembly code selected from a hierarchical list.

Keynote Add or edit the column keynote. Click in the value box to open the Keynotes dialog.
See Keynotes on page 938.

516 | Chapter 19 Architectural Columns

Name Description

Model The model type of the column.

Manufacturer The manufacturer for the column materials

Type comments Specific building or design comments about the column.

URL Sets a link to a web page. For example, a manufacturer's web page.

Description Provides a description of the column.

Assembly Description Description of the assembly based on the assembly code selection.

Type Mark A value to designate the particular column. This value must be unique for each
column in a project. Revit Structure warns you if the number is already used but al-
lows you to continue using it. (You can see the warning using the Review Warnings
tool. See Reviewing Warning Messages on page 1680.)

Cost Cost of the materials for constructing the column. This information can be included
in a schedule.

OmniClass Number The number from Table 23 of the OmniClass Construction Classification System
that best categorizes the family type.

OmniClass Title The name from Table 23 of the OmniClass Construction Classification System that
best categorizes the family type.

Architectural Column Instance Properties

To modify an instance property of an architectural column, you change the value of the corresponding
parameter, as described under Modifying Instance Properties on page 36.
Common instance properties for architectural columns are described below.

Name Description

Constraints

Base Level Specifies the level on which the base of the column rests. The default is Level 1.

Base Offset Specifies distance from the base level. The default is 0.

Top Level Specifies the level that the top of the column reaches. The default is 1.

Top Offset Specifies distance from the top level. The default is 0.

Moves With Grids Columns move when grid lines are moved.

Room Bounding Determines whether the column is room-bounding.

Top is Attached Read-only parameter specifying that the top of the column is attached to a structural
floor or roof. See Attaching Columns on page 510.

Architectural Column Instance Properties | 517

Name Description

Attachment Justification At Top When the column is attached to a surface, sets the top justification for the condition.
Choices are: Minimum Intersection, Intersect Column Midline, Maximum Intersection.

Offset From Attachment At Top When the column is attached to a surface, specifies an offset value for cut tar-
get/column conditions.

Base is Attached Read-only parameter specifying that the base of the column is attached to a surface.
See Attaching Columns on page 510.

Attachment Justification At Base When the column is attached to a surface, sets the base justification for the condition.
Choices are: Minimum Intersection, Intersect Column Midline, Maximum Intersection.

Offset From Attachment At Base When the column is attached to a surface, specifies an offset value for cut tar-
get/column conditions.

Identity Data

Comments Specific comments for the column instance.

Mark Applies a tag to any column for reference purposes. This value must be unique for
each column in a project. Revit Structure warns you if the number is already used
but allows you to continue using it. (You can see the warning using the Review
Warnings tool. See Reviewing Warning Messages on page 1680.)

Phasing

Phase Created The phase when the column was created.

Phase Demolished The phase when the column was demolished.

518 | Chapter 19 Architectural Columns

Roofs
20
In Revit Structure, you can create a roof from a building footprint, as an extrusion, or from a mass instance. A roof cannot
cut through windows or doors.

Roofs Overview
Adding a roof by footprint
■ 2D closed-loop sketch of the roof perimeter

■ Created when you select walls or draw lines in plan view

■ Created at level of view in which it was sketched

■ Height is controlled by Base Height Offset property

■ Openings are defined by additional closed loops

■ Slopes are defined when you apply a slope parameter to sketch lines

519
Roof by footprint

Adding a roof by extrusion

■ Open-loop sketch of the roof profile

■ Created when you use lines and arcs to sketch the profile in an elevation view

■ Height is controlled by the location of the sketch in elevation view

■ Depth is calculated by Revit Structure based on size of sketch, unless you specify start and end points.

It is helpful to use reference planes when sketching the profile of an extruded roof. For example, sketch 3
vertical reference planes parallel to one another, and then sketch a horizontal reference plane that intersects
all 3 vertical planes.
Roof by extrusion

The Roof by Extrusion tool lets you create a roof with simple slopes. To create a roof with complex slopes,
you can use massing.
After you create a roof by extrusion, you can rehost the roof or edit the work plane of the roof.

Adding sloped glazing

You can create sloped glazing using the footprint or extrusion method. Sloped glazing has one or more
slope-defining lines and can join to curtain walls and basic wall types.

520 | Chapter 20 Roofs

Creating a Roof
Add a roof using one of the following methods:

Sketch a roof by footprint

1 Display a floor plan view or a reflected ceiling plan view.

2 Click Architect & Site tab ➤ Architect panel ➤ Roof drop-down ➤ (Roof by Footprint).

NOTE If you try to add a roof on the lowest level, a dialog prompts you to move it to a higher level. If you
choose not to move the roof to a different level, Revit Structure notifies you later if the roof is too low.

3 On the Draw panel, select a sketch or pick tool.

To edit roof properties before sketching, use the Properties palette.

TIP When using Pick Walls, you can specify the overhang before you sketch the roof. On the Options Bar,
select Extend to wall core if you want the overhang to be measured from the core of the wall, and then
specify a value for Overhang.

4 Sketch, or pick, a closed loop for the roof.

5 Specify slope defining lines.

To change the slope definition of a line, select the line and, on the Properties palette, click Defines Roof
Slope. You can then change the slope value.

When a roof line is set to slope defining, this symbol appears adjacent to it.

6 Click (Finish Edit Mode), and then open a 3D view.

Completed gable roof with overhang

Creating a Roof | 521

Sketch a roof by extrusion

1 Display an elevation, 3D, or section view.

2 Click Architect & Site tab ➤ Architect panel ➤ Roof drop-down ➤ (Roof by Extrusion).

3 Specify the work plane.

4 In the Roof Reference Level and Offset dialog, select a value for Level. The highest level in the project
is selected by default.

5 To raise or lower the roof from the reference level, specify a value for Offset.
Revit Structure places a reference plane at the specified offset. Using the reference plane, you can control
the position of the extruded roof in relation to a level.

6 Sketch the profile of the roof as an open loop.

Roof profile sketched using spline tool

7 Click (Finish Edit Mode), and then open a 3D view.

Completed extruded roof

Attach walls to the roof, if desired.

After you create a roof by extrusion, you can rehost the roof or edit the work plane of the roof.

522 | Chapter 20 Roofs

Sketch sloped glazing

1 Click Architect & Site tab ➤ Architect panel ➤ Roof drop-down ➤ (Roof by Footprint) or
(Roof by Extrusion).

NOTE If you try to create a roof on the lowest level, a dialog prompts you to move it to a different level,
ensuring that the roof is higher than any walls joining to it. If you choose not to move the roof to a different
level, Revit Structure notifies you later if the roof is too low.

2 Sketch the roof.

3 If the roof is based on a footprint, specify roof boundary lines as slope-defining, or use the roof slope
arrow to define the slope.

4 Click (Finish Edit Mode).

5 Select the roof, and in the Type Selector, select Sloped Glazing.
You can place curtain grids on the curtain panels of the sloped glazing. Press Tab to switch between
horizontal and vertical grids.
Sloped glazing with mullions and grid lines

Add a roof to another roof

1 To cut off a roof in order to sketch another roof on top of it, select the roof in the drawing area.

2 On the Properties palette, specify a Cutoff Level, and then specify a height for Cutoff Offset.
This property specifies the distance above or below the level at which the roof is cut off.

3 Sketch the new roof on top of the existing roof.

Create a conical roof

If a roof includes a slope-defining arc line, you can specify the number of segments for the line.

1 In the drawing area, select the arc line.

2 On the Properties palette, specify a value for Number of Full Segments.

By default, 4 segments are created. If you specify zero segments, a conical roof is created.

Start and End Points for Extruded Roofs

The extrusion of a roof can extend in either a positive or a negative direction along the plane perpendicular
to the face of a solid component (such as a wall), as shown.

Start and End Points for Extruded Roofs | 523

You can edit the start and end points using the roof properties.

Modifying Roofs
After completing a roof, you can modify its physical structure, change its properties, or join it with another
roof.

Edit the roof sketch

1 In the drawing area, select the roof.

2 Depending on how the roof was created, click Modify | Roofs tab ➤ Mode panel ➤ (Edit Footprint)

or (Edit Profile).

3 Make necessary changes.

If you want to change the position of the roof, use the Properties palette to edit the Base Level and
Offset properties to change the position of the reference plane. If you’re warned that the roof geometry
cannot move, edit the roof sketch, and check for constraints on the sketch, such as between a level line
and a sketch line of the roof.

4 Click (Finish Edit Mode).

Change the roof type

Use one of the following methods to change the roof type:

In sketch mode

1 On the Properties palette, click (Edit Type).

2 In the Type Properties dialog, select a roof type from the Type list.

3 Click OK.

In a project view

1 Select the roof in the project view.

2 In the Type Selector, select a different roof type.

Resize the roof using shape handles

Use this method to resize roofs that were created by footprint or by face.

1 In an elevation or 3D view, select the roof.

2 Drag the shape handle, as desired.

524 | Chapter 20 Roofs

Change the roof overhang
When editing the footprint of a roof, modify properties of its boundary lines to change the roof overhang.

1 In sketch mode, select a boundary line for the roof.

2 On the Properties palette, enter a value for Overhang.

3 Click (Finish Edit Mode).

Cut openings in an extruded roof

1 Select the extruded roof, and click Modify | Roofs tab ➤ Opening panel ➤ (Vertical).

2 If the Go to View dialog displays, select the appropriate plan view in which to edit the profile.
A plan view representation of the roof displays. Reference planes define the boundary of the roof.

3 Sketch closed-loop openings.

Closed-loop sketches in sketch mode

4 Click (Finish Edit Mode).

Closed-loop sketches become vertical cuts
in the roof

Modifying Roofs | 525

Align roof ridges
You can align roof ridges in 3D and elevation views. To align roof ridges in an elevation view, use the Align
tool.

1 In a plan view, add a reference plane:

a Click Home tab ➤ Work Plane panel ➤ (Ref Plane).

b In the drawing area, sketch a reference plane that is not perpendicular to the roof ridges.
Reference plane in plan view

c Select the reference plane, and on the Properties palette, enter a name for the plane.

2 Open the 3D view, and click Home tab ➤ Work Plane panel ➤ (Set).

3 In the Work Plane dialog, select the reference plane name you just created, and click OK.

4 To align roof ridges, use the Align tool.

Unaligned roof ridges

526 | Chapter 20 Roofs

Aligned roof ridges

Joining and Unjoining Roofs

You can join roofs to other roofs or walls, or unjoin them if they were previously joined. This is useful if
you have already sketched roofs and walls and then want to change your design by adding smaller roofs to
create dormers or awnings.

Joining Roofs
NOTE This is a general procedure for joining roofs. You may have variations based on design intent.

1 After you sketch walls and a roof for your design, sketch another roof that you want to join to
the original roof.
Note that you cannot add the second roof by editing the sketch of the first.

2 If desired, set the lines of the second roof to be slope defining, except the roof line that will be
coincident with the first roof or the wall. See Roof Slope on page 528.

3 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ (Default 3D View).

4 On the View Control Bar, for Visual Style, select Shaded.
5 If necessary, spin the design to facilitate selecting the wall or roof edges.

6 Click Modify tab ➤ Geometry panel ➤ (Join/Unjoin Roof).

7 Select an edge of the roof that you want to join, and then select the wall or roof to which you
want to join the roof.
Joined roofs

Unjoining Roofs
The Unjoin tool lets you unjoin geometry with a single click in the drawing area.

Joining and Unjoining Roofs | 527

1 Click Modify tab ➤ Geometry panel ➤ (Join/Unjoin Roof).
2 Select the roof that you want unjoined from everything.
Revit Structure unjoins the roof.

Tips for Joining Roofs

■ The Join/Unjoin Geometry tool does not attach a wall to a roof.

■ You cannot join a roof to more than one top face of another roof.

■ You can join a roof to the top face of another roof and the wall below that roof if you select the wall as
the target. The wall must be attached to the target roof and the target roof must be a footprint roof.
Roof joined to other roof and wall

Roof Slope
You can define the slope of a roof using the following methods:

■ Defines Slope property

■ Slope arrows

Related topics

■ Dormers on page 536

■ Sloped Surfaces Overview on page 579

■ Spot Slopes on page 908

Creating a Roof Slope Using the Defines Slope Property

By applying the Defines Slope property to lines of a roof boundary, you can create different types of roof
lines. (See Examples on page 529.)

1 In sketch mode, select a roof boundary line that defines slope (indicated by ).

528 | Chapter 20 Roofs

2 On the Properties palette, select or clear Defines Roof Slope.
3 To specify roof pitch, select a slope-defining boundary line, click the numeric slope definition
in the drawing area, and enter a value for the slope.

You can specify the format of the Slope property in the Project Units dialog.

Examples
One sloped line forms a flat
roof

Two opposite sloped lines form

a gable

Three or four sloped lines form

a hip roof

Other roof footprints and

sloped lines yield different
results

Related topics

■ Creating a Roof Slope Using Slope Arrows on page 530

■ Aligning Eaves on page 535

Creating a Roof Slope Using the Defines Slope Property | 529

Creating a Roof Slope Using Slope Arrows
You can use slope arrows to create slopes on a roof. See Creating a Sloped Surface Using a Slope Arrow on
page 581.
The following example shows a roof that you can create in Revit Structure using a slope arrow.

Creating a Roof with Different Eave Heights

You can create a roof with slope-defined lines at different elevations by joining 2 separate roofs.

TIP This procedure works best with a multi-level building.

1 Create a footprint roof sketch similar to the following:

2 On the Properties palette, specify a cutoff level for the roof. For example, if you are sketching the roof
on level 2, you might specify level 4 as the cutoff level.

3 Click (Finish Edit Mode).

4 Create another footprint roof sketch at a higher level, similar to the following:

5 Click (Finish Edit Mode).

530 | Chapter 20 Roofs

6 In a 3D view, select both roofs, and click Modify tab ➤ Geometry panel ➤ (Join/Unjoin Roof).

7 View the 2 roofs in a plan view:

You now have a single roof with different eave heights.

Finished house in a rendered view

Creating a Four-Sided Gable Roof

Use slope arrows to create a 4-sided gable roof.

Creating a Roof Slope Using Slope Arrows | 531

NOTE The results of this procedure will differ from the finished pictures.

1 Create a square footprint sketch and designate all sketch lines as non–slope-defining.

2 Click Modify | Create Roof Footprint tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ (Slope Arrow).

3 On the Properties palette, select New <Sketch> from the filter list.

4 Under Constraints, for Specify, select Slope.

5 Under Dimensions, for Slope, enter 9" (or the metric equivalent).

6 Sketch slope arrows as shown.

7 Click (Finish Edit Mode).

8 Open the roof in 3D.

532 | Chapter 20 Roofs

Completed roof

Completed roof on a model

Related topics

■ Sloped Surfaces Overview on page 579

■ Slope Arrow Properties on page 584

■ Creating a Roof Slope Using the Defines Slope Property on page 528

■ Roof Boundary Line Properties on page 550

■ Examples of Roof Slopes

Adding Elements to Roofs

Add elements to a roof in order to complete the roof design.

Eaves
When you sketch a roof, you create eaves by specifying an overhang value. After you complete the sketch
of the roof, you can align eaves and change the eave cut.
Eaves can be cut as

Adding Elements to Roofs | 533

Plumb cut eave

2-cut plumb eave

534 | Chapter 20 Roofs

2-cut square eave

Creating a Plumb Cut, Two-Cut Plumb, or Two-Cut Square Eave

1 In the drawing area, select the roof.
2 On the Properties palette, for Rafter Cut, select Plumb Cut, Two Cut - Plumb, or Two Cut -
Square.
3 For Two Cut - Plumb and Two Cut - Square, specify a value for Fascia Depth between zero and
the thickness of the roof.

Aligning Eaves
Use the Align Eaves tool to realign eave heights of different boundary lines of a roof.

1 While in sketch mode, click Modify | Roofs > Edit Footprint tab ➤ Tools panel ➤ (Align
Eaves).
Dimensions display near the eaves to indicate their height.

2 Select a roof eave line, and then select an option for adjusting eave properties:
■ Adjust Height changes the Plate height from roof base or Offset from roof base value.

■ Adjust Overhang changes the eave height by adjusting the Overhang value.

3 Select the eave that is at the desired overhang/height.

4 Select remaining eaves whose overhang/height is to be adjusted to match the first eave.
As you select the remaining eaves, you can choose between adjusting the height or the overhang
if you created the roof lines using Pick Walls. If you used the sketch tools to draw the lines, only
Adjust Height is available.

5 Click (Finish Edit Mode).

The results of adjusting the overhang are visible after you finish the roof.

Eaves | 535
Changing the Eave Height
After you complete a roof sketch, you can change the height of the eaves so that you create eaves of varying
heights.
1 While in sketch mode, select a slope-defining boundary line.
2 On the Properties palette, specify a value for Offset From Roof Base or Plate Offset From Base.

3 Click (Finish Edit Mode).

Dormers

Creating a Dormer Using Slope Arrows

1 Sketch a roof footprint, including slope-defining lines.

2 While in sketch mode, click Modify | Create Roof Footprint tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ (Split
Element).
3 Split one of the lines in the footprint at 2 points, creating a middle line segment (the dormer
segment), and then click Modify.

4 If the dormer segment is slope-defining ( ), select the line, and on the Properties palette,
clear Defines Roof Slope.

5 Click Modify | Create Roof Footprint tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ (Slope Arrow), and sketch
a slope arrow from one end of the dormer segment to its midpoint.
Correct placement of cursor for slope arrow

6 Click Slope Arrow again, and sketch a second slope arrow from the other end of the dormer
segment to its midpoint.

536 | Chapter 20 Roofs

Properly sketched slope arrows

7 Click (Finish Edit Mode), and open a 3D view to see the results.
Hip roof with dormer

Creating a Dormer Opening in a Roof

1 Start with a building model in which a dormer has been created.

2 Open a plan view or an elevation view in which you can see the dormer roof and the attached
walls. If the roof is extruded, open an elevation view.

Dormers | 537
3 Click Architect & Site tab ➤ Architect panel ➤ Roof drop-down ➤ (Dormer Opening).
4 Highlight the main roof on the building model, and click to select it.
Watch the status bar to be sure that you are highlighting the main roof.
The Pick Roof/Wall Edges tool is active so that you can pick the boundaries that compose the
dormer opening.

5 Place the cursor in the drawing area.

Valid boundaries are highlighted. Valid boundaries are a joined roof or its bottom face, a side
face of a wall, a bottom face of a floor, an edge of the roof to be cut, or a model line on the face
of the roof to be cut.
In this example, side faces of walls and joined faces of the roof were selected. Note that you do
not need to trim the sketch lines to have a valid boundary.

6 Click (Finish Edit Mode).

7 Create a section view through the dormer to see how it cuts the main roof.

Revit Structure makes both vertical and horizontal cuts in the roof.

538 | Chapter 20 Roofs

Dormer opening in a 3D view

Fascia
You can add fascia to edges of roofs, soffits, and other fascias. You can also add fascia to model lines.

You can place fascia in 2D views, such as plan or section views, or 3D views.

Adding Roof Fascia

1 Click Architect & Site tab ➤ Architect panel ➤ Roof drop-down ➤ (Fascia).
2 Highlight edges of roofs, soffits, other fascia, or model lines, and click to place the fascia. Watch
the status bar for information about valid references.
As you click edges, Revit Structure treats this as one continuous fascia. If the fascia segments
meet at corners, they miter.

3 Click Modify | Place Fascia tab ➤ Placement panel ➤ (Restart Fascia) to finish the current
fascia and start a different fascia.
4 Move the cursor to a new edge and click to place.
This different fascia does not miter with other existing fascias, even if they meet at the corners.

5 Click onto white space in the view to finish placing roof fascias.

Fascia | 539
Crown molding fascia

NOTE Fascia profiles miter correctly only around a square cut roof. The roof in this image was created
by running a fascia along the edge of a roof with a Two-Cut Square rafter cut. For information on
setting this property, see Creating a Plumb Cut, Two-Cut Plumb, or Two-Cut Square Eave on page
535.

Resizing or Flipping Roof Fascias

To resize roof fascia
1 In the drawing area, select the fascia.
2 Move the drag controls to the desired location.

To flip roof fascia

1 In the drawing area, select the fascia.
2 If you are in a 3D view, click the flip controls that appear to flip the fascia around the vertical
or horizontal axis.
If you are in a 2D view, right-click the fascia, and click Flip About Horizontal Axis or Flip About
Vertical Axis.

Adding or Removing Segments of the Fascia

1 In the drawing area, select the fascia.

2 Click Modify | Fascias tab ➤ Roof Fascia panel ➤ (Add/Remove Segments).

3 Click a reference edge to add a fascia or remove a fascia. Watch the status bar for information
about valid references.

Changing Mitering Options for Roof Fascia

1 In the drawing area, select the fascia.

2 Click Modify | Fascias tab ➤ Roof Fascia panel ➤ (Modify Mitering).

3 On the Mitering panel, select a mitering option:
■ Vertical

■ Horizontal

■ Perpendicular

4 Click on the end face of the fascia to change the miter option.

540 | Chapter 20 Roofs

Vertical miter

Horizontal miter

Perpendicular miter

5 Press Esc to exit the Modify Mitering tool.

Roof fascias can miter between the eave and rake edges of a plumb-cut gable roof.

Changing Horizontal and Vertical Offset of Roof Fascia

You can change the horizontal or vertical offset of a fascia either through its properties or by graphically
moving the fascia.

Horizontal Move
1 Place the cursor over the fascia and press Tab to highlight the shape handle. The status bar indicates
when you are highlighting the shape handle.

2 Click to select the shape handle.

Fascia | 541
3 Move the cursor left or right to change the horizontal offset.

Vertical Move
Select the fascia and drag it up or down. If the fascia is multi-segmented, then all segments move up or down
the same distance.
Fascia moving vertically in section

Roof Soffits
Use the Roof Soffit tool to create roof soffits.

Adding Roof Soffits

Design intent for creating roof soffits can vary widely. This procedure creates a soffit from a 2-loop sketch
between a wall and a roof. The soffit is associated with the walls and the roof. To create non-associative
soffits, use the Lines tool while in sketch mode.

1 Click Architect & Site tab ➤ Architect panel ➤ Roof drop-down ➤ (Roof Soffit).

2 Click Modify | Create Roof Soffit Boundary tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ (Pick Roof Edges).
This tool creates a locked sketch line.

3 Highlight the roof, and click to select it.

542 | Chapter 20 Roofs

Roof selected with Pick Roof Edges tool

4 Click Modify | Create Roof Soffit Boundary tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ (Pick Walls), highlight the
outside faces of the wall beneath the roof, and click to select.
Wall highlighted for soffit line

Sketch lines for soffit after picking walls

5 Trim the excess sketch lines and close the sketch loop.

Roof Soffits | 543

6 Click (Finish Edit Mode).
To see the soffit better, create a section view through the plan view that shows the wall meeting
the roof.
Roof, soffit, and wall in section view

NOTE The Join Geometry tool was used to join the soffit and the roof in the previous illustration. To
complete the image, join the soffit to the wall, and the wall to the roof.

You can create a sloping soffit by drawing a slope arrow or changing properties of the boundary
line. See Sloped Surfaces on page 579.

Related topic

■ Roof Soffit Examples on page 544

Roof Soffit Examples

Soffit selected in elevation view

544 | Chapter 20 Roofs

Soffits selected on model with gambrel roof

Roof Gutters
You can add gutters to edges of roofs, soffits, and fascia. You can also add gutters to model lines.

You can place gutters in 2D views, such as plan or section views, or 3D views.

Adding Roof Gutters

1 Click Architect & Site tab ➤ Architect panel ➤ Roof drop-down ➤ (Gutter).
2 Highlight horizontal edges of roofs, soffits, fascias, or model lines, and click to place the gutter.
Watch the status bar for information about valid references.
As you click edges, Revit Structure treats this as one continuous gutter.

Roof Gutters | 545

3 Click Modify | Place Gutter tab ➤ Placement panel ➤ (Restart Gutter) to finish the current
gutter and start a different gutter.
4 Move the cursor to a new edge, and click to place.
5 To finish placing gutters, click on white space in the view.
Gutter in section

Related topics

■ Resizing or Flipping Roof Gutters on page 546

■ Adding or Removing Segments of the Gutter on page 546

■ Changing Horizontal and Vertical Offset of Gutters on page 547

■ Roof Gutters on page 545

Resizing or Flipping Roof Gutters

To resize roof gutters
1 In the drawing area, select the gutter.
2 Move the drag controls to the desired location.

To flip roof gutters

1 In the drawing area, select the gutter.
2 If you are in a 3D view, click the flip controls to flip the gutter around the vertical or horizontal
axis.
If you are in a 2D view, right-click the gutter and select Flip About Horizontal Axis or Flip About
Vertical Axis.

Adding or Removing Segments of the Gutter

1 In the drawing area, select the gutter.

2 Click Modify |Gutters tab ➤ Profile panel ➤ (Add/Remove Segments).

3 Click a reference edge to add a gutter or remove a gutter. Watch the status bar for information
about valid references.

546 | Chapter 20 Roofs

Changing Horizontal and Vertical Offset of Gutters
You can change the horizontal or vertical offset of a gutter through its properties or by graphically moving
the gutter.

Horizontal Move
To move a single gutter segment, select the gutter and drag it horizontally.
To move a multi-segmented gutter, you need to select the shape handle of the gutter. Place the cursor over
the gutter and press Tab to highlight the shape handle. Watch the status bar to be sure you are highlighting
the shape handle. Click to select the shape handle. Move the cursor left or right to change the horizontal
offset. This affects the horizontal offset of all segments of the gutter, so that the segments are symmetrical.
Moving gutter on the left also moves gutter on the right

Vertical Move
Select the gutter and drag it up or down. Note that if the gutter is multi-segmented, then all segments move
up or down the same distance.
Gutter moving vertically in section

Roof Properties
You can modify several properties for roofs, including slope and structure. You can also modify parameters
for roof boundary lines, roof fascia, and roof gutters.

Modifying Roof Properties

1 If you are in sketch mode, use the Properties palette to edit roof instance properties as desired.

2 To edit roof type properties, on the Properties palette, click (Edit Type). Change the roof
type parameters as desired, and click OK.

NOTE Changes made to type parameters affect all roofs of this type in the project. You can click
Duplicate to create a new roof type.

Roof Type Properties

Name Description

Construction

Roof Properties | 547

Name Description

Structure Defines the composition of a compound roof. See Compound Structure on page
573.

Default Thickness Indicates the thickness of the roof type, which is determined by the cumulative
thickness of its layers. This is a read-only property.

Graphics

Coarse Scale Fill Pattern The fill pattern for a roof displayed at a coarse detail level.

Coarse Scale Fill Color Applies a color to the fill pattern for a roof in a coarse-scale view.

Identity Data

Keynote Add or edit the roof keynote. Click in the value box to open the Keynotes dialog.
See Keynotes on page 938.

Model The model type for the roof.

Manufacturer The manufacturer of the roof.

Type Comments Comments about the roof.

URL Link for a manufacturer web page.

Description Description of the roof.

Assembly description Description of the assembly, based on the assembly code selection.

Assembly code Uniformat assembly code selected from hierarchical list.

Type Mark A value to designate the particular roof. This value must be unique for each roof in
a project. Revit Structure issues a warning if the number is already used but allows
you to continue using it. You can see the warning using the Review Warnings tool.
See Reviewing Warning Messages on page 1680.

Cost Cost of the roofing material. The cost can be included in a schedule.

Roof Instance Properties

Name Description

Constraints

Work Plane The work plane with which an extruded roof is associated.

Base Level Sets the level for the footprint or extruded roof.

Room Bounding If selected, it means the roof is part of a room boundary. If not selected, it means
the roof is not part of a room boundary. This property is read-only before creating
a roof. After you draw the roof, you can select it and then modify this property.

Related to Mass Indicates the element was created from a mass element. This is a read-only value.

548 | Chapter 20 Roofs

Name Description

Base Offset From Level Sets the height of the roof above or below the level where it is being sketched. This
property is enabled only when creating a roof by footprint.

Cutoff Level Specifies a level above which all footprint roof geometry will be not shown. Roofs
cut in this manner can be combined with another roof to form Dutch Hip, Mansard,
or other roof styles.

Cutoff Offset Height of the cutoff above or below the level specified in Up to Level.

Extrusion Start Sets the start point of the extrusion. For example, if you pick the outer edge of the
wall during creation of the extrusion, the start point starts the extrusion to some
point traveling out from the outer edge of the wall. This parameter is only enabled
for extruded roofs.

Extrusion End Sets the end point of the extrusion. For example, if you pick the outer edge of the
wall during creation of the extrusion, the end point ends the extrusion at some point
out from the outer edge of the wall. This parameter is only enabled for extruded
roofs.

Reference Level The reference level for the roof. The default is the highest level in the project. This
parameter is only enabled for extruded roofs.

Level Offset Raises or lowers the roof from the reference level. This parameter is only enabled
for extruded roofs.

Construction

Fascia Depth The length of the lines defining the fascia.

Rafter Cut Defines the rafter cut on an eave. See Creating a Plumb Cut, Two-Cut Plumb, or
Two-Cut Square Eave on page 535.

Rafter or Truss This property is a switch for the Plate Offset from Base property. If you choose Rafter,
the Plate Offset from Base is measured from the inside of the wall. If you choose
Truss, the Plate Offset from Base is measured from the outside of the wall. To see
the effects of this property more clearly, set a value for Plate Offset from Base other
than 0. (See Roof Boundary Line Properties on page 550.)
This property only affects roofs created by picking walls.

Maximum Ridge Height The maximum height of the top of the roof above the base level of the building.
You can set a maximum allowable ridge height using the Max Ridge Height tool.This
is a read-only value. This property is enabled only when creating a roof by footprint.

Dimensions

Slope Changes the value of the slope-defining line to the specified value, without the need
to edit the sketch. The parameter initially displays a value if there is a slope-defining
line. If there is no slope-defining line, the parameter is blank and disabled.

Thickness Indicates the thickness of the roof.

This is typically a read-only value, unless a shape edit has been applied and its type
contains a variable layer. When the value is writable, it can be used to set a uniform
thickness of the roof. The entry can be blank if the thickness varies. See Variable
Layer Thickness for Roofs and Structural Floors on page 392.

Roof Instance Properties | 549

Name Description

Volume The volume of the roof. This is a read-only value.

Area The area of the roof. This is a read-only value.

Identity Data

Comments Comments about a particular roof.

Mark A label applied to a roof. Usually a numeric value. This value must be unique for
each roof in a project. Revit Structure issues a warning if the number is already used
but allows you to continue using it. You can see the warning using the Review
Warnings tool. See Reviewing Warning Messages on page 1680.

Phasing

Phase Created The phase when the roof was created.

Phase Demolished The phase when the roof was demolished.

Roof Boundary Line Properties

You can change the properties of a roof boundary line when editing the roof footprint.

Name Description

Constraints

Defines Roof Slope For footprint roofs, specifies a roof line to be a slope-defining line.

Overhang Adjusts the horizontal offset of the line from its associated wall. Available only when
picking walls.

Plate Offset From Base The height above the base level at which the wall and the roof meet. This height is
relative to the base level of the roof. The default value is 0. This parameter is enabled
when a roof boundary line is created using Pick Walls. If a sloped footprint roof line
has an overhang, the height of the roof at the eave will be different from the height
at the wall. With this property, you can specify the height at the wall rather than at
the eave.

Offset From Roof Base Specifies the offset of the slope line from the base of the roof. This parameter is en-
abled when a line is set as slope-defining and it is not associated with a wall.

Extend into wall (to core) Specifies the overhang dimension from the roof edge to the exterior core wall. By
default, the overhang dimension is measured from the exterior finish face of the
wall.

Dimensions

Slope Specifies the pitch of the roof. This property specifies the slope angle for slope-de-
fining lines.

Length The actual length of the roof boundary line. This is a read-only value.

550 | Chapter 20 Roofs

Roof Fascia and Gutter Type Properties
Name Description

Construction

Profile The profile shape for the fascia or gutter. Choose from a list of predefined profiles,
or create your own profile using the profile-hosted.rft template. For information
about creating your own profiles, see The Families Guide on page 680.

Materials and Finishes

Material Specifies the look of the fascia or gutter in various views, including a raytraced
model. For more information on setting a material, see Materials on page 1573.

Identity Data

Keynote Add or edit the fascia or gutter keynote. Click in the value box to open the Keynotes
dialog. See Keynotes on page 938.

Model The model type for the fascia or gutter.

Manufacturer The manufacturer of the fascia or gutter material.

Type Comments Comments about the fascia or gutter type.

URL Link for a manufacturer web page.

Description Description of the fascia or gutter.

Assembly Description Description of the assembly, based on the assembly code selection.

Assembly Code Uniformat assembly code selected from hierarchical list.

Type Mark A value to designate the particular fascia or gutter. This value must be unique for
each fascia or gutter in a project. Revit Structure issues a warning if the number is
already used but allows you to continue using it. You can see the warning using the
Review Warnings tool. See Reviewing Warning Messages on page 1680.

Cost Cost of the fascia or gutter. Can be included in a schedule.

Roof Fascia and Gutter Instance Properties

Name Description

Constraints

Vertical Profile Offset Moves the fascia or gutter above or below the edge on which you created it. For
example, if you chose a horizontal roof edge, a fascia moves above or below that
edge.

Horizontal Profile Offset Moves the fascia or gutter forward or backward from the edge on which you created
it.

Dimensions

Roof Fascia and Gutter Type Properties | 551

Name Description

Length The actual length of the fascia or gutter.

Identity Data

Comments Comments about the roof fascia or gutter.

Mark A label applied to roof fascia or gutters. Usually a numeric value. This value must be
unique for each roof fascia or gutter in a project. Revit Structure issues a warning if
the number is already used but allows you to continue using it. You can see the
warning using the Review Warnings tool. See Reviewing Warning Messages on page
1680.

Phasing

Phase Created The phase when the fascia or gutter was created.

Phase Demolished The phase when the fascia or gutter was demolished.

Profile

Angle Rotates the fascia or gutter to the desired angle.

Roof Soffit Type Properties

Name Description

Construction

Structure Defines the composition of a soffit. See Compound Structure on page 573.

Thickness Indicates the thickness of the soffit, which is determined by the cumulative thickness
of its layers. This is a read-only property.

Graphics

Coarse Scale Fill Pattern The fill pattern for a soffit displayed at a coarse detail level.

Coarse Scale Fill Color Applies a color to the fill pattern for a soffit in a coarse-scale view.

Identity Data

Keynote Add or edit the soffit keynote. Click in the value box to open the Keynotes dialog.
See Keynotes on page 938.

Model The model type for the soffit.

Manufacturer The manufacturer of the soffit material.

Type Comments Comments about the soffit type.

URL Link for a manufacturer web page.

Description Description of the soffit.

552 | Chapter 20 Roofs

Name Description

Assembly Description Description of the assembly, based on the assembly code selection.

Assembly Code Uniformat assembly code selected from hierarchical list.

Type Mark A value to designate the particular soffit. This value must be unique for each soffit
in a project. Revit Structure issues a warning if the number is already used but allows
you to continue using it. You can see the warning using the Review Warnings tool.
See Reviewing Warning Messages on page 1680.

Cost Cost of the soffit. Can be included in a schedule.

Roof Soffit Instance Properties

Name Description

Constraints

Level Specifies the level on which to place the soffit.

Height Offset From Level Sets the height of the soffit above or below the level where it is being sketched.

Room Bounding If selected, it means the soffit is part of a room boundary. If not selected, it means
the soffit is not part of a room boundary. This property is read-only before creating
a soffit. After you draw the soffit, you can select it and then modify this property.

Dimensions

Perimeter Indicates the perimeter of the soffit.

Volume The volume of the soffit. This is a read-only value.

Area The area of the soffit. This is a read-only value.

Identity Data

Comments Comments about the roof soffit.

Mark A label applied to roof soffits. Usually a numeric value. This value must be unique
for each soffit in a project. Revit Structure issues a warning if the number is already
used but allows you to continue using it. You can see the warning using the Review
Warnings tool. See Reviewing Warning Messages on page 1680.

Phasing

Phase Created The phase when the soffit was created.

Phase Demolished The phase when the soffit was demolished.

Roof Soffit Instance Properties | 553

Troubleshooting Roofs
Read the following topics to learn about issues with roofs and related elements.

Can’t Create Curtain Panel

Error: Can't create curtain panel. A panel or a mullion is probably too small.
Issue: Typically, this problem occurs in a panel on a sloped glazing. A horizontal and vertical curtain grid
on a panel are not meeting exactly at a point, creating a small triangular panel within the main panel. The
triangular panel cannot be accurately regenerated, because it is too small. This error can result from placing
curtain grids, or moving one in such a way that the small triangular panel displays. Also, the triangle can
display, if you created vertical grids and then placed a horizontal grid that did not snap to the vertical grids.
Solution: Cancel the placement and/or the movement of the grid. When dividing the panels in a sloped
glazing, it is best to start with the placement of horizontal curtain grids and then snap vertical grids to the
horizontal grid.

Cannot Create Curtain Panel in Opening

Error: Cannot create curtain panel in opening. The opening is probably too small.
Issue: Typically, this problem occurs in a sloped glazing. A horizontal and vertical curtain grid are not meeting
exactly at a point, creating a small triangular panel, which cannot support mullions.
Solution: Cancel the placement of the mullion. When dividing the panels in a sloped glazing, it is best to
start with the placement of horizontal curtain grids and then snap vertical grids to the horizontal grid.

Extruded Roof Must Face Upward

Warning: All parts of an extruded roof must face upward. Make sure that no part of the sketch lies below
any other part of the sketch.
Issue: You have sketched an extruded roof in such a way that a part of the roof will lay under another part.
Or you may have drawn vertical lines as part of your roof.
Solution: Sketch the roof edge such that lines join, but do not pass underneath one another. Also, remove
any vertical lines in the sketch.

554 | Chapter 20 Roofs

Floors
21
You create floors by sketching them, either by picking walls or by using the Line tool. Typically, you sketch a floor in a
plan view, although you can use a 3D view if the work plane of the 3D view is set to the work plane of a plan view. Floors
are offset downward from the level on which they are sketched.
In a conceptual design, you can use floor area faces to analyze masses, and create floors from a mass. For more information,
see Analyzing a Conceptual Design on page 1335 and Creating Floors from Mass Floors on page 1362.

Adding Floors

1 Click Home tab ➤ Structure panel ➤ Floor drop-down ➤ Architectural Floor.

2 Draw the floor boundaries, using one of the following methods:
■ Pick walls: By default, Pick Walls is active. (If it is not active, click Modify | Create Floor

Boundary tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ (Pick Walls).) Select walls in the drawing area to use as
floor boundaries.

555
■ Sketch boundaries: To sketch the profile of the floor, click Modify | Create Floor Boundary
tab ➤ Draw panel, and select a sketching tool. See Sketching on page 1405.

The floor boundary must be a closed loop (profile). To create an opening in the floor, you can
sketch another closed loop where you want the opening to appear.

3 On the Options Bar, for Offset, specify an offset for the floor edges.

NOTE When you are using Pick Walls, select Extend into wall (to core) to measure the offset from
the wall's core.

4 Click Finish Edit Mode.

Changing the Floor Type

To change the floor type in sketch mode

1 On the Properties Palette on page 34, click Edit Type.

2 In the Type Properties dialog, for Type, select a different floor type.
3 Click OK.

To change the floor type in a project view

1 Select the floor in the project view.
Watch the tooltip and the status bar to be sure you select the floor, not another element. If
desired, you can use a filter to select the floor. See Selecting Elements Using a Filter on page 1442.

2 In the Type Selector on page 35 select the desired floor type from the drop-down.

Editing a Floor Sketch

1 In a plan view, select the floor.
Watch the tooltip and the status bar to be sure you select the floor, not another element. If
desired, you can use a filter to select the floor. See Selecting Elements Using a Filter on page 1442.

2 Click Modify | Floors tab ➤ Mode panel ➤ Edit Boundary.

3 Make any necessary changes.
See Sketching on page 1405.

4 Click Finish Edit Mode.

Sloped Floors
To create a sloped floor, use one of the following methods:

■ Draw a slope arrow while sketching or editing the floor boundary.

556 | Chapter 21 Floors

■ Specify a value for the Offset from Base property for parallel floor sketch lines.

■ Specify a value for the Defines Slope and Slope properties for a single floor sketch line.

A sloped floor in a cinema

Related topics

■ Sloped Surfaces Overview on page 579

■ Sloped Structural Floors on page 372

Multi-layer Floors
In a multi-layer floor, the graphic display of the lines (or edges) between the floor layers can be controlled
through the floor subcategories and by overriding the host layers of the floor.
The Common Edges subcategory specifies the graphic display of the lines between layers in a multi-layer
floor. The Interior Edges subcategory is applied to edges between adjacent layers that have the same override
style.
You can edit the graphic display of floor subcategories from the Visibility/Graphics dialog. See Overriding
Graphic Display of Element Categories on page 803. To edit host layers, see Override Cut Line Styles on page
814.

Floor Properties
You can modify several properties for floors, including the slope and the level.

Related topics

■ Slope Arrow Properties on page 584

■ Boundary Line Properties for Sloped Surfaces on page 585

Modifying Floor Properties

1 Modify the instance properties of a floor by changing corresponding parameter values on the
Properties palette.

Multi-layer Floors | 557

See Floor Instance Properties on page 559.

2 To access/modify the floor type properties, on the Properties palette, click Edit Type.
See Floor Type Properties on page 558.

NOTE Changes made to type parameters affect all floors of this type in the project. You can click
Duplicate to create a new floor type.

Floor Type Properties

Name Description

Construction

Structure Creates the composition of a compound floor. See Compound Structure on page
573.

Default Thickness Indicates the thickness of a floor type, which is determined by the cumulative
thickness of its layers. See Shape Editing for Structural Floors, Roofs, and Floors on
page 386.

Function Indicates whether a floor is interior or exterior. Function is used in scheduling and
to create filters to simplify a model when exporting.

Graphics

Coarse Scale Fill Pattern Specifies a fill pattern for a floor in a coarse-scale view. See View Properties on page
873

Coarse Scale Fill Color Applies a color to the fill pattern for a floor in a coarse-scale view.

Identity Data

Keynote Add or edit the floor keynote. Click in the value box to open the Keynotes dialog.
See Keynotes on page 938.

Model The model type of the floor.

Manufacturer The manufacturer of the flooring material.

Type Comments Comments about the floor type. This information can be included in a schedule.

558 | Chapter 21 Floors

Name Description

URL Link for a manufacturer web page.

Description Provides a description of the floor.

Assembly description Describes the assembly based on the assembly code selection. This is a read-only
value.

Assembly Code Uniformat assembly code selected from a hierarchical list.

Cost Cost of the flooring. This can be included in a schedule.

Floor Instance Properties

Name Description

Constraints

Level The level to which the floor is constrained.

Height Offset from Level Specifies the elevation of the top of the floor relative to the Level parameter.

Room Bounding Indicates that the floor is a room-bounding element.

Related to Mass Indicates the element was created from a mass element. this is a read-only value.

Structural

Structural Indicates that the element has an analytical model.

Rebar Cover - Top Face The rebar cover distance from the floor top face. See Rebar Cover on page 399.

Rebar Cover - Bottom Face The rebar cover distance from the floor bottom face. See Rebar Cover on page
399.

Rebar Cover - Other Faces The rebar cover distance from the floor to adjacent element faces. See Rebar
Cover on page 399.

Estimated Reinforcement Volume Specifies the estimated reinforcement volume of the selected element. This is a
read-only parameter that only displays when rebar has been placed.

Structural Floor Shape Edit

Dimensions

Floor Instance Properties | 559

Name Description

Perimeter The perimeter of the floor. This is a read-only value.

Area The area of the floor. This is a read-only value.

Volume The volume of the floor. This is a read-only value.

Identity Data

Comments Specific comments related to the floor that are not already defined in the descrip-
tion or type comments.

Design Option If design options have been created, this property indicates the design option
in which the element exists. For more information see Design Options on page
653.

Phasing

Phase Created The phase when the floor was created. See Project Phasing on page 877.

Phase Demolished The phase when the floor was demolished. See Project Phasing on page 877.

Structural Analysis

Structural Usage Specifies the structural usage of the floor.

Analytical Model

Vertical Projection The plane of the floor used for analysis and design. See Projection Plane Options
for each Structural Element Type on page 1301.

560 | Chapter 21 Floors

Openings
22
Use the Opening tool to cut openings in walls, floors, ceilings, roofs, structural beams, braces, and structural columns.

■ When you cut a floor, ceiling, or roof, you can choose to cut vertically or perpendicular to the surface. You can also
sketch complex shapes using the drawing tools.
■ When cutting an opening in a wall, you can sketch a rectangular opening in a straight or arc wall. (For walls, you can
create rectangular openings only. You cannot create round or polygon shapes.)

For information on cutting openings in structural beams, braces, and structural columns, see Openings in a Structural
Beam, Brace, or Structural Column on page 343.
You can also cut openings in structural floors and decks. For more information, see Openings in Structural Floors on page
372.
When creating a family, you can sketch an opening in family geometry. See The Families Guide on page 680.
Examples of a roof opening, a dormer cut, and a stairway
opening through the floor and ceiling

561
Cutting Rectangular Openings in Walls
Use this procedure to cut rectangular openings in a straight or curved wall. (To cut round or polygon openings,
see Editing the Profile of a Wall on page 455.)
View of an opening in a wall

To cut a rectangular opening in a wall

1 Open an elevation or section view where you can access the wall that will host the opening.

2 Click Home tab ➤ Opening panel ➤ Wall Opening.

3 Select the wall that will host the opening.
4 Sketch a rectangular opening.
Wall elevation view with opening being sketched

After you specify the final point of the opening, the opening displays.

5 To modify an opening, click Modify, and select the opening.

562 | Chapter 22 Openings

Modifying a selected opening

You can use the drag controls to modify the size and location of the opening. You can also drag
it to a new location on the same wall, and add dimension to the opening.

Cutting Openings in Floors, Roofs, and Ceilings

Use this procedure to cut an opening in a roof, floor, or ceiling (for example, to accommodate a chimney).
You can cut openings in the faces of these elements, or you can select the entire element to make a vertical
cut.

1 Click Home tab ➤ Opening panel, and select By Face or Vertical.

Use the By Face option when you want the opening to be perpendicular to the selected face.
Use the Vertical option when you want the opening to be perpendicular to a level.

2 If you chose By Face, select a face in the floor, ceiling, or roof. If you chose Vertical, select the
entire element.
Selected face for opening by face

Selected element for vertical cut

Cutting Openings in Floors, Roofs, and Ceilings | 563

Revit Structure enters sketch mode, where you can create an opening of any shape. For more
information about sketching, see Sketching on page 1405.

3 Click Finish Opening.

Cutting Shaft Openings

Use this procedure to place an opening that extends through the entire height of a building (or through
selected levels) cutting through the faces of roofs, floors, or ceilings simultaneously.

1 Click Home tab ➤ Opening panel ➤ Shaft.

2 Sketch a shaft opening by drawing lines or by picking walls.

TIP Typically you will want to sketch the shaft on a host element, such as a floor, in a plan view.

3 If desired, add symbolic lines to the opening.

4 When you are done sketching the shaft, click Finish Opening.
Shaft opening with symbolic lines

5 To adjust the levels that the opening cuts, select it, and make the following adjustments on the
Properties palette:
■ For Base Constraint, specify a level for the start point of the shaft.

■ For Top Constraint, specify a level for the end point of the shaft.

6 Click Apply.
The shaft cuts through and is visible on all intermediate levels. If you move the shaft on any
level, it moves on all levels. The symbolic lines are visible on all levels too.

564 | Chapter 22 Openings

Model Text
23
Model text is a work plane-based 3D element that you can use for signs or lettering on a building or wall.

You can add model text in a project view and in the Family Editor for families that can be represented in 3D, such as walls,
doors, windows, and furniture. Model text is not available for families that can only be represented in 2D, such as
annotations, detail components, and profiles.
You can specify many properties for model text, including font, size, and material.

Effect of Cut Plane on Model Text

If model text intersects the cut plane of a view, it is shown as cut in a plan view. See View Range Properties on page 867.
If a family is shown as cut, the model text saved with a family is cut in plan or reflected ceiling plan views. If the family
is not cuttable, it is not shown as cut. For more information on which families can be shown cut, see Managing Family
Visibility and Detail Level on page 1619.

565
Adding Model Text
1 Set the work plane where you want the text to display.
See Work Planes on page 1517.

2 Click Home tab ➤ Model panel ➤ Model Text.

3 In the Edit Text dialog, enter the text, and click OK.
4 Place the cursor in the drawing area.
A preview image of the model text displays as you move the cursor.

5 Move the cursor to the desired location, and click to place the model text.

Related topics

■ Editing Model Text on page 566

■ Moving Model Text on page 566

■ Model Text Instance Properties on page 567

■ Model Text Type Properties on page 568

Editing Model Text

NOTE Model text saved with a family and loaded into a project cannot be edited in the project view.

1 In the drawing area, select the model text.

2 Click Modify | Generic Models tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Edit Text.

3 In the Edit Text dialog, change the text as desired.
4 Click OK.

Moving Model Text

Move model text to a new location in the same work plane
1 In the drawing area, select the model text.
2 Drag the model text to a new location.

Move model text to a new work plane

1 In the drawing area, select the model text.

2 Click Modify | Generic Models tab ➤ Work Plane panel ➤ Edit Work Plane. See Work
Planes on page 1517.

Move model text to a new host

1 In the drawing area, select the model text.

566 | Chapter 23 Model Text

2 Click Modify | Generic Models tab ➤ Work Plane panel ➤ Pick New.
See Moving Components to Different Hosts on page 507.

Model Text Instance Properties

To modify an instance property of model text, you change the value of the corresponding parameter, as
described underModifying Instance Properties on page 36.
Common instance properties for model text are described below.

Name Description

Constraints

Work Plane Identifies the work plane on which this instance is placed.

Graphics

Text Opens the Edit Text dialog when you click Edit.

Horizontal Align Specifies the justification of the text when there are multiple lines. Lines justify to
each other.

Materials and Finishes

Material Opens the Materials dialog when you click the button to the right of the current
value. For more information, see Applying Materials to Elements on page 1576.

Dimensions

Depth Specifies the depth of the typeface.

Identity Data

Comments Specific comments about the model text.

Mark Enumerates instances within a category. If you change this value to one that is
already used by another model text instance, Revit Structure warns you, but allows
you to continue using it.

Subcategory Displays the default category (Generic Models) or a subcategory you select from
the drop-down list if you have defined subcategories for using Manage tab ➤ Project
Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Object Styles. When defining object styles
for the subcategory, you can define its color, line weight, and other properties. You
can then control the display of the model text by turning the visibility of the subcat-
egory on or off using View tab ➤ Graphics panel ➤ Visibility/Graphics. See Object
Styles on page 1601 and Visibility and Graphic Display in Project Views on page 801.

Phasing

Phase Created Specifies the phase when this instance was created. See Creating Phases on page
878.

Model Text Instance Properties | 567

Name Description

Phase Demolished Specifies the phase when this instance was demolished. See Demolishing Elements
on page 883.

Model Text Type Properties

To modify a type property of model text, you change the value of the corresponding parameter as described
underModifying Type Properties on page 38.

NOTE Changing a model text type property will affect all model text of that type in the project. Note also that
the type name does not update when you change type parameter values. For example, you could use the type
parameter Structure to change the width of the Generic - 6” wall type to 6.5”, but the type name will remain
Generic - 6”. If you want to create a new model text type, click Duplicate. For more information, see Creating a
New Family Type in a Project on page 38.

Common type properties for model text are described below.

Name Description

Text

Text Font Sets the model text font.

Text Size Sets the text size.

Bold Sets the typeface to bold.

Italic Sets the typeface to italic.

Identity Data

Keynote Add or edit the model text keynote. Click in the value box to open the Keynotes
dialog. See Keynotes on page 938.

Model Definition of the model text model.

Manufacturer Definition of the model text manufacturer.

Type Comments Model text comments.

URL Sets applicable URL.

Description Model text description.

Assembly Description Description of the assembly based on the assembly code selection.

Assembly Code Uniformat assembly code selected from a hierarchical list.

Type Mark Sets the model text type mark.

Cost The model text cost.

568 | Chapter 23 Model Text

Model Lines
24
Model lines are work plane-based elements that exist in 3D space and are visible in all views. They can be drawn straight
or curved, either singly or in chains, or in the shape of a rectangle, circle, ellipse, or other polygon. (For detailed instructions
on the available sketching options, see Sketching Elements on page 1406.) Because they exist in 3D space, you can use model
lines to represent geometry such as cords or cables supporting a tarp.

In contrast to model lines, detail lines exist only in the view they are drawn in (see Detail Lines on page 969). You can
convert model lines to detail lines, and vice-versa. See Converting Line Types on page 570.

Placing Model Lines

1 Click Home tab ➤ Model panel ➤ Model Line.

2 Click Modify | Place Lines tab ➤ Draw panel, and select a sketching option or Pick Lines
to create lines by selecting lines or walls within the model.
3 If you want to use a different line style than the one shown on Line Style panel, select one from
the Line Style drop-down.
For information about creating additional line styles, see Line Styles on page 1602. Note that line
styles are not available for model lines created in sketch mode.

569
4 On the Options Bar, specify the following options as appropriate for the type of model line you
are drawing:
If you want to… then…

draw the model line on a plane other than select a different level or plane from the
the current value of Placement Plane drop-down. If the desired plane is not lis-
ted, select Pick, and use the Work Plane
dialog to specify a plane. See Setting the
Work Plane on page 1517.

draw multiple connected line segments select Chain.

offset the model line, either from the cursor enter a value for Offset.
position or from an edge you select in the
drawing area

specify a radius for a circle or curved select Radius, and enter a value.
model line or for filleted corners on a rect-
angle or filleted joins between chained
lines

For more information on these options, see Sketching Elements on page 1406.

5 In the drawing area, draw the model line, or click an existing line or edge, depending on the
sketching option you are using.

TIP After you click to specify the start point of a straight model line, you can quickly set its length
by typing a value for the temporary dimension that displays with the line. Likewise, you can enter a
radius value for circles or curves, 2 radius values for ellipses, or —for polygons— the distance from
the center to the vertices or sides.

Like components, model lines can move with nearby elements, provided they are sketched parallel to that
element. For example, if you draw a wall and then draw a line parallel to that wall, the line can move with
the wall if you select the Moves With Nearby Elements option on the Options Bar, or choose it from the
properties of the line. An arc line can move with an arc wall if the 2 are concentric. See Moving Lines and
Components with Walls on page 1478.

Related topics

■ Converting Line Types on page 570

■ Model Line Instance Properties on page 571

■ Detail Lines on page 969

Converting Line Types

When you import a file and explode it in Revit Structure, the import lines are converted to model lines. If
this is not the line type you want to work with, you can use the Convert Lines tool to convert model lines
to detail lines. Then, using Convert Lines, you can convert the lines back to their original line type. In
families, you can convert symbolic lines to model lines, and vice-versa.
Convert Lines is also useful if you want to convert lines that were mistakenly drawn as the wrong line type.
During conversion, Revit Structure remaps the styles of, and references to, the lines being converted. See
Exploding Imported Geometry on page 75 for more information about importing files into Revit Structure.

570 | Chapter 24 Model Lines

NOTE When using Convert Lines, the active view must support the new line type.

To convert a line type

1 Make sure the active view supports the line type to which you are converting.
2 In the drawing area, select the lines to be converted (model, detail, or symbolic).

3 Click Modify Lines tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Convert Lines.

NOTE If your current selection has both model and detail or symbolic lines, the Specify Lines to
Convert dialog displays, and prompts you to specify which type of line you want to convert.

Model Line Instance Properties

To modify model line instance properties, see Modifying Instance Properties on page 36.

Parameter Description

Constraints

Work Plane Identifies the work plane on which this line is placed.

Moves With Nearby Elements Determines whether the line moves when a nearby element is moved.

Graphics

Line Style Specifies the line style type as defined in the Object Styles dialog. See Object Styles
on page 1601.

Center mark visible Indicates whether the center mark displays for an arc, circle, tangent or fillet model
line. You can dimension to the center mark.

Detail Line Indicates whether the line is a detail line.

Dimensions

Length Specifies the actual length of the line.

Identity Data

Design Option Indicates the design option in which this element exists, if applicable. For more in-
formation, see Design Options on page 653.

Phasing

Phase Created Specifies the phase when this instance was created. See Creating Phases on page
878.

Phase Demolished Specifies the phase when this instance was demolished. See Demolishing Elements
on page 883.

Model Line Instance Properties | 571

572
Compound Structure
25
Walls, floors, ceilings, and roofs can be composed of parallel layers. A layer can consist of a single continuous plane of
material (such as plywood) or multiple materials (such as gypsum board, studs, insulation, air spaces, bricks, and sheathing).
In addition, each layer within the component serves a particular purpose. For example, some layers provide structural
support, while others act as thermal barriers. Revit Structure considers the function of each layer and matches the layers
appropriately.
You can represent each layer by setting the layer's material, thickness, and function. You typically see compound geometry
in floor plans, reflected ceiling plans, and sections. They display in hidden line and wireframe views. See Hidden Line
Visual Style on page 869 and Wireframe Visual Style on page 868.
7-layer wall shown in plan view

Materials in Compound Geometry

Each layer in a compound structure is typically displayed with some type of material. For example, one layer
might be the air infiltration barrier, another is plywood, followed by a layer of wood. Revit Structure has
several predefined materials, or you can create your own using the Materials tool. See Materials on page 1573.

Layer Pattern Display

The material on layers displays with fill patterns. To see the fill pattern in a coarse-scale view, set the Coarse
Scale Fill Pattern and Coarse Scale Fill Color properties of the compound structure. To see the fill pattern in
a medium or fine detail level, change the Detail Level parameter of the View Properties to medium or fine.
See View Properties on page 873.

Layer Join Cleanup

Compound layer joins clean up only if the layers share the same material. For example, a compound floor
layer can join to a compound wall layer if both layers are drywall. If the layers do not clean up, then a solid
line appears between them in the join. See Materials on page 1573.

573
Applying a Function to a Layer of a Compound Structure
You assign each layer a specific function so the layer can join to its corresponding functional layer. Layer
functions have an order of precedence.

Rules for Layer Joins

■ The structure layer has the highest priority, Priority 1.

■ Finish 2 has the lowest priority, Priority 5.

■ Revit Structure connects high priority layers before connecting layers with the lowest priority.
For example, suppose that you join 2 compound walls. A layer in the first wall with Priority 1 joins to a
layer with Priority 1 in the second wall. That Priority 1 layer can pass through lower priority layers before
joining to the other Priority 1 layer. A layer with a lower priority cannot pass through a layer of equal
or higher priority.
The following illustration shows higher priority layers joining before lower priority layers. The Priority
1 CMU layer of the horizontal wall passes through all layers, until it reaches the Priority 1 stud layer of
the vertical wall. Note that the insulation in the horizontal wall does not pass through the air space in
the vertical wall, because they are both Priority 3 and are outside the core layer.

■ When layers join, the join cleans up if the 2 layers have the same material. If the 2 layers have different
materials, a line appears at the join.

■ Each layer must have a function assigned to it for Revit Structure to match layers accurately.

■ Layers inside the core of one wall pass through layers of higher priority that are outside the core of the
joined wall. The layers in the core extend to the core of a joined wall, even if the core layers are set to
Priority 5.

574 | Chapter 25 Compound Structure

The following illustration shows how a layer of lower priority inside the core passes through layers of
higher priority outside the core. The insulation layer of the horizontal wall has moved inside the core.
The insulation layer can now pass through any layer outside the core, regardless of its priority.

Layer Functions
Layers can be assigned the following functions:

■ Structure [1]: Layer that supports the remainder of the wall, floor, or roof.

■ Substrate [2]: Material, such as plywood or gypsum board, which acts as a foundation for another material.

■ Thermal/Air Layer [3]: Provides insulation and prevents air penetration.

■ Membrane Layer: A membrane that commonly prevents water vapor penetration. The membrane layer
should have zero thickness.

■ Finish 1 [4]: Finish 1 is typically the exterior layer.

■ Finish 2 [5]: Finish 2 is typically for the interior layer.

Inserting Layers into a Compound Structure

1 Access the type properties of the compound element.
2 For Structure, click Edit.
The Edit Assembly dialog appears, allowing you to specify the material for layers and the thickness
of those layers.

TIP If desired, create a new type in the Type Properties dialog by clicking New and entering a name
for the type.

3 Click Insert to insert layers.

4 For Function, select a function for a layer.
5 For Material, select a material for a layer.

Inserting Layers into a Compound Structure | 575

NOTE If you wish to create a new material for the list, see the Materials tool. Among other settings,
the Materials tool includes options for specifying cut patterns. For more information about materials,
see Materials on page 1573. For more information about creating and setting cut patterns, see Fill
Patterns on page 1566. You cannot choose material or thickness for core boundary layers.

6 For Thickness, specify a thickness for a layer.

7 If you want to move the position of the layer, select the layer, and click Up or Down.
8 Set the detail level of the view: Click View tab ➤ Graphics panel ➤ View Properties. Set the
Detail level property value to medium or fine.

Layer Wrapping
Compound wall layers can wrap at inserts and at the end caps of the wall. Wrapping is visible in plan view
only.
Compound wall with no end-cap wrapping

Exterior wrapping at a wall's end caps

Interior wrapping at the end caps

Wrapping Around Complex Inserts

Layers can wrap around complex inserts, such as non-rectangular shapes.

Setting Layer Wrapping

You can set layer wrapping using the type properties of the wall or by editing its structure.

To set layer wrapping using type properties

1 Select a compound wall, and click Modify Walls tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties
drop-down ➤ Type Properties.
2 If you want wrapping at inserts, for Wrapping at Inserts, select Exterior, Interior, or Both.
3 If you want end cap layer wrapping, for Wrapping at Ends, select Exterior or Interior.
4 To set individual layers to wrap, select the Wraps check box at the end of each layer.

To set layer wrapping by editing the structure

1 For Structure, click Edit.
2 If you want wrapping at inserts, for Wrapping at Inserts, select Exterior, Interior, or Both.
3 If you want end cap layer wrapping, for Wrapping at Ends, select Exterior or Interior.
4 Click OK.

576 | Chapter 25 Compound Structure

Previewing the Compound Geometry
To preview the appearance of the wall as you add layers, click Preview in the Type Properties dialog or in
the Edit Assembly dialog. The preview image updates as you edit the layers of the wall.

Layers as References
You can select a layer to be a reference point for dimensioning or alignment. Place the cursor on the layer
line to use as a reference. Press Tab to select the layer.
By default, each compound component type has 2 layers called Core Boundary. These layers are not
modifiable, and they have no thickness. They are references for dimensions.
Preview of compound geometry with Core Boundaries indicated in red

Compound Walls Joined to Columns

The compound structure of a wall extends to columns when you join the wall to the column.
Compound wall joining to column

Resulting join of column to wall

Editing Layers
In the Type Properties dialog, you can click Edit for the Structure property. The Edit Assemby dialog opens
inside the Type Properties dialog. You can also preview the effects of edits to the layers by clicking Preview.

Flipping Orientation of Compound Walls

As you are placing a compound wall in a plan view, you can press the Spacebar to flip its orientation. You

can also select an existing wall in a plan view, and control arrows appear: . If you click on the arrows,
the first and last layers of the wall change position.

NOTE Any cutouts in the wall do not flip their orientation.

Previewing the Compound Geometry | 577

Compound wall as seen in plan view before flipping

Compound wall after flipping (the first and last layers have changed position)

578 | Chapter 25 Compound Structure

Sloped Surfaces
26
You can create sloped surfaces for the following elements:

■ Roofs
■ Soffits
■ Floors
■ Structural floors
■ Building pads

To create a sloped surface, draw a slope arrow in the drawing area or change properties of boundary lines.

Related topics

■ Shape Editing for Structural Floors, Roofs, and Floors on page 386
■ Spot Slopes on page 908

Sloped Surfaces Overview

To create a sloped surface, edit the boundary of the element in a plan view or a 3D view. Then use one of
the following methods:

■ Slope arrow: Draw a slope arrow on the element. Use slope arrow properties to further define the slope.

■ Boundary line properties: Define the slope of the surface by changing properties of its boundary lines.

How slope properties are measured

Slope-related properties are measured from the bottom face or top face of the element, depending on the
type of element:

■ For roofs and soffits, slope-related properties are measured from the bottom face. For example, Height

Offset From Level specifies the distance between the level and the bottom face of a roof.

579
■ For building pads, floors and structural floors, slope-related properties are measured from the top face.

For example, Height Offset From Level specifies the distance between the level and the top face of

a floor.

Modeling multiple slopes

With the exception of roofs, Revit elements can slope in one direction only. To create a surface with multiple
slopes, create multiple elements, each with its own slope. Then align and lock the elements together.

NOTE For floors, structural floors, and roofs, you can also use shape editing tools to split a surface into subregions
that slope independently. See Shape Editing for Structural Floors, Roofs, and Floors on page 386.

Slope Arrow
The Slope Arrow tool creates sloped surfaces. You can use a slope arrow for roofs, soffits, building pads,
floors, and structural floors.
For example, to create a flat sloping roof, draw a slope arrow from the lower edge to the upper edge of the
roof boundary.

When you draw a slope arrow, you can enter property values to specify the height at its head and tail, or a
slope value. The tail of the slope arrow must be on one of the sketched lines that defines the boundary. This
sketched line cannot be slope-defining (unless the slope arrow is at a vertex), because that would specify
conflicting slopes for the same segment.
The following example shows a hip on a gable roof. The slope arrow properties are defined as Specify = Slope,
Height Offset at Tail = 4’ 0”, and Slope = 9”/12”.

580 | Chapter 26 Sloped Surfaces

When to use a slope arrow
Use a slope arrow when

■ you want to draw the slope in a plan view.

■ you know the height at the top and bottom of the element plane, rather than the slope angle. For example,
you can use slope arrows to adjust a flat roof to satisfy a particular height at a drainage point.

■ the slope is diagonal across the surface or not square to an edge.

■ the slope starts and ends at atypical points on the surface.

■ you want to create a dormer.

Related topics

■ Creating a Sloped Surface Using a Slope Arrow on page 581

■ Slope Arrow Properties on page 584

Sloping with Boundary Line Properties

You can create a sloped surface by changing properties of its boundary lines. You can use this method for
roofs, soffits, floors, and structural floors.

■ If you know the starting height of the slope and the pitch , specify properties for a single sketch
line. Revit Structure calculates the position of the opposite edge of the sloped surface.

■ If you know the height of the lower edge and upper edge of the sloped surface, but not its pitch
, specify properties for parallel sketch lines. Revit Structure calculates the pitch.

Related topic

■ Boundary Line Properties for Sloped Surfaces on page 585

Creating a Sloped Surface Using a Slope Arrow

You can use this method to create a sloped surface on a roof, soffit, building pad, floor, or structural floor.
1 If you are not already in sketch mode, select the element in a plan view, and click Modify |
<Elements> tab ➤ Mode panel ➤ (Edit Boundary/Footprint/Sketch).

2 Click Modify | Create/Edit Boundary ➤ Draw tab ➤ (Slope Arrow).

3 Draw the slope arrow in the drawing area: click once to specify its start point (tail); click again
to specify its endpoint (head).
The slope arrow must start on an existing sketch line. For more examples and tips, see Slope
Arrow on page 580.

Sloping with Boundary Line Properties | 581

4 (Optional) Refine the sloped surface using one of the following methods:

Specify the height of the sloped surface at its top and bottom

a With the slope arrow selected, access the Properties palette.

b For Specify, select Height at Tail.

c Enter values for Level at Tail , Height Offset at Tail , Level at Head , and Height
Offset at Head .

Specify the slope (rise/run)

a With the slope arrow selected, access the Properties palette.

b For Specify, select Slope.

c Enter values for Level at Tail , Height Offset at Tail , and Slope .

5 On the ribbon, click (Finish Edit Mode).

To see the resulting sloped surface, open a 3D view.

582 | Chapter 26 Sloped Surfaces

Related topics

■ Creating a Sloped Surface Using Parallel Sketch Lines on page 583

■ Creating a Sloped Surface Using a Single Sketch Line on page 583

Creating a Sloped Surface Using Parallel Sketch Lines

You can use this method to create a sloped surface on a soffit, floor, or structural floor.

NOTE To slope a building pad, use a slope arrow. To create a sloped roof, see Roof Slope on page 528.

1 If you are not already in sketch mode, select the element in a plan view, and click Modify |
<Elements> tab ➤ Mode panel ➤ (Edit Boundary/Footprint/Sketch).
2 Select one boundary line, and, on the Properties palette:
■ Select Defines Constant Height.

■ Enter values for Level and Offset From Base .

3 Select a parallel boundary line, and, using the same method, specify the properties for Level
and Offset From Base .

4 On the ribbon, click (Finish Edit Mode).

To see the resulting sloped surface, open a 3D view or a section view.

Related topics

■ Creating a Sloped Surface Using a Slope Arrow on page 581

■ Creating a Sloped Surface Using a Single Sketch Line on page 583

Creating a Sloped Surface Using a Single Sketch Line

You can use this method to create a sloped surface on a soffit, floor, or structural floor.

NOTE To slope a building pad, use a slope arrow. To create a sloped roof, see Roof Slope on page 528.

1 If you are not already in sketch mode, select the element in a plan view, and click (Edit
Boundary/Footprint/Sketch).

Creating a Sloped Surface Using Parallel Sketch Lines | 583

2 Select one boundary line and, on the Properties palette:
a Select Defines Constant Height.

b Select Defines Slope.

c Enter a value for Slope .

d (Optional) Enter values for Level and Offset From Base .

3 On the ribbon, click (Finish Edit Mode).

Related topics

■ Creating a Sloped Surface Using a Slope Arrow on page 581

■ Creating a Sloped Surface Using Parallel Sketch Lines on page 583

Slope Arrow Properties

When you draw a slope arrow to create a sloped surface, you can specify the following properties on the
Properties palette. See also How slope properties are measured on page 579.

Name Description

Constraints

Specify Selects the method for defining the slope of the surface.
To define its pitch, select Slope. Then enter a value for the Slope property.
To define the slope by specifying the height at the tail and head of the slope arrow, select Height
at Tail. Then enter values for Level at Tail, Height Offset at Tail, Level at Head, and Height Offset
at Head.

Level at Tail Specifies the level associated with the tail of the slope arrow.

Height Offset at Tail Specifies the starting height of the sloped surface in relation to the Level at Tail. To start below the
level, enter a negative number.

Level at Head Specifies the level associated with the head of the slope arrow. This property is enabled when
Specify is defined as Height at Tail.

Height Offset at Head Specifies the ending height of the sloped surface in relation to the Level at Head. To end below the
level, enter a negative number. This property is enabled when Specify is defined as Height at Tail.

584 | Chapter 26 Sloped Surfaces

Name Description

Dimensions

Slope Specifies the pitch (rise/run) of the sloped surface.

Length Indicates the actual length of this line. (Read-only)

Boundary Line Properties for Sloped Surfaces

When creating or editing a boundary line for a floor, structural floor, or soffit, you can define the slope of
the surface by changing properties of the line on the Properties palette. See also How slope properties are
measured on page 579.

Name Description

Constraints

Level Indicates the level with which this line is associated.

Defines Slope Indicates that the selected boundary line is one edge of a sloped surface.
This property is active only when Defines Constant Height is selected.

Defines Constant Specifies whether the entire line is at the same height in relation to its associated
Height level.

Offset from Base Specifies the distance this line is offset from its associated level.
To start below the level, enter a negative number.
This property is active only when Defines Constant Height is selected.

Graphics

Center Mark Visible If the boundary line is an arc, specifies whether the center mark for the arc displays. You can dimen-
sion to the center mark of an arc.

Dimensions

Slope Specifies the pitch (rise/run) of the sloped surface.

This property is active only when Defines Slope is selected.

Length Indicates the actual length of this line. (Read-only)

Related topics

■ Creating a Sloped Surface Using a Single Sketch Line on page 583

■ Creating a Sloped Surface Using Parallel Sketch Lines on page 583

Boundary Line Properties for Sloped Surfaces | 585

586
Uniformat Assembly Codes
27
All model elements in Revit Structure have Assembly Code and Assembly Description type properties based on the
hierarchical list of Uniformat codes assigned by R.S. Means. You can add or change a Uniformat assembly code for a
selected element type. The read-only Assembly Description property updates to match the assigned code.
Both the Assembly Code and Assembly Description fields are available for creating a schedule that groups components
by Uniformat code.

To add or change a Uniformat assembly code for an element type

1 Select an instance of the element type in the drawing area.

2 On the Properties palette, click Edit Type.

3 For the Assembly Code parameter, click the value box, and then click .
4 In the Choose Assembly Code dialog, navigate the Uniformat Classification hierarchy, and select
a code.

TIP If you are looking at the type properties of a wall, you see only the Uniformat codes related to walls. You can
select a different category of codes from the drop-down at the top of the dialog.

5 Click OK.
The Assembly Description parameter updates to display the description for the new code.

587
588
Circulation

589
590
Stairs
28
You create stairs in a plan view by defining the run of the stairs or by sketching riser lines and boundary lines. You can
define straight runs, L-shaped runs with a platform, U-shaped stairs, and spiral stairs. You can also modify the outside
boundary of the stairs by modifying the sketch. The risers and runs update accordingly. Revit Structure also generates
railings automatically for the stairs. In multi-story buildings, you can design one set of stairs and extend identical sets up
to the highest level you define in the stair properties.

The number of treads for a stair run is based on the distance between floors and the maximum riser height defined in the
stair properties. A rectangle is displayed in the drawing area, representing the footprint of the run of the stairs.
When creating new stairs, you can also specify the railing type to be used. See Specifying the Railing Type for New Stairs
on page 597.
You can schedule stairs with parameters that include Actual Rise (riser), Actual Number of Risers, Run, and Width. See
Creating a Schedule or Quantity on page 772. You can also tag stairs with the stair tag family. The stair tag is available from
the Annotations folder of the Revit Structure family library. For more information, see Tags on page 944.

591
Creating Stairs by Sketching Runs
Sketching a run is the easiest way to create stairs. The boundaries and risers are generated automatically as
you sketch the run. When you finish the sketch, a railing is applied automatically. The Run tool limits the
design of your stairs to straight runs, straight runs with landings, and spiral staircases. For more control
when designing stairs, sketch the run by sketching the boundary and riser lines.

To sketch a run

1 Open a plan or 3D view.

2 Click Home tab ➤ Circulation panel ➤ Stairs.

3 Click Modify | Create Stairs Sketch tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ Run.

The Line tool is selected by default. Select a different tool on the Draw panel if desired.

4 Click to start the run.

Click start point on left side

5 Click to end the run.

Click endpoint on right end

6 Click (Finish Edit Mode).

592 | Chapter 28 Stairs

Completed stairs in 3D with default railings and balusters

To create stairs with a landing

1 Click Home tab ➤ Circulation panel ➤ Stairs.

2 Click Modify | Create Stairs Sketch tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ Run.

The Line tool is selected by default. Select a different tool on the Draw panel if desired.

3 Click to start the run.

4 Click to position the landing when the desired number of risers have been reached.

5 Drag the cursor along the extension line and click to start drawing the remaining risers.

6 Click to finish the remaining risers.

7 Click (Finish Edit Mode).

First run of stairs- 9 risers created with 9 remaining

Creating Stairs by Sketching Runs | 593

Additional run of stairs perpendicular to the original

Completed sketch with landing created automatically

You can modify a stair footprint that you have sketched using one of the drawing tools.

To modify a run of stairs

1 Select the stairs.

2 Click Modify | Stairs tab ➤ Mode panel ➤ Edit Sketch.

3 Click Modify | Stairs > Edit Sketch tab ➤ Draw panel, and select the appropriate drawing tool to make
your changes.

In the next figure, the sketch of the landing was modified using the Start-End-Radius Arc drawing tool
Modifying a run of stairs

Finished sketch with landing modified

Also, you can modify the stairs you sketched by changing their instance properties on the Properties palette.

To access the type properties, click Edit Type on the Properties palette.

594 | Chapter 28 Stairs

For a description of stair properties and their values, see Stair Properties on page 601.

Creating Stairs by Sketching Boundary and Riser Lines

You can define your stairs by sketching boundaries and risers instead of having Revit Structure calculate the
stair run automatically. This method gives you more control when sketching the footprint of the stairs.

1 Open a plan or 3D view.

2 Click Home tab ➤ Circulation panel ➤ Stairs.

3 Click Modify | Create Stairs Sketch tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ Boundary.

Sketch the boundaries using one of the drawing tools.

4 Click Riser.
Sketch the risers using one of the drawing tools.

5 Click (Finish Edit Mode).

Revit Structure generates the staircase with the railings automatically applied.

Stairs sketched using Boundary and Riser tools

3D view of stairs sketched using Boundary and Riser Tools

Stairs with Landings

When a landing is included in the stairs that you create by sketching boundary and riser lines, split the
boundary lines where they meet the landing so the railing accurately follows the landing and the slope of
the stairs.

Creating Stairs by Sketching Boundary and Riser Lines | 595

1 After you have sketched the stairs and are still in sketch mode, click Modify | Create Stairs Sketch

tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Split.

2 Split the boundary lines where they meet the landing.

Modifying Stairs Sketched with Boundary and Riser Lines

You can modify stairs that you sketch using boundary lines and risers the same way you can modify the
stairs that you sketched using the Run tool. You can use the drawing tools to change the footprint and the
instance and type parameters to change the stair properties.

Tips
■ Do not connect left and right boundary lines to each other. You can sketch them as single lines or
multi-segmented lines (for example, straight lines and arcs connected).

■ Connect riser lines between the left and right boundaries.

■ The top riser line on a run of stairs represents the actual riser without a tread.

Creating Spiral Staircases

1 Open a plan or 3D view.

2 Click Home tab ➤ Circulation panel ➤ Stairs.

3 Optionally, click Home tab ➤ Work Plane panel ➤ Set, to select a different work plane for the
stairs. See Work Planes on page 1517.

4 Click Modify | Create Stairs Sketch tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ (Center-ends Arc).
5 In the drawing area, click to select a center point for the spiral.
6 Click a start point.
7 Click an end point to complete the spiral.
Completed spiral staircase

596 | Chapter 28 Stairs

The spiral is limited to fewer than 360 degrees. If you overlap spiral runs, a warning is displayed;
the stringers and railings are not placed accurately.

8 Click (Finish Edit Mode).

TIP To create a spiral staircase to multiple levels, on the Properties palette, under Constraints, specify the top level
for the Multistory Top Level parameter.

Creating Arced Landings

You can create arced landings if you sketch arced runs that share a center and a radius value.
Spiral arcs with the same radius and center

Finished arc landing

Specifying the Railing Type for New Stairs

When sketching new stairs, you can specify the railing type to use. Click Modify | Create Stairs Sketch
tab ➤ Tools panel ➤ Railing Type. This tool is available only when sketching new stairs. When you select

Creating Arced Landings | 597

Railing Type, you are prompted to select the railing type from the list of existing types in the project. You
also have the option to select None or Default.

To specify a railing type

1 Click Home tab ➤ Circulation panel ➤ Stairs.

2 Click Modify | Create Stairs Sketch tab ➤ Tools panel ➤ Railing Type.
3 In the Railings Type dialog, select a rail type.
If the desired type does not display in the list, you can quit the Stairs tool, create the railing
type, and then restart the Stairs tool. Also, you can create the stairs with any railing type, and
change the type after you have created the desired railings. For more information, see Railings
on page 611.

4 Click OK.

NOTE The default railing type is the railing type specified in the Type Selector on page 35 when you
are in the Railing sketch mode. You can change the default railing by selecting a new railing type in
the Type Selector on page 35. For more information, see Railings on page 611.

Stair Calculator
Use the stair calculator to calculate the tread depth of stairs. The calculator applies a common, rule-of-thumb
formula, such as a formula specified in the Architectural Graphic Standards. Before using the stair calculator,
specify the values for the minimum tread depth and maximum riser height. See Stair Properties on page 601.

Using the Stair Calculator

1 In the drawing area, select the stairs.

2 On the Properties palette, click Edit Type.

3 In the Type Properties dialog, under Construction, for Calculation Rules, click Edit.
4 In the Stair Calculator dialog, select Use Stair Calculator for slope calculation.
5 Under Calculation Rule for target slope, enter a value to multiply by Rise.
6 Enter a value to multiply by tread Depth.
7 Enter a Maximum Result and a Minimum Result for the stair calculator.

NOTE The stair calculator uses the tread depth you specified in the instance properties of the stairs.
If the value you specified causes the calculator to produce values that are outside the range of the
acceptable results, a warning is displayed.

8 Click OK.
The stair calculator computes the tread depth for new stairs only; existing stairs are not affected.

598 | Chapter 28 Stairs

Rule-of-Thumb Formulas
The following is a rule-of-thumb formula for interior stairs, as specified in the Architectural Graphic Standards.

■ Riser + Tread = 17.5 inches: 7.5 inches for the riser height; 10 inches for the tread depth.

■ Riser * Tread = 75 inches.

■ 2(Riser) + Tread is greater than or equal to 24 inches (minimum threshold) or less than or equal to 25
inches (maximum threshold).

Modifying Stairs
You can modify stairs in several ways including the stair boundaries, risers, and run lines, railings, labels,
direction, and tread thickness for monolithic stairs.

Boundaries and Riser and Run Lines

Stair boundaries, as well as riser and run lines, can be modified to shape the stairs in the desired manner.
For example, you can select the run line and drag it to add or remove risers.

Modifying Stair Railings

When you add stairs, stair railings are added automatically. You can modify stair railings at any time after
their creation.
1 Select a railing.
If you are working in a plan view, it may be helpful to use the Tab key to select the railing.

TIP Modifying railings in a 3D view allows for easier selection and better view of your changes.

2 Modify instance properties of the railing as needed on the Properties palette, or click
Edit Type to access its type properties.

3 To modify the sketch line of the railing, click Modify | Railings tab ➤ Mode panel ➤
Edit Path.
The railing line is selected, as follows.

4 Edit the selected line as desired.

You are in sketch mode, so you can modify the shape of the line to suit your design. The railing
line can consist of connected straight and arced segments, but it cannot form a closed loop. You

Rule-of-Thumb Formulas | 599

can resize it by dragging the blue controls. See Controls and Shape Handles on page 1449 and
Splitting Elements on page 1509. You can move the railing line to a new location, such as the
center of the staircase. You cannot draw multiple railings in the same sketch session. For each
railing you sketch, you must first finish the sketch, before you can draw another railing.
Modified stairs with center railing

Extending Stair Railings

If you extend stair railings (for example, to extend onto a floor), you need to split the railing line so that
the railing changes its slope and meets the floor properly. See Splitting Elements on page 1509.
Split the rail line as shown in the picture.

Finished result of extending railing

600 | Chapter 28 Stairs

Moving Stair Labels
You can drag the Up or Down label that displays in plan views with a run of stairs using any of 3 methods.

To move the stair label

1 Place the cursor over the stair text label.
A drag control displays next to the label.

2 Drag the control to move the label.

Method 2
1 Select the run of stairs.
A blue drag control displays.

2 Drag the control to move the label.

Method 3
1 Highlight the entire run of stairs, and press Tab to select the shape handle.
Watch the status bar as you press Tab until it indicates that the shape handle is highlighted.

2 Drag the label to a new position.

Changing the Stair Direction

You can change the direction of the stairs after you have completed the stair sketch.
1 Select the stairs in a project view.
2 Click the blue flip control arrows.

Zero Tread Thickness for Monolithic Stairs

You can set the tread thickness of monolithic stairs to 0. Monolithic stairs have their stringers, treads, and
risers all made from the same material, such as concrete stairs.

1 In the drawing area, select the stairs.

2 On the Properties palette, click Edit Type.

3 In the Type Properties dialog, under Construction, select Monolithic Stairs.

4 Under Risers, clear the End with Riser parameter.

5 For Riser Thickness, enter 0.

6 For Tread Thickness, enter 0.

Stair Properties
You can modify several properties for stairs, including the top and base levels, calculation rules, and stair
labels.

Moving Stair Labels | 601

NOTE If you are upgrading stairs from a previous release of Revit Structure, and you do not see all the parameters
listed here, duplicate your stair type from the Type Properties dialog, and then you should see all of the parameters.

Modifying Stair Properties

1 Modify the instance properties of a stair by changing corresponding parameter values on the
Properties palette.
See Stair Instance Properties on page 605.

2 To access/modify the stair type properties, on the Properties palette, click Edit Type.
See Stair Type Properties on page 602.

NOTE Changes made to type parameters affect all stairs of this type in the project. You can click
Duplicate to create a new stair type.

Stair Type Properties

Name Description

Construction

Calculation Rules Click Edit to set the stair calculation rules. See Stair Calculator on page 598.

Extend Below Base Extends stringers below the base level of the stair. This is useful for cases where the
stringer attaches to the face of a floor opening rather than resting on the surface of
a floor. To extend the stringer below the floor, enter a negative number.

Monolithic Stairs Specifies that the stairs are to be made of one material.

Landing Overlap Enabled when stairs are set to monolithic. When a monolithic stair has a winder,
the bottom of the stair can be a smooth shape or stepped. If it is stepped, this
parameter controls the distance between the riser face and the vertical face of the
corresponding step on the underside.

Underside of Winder Enabled when stairs are set to monolithic. If a monolithic stair has a winder, the
bottom of the stair can be a smooth shape or stepped.

Function Indicates whether the stairs are interior (default value) or exterior. Function is used
in scheduling and to create filters to simplify a model when exporting.

Graphics

Break Symbol in Plan Specifies whether the cutline of the stairs in plan view has a break line.

Text Size Changes the size of the UP-DN symbol in a plan view.

Text Font Sets the font of the UP-DN symbol.

Materials and Finishes

602 | Chapter 28 Stairs

Name Description

Tread Material Click the button to open the Materials dialog. See Materials on page 1573 for more
information on creating a material.

Riser Material See Tread Material description.

Stringer Material See Tread Material description.

Monolithic Material See Tread Material description.

Treads

Minimum Tread Depth Sets the initial value for the Actual Tread Depth instance parameter. If the Actual
Tread Depth value exceeds this value, Revit Structure issues a warning.

Tread Thickness Sets the thickness of the tread.

Nosing Length Specifies the amount of the tread depth that overhangs the next tread.

Nosing Profile The pro